Home

Dell Active System Manager Version 7.1 User's Manual

1. Cluster VMware ESXi 5 1 Hypervisor deployment ISO boot HDD VMFS Datastore Provision Two panes display e Available Operations View Contains all Resource Adapter custom operations associated with each resource in your Template e Orchestration View Working pane where you build your workflow by drag and drop operations from the Available Operations View pane 3 Add a step or steps by one of the following methods e Select operations from the Available Operations view pane and drag those to the Orchestration View pane The Specify Input Values dialog box displays Figure 11 36 where you must provided Resource Adapter values where required then click OK For more information on Resource Adapter capabilities see the Working with Resource Adapters section on page 9 16 11 57 Working with Templates Figure 11 36 Specify Input Values for Selected Operation Example Specify Input Values specify Input Values for Delay Specify the input values for the operation indicates the value is required Check possible values Optional Parameters Possible Values Name Data Type i Primary Source Ef DelayinSeconds number Secondary Source a Gee e In the Orchestration view right click any Step n folder and select Add Step The step is automatically added at the end of the step process e In the Orchestration view right click anywhere in the pane and select Add Step The step is automati
2. 12 28 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Running Sessions Figure 12 23 Duplex Link editor Filter Mad_DIS_02 4 3 Mgd_DIS 01 10 100 1000 Ethernet a 10 100 1000 Ethernet 4 ethl 4 4 ethl eth2 lt eth2 Y eth3 _ _ _ _ _ lt eth3 eth4 Y eth4 gt eth5 lt eth5 gt FIBER a FIBER gt Fbl gt Fbl Fb2 4 Fb2 4 Fb3 4 Fb3 lt Fb4 lt Fb4 4 Fb5 4 Fb5 EA Figure 12 24 Multicast Topology_test Link editor EH Mgd_DIS_ 02 Mgd_DIS 01 10 100 1000 Ethernet 10 100 1000 Ethernet 4 ethl gt ethl eth2 ee ogee gt eth2 eth3 e Sle oe ott gt eth3 Multicast_04 lt eth4 gt eth4 eth5 eth5 FIBER FIBER 4 Fbl 4 Fbl 4 Fb2 Fb2 Fb3 Fb3 Fb4 gt Fb4 Fb5 Fb5 Session Link Session Management 12 29 Working with Running Sessions Figure 12 25 Tap E Topology_test f 1 aC Pinning 52 N Link editor Magd_DIS_ 02 10 100 1000 Ethernet ethl ethl eth2 eth2 4 eth E om eth4 eth4 4 eth5 4 eth5 FIBER a FIBER gt Fbl gt Fbl Fb2 Fb2 4 Fb3 lt 4 Fb4 gt Fb5 4 3 Mgd_DIS 01 a lt 10 100 1000 Ethernet lt 4 Fb3 lt 4 Fb4 lt 4 Fb5 Link Feasibility Toolbar The link feasibility icons mutually exclusive allow you to build connectivity within your Te
3. Open a session editor see the Opening the Session Editor section on page 12 9 2 Select a virtual resource right click and select Scale Up 3 Update one or more the capacity values 4 Optional Enable the Relocation option This option is only available if new capacity values are not fulfilled by the current host Relocation options include e Automatic The Active System Manager determines a secondary hypervisor to move your current virtual machine to run on and still validates the original capacity constraints e Manual The session owner or participants can select from a list of other hypervisors available in the Active System Manager inventory 5 Click OK to start the scaling operation The Session editor updates once the operation has completed sa Optional Check the new capacity values of the virtual resource on the Elasticity tab the Properties view and check the targeted hypervisor from the Resource tab Host Asset Tag Host Domain property Invoking Resource Adapters The following topics describe how to invoke built in or custom Resource Adapter operations and applications on resources under test and underlying control resources in a running session e Executing System Based Operations e Executing Custom Based Operations e Executing Monitoring Operations Session Management 12 67 Managing Virtual Resources Executing System Based Operations 12 68 There are three sub menus available
4. Es Note The Active System Manager software saves the last directory browsed Es Note You can perform this step with a valid directory b Import Templates only e In the Select root directory browse to perform a smart search that displays all Templates found in the default directory in Templates section e In the archive file select a Template file from your file system 3 Click Select All to select all the Templates that display or click Refresh to restart your selection process 4 Click Finish to open the imported Templates into the Template editors one per Template Once imported one editor per Template opens with the content of the Template displayed 5 Click File gt Save to save the Template or update it first then save Exporting Templates To export a Template perform the following steps 1 Select a method to open the Export Templates dialog box see Figure 11 7 e On the Active System Manager menu bar click File gt Export gt expand the Active System Manager folder and click Templates gt Next e Inthe Templates view right click and select Export 11 16 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Templates Figure 11 7 Export Templates Export Export Templates E Destination directory does not exists E Mame Select All W newtemplate W p Deselect AlI To directory C Users abhishekp Desktop El Export Orchestrations as well if any lt Back N
5. Table 9 3 View Name Resource Adapters File Servers Software Repositories Setup Perspective Elements View or Editor Description View Lists all Resource Adapters deployed in the Active System Manager environment From this view you can customize filters or group the Resource Adapter organization by tree View Lists OS image files configuration files and other elements associated with each repository View Lists OS image files configuration files and other elements associated with each repository of Storage Array type Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Managing Repositories Managing Repositories Table 9 4 lists and defines the set of general properties for managing repositories Table 9 4 Field Name Description Location Pattern Repository Properties Additional Properties Domain Association General Properties for Managing Repositories Description Name of the repository you assign The name cannot be changed once it is created Description of the repository you create or update A simple way to force a structure on the repository e File Format e Folder Format If files are organized per Manufacturer Model you can express it with the following Manufacturer Model Note The value of the File Format and Folder Format is used by the saveas policy of the RA It tells the saveas script where to save the image or configuration file in the repository The file is created with
6. Secure option to configure secure execution environment Remote Script Execution Environment Hostname Username Password Script 172 16 100 210 skumar S888 fu01 home skumar scriptserver abc abc script sh Folder Location u01 home skumar scriptserver Secure Runtime Variables Session Level Script Reservation ID Session ID Session Name Template Name Owner Session ID Session Name Template Narr Table 14 2 Execute Scripts Property Fields Field Hostname Username Password Script Folder Location Secure check box Description Script server hostname or IP address Remote Shell RSH or Secure Shell SSH username a UNIX account Remote Shell RSH or Secure Shell SSH password a UNIX account Default session script Default location to store the scripts Indicates that the communication from the Active System Manager server to the remote script server is secure Non secure will use a Remote Shell Protocol RSH If you use Secure it will be Secure Shell Protocol SSH 3 On the Execute Scripts Test Cases dialog box click OK 4 Click OK to start the execution of selected scripts The executions are added to the Execution Queue for more information see the Working with the Execution Queue View section on page 14 10 to start stop delete monitor or review the scripts or test case executions Working with Test and Script Execution 14 9 Working with
7. Template Management 11 25 Working with Templates Figure 11 11 Template Level Properties View Properties Template Mame Value Description Global Parameters Ef Compute 7 i ce i Provisioning DatastoreVolumeSsize 100g l ImageName san 150 Bootable Images esxi5 1 Attachments E 3 pS InstallationDiskType 5D History ESAserverLicenseKey PJ08 48K40 28K41 0141842 ADUINN 10 128 38 98 GoldDatastoreVolumeName GoldWolume ISCSIVNICS vmnicl wmnic3 veinic wmnic SCSIvSwitch v5witchl PodName AS5O_1 ASMServerlPAddress 192 168 48 15 E vCenterClusterMame AS50ClusterTesti000 vCenterFolderMamne AS50FolderTestl000 vCenterDatacenter ASSODatacenterT estL000 BootProtocal static Storage StoragePoolName default StorageGrouplP 192 168 55 10 14 Table 11 4 lists and defines the Template level properties Table 11 4 Template Level Properties Tab Name Category Property Template Custom Template System Archive Template System Created On Template System Description Template System Name Template System Owner Template System Participants 11 26 Description Contains a set of custom and system Template level property names and values Note A default set of properties may be available based on your Active System Manager deployment configuration You can add or remove the custom Template level properties The Open function is intended to use for opening URLs or links It launches a new browser window
8. To add a custom Template property that must be overwritten with a editable value click Add To remove a custom Template property select a row and click Remove Note All of the Add and Remove functions must be saved to save those property changes click File gt Save Note These custom properties can now be used in the Template view for grouping filtering and searching Mode that defines whether the archive is public or private Date created Template Template description Template name Template owner name Template participants Value User defined User defined User defined User defined Login username User defined Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Table 11 4 Tab Name Global Parameters Provisioning Provisioning Provisioning Provisioning Provisioning Provisioning Template Management Working with Templates Template Level Properties continued Category User defined Custom Policy Policy Policy System System Property User defined lt custom names gt Setup Snapshot Teardown Cleanup Time Min Execute All Scripts Description Value Contains a set of user defined Template level property User defined names and values You can add edit or remove the user defined Template level Global Parameters Refer Global Parameter section on page 11 28 for more details on Global Parameters Note All of the Add Edit and Remove fu
9. d s i i i i YLAN 11 15 Session Link Properties F v xX Resource Name Yalue Encrypted nt ISL P L rovisioning vLANId TTEA 5 Inventory YLANCount Configuration Files namel valuel Image Files VLANGroup The VLANGroup inventory property facilities you to provide VLAN IDs in a group Creating groups for VLAN IDs facilitates you to map your VLAN ID requirements with the existing group names so as to choose from a set of VLAN IDs as per your requirements The VLAN groups are created on a matrix switch To create a VLAN ID group you are required to define the group name in curly brackets and its corresponding VLAN IDs or ranges must be in parenthesis for example gp1 20 25 pe Note You can associate only one group at a time with the VLAN component To assign a VLANGroup to the VLAN component press Ctrl spacebar and select the group name see e Note Groupname is associated with assettag and it is mandatory to select an asset tag before selecting a value for VLANGroup Session Management 12 51 Working with Running Sessions Figure 12 44 Assigning VLANGroup to VLAN Component AUTO1347945075344 Running 2 E d r i i 7 LAN Auto Session Link Properties e v xX Resource Enforced Property Operator value Type Unit Provisioning Custom L YLANGroup i Inventory YLANSrou is gpi String z System Configuration
10. e Configure IP addresses so that when a CMC or iDRAC moves to a private VLAN its IP address also moves to a different subnet than untagged traffic E Note Failing to move the IP address will cause the router to assume the CMC or iDRAC is on the same network as untagged packets Routing will not work and packets won t forward correctly between subnets and VLANs This can cause communication loss with some or all devices The following table shows a sample IP configuration that prompts the router to forward packets after the VLAN 1s configured Notice that the initial IP addresses of the CMC iDRAC I O aggregator and Active System Manager virtual appliance are all on the same subnet and because VLANS are not used all traffic is untagged The final IP addresses of the CMC and iDRAC do use VLAN tagging and are on a different subnet than untagged traffic Table 10 1 IP Configuration For Forwarding Packets Initial IP Address Subnet Mask VLAN Final IP Address Subnet Mask VLAN CMC 172 6 53 4 255 255 0 0 None 172 5 53 4 255 255 0 0 5 I O Module 172 6 53 4 255 255 0 0 None 172 6 53 4 255 255 0 0 None Active System Manager 172 6 53 4 255 255 0 0 None 172 6 53 4 255 255 0 0 None DRAC 172 6 53 4 255 255 0 0 None 172 7 53 4 255 255 0 0 7 Adding or Editing a Network Adding the details of an existing network enables Active System Manager to automatically configure resources that are connected to the ne
11. e Populating the Link Inventory Spreadsheet e Importing CSV Link Files e Validating CSV Link Files Inventory Management 5 49 Importing Connectivity Table 5 17 outlines the typical workflow checklist for importing links with the Import tool Table 5 17 Typical Workflow Checklist for Importing Links Task v 1 2 Perform a complete inventory of all links in your environment Optional Manually validate the spreadsheet data This manual validation is required to identify and fix any illegal characters or field lengths within the input field definitions Migrate the data from step 1 to populate a link inventory spreadsheet For more information see the Populating the Link Inventory Spreadsheet section on page 5 50 Migrate the data in the link inventory spreadsheet to a CSV file Note The CSV file also includes a set of additional input field definitions that are used by the Active System Manager software These additional definitions include the following fields e Sequence e Status e Link Error Validate the imported CSV file into the Active System Manager client For more information see the Validating CSV Link Files section on page 5 52 Fix any returned CSV errors Re import the validated CSV file into the Active System Manager client Note If you use the CSV editor in the Active System Manager client re importing the CSV file is unnecessary Fix any remaining errors and re import the validate
12. i setting up Accounts List of Accounts ASM 1 DDC 3 Click Add to display the Add New Account dialog box see Figure 3 3 Figure 3 3 Add New Account Normal over HTTP 4 Enter the following values as instructed by your Active System Manager administrator a Click the Account field and type the name up to 25 characters to associate with the server properties b Click the Server field and type the name of the Active System Manager server to access it is case sensitive c By default the port number is already provided however you can override it as appropriate Confirm with your administrator d Click the Transport field and select the Normal over HTTP or Secure over HTTPS option The default is Normal over HTTP All data between the Active System Manager client and server is encrypted with the Secure over HTTPS option 3 2 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Creating New Server Accounts Note Ifthe Active System Manager application is running behind your company firewall this should be q a preferred option 5 Click OK to add the new account and to return to the Setting Up Accounts dialog box The new account is listed in the List of Accounts section for an example see Figure 3 2 on page 3 2 To create additional accounts repeat step 3 and step 4 which connect you to different labs each environment has its own Active System Manager server 6 Click Close when you have
13. lt Manufacturer gt lt Manufacturer gt lt Model gt This section describes the following topics e Opening the Resource Scripts View e Setting Preferences for Resource Scripts e Starting a Resource Script e Viewing Resource Script Output e Stopping a Resource Script Opening the Resource Scripts View You can view resource scripts in the Resource Scripts view to open the Resource Scripts view Setting Preferences for Resource Scripts The following sub sections describe how to set preferences for resource scripts e Setting a Default Remote Script Execution Environment e Setting Default Runtime Environment Variables Setting a Default Remote Script Execution Environment 14 4 To set a default remote script execution environment perform one of the following options e On the Active System Manager menu toolbar click Window gt Preferences gt Test and Script Execution gt Script Server e Inthe Resource Scripts view select one or more resource scripts right click and select Preferences All fields are required and must be completed to identify the scripts in the Resource Scripts view The Secure check box indicates that the communication from the Active System Manager server to the remote script server 1s secure Non secure will use a Remote Shell Protocol RSH If you use Secure it will be Secure Shell Protocol SSH Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Resource Scripts Setting De
14. section above for more information Note Template history details can be carried over from one Template to another when saving the Template see the Saving Templates section on page 11 8 or saving a session Filtering Templates You can use the Templates Filter dialog box to filter Templates and associated sessions by date range This option is particularly useful if you want to filter out older sessions The Templates Filter dialog box also includes Template Imported Time as part of the filter property list Validating Templates Note For each Template a validation is required If a Template is not validated it does not get scheduled therefore 1t does not get realized By default the Template editor 1s valid or invalid The term valid indicates that the Template 1s ready to be scheduled invalid indicates that some of the Template objects are invalid Invalid Templates are flagged with red labels and icons For more information switch to the link editor refer the Switching to the Link Editor section on page 11 50 and move your cursor over the Template to read the explanations for why the Template is invalid Figure 11 5 displays an example of an invalid Template because of missing interfaces and links Template Management 11 13 Working with Templates Figure 11 5 Invalid Template Example Es Missinginterfaces MissinginterfacesAndLink X A A UU AT PICO401 102 A UU AT PICO401 103 Ethernet 10
15. Click File gt Save or in the session editor right click and select Save to invoke the scheduler and start the session Complete the scheduling wizard For more information see the Scheduling Templates section on page 11 18 The session is created in the Confirmed state then goes into the Setting Up state if all resources are deemed allocated and ready to be provisioned Once in a Running state users can interact with the resources per normal operation Opening Sessions 12 6 Opening a session is similar to opening a Template except that sessions are opened with real allocated resources You can open the session in any state but only in running status is where you can actually interact with the equipment The session editor tracks the session status and that status is reflected in the session and Template background To open one or more sessions perform the following steps l 2 Select the method to open the Sessions view e On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Show View gt Other gt Active System Manager gt Sessions gt OK e On the Active System Manager toolbar click the Sessions perspective icon Select the method to open a session for a session see Figure 12 3 e Fora single session in the session editor or Sessions view double click or right click the session and select Open e For multiple sessions in the session editor or Sessions view hold down the Ctrl key an
16. ES Note You can define new properties for a resource type at the resource level or at the interface level Inventory Management 5 17 Using Resource Types Adding Inventory Parameters for Resource Based Scheduling 5 18 Inventory parameters carry specific information about each resource type It allows for a complex customization of the resource type To add an inventory parameter for resource scheduling perform the following steps 1 In the Resource Types view right click a resource type and select Open The resource type core properties display within the specified perspective 2 Scroll down to the Inventory Parameters section see Figure 5 14 and click Add to add a blank parameter Figure 5 14 Resource Type Inventory Parameters Inventory Parameters Put your description For the Inventory Parameters section here Mame Description Type cannotbescheduled valenz String CPU CPU Count Mumeric namel String namez String acheduledme valued1 String 3 Modify the inventory parameters as follows a A default name is already provided Click the Name and Description fields and modify as appropriate b Click the Type field and select one of the following types e String Text and numbers are allowed There is no maximum number of characters to use e Password Save the inventory parameter value in an encrypted format on the server In addition you can specify whether to encrypt the v
17. Figure 13 2 Value Source_Example Primary Operation Center Elements Host Cluster DataStore Pool Volume Selecting Context Sensitive Values 13 4 To select context sensitive values perform the following steps 1 While creating Orchestration or updating Orchestration during execution drag an operation to include it into a step The Specify Input Values dialog box displays containing the following two panes e Parameters Pane Contains general execution details such as operation names and the Value field for entering values against input parameters You can either enter these parameter values in Value manually or by selecting a value from the list of possible values from Possible Values pane E Note The star pre fixed in the icons in the Name column of the Parameters section indicates mandatory values that you must enter e Possible Values Pane Displays all elements contained in selected Value Source This panel allows you to choose values from the Primary Source and the Secondary Source drop down lists e Note For information on Value Sources applicable on custom operations see the Working with Resource Adapters section on page 9 16 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Orchestrations 2 Select a parameter in the Parameters pane 3 Click Primary Source in Possible Values pane and select the value source for the selected parameter for example select Software Repos
18. Secure File Transfer Protocol SFTP Trivial FTP TFTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP and Secure HTTP HTTPS to communicate with the repository from the Active System Manager application Table 9 2 lists and describes repository support available Table 9 2 Repository Support Element Operations Type Protocol Discover Import Export Delete Validate getVersions File servers FIP Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No SFTP Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No TFTP No Yes Yes No Yes No Repository Management 9 3 Introducing the Setup Perspective Table 9 2 Type Storage Arrays Repository Support continued Element Operations Protocol Discover Import Export Delete Validate HTTP No No Yes No Yes HTTPS No No Yes No Yes getVersions No No Note The Storage Arrays repository support can be performed through the Dell Professional Services Group 1 The release notes will contain a set of platforms and services supporting those operations Opening Views on the Setup Perspective To open the navigating views available on the Setup perspective on the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Show View Four navigator views are available three of which are associated with Repository management see Table 9 3 All of the Setup perspective navigator views support built in and custom filtering and grouping functions For more information see the Filtering section on page 1 12 and the Grouping section on page 1 15
19. Session Management The Active System Manager administrator has many built in permissions separate from the user role For more information about the built in permissions see Table 4 1 on page 4 19 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Active System Manager User Interface Elements Active System Manager User Interface Elements The Active System Manager user interface elements contains the following e Active System Manager Software Menu Options e Perspectives e Views e Editors e Preferences e Icons Active System Manager Software Menu Options Table 1 3 Menu Table 1 3 lists and describes the available Active System Manager software menu options Active System Manager Menu Options Description File Allows you to perform the following functions e Connect to an Active System Manager server e Create new resources templates instances inventory e Import a CSV and export the resources templates import plug ins sessions and types Resource Adapters user repositories provisioning e Close and save elements related to your network repository elements etc in your network e Revert move rename refresh and print elements within e View the properties for a given element your network e Exit the Active System Manager software Edit View Navigate Tools Allows you to perform undo redo cut copy paste delete select all and find replace functions Note The View menu is only available
20. Storage Utilization Consolidated CPU Memory Utilization Over Time Graph for Hosts Description Provides resource allocation data for sessions in a Running state This report displays CPU and memory allocations grouped by sessions Provides resource allocation data for hosts on which some virtual machine instances are provisioned in the current running sessions This report displays CPU and memory allocations grouped by hosts Displays resource allocation data for virtual resources that are utilized in sessions owned by members of a group grouped by an Active System Manager group name This report also captures current group allocation including CPU and memory allocation To configure schedule a session with virtual machines VMs and the session owner should be part of one the groups When the session is in a running state the graph displays a grouped allocation of resources Displays the top 10 users who currently consume a maximum of CPU and memory resources Displays the top 10 hypervisor cluster resource utilization in the data center Displays the most recent data in percentage for CPU and memory utilized on any VM grouped by sessions To configure schedule a session with a VM and use the monitor operation to capture utilization data is present in RA When the session is in arunning state it displays utilization in that specific session Displays information about how much capacity is utilized on a host by al
21. prompt displays confirming your scheduled session 13 Click the Remember my decision check box to allow the software to remember the scheduled session and view the all of your sessions Note This message displays if you are not in the Sessions perspective If you have enabled 5 the check box the message will not appear on subsequent session scheduling 14 Click Yes to automatically switch to the Sessions perspective or click No to remain in your current perspective Your newly created session will display in the Sessions view 12 26 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Running Sessions Managing Session Links Authoring links essentially means to create connectivity links between or among the interfaces of the resources The following topics describe how to author links e Adding Connectivity e Common Features of the Session Link Editor Adding Connectivity When the Active System Manager software starts a session by attempting to realize the associated Template one of its main tasks is to implement the Template s links You can assign a priority level to links in a Template by clicking the Priority Value field and selecting a priority value The lowest priority level highest priority level and default priority the priority of any link that has not been set are determined by a file on the Active System Manager server If these values have not been modified they are preset with the following
22. ASAP e ASAP with fixed time frame e Fixed start and end date e Permanent Session 4 Specify the Date Time Options in Days Hours and Minutes 5 Click Next The next Scheduling Template dialog box displays where you can now create sessions on behalf of other users El Note Only the administrator and current owner can change the ownership This field is read only if you are not the administrator user 6 Click Next fe Note You can adjust the scheduling behavior based on user preferences See the Preferences Scheduler E page for scheduler options click Window gt Preferences gt Scheduler The Scheduler can automatically perform extra scheduling when no solutions are reported including identify preemption or running ASAP Scheduling Note You can adjust the Scheduler session and security properties See the Preferences Scheduler page E for advanced scheduler options click Window gt Preferences gt Scheduler gt Advanced Scheduling The scheduler has identified a set of solutions see Figure 12 18 If no solutions are reported the wizard displays an error page with a high level error message and a complete set of logs Click Back to change your setting request Solutions should appear however if not the Scheduler logs are displayed The number of causes may result in the Active System Manager software being unable to find any suitable times to schedule your session For example the resources in your Template
23. AUTO1296176645665 Running ec2 demo 01 Running 3 4 y Resource Adapter Log System Operation gt Applications describe M r Open Session Audit Report Running on Amazor _ Switch to Link Editor Open Resource Instance Editor Open Resource Type Editor cil EE Execute Session Scripts E Properties E Resource Scripts Custom Show i gt E my Past Duplicate Name Status ner Start C a E admin Hide Annotations DO test Failed A y idmin 06 17 2 ZD Test Failed Attach Rendering Using t idmin 06 17 2 fo o es et An example of a custom operation dialog box displays The list of parameters and operations change depending on the resource Resource Adapter The Operation pull down menu is pre filled and a list of associated properties display 2 Optional Specify the following values for those properties e Name By default is available by the Resource Adapter e WValue The default value if available displays e Mandatory If true then the value must be provided 3 In the Execution Properties section enter the number of times to run this operation The default value is 1 4 Click the Execute Sequentially check box to enable it If it is disabled not checked all executions are performed in parallel 5 Click OK 6 Open the Custom Operations view on the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Show View gt Other gt Active System Manager gt Custom Op
24. Adding Resources by Type To add resources by type perform the following steps 1 Open a session editor gt Resource Types view User Action Read only Read only Read only 2 Drag a resource type node into the session The outline indicates that the node has not yet been allocated to your session 3 Enable interfaces 4 Set the properties as required e Use the Resource tab to set exclusivity e Use the Inventory tab to set characteristics of the desired resource e Use the Configuration Files and Image Files tabs if you need provisioning 5 Save the session File gt Save or click Ctrl S The scheduler determines the best resource to be allocated and adds into the session The resource operations such as Resource Adapter setup methods will be executed once the resource has been allocated 12 38 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Running Sessions Adding Resource Instances To add resource instances perform the following steps l 2 Open a session editor gt Resource Instances view Drag a resource instance node into the session The outline is yellow which indicates that the node has not yet been allocated to your session Enable interfaces Set the properties as required Use the Configuration Files and Image Files tabs if you need provisioning Save the session File gt Save The scheduler determines the best resource to be allocated and adds into the session The res
25. As seen in Figure 16 8 the following operations are available on Script Servers sub menu e Defining New Script Server e Deleting Server Defining New Script Server To create a new script server click New see Figure 16 8 The Add HTTP Script Server dialog box displays see Figure 16 9 Figure 16 9 Add HTTP Script Server Add HTTP Script Server x Server Name o O Server IP Addres o O Server Port 16 10 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Properties Table 16 6 lists and defines the fields to be set for adding a new HTTP Script Server Table 16 6 Fields for Adding HTTP Script Server Fields Description Server Name Mandatory field Enter HTTP script server name to be added Server IP Address Mandatory field Enter HTTP script server IP address Server Port Pre populated by default port number 2 Click Save to add new HTTP script server Deleting Server To delete an existing script server from the list click Delete see Figure 16 8 Properties The Properties sub menu allows the administrator to update the properties of Inventory Template Session Template Link and Preferences by importing the properties file in csv format To view components for updating properties perform the following steps 1 Click Settings gt Properties to display the list of existing script servers see Figure 16 10 Figure 16 10 Properties ri admin admin lt u Active System Manager Active Infrastructure Ma
26. Dashboard section on page 17 1 5 70 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Figure 5 44 Monitoring Resources Operation Center Resources Server Templates And Profiles Name a Pj System Domain 4 ol vCenter vCenter a es 172 16 100 51 vCenter F NewDatacenter DataCenter 4 vCenter2 vCenter E 172 16 100 51 vCenter 4 F NewDatacenter DataCenter 4 amp DEV CLUSTER Cluster 4 a 172 16 100 252 Host E Alectrona32 VM E Cisco UCS Platform Emulator 2 1 VM E DEVELOPMENT II Thin Do not Delete VM E DEVLOPMENT I VM E DEVLOPMENT I VM 5 DevRHEL 6 2 172 16 100 86 VM 53 HARRIER_UAT VM 5 Imbuild32 VM E SMOKE TEST VM 3 ySwitch0 vSwitch ySwitchl vSwitch a S 172 16 100 29 Host amp AutoTest VM amp DBINSTALLER VM E Dev NewOne VM E Oracle 11gR2_devdb2_172 16 100 189 VM h Status Connected Powered Off Powered On Powered Off Powered On Powered On Powered Off Powered Off Powered Off Powered On Connected Powered Off Powered Off Powered Off Powered On E Oracle 11gR2_Standard_devdb3_172 16 100 185 VM Powered On 32 vSwitch0 vSwitch 3 datastorel 2 DataStore D Datastore252 DataStore 3 Dev Ind DataStore D devvmbackup DataStore e Storagel DataStore DEV CLUSTER DataStoreCluster Editing Data Flow Values Active Active Active Active Active F Resource Information Resource Details Managing Vir
27. Database to display the existing database listing see Figure 16 2 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Configuring Settings Figure 16 2 Database lt u Active System Manager Active Infrastructure Management HOME SESSIONS TEMPLATES RESOURCES REPORTS SECURITY SETTINGS License Script Servers Properties Data base Refresh Backup Now Scheduler gt Note This Requires password less SSH configured between Active System Manager server and Database server NAME SIZE STATUS ACTION Copyright 2012 2013 Dell Inc All Rights Reserved As shown in Figure 16 2 the following operations are available on the Database sub menu e Database Backup e Refreshing Database e Database Scheduler e Database Related Operations Database Backup To back up the database click Backup Now see Figure 16 2 Refreshing Database To refresh database click Refresh see Figure 16 2 Database Scheduler The Scheduler operation allows you to schedule the backup operation for database as and when required To schedule a database click Schedule The Schedule page displays see Figure 16 3 Settings 16 5 Configuring Settings Figure 16 3 Schedule Database 2 admin admin L lt u Active System Manager Active Infrastructure Management HOME SESSIONS TEMPLATES RESOURCES REPORTS SECURITY SETTINGS Settings Database License Script Servers Properties Data base Refresh Backup Now i Scheduler Note This Requi
28. Figure 4 8 New Group Group Tab New Group x Add Group Group Membership Permissions Login Profiles Resources Name Scheduling Priority 3 El Specify maximum session duration constraint 0 Day s 0 Hour s 0 Minute s C Specify maximum concurrent session constraint 0 3 Click the Name field and enter a name for your group 4 Scheduling Priority The Scheduler uses this value to identify who has precedence in allocating resources among all users and groups The values range from 1 to 5 where the highest priority is 1 and the lowest priority is 5 the default is 3 Users with a lower priority may see their sessions rescheduled based on overall system allocations Only administrators can change this value Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Managing Groups 5 Optional Click the Specify maximum session duration constraint check box to set boundaries on the session duration Specify the duration in day hours and minutes 6 Click the Membership tab and select the users and groups to include as members of your new group You can click to select the check box next to each user and group to include individually or to select all users and groups click Select All see Figure Alternatively to remove users and groups as members of your group click Deselect All Figure 4 9 New Group Membership Tab New Group Add Group Add Group profile membership and permissions Membersh
29. Importing Validated Resource Data section on page 5 48 Note If you use the CSV editor in the Active System Manager client re importing the CSV file is unnecessary 9 Create a resource interface location generator file for each resource 10 Perform a final validation check to ensure that your resource interfaces are correct 11 Once resources have been saved you can import links using the procedure described in the Linking Resources section on page 5 36 This is the same process with standard and composite resources For additional information related to the CSV file see Table 5 10 which lists and describes the characters value definitions and field lengths that can be used when importing your composite resources It also lists characters that cannot be used Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Table 5 10 CSV Input Field Definitions Field Name Resource Details Resource Manufacturer Resource Model Resource Asset Tag Resource Display Name Resource Category Resource Description Interface Resource Interface Field Length O to 80 chars O to 40 chars O to 80 chars O to 80 chars O to 80 chars O to 1024 chars O to 80 chars Management Interface Inventory Management Illegal Characters 2 lt gt amp i e a space char 2 lt gt amp i e a space char 2 lt gt amp i e a space char Wes 8
30. In the Configured Networks folder click the type of network to view Active System Manager displays the following information for each network e Name e Description e Addressing Static or DHCP Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Understanding Networks e VLAN ID Enabling the VLAN ID Chassis Management Controllers CMCs and Integrated Dell Remote Access Controllers G DRACs both support VLAN tagging however they share a port with the I O aggregator switch which does not support VLAN tagging For this reason before enabling VLAN tagging for the CMC and iDRAC you must take certain steps to make sure that all traffic tagged and untagged passes through the network and the out of band switch port to the CMC without being dropped E Caution To avoid losing device connectivity it 1s critical to use extreme caution when enabling VLAN tagging If tagging is not enabled correctly on the switch port then traffic from the CMC and IDRAC is likely to be lost Additionally because the I O aggregator does not support VLAN tagging you must also configure the switch port to allow untagged traffic To ensure Active System Manager can communicate between all tagged and untagged devices your external network must route between these tagged and untagged VLANs To prevent dropped traffic configure your network as follows e Use VLANs to carry both tagged and untagged traffic e Configure routing for the affected subnets and VLANs
31. J Operations No Data found Click 8 to configure ES 0 5 Templates EN g 04 Sessions 7 SL N 0 LW Preferences 5 Y a 02 O Reset E 0 1 oh r x Top Ten Resource Utilization Eas Top Ten Clusters CPU Utilization id MB cru 0 6 E 0 5 n MH 192 168 120 171 40500 admin America Los_Angeles 7 0 0 21236 To open the Dashboard perspective and view the widgets use one of the following methods e On the Active System Manager navigation menu click Dashboard e On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Open Perspective gt Dashboard Dashboard 17 1 Managing Widgets Managing Widgets The Dashboard perspective contains widgets that define your infrastructure in a specific layout A widget is a Stand alone application that can be embedded into third party sites by any user on a page where they have rights of authorship e g a web page blog or profile on a social media site Widgets allow users to turn personal content into dynamic web apps that can be shared on websites where the code can be installed The Active System Manager comes with a default set of widgets 11 already defined Table 17 1 Default Set of Widgets Widget Resource Allocation By Session Resource Allocation by Host Resource Allocation By Group Top ten Resource Allocation Top ten Resource Utilization VM Utilization by Session Host Utilization Consolidated Cluster Utilization Consolidated
32. Name reminderl Description first reminder Scope My Sessions Owned Email Recipients F Owner _ Participants E Other Note Use semicolons between email addresses in the Other field Before Start Time Minutes Before End Time Minutes Hour s A Custom 1 Hourfs 3 In the Rule section perform the following sub steps a Click the Name field and type a name for the reminder rule Note A reminder rule cannot be saved without a name b Click the Description field and type a corresponding description for the reminder rule c Click the Scope field and select All Sessions System Wide By default the administrator can view and access two scope types All Sessions System Wide or My Sessions Owned 4 In the Email Recipients section select one or more email recipients e Owner Owner of the session notification e Participants Participants of the session notification e Other List of email addresses you enter separated by a semicolon 5 In the Before Start Time Minutes section select one or more of the following values in minutes 5 15 30 45 Or you can click the Custom check box and specify a value in hours or days 6 In the Before End Time Minutes section select one or more of the following values in minutes 5 15 30 45 Or you can click the Custom check box and specify a value in hours or days 7 Click OK Session Management 12 63 Starting and Stopping A
33. The system allows you to export your physical connectivity in two file formats XML and CSV To perform a file export function perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click File gt Export and on the next wizard page click Resource Links gt Next to display the Export Resource Links dialog box 2 Select one or more resources to export a Click Browse and navigate to the directory where you want to export the resource links b Select the file type XML or CSV 3 Click Finish Note You can also pre select the resource list from the Resource Instances view and follow the steps Resources will be pre selected in the Export Resource Links wizard Managing Resource Pools Resource pools allow you to allocate and assign a specific set of equipment to users and groups By default everyone can use all equipment based on their resource availability Note To manage resource pools you must be logged in as an administrator O 5 E Note To be backward compatible with previous software releases any unassigned resource pool equipment is considered part of the free pool and is visible and schedulable by all users Adding Resource Pools To add create resource pools and allocate resources perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Tools gt Resource Pools Management The Manage Resource Pool dialog box displays see Figure 5 30 Figure 5 30 Managing Resource P
34. Value list Default O Dynamic List Select Primary and Secondary values C Select if parameter is mandatory OK Cancel Note Global Parameters can only be added at the Template level using Active System Manager s thick client Add operation cannot be performed using Active System manager web client In Figure 11 13 you can select the either one of the following values e Encrypted Selecting Encrypted allows you to enter a value that displays in the encrypted format e Static List Selecting Static List allows you to enter comma separated values in Value List that are available in the drop down in Default field e Dynamic List Selecting Dynamic List allows you to select a value for the defined parameter from the Primary and Secondary sources Note For more information on Primary and Secondary value source refer Selecting Custom Operations section on page 13 4 Edit To edit the Global Parameters click Edit see Figure 11 11 on page 11 26 Note While editing Global Parameters the name of the Global Parameter cannot be edited However you can choose to edit the Description or Category of the selected parameter You can also choose to define the values as Encrypted Static List or Dynamic List Note The Global Parameters can be edited from both the Active System Manager thick client and Web client Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Templates Remove Select the Global Param
35. You have the options of canceling the connection attempt or running it in the background Also you can display the loading process details by clicking Details Note The Active System Manager software auto detects when a connection is lost and attempts to 7 reconnect without user interaction If you are in the middle of a work session we recommend saving your work on a regular basis to ensure that any changes are not lost should a disconnection occur Note You cannot disconnect from the server manually you must exit the application You can reconnect q to a secondary server by using the File gt Connect to Server menu option at any time Or reconnect to the same server with different user account Verifying the Connection Status When you launch the Active System Manager software it requires you to connect to the server to successfully establish a working environment session To verify the connection status perform the following steps 1 Launch the Active System Manager software see the Launching the Active System Manager Client Software on Windows section on page 2 3 The Welcome page displays the first time you log on It is recommended to read the Welcome page at least once It contains a brief product overview and information on finding help When you are finished you can close the page by clicking the X in the Welcome tab To recall the Welcome page at a later time on the Active System Manager menu bar click Help gt We
36. ab LANSwitch 2_1 Configuresuitch Passed ab sanswitch 1 1 Configureswitch Passed ob sanswitch 2 1 Configureswitch Passed E 3 Configure Storage Group Failed 3 Storage 4_1 ConfiguresroupandIP Failed af Server 1_1 CreateClonelmage Passed w Server 2 1 CreateClonelmage Passed E Install ESxi on Servers Step 6 a Server 1_1 InstallIso Skipped al Server 2_1 InstallIso Skipped 13 18 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Executing Orchestration Console View The Console view displays the real time status of each step in an executing Orchestration see Figure 13 19 Figure 13 19 Console View of Executing Orchestration Step 3 Configure VLAH on L LAH and SAH switches Success Contigureswitch Succestully connected to the device LaNSwitch 1 All connected interfaces on SAM switch has been configured successfully for portfast and with spanning tree cost Spanning tree has been configured on SAN switch Switch configuration successfully completed Step 4 Configure Storage Group Failed ConfiqurecroupindIP Authentication failed Authentication failed Unable to Connect Login to device Storage 4 Failed to connect terminal server CreateClonelImage Successtully connected to Server Computeserver 1 configuring the ESXi install environment for Computeserver 1 successfully created the ESXi install environment for Computeserver 1 Orchestration Management 13 19 Executing Orchestration 13 20 Active System Man
37. and linking orchestrations with a selected template Chapter 14 Working with Test and Script Execution Describes how to work with test cases and resource script execution and Active System Manager views Chapter 15 Reports Describes the Active System Manager report generation feature and all of the functions available for you to create and print user reports for your inventory Chapter 16 Settings Describes the Active System Manager Settings feature and all of the functions available for you to manage your inventory settings Chapter 17 Dashboard Describes the Active System Manager Dashboard feature and all of the functions available xi Conventions Conventions This guide uses special conventions for the following elements Notes Notes Syntax Conventions Administrator Role Icon Notes and caution statements provide special information Their appearance and usage 1s as follows pe Note Indicates information that emphasizes or supplements the main text A note supplies information that may apply only in special cases for example memory limitations or equipment configurations Syntax Conventions Table 1 describes the text format and character conventions used in this guide Table 1 Text Format Bold Courier Italic Right angle bracket gt Separator characters O _ Syntax Conventions Convention Indicates toolbar buttons menu selections field names or
38. better reliability heavy overhead e RAID 5 Good performance better reliability light overhead Click Next Adding or Editing Firmware Settings on a Server Template Before you begin this task you must create and populate your image repositories To exclude firmware settings from this template deselect Include Firmware Settings If Firmware Settings is deselected the Firmware setting will not be included any associated Server Profiles Alternately to specify firmware settings that will be applied to servers based on this template Server Template and Profiles 7 3 1 On the Firmware Settings page of the Create Server Template wizard choose a device and either enter the path to the correct firmware repository or click the browse button and select the firmware in the Browse Repository dialog box To clear an incorrect path click Clear Note The firmware versions will depend on your environment Any paths left blank will leave the firmware at its current version 2 Click Next Adding or Editing Networks Settings on a Server Template On the Networks Settings page of the Create Server Profile Template wizard you can add edit and remove the virtual NICs available to servers deployed with this template A virtual NIC configures the adapter port or port partition on a network adapter The virtual NIC settings are used to filter the available servers that display when applying the template To exclude Network informa
39. e Hide The property is not displayed at scheduling time Note You must save the changes Check the Encrypted check box to set the value of provisioning parameter as encrypted List of all scheduling properties that you can edit to request specific resource instances from the scheduler e Custom properties Inventory parameters that are defined in the Inventory perspective for a resource type e System properties Types of system properties such as card type that are pre defined in the Active System Manager software These properties are built in and are common to all resource types You can specify the property values for a resource or for an interface System properties at the resource level are e assettag e domain Specifying a resource s asset tag by property value is different than authoring a complete resource instance In either case you can access the resource with the named tag but the assignment of ports is handled differently Properties are entered in the form of a conditional expression lt Property name gt lt Operator gt lt Value gt where e Property name is the name of the property whose value is to be checked This can be one of the system properties listed above or a custom property defined in the resource type e Operator can be either the IS or IS NOT or IN or NOT IN mathematical symbols e Value is a string whose value is to be matched The string is not case sensitive
40. e Ifyou have more than one Template open in the Template editor select which Template to close and click File gt Close Alternatively to close all of the open Templates click File gt Close All e In your open Template editor select which Template to close and click the Close icon in the top right corner of the tab Using either option the Save Resource dialog box displays prompting you to save any changes 2 Click Yes to save any changes or click No to close the Template without saving changes Deleting Templates To delete one or more Templates from the Templates view perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar open the Templates view click Window gt Show View gt Templates to open the Templates view 2 Select the method to delete one or more Templates e Fora single Template In the Templates view right click the Template and select Delete e For multiple Templates In the Templates view hold down the Ctrl key select the desired Templates right click and select Delete The Confirm Delete dialog box displays prompting you to confirm the deletion 3 Click OK to delete the selected Template or Templates Managing Template History Details Template history is an effective way to track the life cycle of your Templates and keep a set of comments and notes for example history of the current updates Just as you can search and filter Template descriptions you can search and filter
41. grouped by perspective For more information about perspectives see the Preferences section on page 1 27 1 10 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Table 1 5 Default Views Other Views Active System Manager User Interface Elements Views Associated with Perspectives Perspectives Inventory Provisioning Template Resource Types e Resource Adapters e Components Resource e File Server e Templates Instances e Source Control e Resource Types Operation Center e Software e Resource Instances Outline Repository Properties Properties Outline Templates e Resource Adapters e Template Archive Bin Discovery Explorer e Search Import Explorer e Palette Search e Sessions Links e Components Dependencies Resource Allocation Resource Port Allocation Custom Operations Components The following sections provide more detail about views e Using Navigator Views e Opening Navigator Views e Navigating Through the Views e Creating Views Using Navigator Views Session Test e Sessions Sessions Execution Queue Execution Queue e Templates e Test Cases e Properties e Resource Scripts e Outline e Properties e Search e Search e Active Terminals e Terminal e Terminal e Outline e Console e Execution Output e Palette e Sessions Session Archive Bin The navigator views provide a hierarchical view of the resources in the Active System Manager application which is where you can open f
42. lt gt amp lt gt amp lt gt amp Importing Inventory Description Defines the Manufacturer of the resource For the inventory spreadsheet only list the Resource Manufacturer once per resource Model of the resource Be consistent when naming like models so that the Active System Manager software can appropriately select equipment for sessions Resource Asset Tag must be unique across your inventory Defining a specific naming scheme is useful and recommended as Asset Tags are used across the entire application and reports Displays the actual name that you would like to see the resource identified as within the Active System Manager software Display Name does not have to be unique Category of the resource For example managed resource matrix switch or hub You must identify a Resource Category for every component listed There are several different options hub managedresource matrixswitch patchpanel powercontroller terminalserver andtftpserver are the available options If it is a Cisco router or switch for instance this would be listed as managedresource If it is a control resource say an APCON MRV or layer one switch it would be listed as a matrixswitch Resource category depends on the usage of the resource within the test Template If the resource is to be used as a resource under test RUT the category needs to be managedresource If the resource is not used as
43. out of the box to execute system based operations see Figure 12 56 e Apply Configuration Files Applies a new configuration to the resource using the associated configuration file e Apply Image Files Applies a new set of OS images to the selected resources e Snapshot Saves the current configuration and image file back into the repository Figure 12 56 System Operation Menu af Time End Date Time Topology Name Resource Adapter Log System Operation Apply Configurations Custom Operation Apply Image Files I Applications Snapshot Open Session Audit Report Power Status Open Terminal a Switch to Link Editor a Open Resource Instance Editor cisco_3600 Open Resource Type Editor Execute Session Scripts Attach Rendering Using To execute system based operations perform the following steps 1 Open a session right click one or more resources and select System Operation 2 Select Apply Configuration Files Apply Image Files or Snapshot as appropriate for your execution 3 Follow the procedures described in the following sections and click OK when you complete your task e Using the Apply Configuration Files Menu e Using the Apply Image Files Menu e Using the Snapshot Menu Using the Apply Configuration Files Menu The Apply Configuration Files menu applies a new configuration to the resource using the associated configuration file A list of pre associated files are available from which you
44. sessions against that Template otherwise the results include dependencies e On the Active System Manager toolbar click the Save icon e Inthe Templates view right click a Template to save and select Save as e Inthe Template editor right click a Template to save and select Save as Note Clicking Save As allows you to save the Template as a different name or change the permissions 11 8 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Templates Figure 11 3 Save As Dialog Box 2 E Save As la eS Save As A Save as a new template Name newtemplate Description Template Type Normal Physical Logical Participants Name Add techpubs Permission Permissions Delete Update V Keep existing history details D Of Cancel 2 Click the Name field and enter a new name for this Template 3 Optional Click the Description field and enter a description 4 Optional Click the Participants field and Add or Remove participants sharing to a set of participants users Or groups as necessary 5 Select a Permissions option for each user you can assign permissions and by default they can be read only e Delete is available for a specific user e Update is available for a specific user 6 Click the Keep existing history details check box to carry the existing notes to the new Template Deselect the check box to clear all exis
45. the 2nd location generated by the location generator e Specific Location means that the user must specify the exact interface location on which this parameter will be applicable For example e Fora sequence type location inventory paramname paramval INTERFACE Fibre Channel LW 2 e Fora specific location Creating Location Generator Files inventory paramname paramval INTERFACE Fibre Channel LW Fibre Channel LW 00 To create a location generator file perform the following steps 1 Create the following directory structure within the lux inventoryimport plugindata directory for the location generator files a Create a subdirectory for each resource manufacturer b Create a subdirectory within each resource manufacturer subdirectory for each model that is defined for each manufacturer c Create a resource location generator file for each model This file specifies how the resource interfaces are addressed 2 Copy each file to its associated subdirectory file location You use the location generator files to input information with the locations retrieved from Tool Command Language Tcl scripts The following three Tcl scripts can be used to generate locations e Component location generator The Tcl file for generating locations for a component This can be changed as per component manufacturer model information Table 5 11 lists the component location generator file properties Inventory
46. the property of the object selected first will be displayed Template Types The Active System Manager software supports the following three Template types see Table 11 2 Table 11 2 Template Types Template Type Description Normal Template The resources are selected from the free pool By default the Normal Template is selected Physical Template Provisions Hypervisors on raw blades It is also used to provision the VLAN component with a range of VLAN IDs onto matrix switch In case of Physical Template the Resource Adapter internally makes clusters from Hypervisors Note The Physical and Logical Template types exist in the Active System Manager software to provision ESXI image on raw blades and use such Hypervisors to provision VMs This happens in the following two steps e Firstly the Physical Template is created and during realization the ESXI image is provisioned on raw blades e Secondly the Logical template is created to provision VMs on such Hypervisors by realizing the template onto session created from the Physical Template Logical Template The Logical template is used to provision VMs on Hypervisor or cluster from sessions created from physical template It is also used to provision the VLAN component from VLAN range given in the Physical template Physical Template The workflow of Physical Template consists of the following tasks e Linking Editor e Creating a Physical Template e Creating Orchestration for P
47. 1 Openine the Test Cases View a IS SS E A AS AS E o ia 14 1 petting Preferences for Script Servers tii a in REAR Eee eS 14 2 stattino a Nest Cases sta a ade aly See mw eae eee Ue oe AA Nea oe es 14 3 Viewing Test Case Properties AA ae ied pit tags Wise AA Sete Rd AAA po aed Sees 14 3 Stoppine a Test Case sire ce uti Laie cha ot BRR AA Oe eae IA Sake ea tie ee 14 3 Working with Resource Scripts 2 lt e04004 005 54444 eb baa wen a be cee alba DEES we a a 14 4 Opening the Resource Scapis VIEW asis 5 AG eer A EA dow Be eee Ka dae ies 14 4 Setting Preferences for Resource Scripts us coke Ye eR be weds A Dew Seeds ble He A ae Be ee eS gp 14 4 Setting a Default Remote Script Execution Environment 0 0 0 0 0 0 eee eee eens 14 4 Setting Default Runtime Environment Variables 0 0 0 0000 teen eens 14 5 Starline a Resource SCDE sors nodose A ene aw Peete A oes de eRe wa eh oad eo ke hes 14 5 Viewing Resource Script Output a A A A aed ey A gs Rick PS Reem Selene Bd AAA A AA 14 6 Stopping a Resource Scnpt 4 440s cd A A AA AAA a eee 14 6 Working with Session Scripts 20 6 ee ee eee eee eben tebe bebe nese eee e enna 14 6 Setting Preferences for Session SChPIS att ict eee Ra ede A A ee thew AS eee ees 14 7 Setting a Default Remote Script Execution Environment 0 0 0 00 eee eens 14 7 Setting Default Runtime Environment Variables 0 0 0000 eee eee eens 14 7 Browsing and Executing Session Scripts 0 0 0 eee een eee
48. 100 1000 Base T 4 10 100 1000 Base T_if1 4 10 100 1000 Base T_if1 4 FiberChannel 4 FiberChannel lt P FiberChannel_Fel lt P FiberChannel_Fel lt P FiberChannel_ Fe lt P FiberChannel_ Fe 4 GigabitEthernet 4 GigabitEthernet gt GigabitEthernet_ethl GigabitEthernet_eth2 C At G1gabittthernet_eth2 lt P GigabitEthernet_eth3 lt P GigabitEthernet_eth3 lt P GigabitEthernet_eth4 lt P GigabitEthernet_eth4 lt P GigabitEthernet_eth5 lt P GigabitEthernet_eth5 Topology ES Properties 4 Dependencies a 7 7 AA Link Property Value Provisioning dba Limk_5 Description o Type duplex Priority 1 Table 11 10 lists and defines the default properties for the selected links Table 11 10 Default Template Link Properties Property Name Description Name Name you assigned to this link or the default name assigned by the Templates perspective Enter a link name of up to 80 alphanumeric characters including spaces and special characters Description Text string that describes this link Type Type of link simple Priority You can assign a priority level to links in a Template by clicking the Priority Value field and selecting a priority value The lowest priority level highest priority level and default priority the priority of any link that has not been set are determined by a file on the Active System Manager server If these values have not been modified in that file they come with the default priority of 1
49. 100 rF Message Device status passed Timestamp 10 08 2010 10 57 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 57 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 57 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 57 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 57 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 57 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 57 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 57 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 57 PM IST O08 7070 10 57 PM Interface status passed Interface status passed Interface status passed Interface status passed Interface status passed Interface status passed Interface status passed Interface status passed l E CATI i Figure 12 35 displays the resource status example using the F2 key Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Running Sessions Figure 12 35 Using the F2 Key a 2 Ethernet 10 100 Ethernet 10 100_ifel Ethernet 10 100_ife2 Ethernet 10 100_ife3 Ethernet 10 100_ifed Ethernet 10 100_ife5 Ethernet 10 100_ife6 Ethernet 10 100_ife7 Ethernet 10 100_ife8 Ethernet 10 100_ife9 Ethernet 10 100_ifel0 4 2 Fiber Channel SW Fiber Channel SWW_if1 M Fiber Channel SW_if2 M Fiber Channel SW_if3 M Fiber Channel SW_if4 M Fiber Channel SW_if5 M Fiber Channel SW_if6 M Fiber Channel SW M Fiber Channel SW_if8 M Fiber Channel SW_if9 M Fiber Channel SW_if10 M Fiber Channel SW_ifl1 M Fiber Channel SW_if12 M Fiber Channel SW_if13 M Fiber Channel SW_if14 M Fiber Channel SW_if15 M Fiber Channel SW_if16 M Fiber Channel SW_if17 M Fiber Channel SW_if18 M Fiber Channel SW_if19 M Fiber Channel SW_if20 Me
50. 33 Setup time is the time required to load software boot and initially configure the resource before it is ready for use Cleanup time allows for tasks related to restoring the state of the resource at the end of a session Allows a software image to be specified for a session Allows a configuration file to be specified for a session This file is typically a script with command line interface CLI commands to configure the resource at the beginning of a session during the setup time Using Resource Types Table 5 4 Resource Type Resource Information continued Resource Description Properties for property based You can define new kinds of properties as inventory parameters with the schedulable flag set scheduling enabled When creating a Template in the Template perspective you can then specify values required for those properties The Active System Manager scheduler checks that a resource meets those requirements before allocating it in a session You can define new properties for a resource type at the resource level or at the interface level For more information regarding property based scheduling see Chapter 5 Inventory Management Note For interfaces console ports and power supplies if you need an element of a type that is not currently available on the Active System Manager server you can add a new element type The core properties for a resource type contain fields for the Manufacturer Model and F
51. 36RJ_EMPMC 36RJ_1 4 EMPMC 36RJ_EMPMC 36RJ_1 a Ethernet 10 100 lt gt Eth1 lt gt Eth2 AS Property Code Message Updated On Figure 12 32 Interface Status Link editor 4 test managed_01_dis2 a lt 100 lt MIL 4 EMPMC 36R lt gt EMPMC 36RJ_EMPMC 36RJ_1 EMPMC 36RJ_EMPMC 36RJ_1 a Ethernet 10 100 lt gt Eth2 lt gt Eth3 le O Test Running Topology 02 Topology_03 Filter 4 E100 lt gt MIL 4 EMPMC 36R EMPMC 36RJ_EMPMC 36RJ_1 lt EMPMC 36RJ_EMPMC 36RJ_1 4 Ethernet 10 100 4 Eth 4 Eth2 4 Eth3 E Properties 53 _ amp Resource Scripts Custom Operations 189 testmanaged_Oldist YB Value 0 device status passed Tue Feb 21 14 47 16 IST 2012 Filter 4 E100 lt gt MIL 4 EMPMC 36R 4 EMPMC 36RJ_EMPMC 36RJ_1 lt P gt EMPMC 36RJ_EMPMC 36RJ_1 4 Ethernet 10 100 4 Eth1 4 Eth2 4 Eth3 4 Eth4 Im E Properties 2N Resource Scripts Custom Operations 189 test managed_01 dis1J ea Property Value Code 0 Message interface status passed Updated On Tue Feb 21 14 47 16 IST 2012 Session Management 12 35 Working with Running Sessions 12 36 Displaying Link Status To display link status perform the following steps 1 Open a session or link edit see the Opening the Session Editor section on page 12 9 In the session editor select a resource and click the Link Editor tab 2 3 Click the Proper
52. Accounts Connecting to Server Accounts Each Active System Manager server controls a environment including equipment and scheduling By entering more than one account you can connect to servers on demand This allows you to switch accounts to work with different labs When you exit the Active System Manager client it remembers the last account you used Therefore the next time you launch the Active System Manager software it uses that account name To connect to a different server account perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click File gt Connect to Server The Connect to Active System Manager Server dialog box displays see Figure 3 1 on page 3 1 2 Click the Account field and select the account to which you want to switch 3 Click the Username and Password fields and type the associated username up to 25 characters and password with the selected account and click OK If you have unsaved changes for your original server the Active System Manager client prompts you to save them When you connect to the new server the Active System Manager client keeps its views and contexts open provided they synchronize with the new connected server The status bar displays the server connection status The Select Login Profile as User dialog box displays see Figure 3 5 Ea Note Until you successfully connect to a new server you remain connected to your original server Figure 3 5 Select Login Profile As Us
53. Assigning and Changing Session Ownership You can assign and change the session ownership by two methods e Using the Scheduling Wizard at Creation Time e Using the Edit Session Properties Using the Scheduling Wizard at Creation Time Note The criteria described to configure scheduling a Template can also be configured in the Preferences dialog box To do so on the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Preferences gt Scheduler To assign the session ownership by using the scheduler wizard see the Scheduling Templates section on page 11 18 As an administrator the scheduler wizard allows you to assign session ownership to a different user Using the Edit Session Properties To change the session ownership by using the edit session properties see the Viewing Session Properties section on page 12 16 and the Editing Default Session Properties section on page 12 18 12 20 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Running Sessions Canceling Sessions Based on the current state of your session the Cancel option is available To cancel a session or multiple sessions perform the following steps 1 In the Sessions view select one or more sessions to cancel 2 Right click and select Cancel to display the Confirm Cancelation dialog box 3 Click OK to confirm the cancellation Deleting Sessions Based on the current state of your session the Delete option is available To
54. Associate Disassociate HOE EBREE0E08R0oa O 4 mn Show and manage interface types compatibility 2 Click the desired Console Interface Power Supply or File System and then click Add The Add Interface Type dialog box displays Figure 5 19 Figure 5 19 Add Interface Type Add Interface Type Name Description 3 Click the Description field and enter a descriptive name Inventory Management 9 33 Using Resource Interface Types 4 Click OK to save your changes Associating Interface Types To associate interface types perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Tools gt Interface Types The Interface Type Definition and Compatibility dialog box displays see Figure 5 18 on page 5 33 2 Click the Show and manage interface types compatibility check box to display the Associate and Disassociate buttons 3 Select the primary interface 4 Hold down the Ctrl key and select the interface types to associate 5 Click Associate The interface types are listed under the primary type as secondary types and your changes are automatically saved Disassociating Interface Types To disassociate interface types perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Tools gt Interface Types The Interface Type Definition and Compatibility dialog box displays see Figure 5 18 on page 5 33 2 Click the Show and manage interface types compatibil
55. DHCP Public LAN Used to access network resources for basic networking activities If associated with a virtual NIC the VLAN ID is used to configure the I O module s server facing ports Can be static or DHCP Note Private and public LANs are functionally identical in Active System Manager The purpose of offering both labels is to help users categorize LANs based on functional use SAN iSCSI Used to manage storage related traffic on an iSCSI network If associated with a virtual NIC the VLAN ID is used to configure the I O module s server facing ports If an IP address pool is associated with the network then Active System Manager can use it to configure the iSCSI initiator IP address when doing a SAN iSCSI boot Can be static or DHCP SAN FCoE Used to identify storage related traffic on a Fibre Channel Over Ethernet FCoE network If associated with a virtual NIC the VLAN ID is used to configure the I O module s server facing ports Can be static or DHCP Hypervisor Management Used to identify the management network for a hypervisor or operating system deployed on a server The VLAN ID is used to configure the I O module s server facing ports Can be static or DHCP Viewing Configured Networks 10 4 l BA On the Active System Manager navigation bar menu click the Setup perspective On the Active System Manager toolbar click the Networking perspective The Networking Configuration editor appears
56. E ftopology adminftopology_creation 1 B Ondemand 1 New Orchestration la Save as Open Sek s J Delete Expand All Collapse All Refresh The Orchestration Editor displays see Figure 13 14 Figure 13 14 Orchestration Editor for Updating Orchestration Orchestration New Orchestration_Test1 Steps can be renamed by clicking on step label Available Operations view Orchestration View Type in operation name to search the desired operatior dh Add Step 3 Remove Step rj Insert Step El Add Script Search Operation Execute Abort On Error Description 5 resourcelnstance gt Test Step_1 MV Y o customOperation 2 resourcelnstance customOperation1 this operation is For apply s g customOperation2 S Ju01 home ssyed gf scripts timescript py 3 Test Step_2 M 0O g resourceInstance customOperation1 this operation is for apply s lt gt topology_creation New Orchestration_Test1 2 Edit the sequence as required 13 14 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Orchestrations Deleting Orchestrations To delete an Orchestration perform the following steps 1 Select the Orchestration to delete and right click and select Delete or press the Delete key 2 When the Confirm Delete dialog box displays click OK Linking Orchestrations with Template Selection The Linking feature allows you to view all Orchestrations related to t
57. Editor Execute Session Scripts ssion Link Show Properties E Resource Scripts A Custom Operations Sessior Hide Annotations E mv ue nee t Preferences ame Status Topology Name CL saAmim Attach Rendering Using start Date Time Session Management 12 71 Managing Virtual Resources 2 In the Operation list that displays select the resource to perform the operation One or more control resources display The list of parameters and operations will change depending on the resource Resource Adapter The Operation pull down menu is pre filled and a list of associated properties display 3 Optional Specify the following values for those properties e Name By default is available by the Resource Adapter e WValue The default value if available displays e Mandatory If true then the value must be provided 4 In the Execution Properties section enter the number of times to run this operation The default value is 1 5 Click the Execute Sequentially check box to enable it If it is disabled not checked all executions are performed in parallel 6 Click OK Executing Monitoring Operations Each resource type Resource Adapter may contain one or more operation definitions Those operations can be launched either from the Active System Manager system or from the Active System Manager portal To execute monitoring operations from the Active System Manager system perform the following steps 1 In the session ed
58. Element to a Repository New Element JE El ES Add a new element to repository Name field is required Repository VMware Baseline Images Name Description File Type Path Level Size Bundle El Resource Association Add Remove Bundle Elements Additional Properties Add Remove Up Down Versions Table 9 5 lists and describes the field properties in Figure 9 2 Table 9 5 Properties for Repository Elements Discovery and Association Field Description Repository Required List of existing repositories You must select one Name Required Filename of repository for example pico test cfg Select file from your desktop using the Browse button currently only available on import Description Optional Description associated with new elements File Type Required You can set the file type The options are e Element e Image File e Configuration File Path Optional Relative path to the file in the repository Level The options are e Base e Patch in case of an element or image file e Add on in case of configuration file 9 8 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Managing Repositories Table 9 5 Properties for Repository Elements Discovery and Association continued Field Description Size Required for repository type storage arrays Bundle Element definition is a bundle of elements for example a container You must move at least one element see
59. Figure 15 2 This can take a few minutes Running a Session Audit Report The Session Audit report the contains core session properties a complete inventory of resources and links used in this session and a complete description of the session life cycle To run a Session Audit report open a currently running session by performing one of the following options e On the Active System Manager menu bar click Reports gt Session Audit Report e In the Sessions view select a session right click and select Open Session Audit Report The report displays in your default web browser Each of the Session Audit sections are linked at the top of this web page for you to easily access Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Using Standard Administrator Report Types Table 15 1 lists and describes the Session Audit report sections Table 15 1 Session Audit Report Sections Section Overview Participants Global Parameters Template Scripts Status Resources Session Audit Trial Set up Sequence Tear down Sequence Associated Rendering Session Properties Provisioning Properties Session Attachments Links Description List of core properties associated with the session List of users who own the right to access session and template List of user defined Global Parameters Success or failure messages associated with the execution of the Template level scripts List of resources used in the session List of all sessions op
60. Files Y e E ica ee Image Files 3 amp On saving the value assigned to VLANGroup the schedular randomly assigns value from the range for the selected group and assigns the value to the VLAN component see Figure 12 45 12 52 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Running Sessions Figure 12 45 VLAN ID Assigned from Selected Group Range AUTO1347945075344 Running 3 E J VLAN 17 Session Link _ Properties rw x Resource Enforced Property Operator Yalue Type Unit Provisioning E A a a Inventory VLANGroup i gpi String z E System Configuration Files Y rere yee 7 ei ieee I Image Files The Assettag associates a VLAN ID with a matrix switch To assign value to the Assettag inventory property press Ctrl spacebar to select the matrix switch value see Figure 12 46 Session Management 12 53 Working with Running Sessions 12 54 Figure 12 46 Assigning Value to Assettag 4UTO1347945075344 Running 3 E YLAN Auto Session Link L Properties F w x Resource Enforced Property Operator Value Type Unit Provisioning El Custom Inventory VLANGroup is String E System Configuration Files Y assettag is CM5_172 16 103 79 String Image Files A Note If you select a value for Assettag inventory property and VLANGroup value is blank then the scheduler searches across selected matrix switch and ass
61. For All Servers E SnapshotSetlscsiAlias Step 9 Update Installation Disk a a re SnapshotsclbesDscovery 4 Dell Servers Update RAID Boot Order For All Servers Update RAID Boot Order For All Servers l SnapshotSetMultiHostAccess gt Step 10 Create ISO Boot Configuration M M E SnapshotSetRWPermission Q Dell Servers Create ISO Configuration For All Servers Create ISO Configuration For All Server la SnapshotSetStatus gt Step 11 Delay after server installation Vv M SnapshotShow Dell EqualLogicStoragePool Delay Delay 2 SnapshotShowConnections Step 12 Get IP Address For All Servers Z M SystemInfoShowDetails ep Dell Servers Get IP Address For All Servers Get IP Address For All Servers ge UnAssignIPFrominterface gt Step 13 Verify ESXi Server Accessibility after installation Y Y Qy VolumeAccessCreate El Dell Servers VMware Verify ESX Servers Accessibility Verify ESX Servers Accessibility Q VolumeAccessCreateChapUser G Step 14 Remove ISO Files Y Y bed Volume ccesDelete EN Dell Servers Remove ISO Configuration For All Servers Remove ISO Configuration For All Serv _ 4 ee r 4 Se m AS50 Cluster VMware ESXi 5 1 Hypervisor deployment ISO boot Configure ESXi Server using ISO Boot The Orchestration Editor contains Available Operations View pane and Orchestration View pane Orchestration Management 13 7 Working with Orchestrations Available Operations view pane Contains
62. On the File Servers view right click an element and select Repositories b On the Active System Manager menu bar click File gt New gt Other gt Active System Manager gt Repositories Firmware Management 6 1 Creating Active System Manager Software Repositories c On the Active System Manager toolbar click the New icon select Other gt Active System Manager gt Repositories The wizard displays a new dialog box for you to create a new repository Click Next to create a new repository Select Software Repository Select the Dell Chassis Firmware Repository from the New drop down list Click Next to display and enter information about the new repository Enter a Name and Description for the repository a A E RE A e A In the Repository Properties enter the correct TFTP host in the Host field to access the repository The host must be accessible from the Chassis to be updated 9 Enter the TFTP Root path in the Linux machine where the TFTP server is hosted Active System Manager will perform a SSH to this machine to access this folder The Chassis to be updated directly accesses the update binaries using TFTP and BaseDirPath 10 Make sure the update files are present in lt TFTP Root Path gt lt BaseDirPath gt and enter the SSH username and SSH password for Active System Manager to access and discover the update binaries 11 Press Next to continue 12 Click Discover to start the browsing and discovery process and
63. Resource Instances view e Equipment in Maintenance Available only on the Resource Instances view 8 8 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 E Accessing Inventory You can create new filters and specify the associated rules for them Once created you can use the new filters for accessing your inventory For more information see the Filtering section on page 1 12 Note You can also set the filter using the Show Active Equipment icon only available on the Resource Instances view not the Resource Types view located on the navigation view action bar If set this filter displays only resources that have active versions 1 e resources with availability dates intersecting with present time Using Resource Instances ka Ej La Using Inventory The Active System Manager Resource Instances view is similar to the Resource Types view both views follow the same format You can explore the various resource instances that Active System Manager displays in the Resource Instances view by performing any of the following operations Navigate to the Resource Instances view and open a resource instance in the editor In the Resource Instances view click the Filter icon filter by Control Equipment and then by Managed Equipment In the Resource Instances view click the Group By icon and group the resources by Role then Manufacturer and then Model In the Resource Instances view click the Show Acti
64. Rowe Pe eee es Rese Sas 8 11 sins The Search Funci n a iaa a 8 11 Using the Resource Allocation Calendar is ieaie A A a ke he 8 11 Using the Resource Availability Calendar Options eee eee e eee ees 8 12 Accessing Calendar Menu Options for Resource Availability Calendar oo o o ooooooooooomoooo 8 12 Displaying Aspects of the Resource Availability Calendar 0 0 0 8 12 Analyzing Resource Instance Availability in Existing Sessions 0 0 0 0 0c ccc eee teens 8 13 Understanding Resource Allocation er A a Berea dd ead Pw Deh hed Re EG ee As ee 8 14 Viewing Provisioned Domains List cc004 teehee A CADSR eS OOS SSS GOO Rae Ae Eh eGR SORA TES 8 15 petting the Detault Domaine srs wicca swe dade At Besos Bak Soe de Rial eee gor Rando ees 8 15 Chapter 9 Repository Management 9 1 Introducins the Setup Perspect yew id A AA AA AAA ew EIR Eas 9 1 Opening Views on the Setup Perspective nee e ee eee ene ees 9 4 Ma as mo Reposttotes arts catia be lean A A tenes awn Gor ai haa ke on 9 5 Creatine a New REPOSO ciales di a barked A cd acd Pees Ge ho ae AE ee BOS es os 9 6 Adding Elements into a Repository 0 eee ene eee a e ees 9 7 Deleting Elements from the Repository 9 9 Removins Elements froma Bundle 00 dna de ee wee ee A A ee ee eh a wre bear a awk ees 9 10 Updating Repository Content a det se oats tel A oa eg E Rew be eee SS ae ON pee 9 10 Contents 5 Deleting Repository Delos t ta bar Oh
65. Scripts Setting Preferences for Session Scripts The following sub sections describe how to set preferences for session scripts e Setting a Default Remote Script Execution Environment e Setting Default Runtime Environment Variables Setting a Default Remote Script Execution Environment You can set runtime environment variables at the resource and session level To set a default remote script execution environment on the Active System Manager menu toolbar click Window gt Preferences gt Test and Script Execution gt Script Server All fields are required and must be completed in order to identify the scripts in the Session Scripts view The Secure check box indicates that the communication from the Active System Manager server to the remote script server is secure Non secure will use a Remote Shell Protocol RSH If you use Secure it will be Secure Shell Protocol SSH Setting Default Runtime Environment Variables To set default runtime environment variables that will be passed to each session script executions perform one of the following options 1 Open the Script Server preferences e On the Active System Manager menu toolbar click Window gt Preferences gt Test and Script Execution gt Script Server e Inthe Resource Scripts view select one or more resource scripts right click and select Preferences 2 In the Runtime Variable section select Resource Level Script or Session Level Script Table 14 1 on page 14 5
66. Search feature is simple toolbar option used to locate search categories including resource types resource instances links templates configurations and sessions that match a single character string For more information see the Using the Search Function section on page 8 11 Using Inventory 8 5 Accessing Inventory This section describes the following topics Using Resource Types Using Resource Instances Linking Views with Resource Instances Using the Search Function Using Resource Types a You can explore the various resource types that Active System Manager displays in the Resource Types view by performing any of the following operations Navigate to the Resource Types view and open a resource type in the editor double click the resource type for example Cisco 6509 as displayed in Figure 8 2 on page 8 4 View the Resource Type properties in the editor by scrolling or by using the Outline view To open the Outline view on the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Show View gt Other gt General gt Outline In the Resource Types view click the Filter icon and filter by Control Equipment only then by Managed Equipment only For more information about how to filter and display resources using this function see the Accessing Resources via the Filters Dialog Box section on page 8 8 In the Resource Types view click the Group By icon and group the resources by Role t
67. Session Owner e Calendar Format Displays a calendar format by Day default Week Month Quarter or Year e Lock Horizontal Scrollbar Allows you to lock the horizontal scrollbar Resource Allocation Calendar Enables the Show Past Sessions feature to display past sessions If you click this check box you can also click to select the Show Archive Bin Sessions check box Note If you click these check boxes it might impact application performance e Calendar Colors The system administrator can disable this option by the system administrator by modifying the Active System Manager server configuration properties If so a message at the bottom of the screen will be available Note For more information about setting colors in hexadecimal values regarding the color configuration properties refer to the following URLs e http www w3schools com Html html_colors asp e http www w3schools com Html html_colornames asp Active System Manager Overview 1 29 Active System Manager User Interface Elements Table 1 8 Preference Types Configurable Parameters continued Preference Type General gt Editors General gt Login Profile General gt Perspectives General gt Web Browser 1 30 Configurable Parameters and Description e Size of recently opened files list For each file that is opened in an editor it is stored in a list of recently used files This option controls the number of files that display in th
68. System Manager administrator but users of the system should be familiar with the different domains in their system if applicable To view a list of provisioned domains on your network on the Active System Manager menu bar click Tools gt Domains The Domain Definitions dialog box displays see Figure 8 8 Figure 8 8 Domain Definitions Domain Definitions m Domain Details Select the domain to wiew the provisioning details Domain Information ID 1 Mame System Session Service IP Address asm galeforce Session Service Port 40500 Session Service Secure Port 551 50500 Mediation Server IP Address asm galeforce Mediation Server Port 0 Mediation Server Secure Port 551 0 Description Every piece of inventory must be associated with only one domain For more information about managing domains see the Active System Manager Server Installation Guide Setting the Default Domain When creating new inventory you must set the domain property You can set the default domain by configuring your preferences To do so on the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Preferences gt Inventory The default domain preferences display see Figure 8 9 Using Inventory 8 15 Understanding Resource Allocation Figure 8 9 Preferences Inventory Domain Information Preferences TTT OOO So type filter text Inventory ey y r F Archive Bin b General Custom Icon Library Folder t Help Use this field to poi
69. System Manager menu bar click Window gt Show View gt Resource Instances The Resource Instances view displays 2 Click the Show Calendar icon displayed in the top right corner of the view The Resource Instances view displays with the Resource Availability calendar in the right side of the view see Figure 5 17 5 28 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Using Resource Instances Figure 5 17 Resource Allocation Statistics No Filtering 011 W37 soy Tue 6 Sep 2011 4437 Wed 7 Sep 2011 1437 Thu 8 Sep 2011 1437 Fri 9 Sep 2011 4437 B E Demo H E ERI B E MRYCommunications a NetApp BS Filer gt Filer_Card El Filer_Chassis BS NetApp_Filer_Chassis_1 Ss Net pp_Filer_Chassis_2 E 3 Pico El Box400 La AT PICO400 01 89 MorePicos La AT PICO400 02 89 AUTO1315 306 MorePicos JB AT PICO400 03 89 O T AT PICO400 04 89 E Ravi All of the associated sessions display for each resource instance that is part of the session within the Resource Availability calendar The associated sessions for each resource instance appear as a colored rectangular bar You may want to check status and availability for resources by using the Resource Availability calendar with the Session view and the Resource Instances view Allocation statistics are displayed next to the resource name or asset tag A resource is organized in one of three categories e Resource not allocated Dubbed available for use
70. The Add Session Notification dialog box displays with the Events tab open see Figure 12 52 on page 12 60 3 Edit the session notification criteria as necessary and click OK Deleting Session Notifications To delete session notifications perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Preferences gt Scheduler gt Notifications amp Reminders The Preferences Notifications Reminders dialog box displays see Figure 12 51 on page 12 59 2 Select one or more by pressing Ctrl click session notifications to delete and click Delete 3 Click Apply gt OK Adding Session Reminders Session reminders are different from notifications in that reminders provide advance notice of session start and end times not status changes and error conditions To add session reminders perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Preferences gt Scheduler gt Notifications amp Reminders The Preferences Notifications Reminders dialog box displays see Figure 12 51 on page 12 59 12 62 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Configuring Session Notifications and Reminders 2 Click Add gt Reminders The Add Session Reminder dialog box displays Figure 12 54 Figure 12 54 Add Session Reminder Session reminder Add Session Reminder Add a session reminder by specifying rule properties events email format and recipients Rule
71. The Select Repository Type dialog box displays see Figure 9 4 Figure 9 4 Select Repository Type Dialog Box File Server le xs Select Repository Type Select repository type to create a new repository or select existing repository to update L A 1 0 o File Server Existing Software Configuration Management New Concurrent Versions System Existing Software Repository New Trivial File Transfer Protocol for PXE Boot Existing EqualLogic Storage Firmwares 2 Click Next 3 Click the File Server gt Existing options and select an existing repository from the pull down selection Your existing repositories for each type should display in the list 4 Click Next to display a dialog box that contains the information associated with your existing repository 9 10 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Managing Repositories 5 Click Next to perform a repository discovery and status update and to display an example of that result The files already exist in the repository but have a new icon design These filters allow you to filter out repository content Table 9 6 lists and defines the icon filters Table 9 6 Filtering Icons Icon Description ie Displays only existing elements efi Displays only newly discovered elements A Displays only conflicting elements Displays all elements 6 Click Finish Deleting Repository Definitions To delete repository definitions perform t
72. The following sessions are blocking your proposed selection and should be manually preempted Start Date Time End Date Time The top part displays the allocated resource instances selected by the Scheduler including interfaces If you click the Identify Preemption Opportunities check box the bottom part can list sessions that should be canceled in order to schedule this session 11 Click Next The next wizard page see Figure 12 20 displays if the option is set in the Window gt Preferences gt Scheduler gt Wizard dialog box only for a session otherwise skip to step 6 By default the No Association option is selected For more information about script association see the Managing Session Links section on page 12 27 Session Management 12 25 Working with Running Sessions Figure 12 20 Scheduling Template Wizard Rescheduling Session Associate Scripts Test Cases Specify scripts test cases to be executed when session enters Running state No association O Associate Associate remote scripts Associate Scripts Hostname Username Password Script Test Case Is Secure Timeout Mins Associate test cases requires AutoTest to be installed Associated Test Cases Test Case Name Timeout Mins Description Execute sequentially 12 Click Finish to confirm your session Environment Cancel If the Perspective check box is enabled on the Window gt Preferences gt Scheduler dialog box a
73. View View Description Lists the available Templates previously created Supports built in filters Public Private and group functions For more information see Chapter 1 Active System Manager Overview Defines the graphical area where you can design your Template The resource types and resource instances can be dragged and moved around in the Template editor Links can be created between appropriate resources in the Template Lists all available resource types For more information about resource types see Chapter 1 Active System Manager Overview Lists all available resource instances For more information about resource types see Chapter 1 Active System Manager Overview Lists the content of the open Template in an outline format It represents a high level summary of an open editor and allows you to navigate or find information quickly When you select a node or link in this view it also is selected in the Template editor and the properties for the selected Template change as appropriate in the Properties view Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Table 11 1 Template Perspective Elements continued View or Editor View or Name Editor Description Properties View Associated with the selections in the Template editor link editor and the Outline view The Properties view displays the properties of any of the selected objects in the associated views or editor In case of multiple selections
74. View Orchestration View Enter operation name to search operation Add Step 44 Remove Step lt b Insert Step ge Remove Eg Add Script Search 3 ESE Operation Execute Abort On Error Description E gt Dell EqualLogicStoragePool E Step 1 Validate Input Parameters AccountShow E Dell Servers VMware Validate Input Parameters VMware Validate Input Parameters gt AssignIpTolnterface Step 2 Get vCenter Credentials M M Q ChapUserCreate 3 lt Dell Servers VMware Get vCenter Credentials Get vCenter Credentials X ChapUserDelete gt Step 3 Verify Installation Disk M M SP ChapUserSetState E J Dell Servers Verify Installation Disk For All Servers Verify Installation Disk For All Servers Delay Step 4 Enable IPMI on Servers DRAC M M GetVolumelQN 4 Dell Servers Enable IPMI For All Servers Enable IPMI For All Servers InterfaceStatusChange Step 5 Clear All Jobs 7 Y S amp P SetGroupPerformanceBalance Dell Servers Clear All Jobs For All Servers Clear All Jobs For All Servers Q SnapshotCloneCreate gt Step 6 Reboot All Servers M M Q SnapshotCreate Dell Servers Reboot All Servers Reboot All Servers 3 SnapshotDelete Step 7 Verify LC Status M wd SnapshotRename Dell Servers Check LC Status For All Servers Check LC Status For All Servers tS SnapshotRestore Step 8 Verify Job Status M M La SnapshotSetDescription 4 Dell Servers Verify Job Status For All Servers Verify Job Status
75. You are prompted to verify the deletion displaying only the asset tag Click OK to confirm the deletion If the resource is used in sessions the update fails You can resolve these errors by deleting the conflicting sessions Setting Inventory Parameter Values Inventory parameter definitions are derived from the resource type and cannot be created in the resource instance you can only set the define value in the resource editor You can then use those values to identify search results and to perform property based scheduling To set inventory parameter values to a resource instance perform the following steps l 2 3 4 In the Resource Instances view right click a resource instance and select Open Open the Inventory Parameters section Select the parameter for which you want to enter or change and value Click the Value column for the parameter value you want to enter click Ctrl space The data entry might be different based on the parameter type For example if the parameter is of the type Date you will be prompted for a calendar The other columns are for information only they cannot be changed Click File gt Save to save your changes to the server E Note If the resource instance is used in existing sessions you must also resolve the dependencies for more information see the next section Resolving Resource Dependencies Resolving Resource Dependencies 5 30 The Inventory perspe
76. a Gaol nae a gar hace oe ook 5 39 lMpOrineInVvenlOry nara a ein ey Se ee a we BE ee A A we eR ae ea oe Ae 5 39 Importing Standard Resource Instances eee ene ee ee eee eens 5 39 Populating an SDI Inventory Spreadsheet eee eee e eens 5 40 Creatine Location Generator Files A ke DELS A REET REISS A 5 43 importas Plos In Internac Files 5 0 05 0 ncn A Kee Be ae id Ia ae eee 5 46 Validatne CSV Resource Dafa cesa A dod aac A hag eA Pea Gree bo i ek ES ee DO ge eS de 5 47 Importing Validated Resource Data 5 48 Using Forced Import for Resources with Session Conflicts 0 0 0 0 0 ccc cee 5 49 Mportino C OnneChyily 4 Aas ats iS A Rea eee wee te Peas ee Oe we Pea ea oe ke 5 49 Populating the Link Inventory Spreadsheet eee eee ee eee eens 5 50 Contents 3 Impor SV Link Tiles raros daran tee ek ee ot Rh eee ee eee ee 5 51 Validanne CSV Dink Files a a anaes ee A Aita 5 52 Importins Validated LARSEN Saw RR ee 5 53 EXPO eo CONCCHVILY eoe eal e od eee e he ee 5 54 iad Ole Resource Pooli sora ar a ew ES Ee ee ee 5 54 Adding Resource ROD pp A A on tee ea Che dE ee dee eames 5 54 Modi vins Resource Poo nd dE IEA eas AAA AAA Rees 5 58 Deletme Resource Pool a AS A A A a 5 59 Managing Maintenance Windows sus sarta dad da da 5 59 Acce ssing the Maintenance Window 20 30 A AA eee AR ta 5 59 Adding a Maintenance W MdOW id E AA AAA AAA A 5 60 Meoditymo a Maintenance WOW a nol Sade ate oe E ee ee 5 61 Canceling the Maint
77. a new link name 3 Optional Click the Description field and enter a description for this link 4 Click OK To display link properties perform one of the following methods e In the link editor select a simple link e In the Outline view select a simple link The Link properties display in the Link Properties view Link tab see Figure 12 27 for an example Session link properties cannot be modified Figure 12 27 Link Properties Example Session Link Property Name Description Type Priority Session Management 12 31 Working with Running Sessions Table 12 7 lists and defines the default properties for the selected links Table 12 7 Default Session Link Properties Property Name Description Name Name you assigned to this link or the default name assigned by the Template perspective Enter a link name of up to 80 alphanumeric characters including spaces and special characters Description Text string that describes this link Type Type of link simple _ Note You can also perform loopbacks for example a loop back to itself on two different ports Loopbacks are only allowed in the left pane not the right pane Adding VLAN switching is also available in the session if there are more than two VLANs authored Disabling and Enabling Session Links By default session links are enabled To disable and enable session links perform the following steps e To disable With a session open click the session
78. all RA custom operations associated with each resource in your Template Orchestration view Working pane where you build your workflow by any of the following two methods Dragging and dropping custom operations from the Available Operations view pane Adding scripts to steps by clicking Add Scripts Note Custom operations and scripts are associated with steps in the Orchestration View Adding Steps in the Orchestration View To add steps in the Orchestration View pane using any of the methods explained above follow the steps below 1 Click Add Step 2 Drag and drop custom operations from the Available Operations View pane to the respective step s in the Orchestration View pane see step 3 or add a script by clicking Add Script see step 4 The Specify Input Values dialog box that corresponds to a custom operation displays whenever any custom operation is dragged to the Orchestration view see Figure 13 6 Figure 13 6 Specify Input Values Specify Input Values 3 specify Input Values for VolumeCreate Enter the input values for the operation or select value from Possible Values indicates mandatory values Parameters Possible Values Name Value Data Type Unit Primary Source Template volumeName string volumeSize DatastoreWolumesize string poolName StoragePoolName string Secondary Source Global Parameters gt JE Compute a Storage E a StorageGrouplP El Fa StoragePoolName
79. and Back buttons in your web browser Using the Pattern Generator Tool The Active System Manager Pattern Generator tool can generate assets and resource names with unique identifiers Using a special character string called a range you can create a long list of names and asset tags that have either letters or numbers appended to the string The format for the range string is 1 9999 A Z a z AA ZZ or aa zz Because uppercase and lowercase letters are treated as different values there is a range of 308 915 776 unique letter combinations Special characters and punctuation are not supported You can use any whole numbers in either ascending or descending order you can use up to four range strings for an asset tag or name Hence if you used the pattern Cisco 1 3 for a resource name the Inventory perspective generates three names Ciscol Cisco2 and Cisco3 Note If your range string begins with a single digit 1 to 9 use a zero to force the generator to make the patterns identical for instance Cisco 01 25 Using multiple range strings creates a geometric progression A unique pattern is generated for every possible combination of the ranges Therefore if you used the Cisco Z X Port 01 03 pattern for an asset tag the Inventory perspective generates nine asset tags e CiscoX Port01 CiscoX Port02 CiscoX Port03 e CiscoY Port01 CiscoY Port02 CiscoY Port03 e CiscoZ Port01 CiscoZ Port02 CiscoZ Port03 T
80. and consolidates it to display the visual representation of a consistent layout of resources in a hierarchial manner The Operation Center view facilitates maximum flexibility in tracking the consistent layout of a virtual infrastructure in the Resource Manager To facilitate things further the Operation Center view displays the current status of resources at regular intervals by scheduling the discovery operation Note There may be a lag between the resource status in Resource Managers and the hierarchy of resources reflected in the Operation Center view in case of changed status of resources in the Resource Manager The Active System Manager software uses the power of Resource Adapters RAs to retrieve and display the hierarchical structure of resources on the Operation Center view The RAs establish a connection with Resource Managers for example VMware vCenter Cisco UCS Manager using a set of open Application Programming Interfaces APIs These APIs communicate with Resource Managers to retrieve the nested relationships of resources and reflect or replicate their corresponding consistent layout in the Operation Center view for example for the VMware vCenter the Operation Center view comprises of objects discovered such as Datacenter Cluster and ESX hosts in the cluster along with the datastores and virtual machine VM objects running in the clusters The resources are displayed per data center starting from Active System Manage
81. and release information Overview Table 9 9 lists and describes the Compatibility Matrix property values Table 9 9 Compatibility Matrix Property Values Property Description Manufacturer Compatibility Matrix manufacturer name Model Compatibility Matrix model name Description Description of the Compatibility Matrix Version Compatibility Matrix version Defined by the Compatibility Matrix integrator Release Number Compatibility Matrix release number Release Date Compatibility Matrix release date To update the compatibility matrix import a new CSV file as follows 1 Inthe Resource Adapters view open the Resource Adapter editor select a Resource Adapter right click and select Open 2 In the Resource Adapter editor a Select the Overview tab b Navigate to the Compatibility Matrix section c Click the browse icon d Import the CSV file 9 18 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Operations Working with Resource Adapters Note All Resource Adapter editor changes using the File gt Save function will take effect immediately in your environment We recommend that you back up or export your Resource Adapters before making such changes To manage the system and custom methods defined in the Resource Adapter perform the following steps E In the Resource Adapters view open the Resource Adapter editor select a Resource Adapter right click and select Open In the Resource Adapter editor s
82. and the Resource Instances view Figure 8 2 illustrates how your generic type of equipment resource types are displayed within the Resource Types view For more information about other views associated with all the perspectives see the Views section on page 1 10 Figure 8 2 Resource Types View E Resource Types 3 gt fe O No Filtering a 2 Dell Dell BladeServer a Dell Chassis a Dell Compellent ft Dell Dummy ft Dell Durnmyl a Dell Equallogic P56110 Dell EquallogicStoragePool Dell Forcel0 54810 mo Dell JOA ot Dell Servers 2 VMware 8 4 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Accessing Inventory Note The area in the Resource Instances view to the right of the actual instance data is the Resource E Availability Calendar which displays information regarding which resource instances are allocated for specific sessions For more information on how to use the information displayed in this area of the view see the Using the Resource Allocation Calendar section on page 8 11 Note While the Inventory perspective is the first place to start working with inventory you can also use Ea other perspectives to accomplish the same tasks Because you will typically use inventory when you are in the Template or Session perspective you can open Resource Types and Resource Instances views from these perspectives as well as from within the Inventory perspective The Active System Manager application provides four m
83. at one time The maximum number of virtual iSCSI identities that Active System Manager can manage is 250 000 1 On the Active System Manager navigation bar menu click the Setup perspective 2 On the Active System Manager toolbar click the Networking perspective The Networking Configuration editor appears 3 In the Global Virtual Identity Pool folder click IQN 10 2 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Understanding Global Identity Pools Click Add Identities In the Generate New Identities dialog box enter the Identity Prefix that Active System Manager will add to the beginning of the IQN Examples of possible prefixes include product types company names or site name e The IQN Prefix can include up to 213 characters Valid characters include uppercase and lowercase letters numbers and these special characters Enter the number of identities to create in the Count field any whole number between 1 1 000 Click OK The identities are added to the pool Virtual WWNN and WWPN Identities Virtual FCoE identities are unique device identifiers that facilitate communication in a storage area network with Fibre Channel over Ethernet SAN FCoE topology Each FCoE identity comprises a World Wide Port Name WWPN and World Wide Node Name WWNN that are generated based on a Virtual FCoE Initialization Protocol FIP MAC Address Adding FCoE identities enables Active System Manager to automatically assign a WWPN a
84. automatically switch to the Sessions perspective or click No to remain in your current perspective Your newly created session will display in the Sessions view For more information about the Sessions view see Chapter 10 Network Management Template Management 11 23 Working with Templates Archiving Templates using the Templates View Typically you may want to archive older Templates depending on the archive rules defined by your Active System Manager administrator e Note You retain the ability to search such Templates within the Archive Bin To archive Templates using the Templates view perform the following steps 1 Open the Templates view on the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Show View gt Templates gt OK 2 In the Templates view right click a Template and select Move to Archive Bin When the Confirm Archiving Operation dialog box displays click OK Restoring Archived Templates You can restore Templates previously archived to the Template Archive Bin To restore a Template to your Active System Manager workbench perform the following steps 1 Open the Template Archive Bin view on the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Show View gt Other gt Active System Manager gt Template Archive Bin gt OK 2 Select the associated Template and perform one of the following options e Drag it to the desired location in the Templates view e Right click in the view and selec
85. be selected otherwise the latest files will be used For information about repositories see Chapter 9 Repository Management To set up provisioning parameters see Chapter 8 Using Inventory Filename derived from the repository Path derived from the repository Repository name assigned or selected Applies only for source control software base repository Applies only for source control software base repository CVS only Resource properties first appear when you add a resource type or instance to the Template by dragging it from the navigation tree You can access the resource properties by clicking the resource To modify resource properties you must access and work within the resource Properties view From this view you can modify the editable properties listed on the Resource Provisioning Inventory Configuration Files and Image Files tabs Deleting Resource Instances To remove the resource instance from the Template and not from the inventory in the Template editor right click the resource instance and select Delete Note Ifthere is any connectivity in the Template with other resource types or resource instances the links attached to the resource type or resource instance that you select will also be deleted 11 40 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Templates Defining Provisioning Policies In order to have fine grained control over provisioning policies
86. by double clicking a file File content is displayed in the editor and content is automatically syntax colored highlighted Basic editing operations are allowed such as Search Cut Copy Paste The administrator must save the file File gt Save after changes are made To add a property file click Add and select the associated level e Manufacturer These files can be used across all Resource Adapters from the same manufacturer e Model These files are unique to the selected Resource Adapter e Control Gear These files are usually associated with Layer 1 switching Resource Adapters To delete a property file select the file and click Remove Note Removing files is not recommended as it may impact the Resource Adapter behavior To view the free form copyright and release information details for the selected Resource Adapter perform the following steps 1 Inthe Resource Adapters view open the Resource Adapter editor select a Resource Adapter right click and select Open 2 In the Resource Adapter editor select the About tab to list all release information for the opened Resource Adapter Editing Resource Adapters 9 20 The Active System Manager software allows you to edit the attribute values of parameters for custom and virtual operations as defined in the RA editor These parameter values are fetched by the executor while executing custom and virtual operations However while editing the parameter values for custom and
87. can be provided in the following format Serial Async RS 232 1 AUX 1 Inventory parameters for the component separated as a list with parameter name and value for example color blue cost 10K Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Table 5 10 Field Name Resource Interface Parameters CSV Input Field Definitions continued Importing Inventory Field Length Illegal Characters Description Field O to 80 chars lt gt amp inventory invParamName invParamVal Value 0 to 50 chars INTERFACE TYPE LOCATION inventory A keyword always present invParamName Name of the inventory parameter invParamVal Value of the inventory parameter INTERFACE It will be always INTERFACE no other type is supported in the CSV import TY PE Optional Interface type If TYPE is specified then this inventory parameter will be applicable for that interface type and if not specified then this parameter will be applied to all interface types LOCATION Optional Location If not specified then it will be applicable for all the interface location of the TYPE interface If specified then it will be applicable to a particular location There are two option available as of now You can specify a sequence 1 2 etc or specific location e Sequence tells the sequence on which this parameter will be applicable generated by the location generator for example if 2 means that this parameter will be applicable on
88. can select If the list is empty then file associations must be made in the repository definition In all cases the repository must be created and elements must be discovered imported and associated with a resource type Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Managing Virtual Resources You can apply the non associated configuration file to the resource To display all configuration files click the Show All Configuration Files check box The Up and Down button is available f you have at least two files you can rearrange the order in which the files will be applied on the resource by the Active System Manager software For information about setting up provisioning parameters see Chapter 8 Using Inventory For more information about repositories see Chapter 9 Repository Management Using the Apply Image Files Menu The Apply Image Files menu applies a new set of OS images to the selected resources You can select the images move them up or down and click OK When you click OK the Active System Manager software updates the changes on the resources A dialog box displays the results for each resource The Resource Operation Results display the Asset Tag Result Return Code and Message Click OK when finished reviewing the results Using the Snapshot Menu The Snapshot menu saves the current configuration and image file back into the repository e Note Associating repository with a resource type is requir
89. click Window gt Show View gt Templates or click Window gt Show View gt Sessions e On the Active System Manager toolbar click the Template or Sessions perspective icon 3 Select the method to open one or more Templates e Inthe Templates view hold down the Ctrl key right click the desired Templates and select Open e In the Sessions view right click and select Open Template The Templates view displays all of the available Templates The owner of a public file is the user that authored the file determined by the user account that created it 4 Note Asa non administrator user when you open a Template unless it is one you created you do not Se E own the Template therefore you cannot modify or save it but you can click Save As to save it as your own A read only watermark displays in the Template editor when you are not the owner of the Templates For more information see the Saving Templates section on page 11 8 Note As an administrator you can edit the Templates owned by other users even if you are not the Template owner E Note Upon opening a Template validation is invoked For more information see the Validating Templates section on page 11 13 Template Management 11 11 Working with Templates Closing Templates There are two ways in which you can close your Template but not leave your working session To do so perform the following steps 1 Select a method to close one or more Templates
90. connectivity from one VLAN component to the next without performing those actions manually Figure 12 41 Layer 2 Template cement Link 3 eiii is ieee Linka TT 0 VLAN 124 d Cisco Link 4 Resource Adapter Log iii dd A System Operation Custom Operation E Open Session Audit Report Cisco_3600_1 Open Terminal a Switch to Link Editor Open Resource Instance Editor Open Resource Type Editor Execute Session Scripts Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Running Sessions Updating VLAN IDs in a Running Session In a running session you can add a new VLAN component and provide VLAN IDs by entering values in any of the following properties E Note Updating values in a running session is irrelevant if a VLAN component is already scheduled e VLANCount Value e VLANId e VLANGroup e Assettag VLANCount Value The VLANCount provisioning property facilitates you to fetch the user defined range of VLAN IDs from a group associated with VLAN component By entering a count value in the VLANCount you can assign random values as per the count to the VLAN component For example if you specify a count of 4 the scheduler searches across the matrix switch to randomly assign any four VLAN IDs to the VLAN component E Note Ifthe VLANCount value is blank the Active System Manager scheduler selects a VLAN ID randomly from the associated group and allocates 1t to the VLAN component However 1f VLAN
91. date and click Remove Inventory Management 5 23 Using Resource Instances 7 Update add or remove interfaces and set properties using one of the following methods e Select one or more interfaces and update manually e Select one or more interfaces and click Add e Select one or more interfaces and click Remove When creating a new resource instance the Active System Manager application will generate the minimum set of interface as specified in the associated resource type The minimum requirements must be available to save your resource instance 8 On the Active System Manager menu bar click File gt Save to save your changes to the server Importing Resource Instances To import a resource instance perform the following steps 1 Select a method to open the Import dialog box e On the Active System Manager menu bar click File gt Import gt Active System Manager gt Resource Instances gt Next e In the Resource Instances view right click and select Import gt Resource Instances gt Next 2 By default the Select root directory option is enabled to allow you to manually type in the root directory location or you can click Browse to navigate to the desired location 3 Select the Select archive file option and type the archive file or click Browse to navigate to the desired location 4 Inthe Resource instances specifications section select a resource instance or click Select All to select all of the resource i
92. determine the actual runtime parameter value at execution time 6 Click OK to execute the custom operation 5 72 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Chapter 6 Firmware Management Note This chapter describes the administrator specific tasks and functions me This chapter describes the concepts pre requisites and procedures required to update the firmware for chassis and servers within Active System Manager This includes creating Active System Manager software repositories Creating Active System Manager Software Repositories The following section describes the procedures to create repositories for chassis firmware and server firmware Creating Repository with Dell Chassis Firmware Repository Type Prerequisites Following are the pre requisites before creating a repository with Dell chassis repository type e Software repositories must be created to contain the firmware Dell Update Packages e The following procedure creates a TFTP based repository If you need to create a custom TFTP based repository see the repository section of the Active System Manager User Guide e The repository server where the firmware Dell Update Packages are hosted must be a Linux server e Chassis firmware update supports only TFTP based repositories Steps to Create Repository with Dell Chassis Firmware Repository Type 1 In the Setup perspective perform one of the following options to display the New Repository dialog box a
93. e The any option functions the same way as the OR logic feature If any of the rules are met then the entry displays E Note You can define multiple rules for example one for templates one for dates and so on 6 Click Apply gt OK Running Archive Bin Rules To run the Archive Bin rules perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Tools gt Archive Bin Rules gt Run to display the Archiving dialog box E Note The Session Archive Bin includes a calendar and as such this Archive Bin includes the same fields as the normal Sessions view 2 Click OK to accept the process Based on the rules when Archive Bin rules are run the affected templates and sessions will be moved to the archive bin Archived templates are available in the Template Archive Bin view and archived sessions are available in the Session Archive Bin Editing Archive Bin Rules To edit Archive Bin rules perform the following steps 1 Open the Archive Bin dialog box see Figure 12 40 on page 12 45 by one of the following methods e On the Active System Manager menu bar click Tools gt Archive Bin Rules gt Edit e On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Preferences gt Archive Bin 2 Modify the settings as appropriate and click Apply gt OK Deleting Archive Bin Rules To delete Archive Bin rules perform the following steps 1 Open the Archive Bin dialog box see Figure 12 40 on page 12 45 by one of
94. entered on this page is used to filter the servers that will be displayed on the Server Selection page of the Server Profile wizard when attaching a profile Only servers that match the criteria can host configuration created with this Server Template The boot settings set where the server will boot from the server s boot device Select an OS Boot Type of FC Local HD PXE SAN FCoE SAN SCSD or SD Card Depending on the boot type enter additional information e IfPXE or SAN FCoE select a Virtual Boot NIC to indicate the network from which the operating system will be loaded Note This list is populated with networks added on the Networking Configuration pane from Setup gt Networking E Note IfSAN iSCSI select a Virtual Boot NIC to indicate the network from which the operating system will be loaded 2 Click Finish Limitations on Editing Server Templates and Profiles If the Server Template has any attached Server Profiles in a non IDLE state for example not running configuring error then the only change a user or administrator can make is to change the vNIC Network Settings gt Edit vNIC Users can add new networks and modify the Select Network s list Users cannot change the native VLAN network If the Server Template does not have any Server Profiles associated with 1t everything on the Server Template can be modified except the name of the template If the Server Template has attached Serve
95. first select a resource type resource instance or an interface and then click this icon e Show Static or Switched Interfaces Only To use this icon option you must first select a resource type or resource instance Effectively this option removes interfaces that are not connected via the underlying infrastructure e Show Existing Physical Connectivity Shows or hides all possible connectivity Select one or more of the drawn links and right click Create Link Note To display current possible connectivity perform the following steps 1 Select a resource instance and interface end point 2 Right click or press F2 to display the Quick Connectivity dialog box 3 Select an entry in the dialog box to author the resource and interface into the Template The following topics describe how to update Templates using the link editor e Switching to the Link Editor e Authoring Interfaces e Modifying Interface Properties e Managing Template Links Switching to the Link Editor To switch to the link editor from the Template editor perform one of the following methods e With the editor workspace open click the Link editor tab e In the link editor right click the resource and select Switch to Link Editor see Figure 11 25 on page 11 47 e Double click a resource or link Authoring Interfaces 11 50 You can author interfaces only in the link editor that 1s make those interfaces enabled and thereby adding them in your
96. for the range string is 1 9999 A Z a z AA ZZ or aa zz Because uppercase and lowercase letters are treated as different values there is a range of 308 915 776 unique letter combinations Special characters and punctuation are not supported You can use any whole numbers in either ascending or descending order you can use up to four range strings for an asset tag or name Hence if you used the pattern Cisco 1 3 for a resource name the Inventory perspective generates three names Ciscol Cisco2 and Cisco3 E Note If your range string begins with a single digit 1 to 9 use a zero to force the generator to make the patterns identical for instance Cisco 01 25 For more information about the Pattern Generator see the Using the Pattern Generator Tool section on page 5 25 E Note Dell recommends that you do not generate more than 100 patterns at once Generating Unique Location Names To generate unique location names perform the following steps 1 In the Resource Types view right click a resource type and select Open to open the resource type in its own editor workspace 2 Scroll down to the Interface Types gt Locations column see Figure 5 20 Figure 5 20 Interface Types Locations Column Interface Types Add update and remove interface type definitions Type Classification Component Manag Min Max Locations ada El F Console Em ef Serial EIA 232 Asyne O 0 1 con
97. in the same window or in a new window Table 1 4 outlines the out of the box perspectives and the tasks that you can perform with each perspective Table 1 4 Tasks for Each Perspective Perspective Preferred Task Chapter Reference Dashboard Facilitates configurable graphical representation Chapter 17 Dashboard of the infrastructure in various widgets Setup Facilitates the discovery of network equipment Chapter 5 Inventory Management related information using domain based information Inventory Managing inventory Chapter 8 Using Inventory Operations Managing operations Chapter 5 Inventory Management Templates Managing templates and scheduling Chapter 9 Repository Management Sessions Managing sessions interacting with equipment Chapter 10 Network Management default and executing test cases Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Active System Manager User Interface Elements Table 1 4 Tasks for Each Perspective continued Perspective Preferred Task Chapter Reference Preferences Facilitates the setting of user preferences e Button Reset Performs current perspective reset to Default The following topics describe the functions available for perspectives Modifying Perspective Preferences Opening Perspectives Navigating Perspectives Customizing Perspectives Saving Your Perspective As Resetting Perspectives Closing One or All Perspectives Deleting Persp
98. infopop for this option A dialog box becomes the default browser for displaying help contents Open help content Allows you to open your document in place or open in an editor area Context Help Open window context help Allows you to select a separate window for this option in a dynamic help view or in an infopop A separate window becomes the default browser for displaying help contents Open dialog context help Allows you to select a dialog box in a dialog tray or in an infopop for this option A dialog box becomes the default browser for displaying help contents Note Selections performed on this page can affect how the help view is presented If the selected browser is not fully compatible with Internet Explorer or Mozilla or has JavaScript disabled the help view shown in the browser might be a simplified version Inventory When creating new inventory you must set the default domain property by configuring the following preferences Inventory gt Inventory Import Custom Icon Library Folder Points the Active System Manager software to the folder where you store your custom icons for resource types Resource Type Multi Editor Displays a warning for incompatible and hidden inventory provisioning parameters upon opening an editor Resource Instance Multi Editor Displays a warning for incompatible and hidden provisioning parameters upon opening an editor Domain Information Sets the default domain and i
99. information see the Filtering section on page 1 12 The new Template should be listed in the view and can now be viewed deleted exported or reserved for a new environment session Configuring Session Notifications and Reminders 12 58 The Active System Manager software includes a notification mode and a reminder mode that enables users and administrators to set flexible session notifications for all session state changes such as Canceled Completed Confirmed Failed and Running and reminders for starting and ending a session For the session state workflow see Figure 12 4 on page 12 8 and their description see Table 12 2 on page 12 8 Note Notifications and reminders are sent as email messages with a 1 1 relationship that is one email is sent for each notification and each reminder The Active System Manager administrator sets the system wide preferences for the session notifications and you may receive notifications based on those system preferences However you can override them by setting your own preferences and you can also set your own notifications on an individual per session basis You can set default notification preferences via the Preferences dialog box For more information see the Preferences section on page 1 27 This section describes how you can use the Preferences Session Notifications dialog box to set the various notification options for your own sessions or on a per session basis This sect
100. it contains a key value pair for each parameter for example config param name config param value e The interface provisioning parameters can be provided as a sequence of attribute name value and category for example attributeName attributeValue CATEGORY e The category can be one of INTERFACE POWERSUPPLY CONSOLE and FILESYSTEM This row for inventory parameters requires the following data e inventory keyword in first column e In successive columns it contains key value pair for each parameter for example inventory param name inventory param value The interface inventory parameters can be provided as a sequence of attribute name value category type and location for example attributeName attributeValue CATEGORY TYPE LOCATION The category can be one of INTERFACE POWERSUPPLY CONSOLE and FILESYSTEM The type and location are the other applicability parameters where location is numeric and specifies the n interface of the type and category on which the attribute is applicable 9 45 Importing Inventory Importing Plug In Interface Files You use the Import Explorer to manage plug ins to add update and delete To import your plug in interface files perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Show View gt Other gt Import Explorer The Active System Manager software displays the Import Explorer view see Figure 5 24 Figure 5 24 Import Expl
101. items that you click press or type Indicates console output path names source code and filenames Indicates path names for which you must supply a value Indicates a referenced name especially in glossary where See references occur Indicates external documentation references Indicates a procedural series of submenus that open from a primary menu Separates a subscriber name or administrator name and a domain name or domain alias or console output that requires text to include a space Example Click Add or select the SaveAs option C dell activesystemmanager Drag the interfaces into the WP group or select Bind gt WP name or right click the interface and select Bind gt WP name This feature is called property based scheduling For more information see the Active System Manager Release Notes Click File gt New gt Worksheet support dell com The format for any image file is osimage username that imported the image imagename xii Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Documentation Lineup Administrator Role Icon For administrator only tasks the administrator icon is used to identify that sole role For non administrator LO tasks no icon is used The Active System Manager administrator can perform the following functions not available for standard users Manage resource types and instances including resource pools Define user groups and permissions Define an
102. lists the default environment variables 3 Build the default environment variable list for each context by clicking Variables to select from the default variables list or manually enter your environment name Each variable must be separated by a space 4 Click Apply or OK to save your preferences Browsing and Executing Session Scripts To browse and execute session scripts perform the following steps 1 Open the Sessions view on the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Show View gt Other gt Active System Manager gt Sessions gt OK 2 In the Sessions view open a running session right click and select Execute Session Scripts The Execute Scripts dialog box displays 3 Customize your script execution settings as needed for more information see the Customizing Script Execution section on page 14 8 Working with Test and Script Execution 14 7 Customizing Script Execution Customizing Script Execution 14 8 To customize script execution perform the following steps l Open the Execute Scripts dialog box by one of the following methods In the Sessions view select a running session right click and select Execute Session Scripts In the Resource Scripts view select one or more scripts right click and select Start Depending on how many scripts you select that number of scripts will appear in the Execute Scripts dialog box In the Resource Scripts view double click a script In th
103. may not be available during the time window you requested or the time window you entered may be too short for the time slot length that you requested One of the following possible responses are available at this time e Ifthe request can be satisfied you see a list of session time options e Ifanon preemptive request cannot be satisfied you will be prompted If other sessions conflict with a preemptive request a list of possible sessions display using resources already assigned to other sessions Session Management 12 23 Working with Running Sessions Figure 12 18 Rescheduling Session Solutions Rescheduling Session scheduling Session The following solutions satisfy your requirements Press Finish to confirm your session or press Next to see the resources selected Scheduler Information Your original request could be satisfied Automatic preemptive scheduling was turned off Automatic ASAP scheduling was turned off Solutions The following solution s were found Start Date Time End Date Time fm 02 26 2013 08 53 PM PST 02 28 2013 12 58 AM PST Setup and Teardown Durations Setup Time 0 mins Teardown Time 0 mins Session Properties Name Value Option Session Name AUTO1361940803601 Cancel blocking sessions to confirm these solutions 7 Click Next to display the next wizard page If no solutions are reported the wizard will display an error page with a high level error message and a complete set of logs
104. of LAN SAN iSCSI or SAN FCoE to display existing networks of that type Select the Native VLAN on which all untagged traffic will be placed This option is required for FCoE and boot to network configurations for example boot to SAN PXE or DHCP Enter the Maximum Bandwidth in GB maximum of 10 GB This is the maximum bandwidth the virtual NIC can consume at any time even if bandwidth oversubscription is enabled Enter the Minimum Bandwidth in GB maximum of 10 GB This is the minimum bandwidth the virtual NIC will be guaranteed If needed the virtual NIC will consume up to the maximum bandwidth but not over Optionally select Redundancy to configure a secondary virtual NIC on the server that provides a redundant network path through the fabric Optionally select a Virtual Identity Pool A virtual identity pool is a group of MAC iSCSI and FCoE identities that you can reserve to be used by one or more Server Templates By default all virtual identities belong to the Global pool Pools are created on the Networking Configuration pane from Setup gt Networking Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Select the network s to associate with this configuration You can select one or more networks for a LAN connection type but only one network for SAN iSCSI or SAN FCoE connection types Click on Add to add a network Click OK Adding or Editing Boot Settings on a Server Template The information
105. of Value Source and is supplied as a parameter value while execution if you further select Provisioning parameter as Sub Type in operation definition Note Inthe Active System Manager software the Value Source is referred to as the Primary Source and its Sub Type is referred to as the Secondary Source Table 9 10 displays the possible Value Sources and its Sub Types as defined in the Active System Manager Table 9 10 Value Source and its Sub Types Value Source Custom Repositories File Servers Operation Output Organization Resource Properties Session Objects Session Properties Software Configurations Value Source Description Manages Image files Configuration files and Elements for particular type of Custom Repositories in the Active System Manager Manages Image files Configuration files and Elements for particular type of File Servers in the Active System Manager Manages Output Parameters of existing custom operations that can be used as input parameters of some other custom operation These Output parameters are defined for custom operations in Resource Adapters Manages all Organizations in the Active System Manager Manages inventory parameters provisioning parameters and Interface elements of a specific resource on which the operations are executed Manages all resources and links of a Template with respect to the Orchestration being created or operation being executed Manages all
106. of hardware resource in your environment You open and modify resource types and resource instances in the Workspace area in the ASM editor For more information see the Using Resource Types section on page 5 8 Model resource instances for each piece of hardware in your environment For more information see the Using Resource Instances section on page 5 21 Model your network interface types For more information see the Using Resource Interface Types section on page 5 31 Create links for the actual network resources in your environment Such links enable resource instances to communicate with each other to describe the actual physical resource connectivity in the environment For more information see the Linking Resources section on page 5 36 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Configuring Discovery Setup Configuring Discovery Setup The Discovery Setup feature discovers the relevant information regarding your network equipment using domain based information g Note You can use Discovery Setup feature to discover either selective or all elements in your network To set up discovery domains and configure discovery parameters perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Tools gt Discovery gt Setup The Discovery Configuration Setup editor displays Figure 5 1 displays an example of a pre existing setup 2 Configure the discovery setup by selecting the c
107. of the mail For Example Active System Manager Feedback Notification 3 In Script Sever Settings section specify your script server settings that will be used by Active System Manager for remote scripts execution Table 16 2 lists and defines the fields to be set for script server settings Table 16 2 Script Server Settings Fields Fields Host Username Password Description Enter script server host to be used by Active System Manager for remote scripts execution Pre populated filed Enter script server username to edit username Pre populated field Enter password to edit password 16 3 Configuring Settings Database 16 4 Table 16 2 Script Server Settings Fields continued Fields Description Remote Script Location Enter servers remote script location Resource Script Location Enter servers resource script location Reservation Script Enter scripts reservation script parameters Parameters Device Script Parameters Enter scripts device script parameters Secure Communication Check for establishing and ensuring securing communication 4 In the General Settings section configure the settings described in Table 16 3 Table 16 3 General Settings Fields Fields Description Enable preference based graphical editor Check this option if the deployment involves huge templates If support in the Active System Manager RCP this flag is true RCP allows preference based graphical editor client support
108. on a Microsoft Windows OS perform the following steps 1 Insert the Active System Manager Client Installation CD into your CD drive 2 On your desktop click Start gt Run gt Browse and navigate to the setup exe file and click OK Or from your Windows Explorer window navigate to the setup exe file and double click it A Security Warning window prompts you to run the file 3 Click Run to enable the installation wizard to guide you through the installation process Note Ifan existing version of the Active System Manager client is on the client machine invoking the 4 installer will prompt you to select to uninstall the existing version already on the system Once selected the installer will uninstall the existing version and then exit You must perform the originally intended install after uninstalling the previous version as a single step Click Finish to complete the installation process Now you are ready to launch the Active System Manager client software see the Launching the Active System Manager Client Software on Windows section on page 2 3 Installing the Active System Manager Client Software on a Mac OS To install the Active System Manager client software on an Apple Mac OS perform the following steps l Download the Active System Manager macosx x86_64_7 1 0_xyzt zip file or copy the file from your CD using the Mac Finder Unzip the file into a specific folder destination on your hard drive Create t
109. on the Session and e Align your Template using a grid format or by clicking the Template perspectives when a Template or session editor is background of a Template editor right clicking and open selecting Layout Note You cannot customize a grid Allows you to perform the following functions ae Enlarge the focus of your view workspace by zooming in Snap your Template into place or by clicking the Zoom icon e Decrease the focus of your view workspace by zooming out Allows you to navigate through all types of editors and resource types by going back forward next or previous Allows you to access the following features Domains displays the domain details configured with the e Links gt Edit or Show system Authentication Repositories lists the LDAP or NIS repository associated with the system e Interface Types e Login Profile gt Delete gt Save As e Purge Sessions e Archive Bin Rules gt Run or Edit e Discovery gt Setup or Start or Stop Resource Pool Management Users and Groups Maintenance Window e Repositories Active System Manager Overview 1 5 Active System Manager User Interface Elements Table 1 3 Menu Reports Window Help Active System Manager Menu Options continued Description Allows you to perform all of the functions to create and print reports for your inventory in alphabetical order not functional order e Control Equipment Summary Report e Managed Equipment Summ
110. option will generate more log content Scheduler will reshuffle the final set of equipment for each individual findings Selecting this option may impact Power Management on Virtualization solution Scheduler will prioritize the uniqueness of returned resources as opposed to same resources with different portal allocation Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 admin admin Ak Purge Audit Data Download Logs Top of Page t Configuring Settings Settings Settings pe Configuring Settings The administrator can configure the following settings from the Settings sub menu Settings Database License Script Servers Properties Note The Settings sub menu page displays by default when you click the Settings sub menu The Settings sub menu allows the administrator to set E mail notification settings script server settings general settings For system settings perform the following steps l Click Settings gt Settings to display the Setting page see Figure 16 1 2 In Email Notification Settings section specify your Email settings for outbound notifications Table 16 1 lists and defines the fields to be set for sending email notifications Table 16 1 E mail Notification Settings Fields Fields SMTP Server Host From Field To Field Email Subject Description Enter SMTP server host Enter Active System Manager s support email id Enter recipients email id Enter subject
111. profile 3 In the prompt dialog box click Yes to overwrite or No to create a new profile name A prompt displays that the profile name is successfully added to the server and have been automatically published to end users Note You can also set a preferred default login profile using the Preferences dialog box On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Preferences gt General gt Login Profile and click the Always log in using this profile check box Associating Login Profiles with Users and Groups Note You are unable to add and remove perspectives and views to an administrator defined login profile To associate login profiles with users and groups perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Tools gt Users and Groups to display the Security Management Users and Groups dialog box displays see Figure 4 6 User Profile Management 4 13 Managing Security Functions Figure 4 6 Security Management Users and Groups Security Management Users and Groups Add edit and delete users and groups with associated permissions Users Search First Name Last Mame Role Authentic Email Time Zone A admin admin admin Administr AL mbansal AmericafL techpubs Mike Bentley User AL jdoe ac America L Delete Profiles Copy Reset Password Activate Deactivate Switch To 2 On the Users tab select one or more Ctrl click users t
112. provisioning properties related to a Template Manages all software configurations Sub Types Defined for Value Source Lists all Custom Repositories existing in the Active System Manager and displays Image files Configuration files and Elements contained in the each repository Lists all File Servers in the Active System Manager and displays Image files Configuration files and Elements contained in each File Server Lists all output parameters of custom operations that are defined in Resource Adapter of the selected resource Sub Type not applicable Lists Resource Properties namely inventory parameters provisioning parameters and interface of a specific resource on which the operations are executed Lists four types of session objects namely resources links resource properties and link properties for Orchestration being created or operation being executed Lists provisioning parameters related to a Template Lists all software configurations e Custom Operations A set of RA operations that are associated with the resources in a template e Virtual Operations A set of RA operations that are associated with the resources in Operation Center view Repository Management 9 21 Working with Resource Adapters Table 9 11 displays the possible Value Sources applicable to custom and virtual operations Table 9 11 Applicable Value Sources for Custom and Virtual Operations Software Custom File Operati
113. remove the custom session level properties The Open function is intended to use for opening URLs or links It launches a new browser window To add a custom session property that must be overwritten with a editable value click Add To remove a custom session property select a row and click Remove Notes 1 All of the Add and Remove functions must be saved to save those property changes click File gt Save 2 These custom properties can now be used in the Sessions view for grouping filtering and searching 3 If any properties are marked as Required by the administrator the property value must be entered before saving the session End date and time of when the environment session ended failed cancelled or completed Start date and time of when the environment session started Duration of your session in day hours and minutes End date and time of when the environment session is scheduled Can be updated based on resource availability that is not booked by someone else Internal number assigned for the session Name assigned to the session Name of individual who created the session List of session participants Start date and time of when the environment session is scheduled The start time cannot be edited if the session is already in progress Value Read write Read write Read only Read only Read only Read only Can be changed see the Editing Default Ses
114. repository Updating Dell Chassis Firmware from the Operations Center Complete the following steps to update Dell chassis firmware Chassis firmware update can be done as a virtual operation provided by the Dell Chassis RA Only one active firmware update using the virtual operation can be done at a time this is to prevent multiple updates from causing the resource instance to enter an unconditional bad state Note The chassis can only be updated with the firmware Dell Update Packages contained in the repository Prerequisites e Chassis Firmware Repository must be set up e Chassis should be successfully inventoried Firmware Management 6 3 Updating Dell Server Firmware e CMC should be ready and in healthy state Steps to Update Dell Chassis Firmware from the Operations Center 1 Click Operations in the left hand tool bar 2 Inthe Operation Center view select the chassis for firmware update and select Update firmware on chassis from the list of Supported Operations In the Update firmware on chassis window enter the firmware DUP to be updated Select the Primary Source and Secondary Source where the firmware Dell Update Packages reside In the Elements folder select the firmware to be applied Ne A E The selected firmware version has to be greater or equal to the minimum firmware version specified in Table 6 1 If firmware version selected is less than the minimum firmware version then firmware update will fai
115. resources and your database configuration Mark as Marks the selected records for deletion When changes are saved the records are deleted from the database assuming Deleted there are no dependencies If the record has not been previously saved to the database it is deleted without prompts Clear Clears the selected field or if you have selected a row it clears all of the fields except for Manufacturer Model and Role Drop Removes the selected row from the multi editor without saving any changes Revert Reverts the selected resources to their last saved configuration Selected Resources Save Saves the changes for the selected resources to the database Selected Resources Revert Reverts all of the content in the multi editor to their last saved configuration Save Saves all changes in the multi editor to the database Preferences In addition to configuring settings for your workspace environment and all the elements that comprise that environment you can set user preferences by clicking Window gt Preferences The Preferences dialog box displays with a list of elements with which you can configure user preferences see Figure 1 15 Note All user preferences are saved on a local machine and the server which allows users to keep their preferences on different computers or installations when using multiple clients The only preference not stored on the server is the Account Name setting Note The Active System Manager software aut
116. select compatible configuration files or operating system OS image files with your resource under test Association can be done under the following circumstances e Defining a new repository during discovery elements wizard based e Updating a repository during discovery and status updates wizard based e Navigating a repository element view based To associate elements perform the following steps 1 On the Discovery results dialog box perform one of the following tasks e Select one or more file elements and click Associate to associate the selected file elements with the resource types e Select two or more elements and click Bulk Associate to associate the selected file elements with the resource types The Associate Inventory dialog box displays where you can select resource types or resource assets to associate with the selected file elements A dialog box displays the complete list of resource types and resource instances supported similar to the Resource Types or Resource Instances view in the Active System Manager inventory You can associate your elements with more than one resource type or resource instance browse the tree and select You have also filters and Select and Deselect options to select the elements 2 Click OK when you have completed your selections Once you click OK the association displays in the Association column In the Name column verify the selected element 3 Click Finish Active S
117. selected device see Figure 5 39 for an example Inventory Management 5 65 Managing Virtual Resources Figure 5 39 Operation Center No Filtering El Resources Templates And Profiles Name a 7 System Domain a Ex AS800_1 AS800 ES 8YJDG2S Chassis P EQL_tag DellEqualLogic a HyperV Cloud hypertest SCVMM 4 D ManagedEquipment B cluster3NS scrumville lab Audit Panel 1 Resource Information Resource Details E Properties ED Sessions E Templates E Monitoring Audit Name 5 Result Session te Acquire Failure amp Clear Config Success amp Power Off Success amp PowerOn Success Status Message Missing configuration file Integrations not Operation clearconfig not supported by pro Operation poweronoff not supported by pro Operation poweronoff not supported by pro Completion Time 05 09 2013 09 35 AM IST 05 09 2013 09 45 AM IST 05 09 2013 09 45 AM IST 05 09 2013 09 35 AM IST Category Session Session Session Session SessionId Session Name 123 AUTO1368072411953 123 AUTO1368072411953 123 AUTO1368072411953 123 AUTO1368072411953 gt p SPE HE Session State Setting up Cleaning up Cleaning up Setting up 3 dummyl g QA 01 B QA 02 g QA 03 B winGYPBQV1 scrumville lab 33 MatrixSwitch 7 4 eo vCenter_1 vCenter a 5 172 16 100 51 vCenter F NewDatacenter DataCenter Supported Operations Note In the Audit feature there ex
118. step also displays the Success or Failure of the step The steps unchecked in Execute check box while creating or updating Orchestration appear with Skipped status in the hierarchial representation of Orchestration Note While creating or updating Orchestration if you choose to Abort on Error on a particular step then rts ji oars e that particular step aborts 1f any error occurs while executing The Failure status is displayed in such a case on that particular step All steps thereafter are aborted and do not execute Note While creating or updating Orchestration if the Execute check box is disabled then the status of that step is displayed as Skipped during Orchestration execution in a running session Figure 13 18 Orchestration Execution with Default Operation Properties View Operation Status Apple Image on L2 LAN and SAN switches Success ef LANSwitch 1_1 ApplyImageSnsSuitch Passed ef LANSwitch 2_ 1 ApplyImageSnsuitch Passed ef SANSuitch 1_ 1 A4pplyImageOnSwitch Passed wf SaNSuitch 2_ 1 ApplyImageOnSwitch Passed E w Apply Configuration on L2 LAN and SAN switches SUCCESS ef LANSwitch 1_ 1 ApplyConfiguration nswitch Passed ef LANSwitch 2_ 1 4pplyConfiguration nswitch Passed w SaNswitch 1 1 ApplyConfigurationGnswitch Passed af SahSuwitch 2 1 ApplyConfigurationGnSswitch Passed E Configure YLAN on L2 LAN and SAN switches SUCCESS db LANSwitch 1_ 1 Configureswitch Passed
119. tab gt Attachments to verify that the Template jpeg attachment has been added The attachments are used for reporting purposes Attaching a Custom Rendering Template from a File To attach a custom rendering perform the following steps 1 Open a Template see the Opening Templates section on page 11 11 2 Inthe Template editor click the background right click and select Attach Default Rendering gt File The Select image for Template rendering dialog box displays 3 Navigate to the file location where your image resides and click Open Scheduling Templates You can reserve equipment from a predefined Template and schedule it Scheduling a Template allows you to invoke the session scheduler To schedule a Template perform the following steps 1 Select a method to schedule a Template e Inthe Templates view right click a Template and select Schedule e On the Active System Manager menu bar click File gt New gt Session e On the Active System Manager menu bar click File gt New gt Other gt expand the Active System Manager folder and click Session e On the Active System Manager toolbar click the New icon gt click Other gt expand the Active System Manager folder and click Session e From a Template editor right click the Template editor background and select Schedule The Scheduling Template dialog box displays as a tree view representation of the Templates which allows for sorting filtering and facil
120. tab to display the Groups information see Figure 4 7 Figure 4 7 Security Management Window Users and Groups Groups Tab Security Managemen Users and Groups Add edit and delete users and groups with associated permissions 0 engineering By default the information provided on the Groups tab is sorted by name and member affiliations 3 Click Close User Profile Management 4 15 Managing Groups Adding Groups 4 16 Groups are made up of users and groups A group has its own set of permissions that are applied to its members To add or create a new group you add the users and administrators to who they belong You can also add other existing groups as members of your group and then set the permissions for that group Groups are managed similarly to users for example e A group list displays all existing groups e A group s name members and permissions comprise its profile e Permissions are created or modified by clicking Edit for a group selecting the Permissions tab and configuring the settings as appropriate To add a group perform the following steps Note You can add a user or group to your group even if it is already a member of another group Thus a user can belong to a number of groups 1 Open the Security Management window see the Accessing a Group List section on page 4 15 2 Click Add The New Group dialog box displays with the Group tab open by default see Figure 4 8
121. the Elements description to the bundle Resource Association Sets the element association with resource types or resource instances Use the Add or Remove buttons to customize your resource association Elements Required when the Bundle check box is enabled Displays the bundle content with a set of elements Use the Add or Remove buttons to customize your bundled content Use the Up and Down buttons to order the bundled content Use the Versions button to select a specific version Note Enabled only for the Source Control CVS repository Additional Properties Elements can carry customized property definitions for example name value mandatory Use the Add or Remove buttons to customize your list 3 Click Finish New elements should display in the associated repository navigator views Deleting Elements from the Repository To delete elements from a repository perform one the following options e Inthe Setup perspective from any navigator view select one or more elements right click and select Delete e In the Setup perspective from any navigator view select one or more elements and on the Active System Manager menu bar click Edit gt Delete The Delete menu displays see Figure 9 3 Figure 9 3 Deleting File Elements from the Repository amp Source Co 5 Resource Adapters No Filtering Name Repository Mame El gt QuestDemo tRepository configur CiwestDemo tRepository configur CiwestDemo tReposito
122. the Firmware Settings screen select Firmware Dell Update Packages from a single repository only Steps to Update Dell Blade Rack Servers Firmware Using the Attach Server Profile Virtual Operation 1 Click Operations in the left hand tool bar to open the Operation Center View 2 In the Operation Center view select the discovered Blade Server 3 In Supported Operations list select Update firmware on server 4 Select the firmware that is to be applied from the Elements list a Note The selected firmware version must be more than or equal to the minimum firmware version specified in the Appendix A However if the selected firmware version 1s less than the minimum firmware version then the firmware update fails 5 Click OK to start the firmware update aa Note When triggering virtual operations for the blade rack servers validations are performed to check if the server instance 1s a part of any session However 1f the server instance happens to be a part of any session a message 1s sent to the admin to notify this and the firmware update 1s not performed Auto inventory 1s performed after the successful completion of firmware update for the resource instance in case of virtual operations only After the auto inventory is successful the new updated firmware versions are visible to the admin in Operation Center view Updating Dell Blade Rack Servers Firmware through an Orchestration Complete the following steps to upd
123. the VLANCount then the specified number of VLAN IDs will be associated with VLAN component If the VLANCount is not specified then a VLAN ID is selected randomly from the specified group and is associated to the VLAN component To create a VLAN ID group the group name is to be defined in curly brackets and its corresponding VLAN IDs or Ranges must be in parenthesis For example Group1 1 10 where Groupl is the VLAN group name and 1 10 range are VLAN IDs added to Group Assettag The VLAN ID is associated with a matrix switch through an assettag The value of assettag Inventory parameter can be any existing matrix switch For more information on setting VLAN ID values see the Setting Up Layer 2 Switching section on page 11 43 Using Annotations 11 46 The Annotations feature allows you to create the following graphical functions to add to your existing or new Templates Note Allows you to create a note and drag it to the Template within the Template editor The properties for that note display in the Properties tab The Note also has a Content tab that allows you to assign a name or content specific to the Note assign the indentation how far the text is from the border of the note assign the font and apply a URL to the note where you can access the URL directly by pressing Ctrl and clicking the note The Content tab is specific only to the Note annotation Oval Allows you to draw around a Template environment as a gr
124. the inventory This view Instances can be filtered grouped and sorted to increase data accessibility and includes the resource availability calendar Outline View Lists the selected inventory resources in an outline format It represents a high level summary of an open editor and allows you to navigate or find information Properties View Displays the properties for the selected session Template or configuration file It is a set of property values that are reflected in what you see in the editors Templates View Lists the available templates previously created Supports built in filters From this view you can customize filters or group the Template organization by tree For more information see Chapter 1 Active System Manager Overview Links View Lists the links between control equipment and managed equipment or between two pieces of managed equipment 8 1 Introducing the Inventory Perspective Table 8 1 Inventory Perspective Elements continued View View or or Editor Name Editor Description Import View Displays the plug in data of used by IIT during the inventory import The following Explorer resource data is displayed e Attributes e Component Location Generator e Resource Location Generator e Icon Path e Slot Information e Hypervisor e Simple Resource Location Generator Import CSV Editor The Active System Manager administrator uses to validate the input field definitions Editor specified within the C
125. the name according to the File Format and its path is determined according to the Folder Format Each repository requires a specific set of property values to access the repository Optional The repository can carry a set of property values that can be retrieved by the Resource Adapters This is extensible using the Active System Manager repository adapter framework Association with one Active System Manager domain is optional Select at least one domain to make the repository available for the resources Each resource instance has a unique domain it can be part of A repository can span across multiple domains This section describes how to manage repositories using the following procedures Creating a New Repository Adding Elements into a Repository Deleting Elements from the Repository Updating Repository Content Deleting Repository Definitions Associating Elements with Resource Types or Resource Instances Repository Management 9 5 Managing Repositories Creating a New Repository To create a new repository or multiple file repositories perform the following steps l SS m A N In the Setup perspective perform one of the following options to display the New Repository dialog box e On the File Servers view right click an element and select Repositories e On the Active System Manager menu bar click File gt New gt Other gt Active System Manager gt Repositories e On the Active System Manage
126. the time frame you are attempting to schedule the session Using the information available within the calendar determine when the resources are scheduled and who owns them Contact the owner and the administrator to see if those sessions can be cancelled or changed View the availability of different resources and then author or schedule a different Template using resources that are available Edit the associated Template to reflect the new resources and then schedule the Template 8 13 Understanding Resource Allocation Understanding Resource Allocation 8 14 Jr The Active System Manager software provides two views that are introduced in the Inventory perspective Resource Allocation view and Resource Port Allocation view The purpose of the Resource Allocation view is to understand the current resource allocation at the resource and port level This view displays all allocations associated to a particular resource To access the Resource Allocation view select one of the following methods e On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Show View gt Other gt Active System Manager gt Resource Allocation gt OK e In the Resource Instances view right click a resource instance and select Show Resource Allocation Features of the Resource Allocation view include e You can keep the content view synchronized with your resource selection in the Resource Instances view click the Link with a Resource Instanc
127. type to use Table 5 1 lists and describes the characteristics for the basic modeling type With basic inventory modeling you essentially define resources with interfaces sometimes referred to as flat or resources Note Each modeling type comes with its own set of tools to help build your inventory however you must stay within the context of the modeling characteristics Table 5 1 Basic Modeling Type Characteristics for Building Inventory Operations Basic Modeling Manual 1 Interface types 2 Resource type 3 Resource instance 4 Link Automated via Tools and Processes 1 Discovery 2 CSV link import 3 CSV resource import Table 5 2 outlines the topics in this chapter to use for building the inventory Some topics are common between the two modeling types Inventory Management 5 1 Building a Standard Active System Manager Inventory Table 5 2 Reference Topics to Use for Building Inventory Basic Modeling Advanced Modeling See the Building a Standard Active System Manager See the Using Resource Instances section on Inventory section on page 5 2 page 5 21 See the Using Resource Instances section on See the Using Resource Interface Types section on page 5 21 page 5 31 See the Using Resource Interface Types section on See the Linking Resources section on page 5 36 page 5 31 See the Configuring Discovery Setup section on page 5 3 See the Linking Resources section on page
128. values highest priority is 5 lowest priority is 1 default priority is 1 You can change these values on the server in the config properties file Note From the Sessions perspective you can specify the link priority only if the value of y lmc linkpriorityenabled is set to true in config properties while deploying the Active System Manager application Common Features of the Session Link Editor Below are some of the common features of the session link editor e The link editor comprises three parts a left pane with the selected element the middle pane that displays any links and the right pane that displays the other elements in a tree view e The top action bar see Figure 12 21 that allows you to define link types as well as building better connectivity Figure 12 21 Top Action Bar Link Editor Filter wars BE E e When you create a link in the link editor the links also display in the session editor To avoid confusion the link editor displays links from left to right The right pane displays the connectivity from one resource to another but the source is unknown To find the source in the right pane select the resource right click and select Move to Left The resource moves to the left pane e You can share the resource for example you can request the scheduler to allow for a subset of the interfaces Quick Filtering In the Filter text box see Figure 12 21 enter a string to search and filter out el
129. with templates The custom operations from Resource Adapters are used in templates to build Orchestrations These custom operations can be run independently or can be organized into steps to construct a step wise group of operations termed as Orchestrations Apart from custom operations scripts can also be used to construct Orchestrations For more information on adding scripts see the Creating Orchestrations section on page 13 6 In the Active System Manager software all Orchestrations related to all existing templates are visible in the Orchestrations view To view steps comprising of custom operations for the selected Orchestration select and double click an orchestration in the Orchestrations view Orchestrations created for all existing templates are visible under Orchestrations Orchestration Management 13 1 Understanding Orchestration Figure 13 1 displays the organization of steps in Orchestration Figure 13 1 Templates No Filtering D kw x admin 4 abhi_topol topo_exc topology_creation vlan_topo gt approvaltestuser1 1 H E userx2 1 Resource Center Orchestrations topology creation S Ew x 25 ftopology adminftopology_creation 1 B Ondemand 1 B New Orchestration_Test 1 2 topology_creation Mew Orchestration_Test 1 3 Organization of Steps in Orchestration Orchestration New Orchestration_Test 1 Steps can be renamed by clicking on step label A
130. 00 ccc eee nett eens 2 3 Launching the Active System Manager Client Software on Windows 0 0 c ccc ccc ccs 2 3 Connecting to the Active System Manager SEVERA is ORR ERAS 2 6 Connecting to the Active System Manager Server for the First Time 0 0 00 cece cece eens 2 6 Connecting to the Active System Manager Server After Account Setup 0 0 0 00 eee ee eens 2 6 Venivito the C OnmeC HOR AUS LA Sa wk ace oe A AAA AAA TA RS 2 7 Uninstalling the Active System Manager Client Software 2 8 Chapter 3 Account Management 0 0 0 eee een ee eee ne ees 3 1 Creating Now Server ACCOUIUS is tia Gt Leen tee Sees 3 1 CONE CIO to Ser Ch ACCOUN 24 5 El ES Vr E PS AAA 3 5 Editine server ACCOUN ara ao eee seus aie Bae Se ae ee ee ee are te ee 3 6 Deletine Server ACCOUNTS 1 4 224 024 20 00 enhi S ehh eases wees nse teed ages 3 7 Chapter 4 User Profile Management ence e eee eens 4 Mana SING Securty FUNCHODS 4 4 4 0 10 s ance Oat Odie ade ee oe dr dr ORS 4 1 Manasino Users or Administr tor ds A AA AAA A is 4 1 cres mo Irse asar Sane oe led 6 ae na en cs A ae ee Soe 4 2 Addie NEW USGS ES EA acl RRA eee a Ae AD A eS 4 3 Adding an LDAP AD Repository a ged da kn Oe SORRELL RAE ORR ROR ios 4 7 AGI NIS USCIS vada odo AA A os 4 8 o is A ee ee ae OR Alek tae E RO E 4 9 Copy a SS ii Ue IE 4 10 Derino Use A EU Tu ata tesa Iara we no ee See ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 4 10 Switching User Repostotes sa sad
131. 10 gt System Dell Chassis Dell Chassis 8089 Dell Compellent Dell Compellent 8013 Dell Dummy Dell Dummy 8105 c Dell EqualLogic PS6110 Dell EqualLogic P56110 8131 c Dell EqualLogic5toragePool Dell EqualLogicStorageP ool 8128 c Dell Forcel0 S4810 Dell Forcel0 54810 8020 cos Dell IOA Dell IOA 8090 ca Dell Servers Dell Servers 8105 cs Template VMwareLib Template VMwareLib 8039 c VMware Host VMware Host 8038 VMware VirtualMachine VMware VirtualMachine 8038 4 mr t Table 9 8 lists and describes the Resource Adapters property values Table 9 8 Resource Adapters Values Property Description Name Resource Adapter name Manufacturer Resource Adapter manufacturer name Model Resource Adapter model name Version Release Number Resource Adapter version Defined by the Resource Adapter integrator Repository Management 9 17 Working with Resource Adapters Opening the Resource Adapter Editor To open the Resource Adapter editor in the Resource Adapters view select a Resource Adapter right click and select Open The following tabs are available on the Resource Adapter editor e Overview Defines all core properties of the Resource Adapter e Operations Defines all custom and system operations for the Resource Adapter e Applications Defines all applications that can be launched using the Resource Adapter e Files Provides access and management to Resource Adapter property files e About Provides free form copyright
132. 100 1000 Ethernet 10 100 1000 JE ied Ss Fibre Channel LW Ss Fibre Channel LW i AD ey Al ai AZ i A3 Topology Links The following list outlines the reasons why a Template 1s invalid e Missing resource types e Missing resource instances e Missing interfaces e Links with incompatible interface types e One or both of the link endpoints are missing E Note After performing the previously indicated Template checks the Active System Manager application verifies that the Template can be scheduled Ifa Template cannot be scheduled an error message displays You can validate Templates on demand and automatically as described in the following subsections e Validating Templates Automatically e Validating Templates On Demand E Note The Active System Manager server validates the Template content during Template save and import operations Validating Templates Automatically The Active System Manager client validates the Template when you open a Template and indicate the invalid resources with red icons To automatically validate a Template open the Template you want to validate To validate more than one Template right click and select the Templates 11 14 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Templates Validating Templates On Demand E Note You can only perform this process on one Template editor at a time To validate a Template on demand perform the following steps 1 Open a Template s
133. 15 Preferences Inventory Preferences us type filter text Inventory Drew Archive Bin General Custom Icon Library Folder Help Use this field to point Active System Manager to the folder storing your custom icons for Standard Resource Types Inventory l Browse Scheduler Browse Search Resource Type Multi Editor Security 4 Show warni ng for incompatible and thus hidden inventory configuration parameters on editor open Template Test and Script Execution Resource Instance Multi Editor XML 4 Show warning for incompatible and thus hidden inventory parameters on editor open Domain Information Default Domain Name Note This Domain Name will be used as default in resource instance Add and Import operations Virtualization Settings 7 Enable resource virtualization by default for newly created inventory Restore Defaults Apply 9 aD a 3 In the Custom Icon Library Folder section enter the folder path for the library folder or click Browse and navigate to the path and click OK 4 When the folder is selected click OK The custom icons are now available when creating or modifying a resource type Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Using Resource Instances Deleting Resource Types When you delete a resource type the Active System Manager software removes it from your workspace and permanently deletes it from the Active System Manager server If the resource type has any dependenci
134. 27 Common Features of the Session Link Editor Gaia A A AA AE A 12 27 Creatina SESSION LINKS Sosa se oe ster td EOS aE RAR ERE oe ea ee 12 31 Disabling and Enabling Session Links o o o oomoooooo rociar 12 32 Handling Link Preemption ii E IAS A i AE 12 33 MANAGING SESSION RESOUrCES a E A A A ee ees 12 33 Understanding Resource Representation n n nnana naene cabra Rees ORS 12 33 Displaying Resource and Link Status i 6 440e A A A he er ee ee A 12 34 Displaying Resource Instance Properties lt i66 65 ss 50s bce A OL ew RGAE ERROR A 12 37 Displaying Link Session Propemies as sack Gade A E we Soe AAA AA 12 38 Adding Resources Dy LIDO sia ov oes AG dk MAE Oe wee ewes be Oe eee 12 38 Adding Resource Instante di a io 12 39 substituto Resource Instances e id A AAA oa 12 39 Deactivatinesand Activating RESQUECES A AR A AA AAA See eS 12 40 DeletmoRESQUICES duna es Ptas rasante RR a ase eee ee Es 12 41 Usmo A NOTALIONS ts E ii At 12 41 Associating Scripts to Sessions ia EA AAA RAR OR 12 41 Setting Script Association Preferences Pai a A o A Aa 12 43 VIS WINS SESSION Script Properties sesionar ano a 12 43 AT CIIVANG SESSIONS ds o da is 12 43 Archiving Sessions Using the Sessions View o 12 43 Archiving Sessions Using the Session Archive Bin View 0 cece eee nee e eens 12 44 Restoring Archived SESSIONS editadas rd da 12 44 Working with Archive Bin Rules sti il id it 12 45 Supporine Layer 2 SIENA nr A AA A 12 48 Updating VLAN
135. 29128424 Running session demo02 pdeloulay 4UTO1217529128424 AUTO1217522811977 Opening the Session Calendar Session Management To open the Session calendar perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Show View gt Other gt Active System Manager gt Sessions gt OK The Sessions tab displays with the Sessions view see Figure 12 12 Figure 12 12 Sessions View CO Sessions S t E gp aut Op Present Future Mame Status Template Name Owner Start Date Time End Date Time ID 2 admin 60 Pawan Cluster Running Cluster VMware ESX1 5 admin 02 21 2013 03 00 AMPST 12 31 2021 11 59 PM PST 50 a TestVM_Sumitl Running VMwareTesting admin 02 26 2013 02 44 AM PST 02 27 2013 06 37 AMPST 90 TestVM_ Sumit Confirmed VMwareTesting admin 02 27 2013 06 37 AM PST 02 27 2013 10 37 AM PST 92 Pawan Cluster 192 168 120 171 40500 admi rica Los_Angeles 7 0 0 21236 EY 2 Click the Show Calendar icon if the calendar is not already displayed 3 Open at least one folder to display the sessions see Figure 12 13 Figure 12 13 Session Calendar View C Sessions 3 t 55 aut Op Present Future a i E o E o o E po d Name Status Template Name Mon 25 Feb 2013
136. 5 36 See the Linking Resources section on page 5 36 Building a Standard Active System Manager Inventory The Inventory perspective provides a simple user interface for you to model and populate your inventory of equipment You model your environment by creating and populating an inventory of all ofthe resources This inventory includes the various general resource types within your environment the resource types as well as the specific resource instances that see a particular configuration for a particular piece of network equipment The Active System Manager software uses resource types as templates for resource instances Table 5 3 outlines the typical workflow for building an inventory with the Inventory perspective Table 5 3 Building a Standard Active System Manager Inventory Workflow Checklist Task v 1 Evaluate your set of managed physical and virtual and control equipment in your environment You should consider all of your network servers storage and resource types virtualized or not the resource characteristics you want to expose and the resource and interface metadata information To jump start your inventory building process click Setup gt Discovery Setup Enter the required details and click Discover to retrieve information about your network equipment For more information about the Discovery Explorer see the Configuring Discovery Setup section on page 5 3 Model the resource types for each type
137. 7 1 6 Working with Resource Adapters Click Browse to select a directory location to import one or more RAP files Click the Select resource adapter package file option and click Browse to select a directory location for your imported RAP file Click the Domain pull down menu and select the domain for this RAP file Review the Resource Adapter values see Table 9 8 on page 9 17 and perform one of the following options e Click Select All to select all of the Resource Adapters to import e Click Deselect All to deselect the selected Resource Adapters e Click Refresh to reset the Resource Adapter list Click Finish to update the view Ed Note The Resource Adapters will take effect immediately New operations will be available to be executed in any running sessions Exporting Resource Adapters To export Resource Adapter Package RAP files rap files from your file system perform the following steps l In the Resource Adapters view select a Resource Adapter right click and select Export The core properties for that selection display by default see Figure 9 14 Repository Management 9 25 Working with Resource Adapters Figure 9 14 Resource Adapter Properties Export Resource Adapters Export Resource Adapters for storage in archive files wf Model Domain E Dell Servers System E Dell IOA System Dell Chassis System E Dell Compellent System E Dell Dummy System E Dell EqualLogicSt
138. 86 150 Level Size Bundle Resource Association Bundle Elements Additional Properties Down Versions Table 9 7 lists and describes the field properties in Figure 9 8 Table 9 7 Field Name Description Type Repository Path Level Size Properties for Repository Elements Discovery and Association Description Read only Current element filename of repository Optional Description associated with new elements Read only Existing element file type e Element e Image File e Configuration File Read only Existing repository name associated with the element Read only Relative path to the file in the repository Optional The options are e Base e Patch Read only Required for repository type storage arrays Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Managing Repositories Table 9 7 Properties for Repository Elements Discovery and Association continued Field Bundle Resource Association Bundle Elements Additional Properties Description Read only if enabled checked Only enabled if you are editing a bundle Element definition is a bundle of elements i e a container You must move at least one element see the Elements description to the bundle Sets the element association with resource types or resource instances Use the Add or Remove buttons to customize your resource association Required when the Bundle check box is enabled Displays the bundle content with
139. Active System Manager client software It also describes how to connect to the Active System Manager server and verify the connection status Chapter 3 Account Management Defines how to set up one or more server Active System Manager server accounts and to switch between a number of Active System Manager servers It also describes how to edit and delete previously created server accounts Chapter 4 User Profile Management Describes the security features available in the Active System Manager software including how to manage users or administrators groups and permissions for users administrators and groups Chapter 5 Inventory Management Describes the Inventory perspective and associated tools that you use to catalog and define the equipment in your network environment Chapter 6 Firmware Management Describes how to update Firmware on the hardware devices discovered in ASM Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 About This Guide Organization Chapter 7 Server Template and Profiles Describes Active System Manager Server Templates Server Templates allow you to configure a server s BIOS RAID firmware networking virtual NIC and boot mode Chapter 8 Using Inventory Describes the Active System Manager Inventory perspective and all of the functions available for using your inventory Chapter 9 Repository Management Describes the Active System Manager Inve
140. Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 July 2013 Copyright Notice 2013 Dell Inc Trademarks used in this text Dell the Dell logo Dell Boomi Dell Precision OptiPlex Latitude PowerEdge PowerVault PowerConnect OpenManage EqualLogic Compellent KACE FlexAddress Force10 and Vostro are trademarks of Dell Inc Intel Pentium Xeon Core and Celeron are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U S and other countries AMD is a registered trademark and AMD Opteron AMD Phenom and AMD Sempron are trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices Inc Microsoft Windows Windows Server Internet Explorer MS DOS Windows Vista and Active Directory are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Red Hat and Red Hat Enterprise Linux are registered trademarks of Red Hat Inc in the United States and or other countries Novell and SUSE are registered trademarks of Novell Inc in the United States and other countries Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and or its affiliates Citrix Xen XenServer and XenMotion are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Citrix Systems Inc in the United States and or other countries VMware Virtual SMP vMotion vCenter and vSphere are registered trademarks or trademarks of VMware Inc in the United States or
141. Adding Resource Types Based on Manufacturer Only 0 cee en ees 11 37 Adding ReSourCe IMStanCeS en sdec era ges Sats a id dE Bie AOS aE 11 38 Modifying Resource Properties ER CASES 6 dG RO EGOS Rae OE OE Ted Meee Ree RA 11 40 Deleting Resource Instances 2 op eade cated bad Oe he MERA E EROS SRN Sd Sen A RE 11 40 Defining Provisioning Policies ia ei de ote wea eee A oe aA wa eu arate eon 11 41 Supports Layer 2 Switching at sane A AA A AA eRe AAA RARA a de 11 43 Using Annotations pr A IR AAA A ea 11 46 Updating Templates using the Link Editor cee nent teen eens 11 47 Common Features of the Link Editor saie is AA dae EA eek bin 11 47 Switching to the ink Editors las an ia dong nye Pew ete bia ide ek EG A ee es 11 50 Authornne AMCLIACES ST ae te eae OU oad Ge Reh beta pane eae tae meek wen ees 11 50 Modifying Interface Properties ce 22204 ca br A SOS SRe Bd Sen REAR di eee 11 53 Man asine Template Links bro A when eee we oe te Sos oe Gd wa eeu eto es 11 53 Associating an Orchestration Workflow with Templates 0 0 0 0 e ene 11 56 Editing Orchestration Workflows iia AA LEER EAS AAA AREL SES it 11 56 Deleting Orchestration Workflows o o o o ooo ee eee eee e eens 11 58 Chapter 12 Session Management 0 0 0 eee nee een eee e eens 12 1 Introducine the Sessions Perspective ni IA hae STE ee ee A AAA 12 1 Working with Running Sessions 0 ee ne eee eee ene eee e teens 12 3 Scheduling q Session Using Te
142. Both the property value and the string you enter is translated to lower case before the comparison is performed More than one property can be specified for a resource or interface The conditional expressions for the properties are logically AND ed That is all specified properties must match the values that you entered for that resource or interface This applies to all elements of a resource being considered by the scheduler That is all conditions specified for the resource must match and all conditions specified for each interface required by the Template must match Any property name can only be used once for a particular resource or interface For example you cannot enter both Author Name John Doe and Author Name John Smith for a resource This is the equivalent of a logical OR operation on the conditional expressions and is not permitted Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Templates Table 11 5 Default Properties for the Resource Types View continued Property Tab Name Name Description Configuration Used if you want to provision the resource Each tab allows you to select files from the newly created Files repositories for more information about repositories see Chapter 9 Repository Management Image Files The following menu options are available on each tab e Add Before you type the filename you can add an image file or configuration by clicking Add in the Properties vi
143. By function allows you to modify the way entries such as resource types or resource instances are presented in the navigator pane or to group entries based on various properties Without any grouping options selected the entries are group based on their basic elements In the case of resource instances they are listed by their name The Active System Manager software screens the items you want to display by grouping and the order that E they are presented by sorting alphabetically Clicking the Group By icon reverses the current alphabetical sort order To use the Group By function perform the following steps 1 Select one of the following methods to open the Group By dialog box see Figure 1 3 for an example e Click the navigator view action bar and click the Group By icon e Click the Menu icon and select Group By Figure 1 3 Group By Dialog Box Group By Available properties Selected properties Classification E Manufacturer Model Role DHCPServerlP DHCPServerPassword DHCP ServerUsername DizkFormat GuestCustomizationRequired GuestDNSDomain GuestHostWName GuestType Guest WindowsDomain Guest WindowsDomainAdminF GuestWindowsDomainAdmint 4 mor r 2 In the Available properties section select the properties to associate with your working session 3 In the Selected properties section click Up and Down to modify the hierarchy of the entries If you select more than one property the navigation tree is re
144. Count is specified and VLANGroup is not specified then the Active System Manager scheduler randomly picks the VLAN IDs and associates it with corresponding VLAN component To provide count of VLAN IDs to be assigned to the VLAN component enter the required count value in VLANCount see Figure 12 42 Session Management 12 49 Working with Running Sessions Figure 12 42 Assigning VLAN Count to VLAN Component AUTO1347945075344 Running 2 To f Y j A 1 j j VLAN 20 10 19 17 Session Link Properties F y x p A Resource Name a e mn Encrypted F eile VLANCount 4 a Realization Tlanid 20 10 19 17 Configuration Files a v 5 4 2 e Note Either VLANCount or VLANId property can contain a value VLANId The VLAN d provisioning property facilitates you to provide comma separated single or multiple VLAN IDs to the VLAN component In case of multiple VLAN IDs the value can be provided in the value range format 10 15 Note Ifthe VLAN ID is blank the VLANId value is automatically assigned by the Active System E Manager software at the time of the realization or else the VLAN ID must be a valid number that you set in your inventory To assign a VLAN ID to the VLAN component enter the valid VLANId value see Figure 12 43 12 50 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Running Sessions Figure 12 43 Assigning VLAN ID to VLAN Component AaUTO1347945075344 Running 3 Zo
145. ERATION CENTER STATUS 192 168 120 120 Microsoft SCVMM_GPOC Success Device Discovery Passed Login Resource Imported Virtual resource import passed Host Successful on device SCVMM_GPOC IMPORTED RESOURCES DETAILS MANUFACTURER MODEL ASSET TAG STATUS Microsoft Host DemoCluster test hyperv com Resource Imported Microsoft Host Server206 test hyperv com Resource Imported Microsoft Host server 124 test hyperv com Resource Imported The report indicates failures indicated in red or success for each element Inventory Management 5 7 Using Resource Types Using Resource Types The Active System Manager software uses resource types to model the various types of hardware resources in your environment A resource type serves as a template for resource instances A resource type does not represent a particular piece of network hardware it describes the basic structure of the basic model for that equipment A single resource type can serve as the template for a variety of actual resource instances that exist in your environment For example assume your environment includes 50 servers These servers have varying elements different ports and different software versions The purpose of a resource type is to serve as a baseline model that you can use to describe each individual resource s unique characteristics This baseline model describes the total number of interface ports that a server supports the minimum time r
146. EYICE Cisco Mexus5548Chassis 5511 EN oo 5S5115350BEZ Cisco NSK PAC SSOW DTM 3 oo S5SI15350BEZ Cisco NSK PAC SSOW DTM 4 es 55115350BEZ Cisco NSK M1008 FOC s ES 55115350BEZ Cisco NSK CS010P BF FOC EJ gt Input CSY Editor The Import Explorer validates the CSV link files according to the following rules e Basic validation Invalid characters Mandatory fields Length of each field supported by the Active System Manager software Duplicate link names within CSV 5 52 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Importing Connectivity Duplicate links within CSV Same resource and location used in the CSV more than once Note The Link Import editor performs all the basic validations e Link name already exists in the Active System Manager inventory e Existence of resources in the Active System Manager inventory e Existence of interface location in the resource Errors if any in the validation at the server are displayed as a server error in the error details and in a light shade of red in the right margin of the editor Validation also determines the status for each link Select links and if necessary click the Show other related errors in CSV check box to view the details and click OK Importing Validated Links To import your validated links as specified in the loader spreadsheet right click in the upper left corner of the file displayed in the Import editor and select Import E N
147. F siye 45 e A6 47 Topology Link 11 48 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Templates Figure 11 28 Duplex Link editor E LJ AT PICO 05 LJ AT PICO 06 S i 10GE lt Ethernet 10 100 1000 e 10gb1 Fibre Channel LW e 100b2 e AQ Ethernet 10 100 1000 fe 41 oa ied t E i Fibre Channel LW oon A3 oo AO De A4 Ha Ou gt AS i A2 gt A6 e A3 fe A7 gt A4 AS e A6 47 Topology Link Figure 11 29 Multicast or Do Xx q AT PICO 05 E 1 AT PICO 06 i 10GE qh Ethernet 10 100 1000 e 100b1 e jen e 10gb2 f Fibre Channel LW gt Ethernet 10 100 1000 pi AD oF ied e Al amp Fibre Channel LW Pt A2 fe A4 gt gt AS eee e 6 ae A7 Figure 11 30 Tap Link editor B AT PICO 05 I AT PICO 06 B f 10GE Hs Ethernet 10 100 1000 oo 10gb1 B f Fibre Channel LW f 100b2 e AD db Ethernet 10 100 1000 o gt Al od ied he A2 Fibre Channel LW ce AS e AD e A4 ese A i 6 t i NE o De A6 oo a3 e AT e A4 AS e AG ce A7 Template Management 11 49 Working with Templates Link Feasibility Toolbar The link feasibility icons mutually exclusive allow you to build connectivity within your Template while being aware of your underlying physical connectivity and compatibility between interface types e Show Compatible Interfaces Only To use this icon option you must
148. For any session related operations the createProfile custom operation will automatically generate profiles based on the servers in session using the Server Template as a reference Creating a Server Profile and Server Profile Settings Use the Create Server Profile wizard to apply profiles to existing machines based on a preconfigured Server Template One template can create up to 32 profiles 1 Enter a Name up to 80 characters and Description up to 255 characters to help identify this profile for future use It is recommended to choose a name that reflects the template s purpose for example WebServer Datacenterl Valid characters include uppercase and lowercase letters numbers and spaces The following special characters are also allowed 2 Select the Number of Profiles to create 3 Select whether to Auto assign the IO Identity or Manually assign the IO Identity If you select Auto assign the IO Identity Active System Manager generates values for the profiles for example MAC iSCSI MAC IQN IP BOOT LUN FCoE MAC WWNN WWPN but you have to manually specify Boot LUN and WNN Note Ifyou do not select Auto Assign the IO Identity you will be required to enter all identity values for the profile When entering the values ensure that you do not to duplicate any existing MAC addresses on your network This can cause serious networking problems 4 Click Next BIOS Settings 7 8 View the BIOS settings that have been set i
149. Global Parameter screen displays see Figure 11 10 Template Management 11 21 Working with Templates Figure 11 10 Edit Global Parameters Edit Global Parameter Edit Global Parameter Change the values to edit the global parameter Mame ImageName Description Category Compute O Encrypted Static List Comma seperated value list a Dynamic List Select Primary and Secondary values Software Repositories Secondary ISO Bootable Images a Element san 150 Bootable Images 55 a amp Image File san 150 Bootable Images esxi5 1_dell I5OBoot 4 Select if parameter is mandatory Note The Edit Global Parameters screen in Figure 11 10 allows you to edit only the respective Value field All other fields cannot be edited a Click OK 6 Click Next Note You can adjust the scheduling behavior based on user preferences See the Preferences Scheduler E page for scheduler options click Window gt Preferences gt Scheduler The Scheduler can automatically perform extra scheduling when no solutions are reported including identify preemption or running ASAP Scheduling The scheduler has identified a set of solutions If no solutions are reported the wizard displays an error page with a high level error message and a complete set of logs Click Back to change your setting request Solutions should appear however if not the Scheduler logs are displayed The number of causes may result i
150. Guide Release 7 1 Importing Inventory Figure 5 25 New Inventory Import Plug in New Inventory Import Plug in BEms Inventory Import Plug in Create a new Inventory Import Plug in Plug in type Simple Resource Location Generator Manufacturer Model ma on Click the Plug in Type drop down box and select a type Click the Manufacturer field and enter a name Click the Model name and enter a name et ee oF Click Finish An empty Tcl file opens enabling you to write the logic for the specific plug in Validating CSV Resource Data E To validate CSV resource data right click in the CSV editor and select Validate Note The Validate menu is only enabled when there are no validation errors Figure 5 26 and Figure 5 27 same image but portioned in each figure to show its entirety displays an example of an error on Validate invocation Note the following characteristics e The Outline view with error red e The red marker on the right red square e For each error a simple marker on the right margin when mousing over the red marker see the error detail in a pop up prompt Inventory Management 5 47 Importing Inventory Figure 5 26 Error on Validate Invocation Left Side CDI_iesv 23 hponent Model Component Serial Number Component Display Name Component Description Component Slot Component Interface Component Management Interfaces Component Management Inte 3 1 C
151. IDs in a Running Session ii A A AAA A eR 12 49 Deleting a VLAN Component from a Running Session 0 0 00 narrer 12 55 SAVNE SESSIONS a e E E is o AN E dene 12 56 Configuring Session Notifications and Reminders 0 0 0 ccc ee eens 12 58 Setting Session Notifications and Reminders o ete eee eee e eee teens 12 59 Adding SESSION NOUNCAUONS usaran Se RRR hed Re OR 12 59 Fiditine Session Notifications is A chu ee A AA At 12 62 Delta Session NOMICAUIONS td Re AR CEA AAA RAR 12 62 RAGING sess on RCMMIMOCIS A A A Gla ga all a dis 12 62 Editine SessiomREMINdETS iena reae h a a a on RR eee 12 64 Deleting Session Reminders tt ti A A Eo oea 12 64 Starting and Stopping ASAP Rescheduling annann 12 64 Man asins Vital INC SOURCES 1 de ea 12 65 Nentyis vital Resource Data sanidad 12 65 Duphcatino gt Virtual RESQUECES is dt a 12 66 Relocatino VittalRESQUICES dE AA CEA AA RAR ee 12 66 Scaling Virtua Resouces 5 IA oe Ce eee ie A E al 12 67 INVOKIne Resource Adapters ocd teak b he oS dared HEROES ao RR eee 12 67 Executing System Based Operations id Giese Oe AN ae Cede is 12 68 Executing Custom Based Operations y E AA we te ee bate oa Ee ER SRSA 12 69 Executing Montoto Operations NS E Ae eee AS Oe eR ec ee 12 72 ExXCCutime AppliCanOns lt lt Iso stat 12 72 Openine Resource adapter LOS 20d is ii ee ee ee A ede wad ewer es 12 72 Monitoring Resource Adapter Execution 0 een nee e teen ee
152. IMM Table 12 2 Session Perspective States Session State Status Pending Mode Confirmed In Process Mode Running Wait Setting Up Setting Up Cleaning Up Snapshot Past Mode Completed Failed Canceled Deleted 12 8 Description A validated or scheduled session A session that has started A scheduled setup time has arrived but some of the resources required by the session have not yet been released by earlier sessions The process of scheduling resources and laying down the required configuration files for a session The process of restoring the original settings for a session Takes the snapshot the running session and saves the modified Template A session that has completed the start to end time A session that did not get realized or problems occurred during the cancel operation A session canceled by the user or system A session deleted by the user Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Running Sessions Opening the Session Editor A session editor allows you to view session based resources When opening the session editor the overall rendering looks similar to the underlying Template but resource type definitions are replaced by real inventory or virtual resources The session editor displays a Template for a running session and for each session you can perform the following operations e View its allocated resources including all resources and links e Add or d
153. If this happens click Back to change your setting request Solutions should appear however if not the Scheduler logs are displayed The number of causes may result in the Active System Manager software being unable to find any suitable times to schedule your session For example the resources in your Template may not be available during the time window you requested or the time window you entered may be too short for the time slot length that you requested You receive one of the following possible responses at this time e Ifthe request can be satisfied you see a list of session time options If a non preemptive request cannot be satisfied you are prompted e If other sessions conflict with a preemptive request you see a list of possible sessions using resources already assigned to other sessions 8 On the Scheduling Template Solutions dialog box select a scheduling solution 9 Optional Click the Session Name and enter a name 10 Click Next to go to the allocated resource information see Figure 12 19 or click Finish 12 24 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Running Sessions Figure 12 19 Allocated Resources Rescheduling Session Allocated Resources Scheduler has identified the following resources associated to selected solution Proposed resource allocation by scheduler O VirtualMachine_1 GigabitEthernet O VLAN 54 VLAN Port Properties associated with above selection
154. List To access the available user list on the Active System Manager menu bar click Tools gt Users and Groups The Security Management window displays with the Users tab open by default see Figure 4 1 gua Security Management Window User and Groups Users Tab Security Management Users and Groups Add edit and delete users and groups with associated permissions Search e First Name Last Name Role Authentic Email Time Zone w Add A admin admin admin Administr AL mbansal AmericafL f techpubs Mike Bentley User AL jdoe ac America L ee Delete Profiles Copy Reset Password Activate Deactivate Switch To By default the information provided on the Users tab is sorted by ascending order based on the Username column however you can sort the information by clicking any of the table headers Username First Name Last Name Role Authentication Email Status and Time Zone 4 2 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Managing Security Functions Adding New Users Based on external authentication methods and repositories the Active System Manager software now supports internal Lightweight Directory Active Protocol LDAP Active Directory AD users and Network Information System NIS users You should create both a profile and a set of permissions for a new user or group For information about permissions see the Defining Permissions section on page 4 19 This
155. Management 9 43 Importing Inventory Table 5 11 Component Location Generator Properties Property Name Property Description Configuration File Property Name comp location gen info file Default File Name complocgenerator tcl File format The default complocgenertator tcl file is placed under lt MYSERVER PATH gt lux inventoryimport plugindata e Resource Location Generator The Tcl file for generating locations for a resource This can be changed as per component manufacturer or model information Table 5 12 lists the resource location generator file properties Table 5 12 Resource Location Generator File Properties Property Name Property Description Configuration File Property Name dev location gen info file Default File Name resourcelocgenerator tcl File format The default resourcelocgenertator tcl file is placed under lt MYSERVER PATH gt lux inventoryimport plugindata e Non traffic interface location generator This CSV file compiles the non traffic interfaces slot locations for a particular manufacturer or model Table 5 13 lists the non traffic interface location generator file properties Table 5 13 Non Traffic Interface Location Generator File Properties Property Name Property Description Configuration File Property Name nentrat ic location intosftile Default File Name nontrafficinterfacelocinfo csv File format CSV file contains multiple rows with three columns for manufacturer model and list of
156. Note By default when a step is added the Execute option is checked which means the step executes in the running session Using this feature you can skip the execution of certain steps of Orchestration in a running session In such a case the unchecked step appears with a Skipped status in a running session For more details refer Executing Orchestration section on page 13 16 To re execute failed steps click the Execute check box next to the required steps see Figure 13 11 Orchestration Management 13 11 Working with Orchestrations Figure 13 11 Re Executing Failed Steps Orchestration New Orchestration_Testl Steps can be renamed by clicking on step label Available Operations view Type in operation name to search the desired operatior de Add Step 3 Remove Step L Insert Step e Operation Execute Abort On Error Description E gt oil E gt Test Step_1 E as o custombperationi sE resourcelnstance customOperation1 this operation is For apply s e o customOperation2 g fu fhomesssyed gf scripts timescript py Orchestration view Add Script E d All H Expan this operation is for apply s ge resourcelnstance custom peration1 H Collapse All O Rename Select Execute All y Deselect Execute All Select Execute From Here topology _creation New Orchestration_Test1 The following right click options are available to select steps for execution e Rename Allow
157. OK to add the name of the new perspective to the Window gt Open Perspective gt Other menu Resetting Perspectives To reset your current perspective back to its default associated views with the original count and positioning and layout perform the following steps 1 Select a method to open the Reset Perspective dialog box thus prompting you to accept the reset function e On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Reset Perspective e On the Active System Manager Perspective toolbar select a perspective and click Reset A prompt displays asking to reset the selected perspective to its default 2 Click OK The reset takes effect the next time the perspective is opened e Note You can also reset the perspective by modifying the perspective preferences On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Preferences gt General gt Perspectives to display the Preferences Perspectives dialog box Click Reset see Table 1 11 on page 1 37 for details and click Apply gt OK to accept the settings Active System Manager Overview 1 9 Active System Manager User Interface Elements Closing One or All Perspectives To close a perspective or all perspectives select one of the following methods e On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Close Perspective or click Window gt Close All Perspectives e On the Active System Manager Perspective toolbar select a perspective right click and sel
158. Open function is intended to use for opening URLs or links It launches a new browser window To add a custom session property that must be overwritten with a editable value click Add To remove a custom session property select a row and click Remove Note All of the Add and Remove functions must be saved to save those property changes click File gt Save Note These custom properties can now be used in the Template view for grouping filtering and searching Attachments Name You can add or remove attachments To add a file attachment click Add select a file from your file system click Open and the file attachment is added Description To open the file attachment select one and click Open To remove a file attachment select a file attachment and click Remove Editing Default Session Properties To edit the default session properties perform the following steps 1 Select a session to modify by one of the following ways e In the Sessions view right click the session and select Edit 12 18 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 In the calendar view right click the session and select Edit Working with Running Sessions The Session properties dialog box for the selected session displays see Figure 12 15 Figure 12 15 Session Properties G Properties for Pawan Cluster type filter text General General Notifications and Remi ID 50 lary Script Name Pawan Cluster Templat
159. Preferences 9 172 16 100 210 41105 admin Asia Calcutta 7 0 0 21236 EE Getting Started 2 5 Connecting to the Active System Manager Server Connecting to the Active System Manager Server To successfully establish a working environment session you must connect to the Active System Manager server by one of two ways you cannot work offline e Connecting to the Active System Manager Server for the First Time e Connecting to the Active System Manager Server After Account Setup e Verifying the Connection Status Connecting to the Active System Manager Server for the First Time To connect to the Active System Manager server for the first time perform the following steps 1 Launch the Active System Manager software see the Launching the Active System Manager Client Software on Windows section on page 2 3 2 Verify the connection status see the Verifying the Connection Status section on page 2 7 3 On the Connect to Active System Manager Server dialog box see Figure 2 2 on page 2 4 create a new server account 4 Click OK to connect to the server If your server must load a very large inventory database a dialog box may appear that displays the progress You have the options of canceling the connection attempt or running it in the background Also you can display the loading process details by clicking Details Note The Active System Manager software auto detects when a connection is lost an
160. RUT resource category need to be assigned based on the type of operation it performs Description of the resource This field is not mandatory however you can use it to describe the chassis or resource For example 6 slot catalyst switch 24 port switch or 4 slot modular router Use the Component Interface field to define the type and number of ports installed in a module For example if you have 48 Gigabit Ethernet ports you can enter either GigabitEthernet 48 or 10 100 1000 48 Note that being consistent when naming ports can improve the software s functionality Types of traffic interfaces belonging to the component separated by a pre defined separator comma for example e Ethernet10 100 1000 48 e Ethernet10 100 1 e Serial DS1 2 9 41 Importing Inventory Table 5 10 CSV Input Field Definitions continued Field Name Resource Management Interfaces Resource Management Interface IP Address Resource Management Interface Subnet Mask Resource Management Interface Gateway Power Supply Resource Power Supply Console Resource Console Field Length O to 80 chars O to 80 chars O to 80 chars O to 80 chars O to 80 chars O to 80 chars Inventory Parameters Resource Inventory Parameters Field O to 80 chars Value O to 50 chars Interface Parameters 5 42 Illegal Characters lt gt amp lt gt 8 i e a space char lt gt
161. Reserve string thinProvision string thinMinReserve string thinGrowthWarn string thinGrowthMax string thinWarnSoftThres string thin WarnHardT hres string multihost ccess string Possible Values Secondary Source Global Parameters gt El Compute 4 D amp Storage StorageGrouplP StoragePoolName In Figure 11 12 you can supply Global Parameter as value from Possible Values pane to the parameters of custom operations in Parameters pane Select Template from Primary Source drop down The associated Global Parameters with the selected Template display Select the Global Parameter to be supplied as value to the custom operation parameter Note For more information on relation between custom operations and Global Parameters refer Sa E Selecting Custom Operations section on page 13 4 Following operations can be performed on Global Parameters e Add e Edit e Remove Add The add feature allows you to create and add a new user defined global parameters To add a new global parameter click Add see Figure 11 11 on page 11 26 The Add Global Parameter screen displays see Figure 11 13 Template Management 11 29 Working with Templates 11 30 Figure 11 13 Add Global Parameter Add Global Parameter Add New Global Parameter Specify name category and value source of new global parameter Name Description Category Encrypted Static List Comma seperated value list
162. Resource Allocation By Group Configure ak Select Group s None selected ak Refresh Interval Never Save Cancel Customizing a Widget Each widget can contain specific filters and options to select to customize their display To customize a widget s display perform the following steps 1 Open the Dashboard perspective and view the widgets use one of the following methods e On the Active System Manager navigation menu click Dashboard e On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Open Perspective gt Dashboard 2 Select a widget If the widget is empty on the title bar click the down arrow icon and select Edit see Figure 17 3 3 Select the required filter value and other options to customize the content Dashboard 17 5 Managing Widgets Refreshing Widget Content For some widget the associated data does not refresh automatically so you may be looking at stale information To get an up to date representation of the widget data you will need to refresh its content perform the following steps 1 Open the Dashboard perspective and view the widgets use one of the following methods e On the Active System Manager navigation menu click Dashboard e On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Open Perspective gt Dashboard 2 Select a widget If the widget is empty on the title bar click the down arrow icon and select Refresh see Figure 17 3 on page 17 5 Deleting a Widge
163. S ote Aer as 5 7 Usina Resource Types srt Rigs a enn AS ii ii Ade ada 5 8 Bulldine Resource Types iS AAA DA AS AAA is A 5 8 Creating a New Resource Type str A HELA ROSS bee GOK WE Gand ae Sena 5 9 poringa Resource Type atesora et eeule dau ae a doe eeu AT keen 5 11 Copying Existing Resource Types oar dteat ob bak Gack een aed dogs iii be Heh EBS Ae BM ee ee So 5 12 Updating Multiple Resource Types at Once 1 ee eee eee eee eens 5 13 Modifying Core Properties for Resource Types cee eee e eee e eee ees 5 14 Adding Resource Interace Types 2x sae die A ee ARS AA Pea ee ead pact eke ned okie dee 5 15 Adding Provisioning Parameters 0 0 cc ee enn ene eee eee eens 5 16 Adding Inventory Parameters y eee eR ETON AA AAA A A SOW ab Oe eRe ks 5 17 Adding Inventory Parameters for Resource Based Scheduling 0 00 ccc ees 5 18 Adding Inventory Parameters for Capacity Based Scheduling 0 0 0 cc ccc ees 5 19 Creating Custom Icons for Resource Types 00 ene e eee n ees 5 20 Deletine Resource Types sic catches tube eee oe A el eae Re ean ASS sain carer eT ed eee Reda eae 5 21 Usina Resource IMStances aires as AAA ii ii da 5 21 Building Resource Instances peras ae Aly ee eee wR ee ORO ee han ote et BA raul awn ea cade Aedes 5 22 Creatine Resource Instances ecteg8 AAA Dogs Ake See Grete us are eee oa 5 22 Importing Resource Instances ns cd ack AA OL OR SAR BIER AOE LE Se hE Ran 5 24 Copying Resource IMStanCes 4 gc aes
164. SAP Rescheduling Editing Session Reminders To edit session reminders perform the following steps l Open the Preferences Notifications Reminders dialog box by one of the following methods e In the Sessions view or session editor select a session to set the reminder options right click and select Edit e On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Preferences gt Scheduler gt Notifications amp Reminders The Preferences Notifications Reminders dialog box displays see Figure 12 51 on page 12 59 Select one and only one session reminder to edit and click Edit The Add Session Reminder dialog box displays see Figure 12 54 on page 12 63 Edit the session reminder criteria as necessary and click OK Deleting Session Reminders To delete session reminders perform the following steps l On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Preferences gt Scheduler gt Notifications amp Reminders The Preferences Notifications Reminders dialog box displays see Figure 12 51 on page 12 59 Select one or more by pressing Ctrl click session reminders to delete and click Delete Click Apply gt OK Starting and Stopping ASAP Rescheduling 12 64 When you create a session you can specify to start the session as soon as all the required resources become available This is called an ASAP session The Active System Manager software schedules the session at the earliest time it can f
165. SV file provide status error data on the associated inventory and then upload the inventory links data into the Active System Manager server To open the Inventory perspective perform one of the following options e On the Active System Manager navigation menu click Inventory Inventory e On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Open Perspective gt Inventory The Inventory perspective displays see Figure 8 1 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Introducing the Inventory Perspective Figure 8 1 Inventory Perspective Tools Reports Window Help Ey A El A 9 Search v gt e Edit Links P Show Links Import Export Save Saved Resource Types Dell Chassis System J Dell_Chassis 23 Nofitterng CC C C Y X Resource Instance gt Dell Resource Instance Dell BladeServer v Core Properties Core Properties A Dell Chassis Specify basic details for the resource Virtualization Infrastructure A Dell Compellent E cme CGJFQVI Availability Dell Equallogic PS6110 All Interfaces 2 Dell EqualLogicStoragePool Manufacturer Dell i E Console A Dell Force10 54810 Model Chassis File System Dell IDA n gt Interface A Dell Servers Asset Tag Dell_Chassis 4 Power Supply 2 VMware Version 1 Inventory Parameters 4 d En E o iy iD Role Managed Equipment Shared Description Domain System v Virtualization Infra
166. Script Execution Environment gt Inventory Hostname 172 16 100 210 Scheduler Search Select default script Use Secure option to configure secure execution environment Username skumar Security Password A Script u01 home skumar scriptserver abc abc script sh Te adsl Scrip ome skumar scriptserver abc abe script s Script Server Folder Location u01 home skumnar scriptserver AMIL EF Secure Runtime Variables Session Level Script Reservation ID Session ID Session Name Template Name Owner Session ID Session Name Template Narr 2 Click the Script and Folder location fields respectively and enter the respective information This field defines the default project workspace or suite location where resource level test cases are organized in a Manufacturer and Model These test cases will be listed in the Scripts view upon opening a session editor 3 Click the Secure check box to ensure that the communication from the Active System Manager server is secure via a Secure Shell SSH protocol By default this check box is enabled secure Non secure communication uses a remote shell RSH protocol to configure non secure communication click the check box to clear it 4 Click Apply gt OK 14 2 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Test Cases Starting a Test Case You can use the Session perspective to view a list of all of the test cases that are assoc
167. System Manager product The Permissions tab is available on the New User and New Group dialog boxes With users or groups you can perform the following tasks e Sort the permissions by clicking the Name field e Select more than one permission at a time by clicking the respective permission check boxes e Select all permissions by clicking Select All e Remove all permissions from a group or user by clicking Deselect All e Complete the desired permissions tasks by clicking OK To modify permissions for a user administrator or group perform the following steps 1 Open the Security Management window and access a user administrator or group e To access a user see the Accessing a User List section on page 4 2 e To access a group see the Accessing a Group List section on page 4 15 2 Add a new user or group as described in the following sections e To add a user see the Adding New Users section on page 4 3 e To add a group see the Adding Groups section on page 4 16 3 From the user or group list select a user group or groups to modify the permissions and click Edit You can only select one user or group at a time to edit The User username or Group group name dialog box displays with the User or Group tab open by default depending on which type you are modifying User Profile Management 4 21 Managing Authentication Repositories 4 Click the Permissions tab and modify the permissions settings as a
168. T 10 08 2010 10 52 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 52 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 52 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 52 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 52 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 52 PM IST To display resource instance inventory properties perform the following steps 1 With a session open click the session editor and select a resource instance The Properties view must also be open Selecting a resource instance in the session editor will automatically refresh the content of the Properties view Table 12 8 defines tab names description and user action of the Resource Properties view Table 12 8 Tab Name Resource Properties User Action Description Resource Displays resource level information based on inventory Note If you have selected a virtual resource note the Host properties Host Asset Tag Host Version Host Manufacturer Host Model Host Domain have been added This indicates where the virtual resource is being hosted Provisioning Properties have been added by the Resource Adapter Framework RAF during the setup process Read only properties cannot be updated others can Some Read only Some property values can be overwritten You can also Add Remove or edit provisioning properties are grayed out based on the read only state properties 12 37 Session Management Working with Running Sessions Table 12 8 Resource Properties continued Tab Name Description User Action Realization Displays Resourc
169. To restore it back to its original view right click the editor and select Minimize Creating Views This section explains how to create the following views e Creating a New View e Creating a Fast View Creating a New View To create a new view perform the following steps 1 On the Resource Types or Resource Instances view toolbar click the down arrow icon The toolbar menu displays the available commands see Figure 1 4 for an example Figure 1 4 Resource Instances View New View Menu Filters ESO bd gt Configure Filters z E Down arrow icon Ez Group By Filters _ ae Box b Configure Filters Expand All AT PICO 001 67 E Collapse All E AT PICO 002 100 Ee Group Bly SIE AT PICO 003 44 or D AT PICO 004 E a 4 Collapse All mv Show Calendar P LJ AT PICO 005 El P AT PICO 006 e AT PICO 007 New View o E AT PICO 008 fae Show Calendar Gel Switch w Ba Show Active Equipment News Yie New View menu Preferences Expand All w a Show Active Equipment Preferences 2 Click New View to display the new view on the same view toolbar as the original You can drag the new view to any part of the user interface Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Active System Manager User Interface Elements 3 Add any filtering grouping or sorting to the new view 4 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Save Perspective As to save the perspective 5 Click the Name f
170. Use this option if your environment deviates from the Active System s reference architecture Set the element properties by clicking on any element The Element Properties section opens see Figure 5 4 Figure 5 4 Element Properties Element Properties Specify element details Assettag and IP Address are mandatory IP Address Discovery Attributes Note In case of any missing information in any of the configured system element the Active System manager system displays the specific errors see Figure 5 5 Figure 5 5 Discovery Configuration Error Discovery Configuration Error Discovery configuration can not be saved due to following errors 1 Assettag is missing For 6510 Brocade felement of 451000_ system 2 IP Address is missing for 6510 Brocade element of 451000_4 system 3 Assettag is missing For Servers Dellfelement of 45200_6 T system 4 IP Address is missing for Servers Delllfelementi of A5200_6 system 5 Assettag is missing For Servers Dellfelement of 45200_6 system 6 IP Address is missing for Servers Delllfelementi of A5200_6 system 4ssettag is missing For Equallogic P56110 Dell element of A5200_6 systen 8 IP Address is missing For EqualLogic 56110 Dellfelement of A5200_6 systen 9 Assettag is missing For Force10 54810 Dellfelement of 45200_6 system 10 IF Address is missing For Force10 54810 Dellfelement of A5200_6 systen 11 Assettag is mis
171. W9 Tue 26 Feb 2013 W9 Wed 27 Feb 2013 W9 Thu 28 Feb 2013 Wo FI 2 admin 60 Pawan Cluster Running Cluster VMwar OS TestVM_ Sumit Confirmed VMwareTesting go TestVM_Sumitl Running VMwareTesting TestVM_Surmitl 4 0 H 34 Note Move your cursor over the colored bar within the calendar view to view the session properties 12 15 Working with Running Sessions Note Use the Show In Calendar menu option right click the session and select Show In Calendar to display the selected session directly in the center of the session calendar a red vertical marker identifies the selected session Right click the Sessions calendar date bar to view the following calendar options e Day Calendar Default displays the calendar in one day segments e Week Calendar Displays the calendar in one week segments e Month Calendar Displays the calendar in one month segments e Quarter Calendar Displays the calendar in quarterly segments e Year Calendar Displays the calendar in yearly segments e Lock View Locks the calendar to keep the time frame within the display when the window is resized e Now Displays the current date within the view e Goto Date Displays the Go To Date dialog box Use this dialog box to set the date you want displayed as well as the Day Week Month display Red line shifts to the new date Viewing Session Properties To view the session properties select t
172. a Active Directory or LDAP for example e Groups Lists all of the groups that have been defined in the Active System Manager software For each group every member is listed as well as whether the member is an administrator or user e Users Lists all of the administrators in the first section and then all of the non administrator users in the next section Within each section entries are listed alphabetically by last name then first name You can select a user and click Remove or Edit at any time to remove or edit the participants e Specify Top Template Count Displays only the top 10 most used templates in the report Click Run Report The Template Utilization report displays in a new window in your default web browser This can take a few minutes You can return to the Active System Manager software while the report is being generated Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Printing Reports Printing Reports The Active System Manager software reporting feature is designed to print out all information in a given category not just the information you see displayed on the screen For best results use the Landscape mode in your browser s print settings This section describes two ways to print reports e Printing Reports from an HTML Browser e Printing Reports from a Web Browser Printing Reports from an HTML Browser To print a report from your HTML browser click File gt Print This menu prints all in
173. a matrix switch create a filter containing the name or model of the matrix switch When you apply a filter synchronization automatically turns off and vice versa Using the Search Function You can also access your inventory via the built in Active System Manager Search function Using the Resource Allocation Calendar The Resource Allocation Calendar is a display option for the Resource Instances view that enables you to view allocation of resources to sessions and their status To display the Resource Allocation Calendar view perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Show View gt Other gt Active System Manager gt Resource Instances Dl 2 In the top right corner of the Resource Instances view click the Show Calendar icon The Resource Allocation Calendar displays within the right hand side of the view All of the associated sessions for each resource instance that are part of the session within the Resource Availability Calendar display The associated sessions for each resource instance appear as a colored rectangular bar This section describes the following topics e Using the Resource Availability Calendar Options e Analyzing Resource Instance Availability in Existing Sessions Using Inventory 8 11 Using the Resource Allocation Calendar Using the Resource Availability Calendar Options The Resource Availability Calendar includes a number of menu options and display
174. a new name b Optional Click the Reason field and enter a reason to update the maintenance window c Inthe Time Options section click the Start Date and End Date pull down menus respectively to set a new start and end date for the maintenance time frame If the maintenance window is already in progress then only the end time can be changed Note You cannot modify the Start Date for an in progress maintenance window 4 Click Next to check for possible conflicts with ongoing sessions 5 Inthe Blocking Sessions section all Running sessions display during the specified maintenance period 6 Select the Acknowledge blocking sessions check box to proceed with the creation and ignore those Sessions 7 Click Finish to complete the update 8 Verify the new start and end date and click OK to exit the dialog box An email notification will be sent out to all to indicate the time changes associated with the maintenance window Canceling the Maintenance Window To cancel the maintenance window perform the following steps 1 Access the Maintenance Window dialog box 2 Select the maintenance window to cancel and click Cancel to close the window Email notifications will be sent out and the entry is deleted 3 Click OK exit the dialog box An email notification will be sent out to all administrators or the window cancellation Inventory Management 5 61 Managing Virtual Resources Managing Virtual Resources This section intro
175. a set of elements Use the Add or Remove buttons to customize your bundled content Use the Up and Down buttons to order the bundled content Use the Versions button to select a specific version Note Enabled only for the Source Control CVS repository Elements can carry customized property definitions for example name value mandatory Use the Add or Remove buttons to customize your list 3 Click Add to define the association The Associate Inventory dialog box displays with the defined associations You can associate your elements with more than one resource type or resource instance To do this browse the tree and select them There are also filters and Select All and Deselect All options to select the elements 4 Click OK when you have completed your selections Once you click OK the association displays in the Association column Disassociating Elements To disassociate elements follow the procedure in the the Associating Elements with Resource Types or Resource Instances section on page 9 12 however in this case select multiple elements click the check boxes to disassociate and click Disassociate You can also remove the association from a selected element from the Repositories view gt Edit dialog box Repository Management 9 15 Working with Resource Adapters Working with Resource Adapters 9 16 In the Active System Manager system resources and therefore Resource Adapters RAs are organi
176. actoring operations The Active System Manager software displays a list of all changes related to previous preferences Resource Custom Operation Allows you to display a resource custom operation status message on completion Annotations Allows you to create the graphical functions to add to your existing or new templates Active System Manager Overview Reference See the Scheduling Templates section on page 11 18 See the Rescheduling Sessions section on page 12 22 Chapter 4 User Profile Management See Chapter 9 Repository Management For bulk VLAN details see the Supporting Layer 2 Switching section on page 11 43 For annotation details see the Using Annotations section on page 11 46 1 33 Active System Manager User Interface Elements Content Assist So So Icons 1 34 e e The Content Assist Ctrl Spacebar facilitates a list of multiple options for the user to choose the required value Note When the light bulb displays it means that Content Assist is enabled Press to search and display all possible values for that property Note Press Ctrl Shift Spacebar if Ctrl Spacebar is used by some other application The main Active System Manager toolbar provides shortcuts for commonly used menu commands including e File gt New e File gt Save e File gt Print e Navigate gt Back e Navigate gt Forward e Search Figure 1 16 displa
177. age 5 54 e Manual Allows you to select from the existing resources available in the inventory 4 Click OK to replace the existing resource with the new resource If the session is in a Running state the Resource Adapter methods are invoked as part of the default setup process Deactivating and Activating Resources Deactivating a resource during the session life cycle does put the resource back into the free pool of resources but it is still displayed in the session as a convenience To deactivate resources perform the following steps 1 Open a session editor 2 Right click a resource and select Status gt Inactive The editor displays with the inactive resources see Figure 12 37 Figure 12 37 Deactivating a Resource Example ES SinglePicoWithFourPorts AUTO1255719902303 2 E Cloud Cloud ml id AT PICO 01 E AT PICO 05 a Session Link 3 Save the Template for the changes to take effect Operations on the inactive resource are no longer available To return the resource into Active State again activating in the editor right click your resource and select Status gt Active 4 Save the Template for the changes to take effect and to invoke the scheduler and Resource Adapters 12 40 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Running Sessions Deleting Resources Inactive resources can be deleted from the session editor The only way to bring the resource instance ba
178. ager User Guide Release 7 1 Chapter 14 Working with Test and Script Execution This chapter describes the various methods of how to work with test and script execution using the Active System Manager software Working with Test Cases Working with Resource Scripts Working with Session Scripts Customizing Script Execution Working with the Execution Queue View Working with Test Cases This section describes the following topics about working with test cases Opening the Test Cases View Setting Preferences for Script Servers Starting a Test Case Viewing Test Case Properties Stopping a Test Case Opening the Test Cases View You can view test cases in the Test Cases view to open the Test Cases view see the Opening the Test Cases View section on page 14 1 Working with Test and Script Execution 14 1 Working with Test Cases Setting Preferences for Script Servers To set preferences and the default values for script servers perform the following steps 1 Select one of the following options to display the Preferences dialog box Figure 14 1 e On the Active System Manager menu toolbar click Window gt Preferences gt Test and Script Execution gt Script Server e In the Test Cases view select one or more test cases right click and select Preferences Figure 14 1 Setting Preferences for Test Cases Preferences gt o So type filter text script Server Archive Bin gt General Help Remote
179. ager menu bar click Tools gt Archive Bin Rules gt Edit e On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Preferences gt Archive Bin Figure 12 40 Preferences Archive Bin ri O type filter text S No filter rule is specified for filer Filter Archive Bin General Help All filters Fi It er rul es Inventory wo Name Type Add Operator Scheduler A Filterl session Security Template Test and Script Execution AML Apply Cancel Session Management 12 45 Working with Running Sessions a Click Add 2 Inthe All filters section perform the following sub steps b Click the Name field and type a rule name that you want to keep for the rule you are defining c Click the Type field and select archive or session type If you select archive type see the corresponding property types in the Templates column in Table 12 10 if you select the session type see the corresponding property types in the Sessions column in Table 12 10 a Click Add 3 In the Filter rules section perform the following sub steps b Click the Property field and set the session property type from the properties listed in Table 12 10 Table 12 10 Corresponding Property Types Sessions Template Name Start Date Time End Date Time Status Owner Description Name of the underlying Template created Start date and time of when the environment session is scheduled The start time cannot be edited if the sessio
180. ail notification of cancelled sessions to the corresponding owners of the sessions You can also extend the email notification to the participants of each session or you can also suppress it You can set this preference before you perform a forced import You can also specify the default availability dates in the Inventory Import preferences where you can import the RI with a specific time availability Importing Connectivity The Inventory Links Import feature enables the administrator to import Resource Instance Specification RIS links into the Active System Manager server This feature accepts this link data in the form of input field definitions that are contained within a comma separated value CSV file called the link inventory spreadsheet The Active System Manager administrator inputs this inventory links data according to the rules set according to the Link CSV field definitions in the Active System Manager software Once this data is loaded into the Active System Manager client the administrator uses the Active System Manager Input CSV editor to validate the input field definitions specified within the CSV file provide status error data on the associated inventory and then upload the inventory links data into the Active System Manager client This section includes details for the overall process required to import your inventory links and some examples of the associated CSV files These details are described in the following topics
181. all passwordlinux Yes all Usernamewindows Yes all passwordwindows Yes all db Yes oracle my Yes oracle all oracle Yes all mysql Yes all 11 35 Working with Templates Setting Resource Type Properties for Scheduling Property based scheduling is a standard capability of the Active System Manager scheduler It applies only to the scheduler s selection of resource types If you author a resource instance then there is no scheduler selection available When you create a session the Active System Manager scheduler checks the availability of resources required by the Template at the specified time and reserves them If a resource instance is required then only that particular resource is reserved for that element in the Template and is used when realizing the Template If a resource type 1s required then the scheduler looks for any resource of that type having the minimum required interfaces available In addition the scheduler verifies that other properties match the values that you specified for the resource and its interface This is called property based scheduling To set resource type properties for scheduling perform the following steps 1 In your Template select a resource type and click the Inventory tab 2 Set the preferred or required property check box status A property for scheduling can be treated in two different ways e By default properties are Preferred that is resources or interfaces that match this property
182. alue for new or existing inventory parameters All resource instances derived from this resource type will include the encrypted parameter The encrypted flag can be used for password protection sensitive access and so on e Numeric Only numerical data is allowed in the inventory parameter value e Date User can select a date from the calendar as appropriate c Optional Click the Unit field and type unit that best associates to the parameter name d Click the Schedulable check box to use the resource type for property based scheduling Note Leave the settings for the Capacity check box and the Over Subscription field blank 4 Click File gt Save to save your changes to the server The Active System Manager application supports Template level setup and teardown scripts as a standard feature These scripts are run at the beginning and end of the session respectively when a Template is part of a live session For resources that have Active System Manager resource integrations installed the Active System Manager application also supports resource level setup and teardown scripts which can be specified and run in addition to Template level scripts Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Using Resource Types To define resource level setup and teardown scripts you must define the inventory parameters called resourceSetUpScript and resourceTearDownScript at the resource type level and then associate a runable script with t
183. ame task by following the procedure in the the Resetting Perspectives section on page 1 9 Allows you to add remove or edit the currently installed web browsers The selected web browser is used as the default when the web pages are open however some applications may always use the external browser You can select the Use the internal Web browser or the Use external Web browser option and click New to add the external web browser The default web browser for your operating system is used for displaying the help contents Reference the Activating Editors section on page 1 19 Figure 1 6 on page 1 20 See the Modifying Perspective Preferences section on page 1 7 Eclipse documentation Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Active System Manager User Interface Elements Table 1 8 Preference Types Configurable Parameters continued Preference Type Configurable Parameters and Description Help Open Modes Specifies how information is displayed The Use External Browser check box allows you to select a web browser for this option The default web browser for your operating system is used for displaying the help contents Open help search Allows you to select a separate window for this option in a dynamic help view or in an infopop A separate window becomes the default browser for displaying help contents Open help view documents Allows you to select a dialog box in a dialog tray or in an
184. amed 1 nameti namei named 1 named 1 named namedi name named nameb1 28 ad EEN Before After The Fill gt Down option creates field values based on the field at the top of the selection see Figure 1 11 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Active System Manager User Interface Elements Figure 1 11 Fill gt Down Option Example 19 namel name i name i name i nameb1 name01 namei namei namei ed Gee name Before After The Fill gt Series option creates field values based on the difference between the numeric values in the first two fields For example if Name00 is in the first record and Name05 is in the second record the subsequent records are called Name10 Namel15 Name20 and so on see Figure 1 12 Figure 1 12 Fill gt Series Option Example 197 al rca nameng al GEUSIE Sn nameos o E 41 el namelo namelS namez namez5 name35 name name 5 Before After A negative numerical difference generates numbers going down and generates negative numbers such as Name05 Name00 Name 05 and so on All discrete numeric values are generated For instance 1f the values Test20Test and Test30Test are used the fields are populated see Figure 1 13 1 13 Fill gt Series Option Example 2 el EAS Tests0Test Test40Test Sl Test50Test Test DTest Test OTest Test UTest TestaDTest T
185. amilies information However much of the information about a server can be included in the name itself For example you could use the manufacturer model and memory configuration as the resource type name such as Dell PowerEdge1955 32gbRAM To create a new resource type perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click File gt New gt Active System Manager gt Resource Type gt Next Alternately you can right click anywhere in the Resource Type Navigation view and select New The New Resource Type dialog box displays see Figure 5 8 Figure 5 8 New Resource Type New Resource Type Resource Type Create a new Resource Type Mame Manufacturer Model Roles Component Aj Hub Managed Equipment Matrix Switch Patch Panel M Power Controller TFTP Server Terminal Server Virtual TERN OS 5 10 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Using Resource Types Note The Active System Manager allows modeling of virtualized resourcing Virtualized resources exist q in inventory as a resource type but virtual resource instances do not have associated resource instances in the inventory which means that a virtual resource instance cannot be created using the traditional wizard Instead because the Active System Manager is responsible for the creation and destruction of those on demand resources the virtual resource instance is created at runtime Examples
186. amp i e a space char lt gt amp i e a space char lt gt amp lt gt amp lt gt amp Description Where you can enter the address assigned to the port on your chassis This must be a port and not a VLAN For example if a management address is accessed through port 1 on your Gigabit Ethernet module then enter GigabitEthernet 1 as the value of this field for example e Ethernet10 100 1000 1 e Ethernet10 100 1 Identifies the IP address assigned to the resource Use this field to identify the Subnet Mask of the resource only if you entered a value in the Management Interface field If you did not enter a value in Component Management Interface field then leave this field blank for example e 255 255 255 252 e 255 255 255 0 e 255 255 255 240 Use this field to identify the Gateway of the chassis only if you entered a value in Component Management Interface field If you did not enter a value in Component Management Interface field then leave this field blank for example 172 16 100 0 172 16 100 1 Used to provide power ports available on power controller Note When you enter a description of the power controller make sure you enter information related to the power wattage If there are motile power port types available provide the value as 4000W 15000W 1 Serial console port information For Cisco controller cards having serial and auxiliary ports the value
187. and non default views available when you open the Sessions perspective see Figure for a graphical representation of the views which appear in tabular form except for the Template editor Table 12 1 Session Perspective Elements View or Editor Non Name Default Default Description Orchestration X Displays orchestration executions Execution ID X Displays the output from your test cases and scripts and provides a series of toolbar options that enable you to control both the test cases and script execution Execution Queue X Displays all the scripts and test executions 12 2 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Running Sessions Table 12 1 Session Perspective Elements continued View or Editor Name Sessions Session Archive Bin Templates Resource Scripts Session Editor Outline Properties Default X Non Default Description Displays all the sessions for all the templates in all states Displays all sessions in the Active System Manager application including sessions that you reserved and those reserved by others who have granted you access to their sessions Sessions in running states are called sessions which are indicated with a green arrow icon see Figure 12 3 for an example The Sessions view is a navigator view that supports built in and custom filtering Past Present Future Last 24 Hours Last 7 Days Last 30 Days Last 60 Days Last 90 Days and grouping functions F
188. anent type If the session scheduled from a Physical template 1s being used by the system to realize a Logical template in present future and if the user cancels the physical session then the system throws an error message Provisioning To provision Hypervisors and clusters the Resource Adapters are required To achieve this a series of Setup orchestration steps are configured In the session provisioning parameter the RA adds cluster or independent Hypervisor s assettag cluster clusterl cluster2 hypervisor hypervisor1 hypervisor2 Logical Template 11 4 The Logical template is used to provision virtual machines VMs on Hypervisor or cluster from sessions created from the physical template It is also used to provision the VLAN component from VLAN range given in the Physical template Note The difference between the Logical and Normal template is that the Logical template is realized upon a Physical template based session Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 The workflow of Physical Template consists of the following steps e Creating a Logical Template e Scheduling Template to Create a Session e Provisioning Note In the current implementation there are separate inventory objects for raw blades and hypervisors clusters provisioned where they are brought into the Active System Manager s inventory through discovery these being logical entities they have no link information Creating a Logical Templ
189. apacity constraint associated with the virtual resource Session Management 12 65 Managing Virtual Resources Duplicating Virtual Resources This procedure allows you to quickly clone a virtual resource in your environment by adding a new resource with same characteristics as the one selected Set up script will be also running during this operations To duplicate virtual resources perform the following steps 1 Open a session editor see the Opening the Session Editor section on page 12 9 2 Select a virtual resource right click and select Duplicate A new icon representing the new virtual resource will be inserted in the session editor 3 Save the Session File gt Save to bring the resource to life and execute its setup workflow operations Relocating Virtual Resources This procedure allows you to move the selected virtual resource from one hypervisor to a secondary one This procedure can use third party software to perform such operations as the use of vSphere vMotion for vm Ware hypervisor To relocate virtual resources perform the following steps 1 Open a session editor see the Opening the Session Editor section on page 12 9 2 Select a virtual resource right click and select Relocate The following options are available e Automatic Active System Manager determines a secondary hypervisor to move your current virtual machine to run on and still validates the original capacity constraints e Ma
190. ary Report e Custom Reports e User Management Report e Detailed Session Report e Session Audit Report e Inventory Link Detail Report e Template Utilization Report e Managed Equipment Detail Report Allows you to perform the following functions e Navigate between the various Active System Manager views editors perspectives and menus e Customize and work with your perspectives e Set preferences for elements used in your network Provides help and the search function for using the Active System Manager software Perspectives Each Active System Manager application window contains one or more perspectives A perspective defines the initial set and layout of views in the application window Within the window each perspective shares the same set of editors Each perspective provides a set of functionality aimed at accomplishing a specific type of task or works with specific resource types As you work in the application you will likely often switch perspectives Perspectives control the layout of the user interface for the Active System Manager product they define which views are displayed and their positions on screen You can customize a perspective and use it at a future time for more information see the Navigating Perspectives section on page 1 7 To set preferences for your perspectives see the Modifying Perspective Preferences section on page 1 7 Note You can set your general preferences to open perspectives
191. ate These operations are inherited from each RA and each operation will contain a set of optional and required parameters that the user must set Operations can be grouped by step with no limitations and an operation within a step is executed in parallel otherwise each step is sequentially executed E Note Only one orchestration workflow can be associated per Template To define a new workflow you gt must save the Template first under a different name Editing Orchestration Workflows To edit an orchestration workflow perform the following steps 1 Open the Templates perspective and in the editor select a template with existing orchestration The list of associated orchestrations will be automatically displayed in the Orchestration view 2 Select one orchestration from the Orchestration view by double clicking or right click gt Open The orchestration displays as an editor in the workspace see Figure 11 35 11 56 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Figure 11 35 2 Discovery Configuration Active System Manager Discovery Notifi Orchestration Editor Cluster VMware ESXi 5 1 Hypervisor dep Orchestration VMFS Datastore Provision Steps can be renamed by clicking on step label Available Operations View Type in operation name to search the desired operation Search Orchestration View el Add Step JL 3 Dell EqualLogicStoragePool AccountShow xo AssignIpTolnterface Q ChapUserCr
192. ate The first step in the workflow consists of creating a Logical template by dragging VMs in the Template editor You are also required to drag the VLAN components in the Template editor Then link VMs and managed devices with VLAN components For more information refer Creating New Templates section on page 11 6 Scheduling Template to Create a Session In the case of a Logical template while scheduling the session the resources are selected from the associated Physical template While scheduling a session you can view the list of running sessions which are created from Physical type template where you are a participant You can select the session onto which you want to realize the Logical template Note No session is selected by default In such a case the Active System Manager system considers the template as Normal for scheduling resources on the template After selecting the session the VMs are to be scheduled on the managed devices as clusters or independent Hypervisors in a session listed in the session parameters of the session refer Provisioning section on page 11 4 If the selected physical session does not contain valid device information in the session provisioning parameters for example if none of the devices are in the inventory then the Logical template is not scheduled Note For Logical templates the link realization is already done on the session associated Ne with it It is assumed that the li
193. ate number of sessions required Scheduler allocates resources for a weekly or daily recurring time frame The black period can also be identified See note below Scheduler attempts to infinitively find and allocate resources starting from a specified date 11 19 Working with Templates 11 20 Based on the first four behaviors selected the date and time options modify automatically If the Recurring Session behavior is selected users can define scheduling recurrence properties in the next wizard page e Recurrence Pattern Daily Weekly Occurs after every lt number of gt Days e Time Options Start lt date gt and Duration lt hours gt e Number of Occurrences Start lt date gt No End Date End After lt a number of gt Occurrences End by lt date gt e Blackout Dates Start and End Dates Once the wizard 1s complete the sessions are scheduled independently of each other with their own life cycle Sl Note Group based sessions are identified by a common group ID and can be edited and cancelled either individually or operations can be done at the session or group level Based on your preferences you can adjust the Scheduler session and security properties See the Preferences Scheduler page for advanced scheduler options click Window gt Preferences gt Scheduler gt Advanced Scheduling The Advanced wizard page allows to change the following e Ownership e Participants users and groups e S
194. ate server firmware through an orchestration Firmware updates can only be performed on servers in which no other firmware update operation 1s running as part of another operation or any virtual operation 6 6 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Prerequisite Updating Dell Server Firmware Server Firmware Repository must be set up Steps to Update Dell Blade Rack Servers Firmware through an Orchestration l Ze Click Operations in the left menu bar Right click in the Operation Center and select Create Template to create a new server profile template OR right click on an existing template and select Edit to edit an existing server profile template In the New Orchestration window enter a Name for the Orchestration and click Finish In the Orchestration editor drag Firmware Update All Servers into the Orchestration view as a new step In the Specify Input Values window enter the firmware update image to be updated Select the Primary Source and Secondary Source where the firmware update image resides In the Elements folder select the firmware to be applied The selected firmware version has to be greater or equal to the minimum firmware version specified in Table 6 1 If firmware version selected 1s less than the minimum firmware version then firmware update will fail Run the orchestration as part of the session Updating Dell Blade Rack Servers Firmware Using the Attach Server Profile Custom Operation Com
195. ation Management 13 3 Understanding Orchestration Selecting Custom Operations While building Orchestrations based on custom operations or prior to executing custom operations explicitly you are required to provide certain parameter values for selected custom operations Instead of manually entering these parameter values you can choose to select pre defined values from custom operation s Value Source as defined in the Resource Adapter definition In Orchestration a Value Source refers to the Primary Source field The Primary Source field displays context sensitive list of values dynamically in a drop down list which is populated with possible values retrieved from a specific value source in corresponding operation defined in the RA The Sub Type is the Secondary Source field that further categorizes values based on the selected Primary Source For Example When Operation Center Elements are selected as Primary value source the associated elements such as Host Cluster Datastore Pool and Volume are available to be chosen as value for the custom operation parameter values Note The Operation Center Elements displayed in Figure 13 2 are the pre defined values for provisioning values Rather than entering provisioning values manually the Active System Manager facilitates you to choose the required value from Operation Center Elements element list Host Cluster Datastore Pool and Volume and supply the same to provisioning as values
196. ator to import an inventory of or chassis based resources for example cards and hierarchical resources into your Active System Manager server and then update their specific configuration for example module or port blade changes The Inventory Import tool accepts this resource inventory data in the form of input field definitions that are contained within a comma separated value CSV file called the network inventory spreadsheet The Active System Manager administrator inputs this inventory data according to the rules set according to the CSV field definitions into the Active System Manager software Once this data is loaded into the Active System Manager client the administrator uses the Input CSV editor to validate the input field definitions specified within the CSV file provide status error data and report information on the associated inventory and then upload the inventory data into the Active System Manager client This section describes how to import inventory primarily by way of the following methods e Importing Standard Resource Instances e Populating an SDI Inventory Spreadsheet e Creating Location Generator Files e Importing Plug In Interface Files e Validating CSV Resource Data e Importing Validated Resource Data Importing Standard Resource Instances This section includes details for the overall process required to import your standard inventory and some examples of the associated CSV files for different types o
197. atus bar Once the time zone 1s updated you must reconnect to the server for the time zone to take effect You can also change your time zone via Tools gt Users and Groups Select the user and click Edit to change the time zone You must restart the application for the new time zone to take effect 4 Click the Membership tab and select the groups to include as members of your new group You can click the check box next to each group to include individually or to select all groups click Select All see Figure 4 3 Alternatively to remove user membership in all groups click Deselect All To remove membership from a selected group de select the check box next to each selected group Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Managing Security Functions Figure 4 3 New User Membership Tab User vromana Edit User Edit User profile membership and permissions Profile Membership y I Name 0 engineering Deselect All 5 Click the Permissions tab see Figure 4 4 Figure 4 4 New User Permissions Tab User vromana la a Edit User Edit User profile membership and permissions Membership Permissions Login Profiles sl Mame z Allow Login Create Repository Element Create Sessions Delete Repository Element Delete Resource Adapter Package Export Template Import Resource Adapter Package Import Template Modify Repository Element ES With this feature you can e Sort the perm
198. bal Session Notifications section click the Active check box for each notification and reminder rule to enable it so that the server will look it up 3 Click Apply gt OK to accept the updates Adding Session Notifications To add session notifications perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Preferences gt Scheduler gt Notifications amp Reminders The Preferences Notifications Reminders dialog box displays see Figure 12 51 on page 12 59 2 Click Add gt Notifications The Session Notification Add Session Notification dialog box displays with the Events tab open see Figure 12 52 Session Management 12 59 Configuring Session Notifications and Reminders Figure 12 52 Add Session Notification Events Tab Dialog Box Session Notification Add Session Notification At least one notification email format should be selected Rule Name demotest Description demo Scope My Sessions Owned Session Notification Criteria On date time start end changes El On ASAP rescheduling On name change only El On participants list change El On ownership change On session resource change On status change A a iA canceled cleaning up completed confirmed deleted failed running O0 0 o 0o A o setting up 3 In the Rule section perform the following sub steps a Click the Name field and type a name for the notification rule E No
199. be set up Steps to Update Dell Blade Rack Servers Firmware from an Active Session l 2 Click Sessions in the left hand tool bar In the Sessions view right click on the session that contains the server to update and select Custom Operation gt Firmware Update All Servers In the Update firmware on server window enter the firmware update image to be updated Select the Primary Source and Secondary Source where the firmware update image resides In the Elements folder select the firmware to be applied The selected firmware version has to be greater or equal to the minimum firmware version specified in Table 6 1 If firmware version selected is less than the minimum firmware version then firmware update will fail Press OK to start the firmware update for all Dell servers that are part of the session After the firmware update is complete a success message or a list of errors is displayed Firmware Management 6 5 Updating Dell Server Firmware Updating Dell Blade Rack Servers Firmware Using the Attach Server Profile Virtual Operation Complete the following steps to update server firmware through a virtual operation Firmware updates can only be performed on servers in which no other firmware update operation is running as part of another operation or any virtual operation Prerequisite e Server Firmware Repository must be set up e Maintenance operations should not be running on the server e While selecting firmware in
200. bility to initiate an Orchestration execution in a running Active System Manager session as needed On Demand Orchestration executes one at a time in the running session Before doing so the Active System Manager software validates the Orchestration for any missing or removed device in the template For more details see the Executing Orchestration section on page 13 16 Teardown The Teardown Orchestration can be defined per template where each Template can contain a maximum of one Teardown Orchestration When a template with a Teardown sequencing is scheduled and goes into a Clean Up state the Active System Manager execution service implements the Teardown Orchestration as per the custom operations defined in the Orchestration steps During a Teardown Orchestration the following steps effect in sequence 1 Teardown Orchestration is executed 2 Reservation Teardown scripts are executed default or user defined as available 3 Resource level Teardown scripts are executed 4 Connected devices are released 5 Ondevices are powered off The template owner has the ability to specify Orchestration on the basis of reservation states for the custom Orchestration constructs using a drag and drop method Note On creation all Orchestrations are of the On Demand Orchestration type However you can easily change them into a Setup Orchestration or a Teardown Orchestration and vice versa in the Orchestration view Orchestr
201. ble You can edit any existing availability dates by selecting the date field and entering a new date E Note The default availability time frame ranges from the current time and date to 12 31 2021 at 11 59 p m To modify the dates click the arrow and select the correct period using the pop up calendar 4 Optional Delete an availability date by selecting 1t and clicking Remove 5 On the Active System Manager menu bar click File gt Save to save the date updates E Note Resource availabilities can be modified as long as the resource has not yet been scheduled If you try to modify then save the resource instance session dependencies may display Canceling those sessions 1s the only way to update the resource availability Modifying Resource Instance Interfaces You can modify resource instance interface definitions adding or removing them as long as it still meets the minimum requirements from the associated resource type Each interface includes properties that you can set To save the changes click File gt Save Note Underlying physical connectivity information is displayed if available Displaying the Resource Availability Calendar View The Resource Availability calendar is a display option for the Resource Instances view that enables you to view availability and status of specific resources against a variable time frame To display the Resource Availability calendar view perform the following steps 1 On the Active
202. boxes in the Name column 11 Click Finish Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Managing Repositories Adding Elements into a Repository To add elements in a repository you must select files also called elements to add into the Active System Manager repository context view E Note This operation may not be supported for all repository types and protocols supported Dell recommends reviewing the Repository Support table Table 9 2 on page 9 3 To do so perform the following steps To add elements in to a repository perform the following steps 1 Open the Setup perspective see the Introducing the Setup Perspective section on page 9 1 2 Display the New Element dialog box using one of the following options e On the File Servers view right click and select New Element or Import e On the Active System Manager menu bar click File gt New gt Other gt Active System Manager gt Element e On the Active System Manager toolbar click the New icon select Other gt Active System Manager gt Element If you have the File Servers view open then you can view your new files The repository on the network can be very large therefore administrators can select a few and make them available to the rest of the users A new blank dialog box displays for you to continue the process of adding a new element to a repository see Figure 9 2 Repository Management 9 7 Managing Repositories Figure 9 2 Adding a New
203. building and managing the environment s resource inventory which includes the various general resource types within your environment as well as specific instances that require a particular configuration for a particular piece of network equipment The administrator uses the Active System Manager application to define and catalog the specific types of equipment interfaces and each general type of network hardware in the environment For more information about how to manage the inventory see Chapter 5 Inventory Management The administrator can use the Active System Manager application and all of the functions to create update save validate schedule and delete templates In addition the administrator can cancel or edit present or future sessions of other users or delete past sessions The administrator can set up system wide Archive Bin rules For more information about Archive Bin rules or how to manage templates and sessions see Chapter 10 Network Management The administrator can create update save and delete server profile templates and server profiles The administrator can also manage the identity pools used to generate server profiles The Active System Manager software includes a set of pre defined web based support that has the ability to create administrator specific reports and provides the ability for administrators to create and generate custom BIRT based reports For more information see Chapter 12
204. cally added at the end of the step process 4 In the Orchestration view right click the Step n folder to insert a step and select Insert Step The step is automatically between where you clicked the Step n folder and the next step 5 In the Orchestration view right click a specific step in the Orchestration view pane or within the Orchestration view and select Remove Step 6 Inthe Orchestration view pane right click an operation within a step or within the Orchestration View pane and select Remove Operation El Note You can change the order of the steps at any time by right clicking in the Orchestration view pane and dragging to the preferred sequence location You can also specify a name to the step ID 7 Click OK to save the workflow Deleting Orchestration Workflows To delete a workflow perform the following steps 1 Open the Templates perspective and in the editor select a template with existing orchestration The list of associated orchestrations will be automatically displayed in the Orchestration view 2 Select one orchestration from the Orchestration view by double clicking or right click gt Delete You can delete multiple groups or one by selecting more entries You will be prompted to confirm the deletion 11 58 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Chapter 12 Session Management This chapter describes the Active System Manager Sessions perspective including all of the functions available
205. ce Gee Eee a we ee ee a O EN 17 6 Maximizing Or Minimizme a WISE ae AAA ASA Phe ee eB eee ee 17 6 Changing the Dashboard Layout certeras rara ria 17 7 Reatrancine Dashboard Contents da it eh at Dea eae bade slats 17 7 10 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 About This Guide This guide describes the Dell Active System Manager product which provides an integrated set of tools and services to automate environment infrastructure and streamline the new equipment verification and qualification process This guide provides information needed to maintain and support the hardware and software environment of the Active System Manager product and describes the architecture and operations of the Active System Manager product Specifically it also describes the following information Overview of the Active System Manager client software including concepts and features specific to using the software Instructions for installing the Active System Manager client software User guidance on the features and functionality of the following aspects of the software Active System Manager server accounts Active System Manager client user interface including managing template files and reserving sessions Authoring and modifying templates Connecting local and remote users to running sessions and allowing users to monitor and manage these sessions Guidance for system administrators to manage Active System Manager inve
206. cel e Note Ifthe Global Parameters at Template level exist clicking Next opens the Scheduling x Session Global Parameters screen see Figure 11 9 For more information on Global Parameters refer Global Parameter section on page 11 28 Also you can edit the value of Global Parameter while scheduling a session using a Template refer Editing Global Parameters section on page 11 21 2 Define the session parameters as necessary For details see the Scheduling Templates section on page 11 18 Es Note For information about templates see Chapter 9 Repository Management Creating an Instant Session Instant scheduling allows users to start a session with dedicated resources or resource types without creating and managing templates To create an instant session perform the following steps 1 Open the Resource Instances view or Resource Types view see the Opening Navigator Views section on page 1 16 Session Management 12 5 Working with Running Sessions Ot Fes ae u Right click one or more resources or resource types and select New Session Click the Name field and enter a session name Optional Click the Description field and enter a description for this session Click Finish to open the session editor A new editor comes up with your resources layout automatically in the editor Set the properties in the Properties view and enable interfaces based on your requirements
207. cense License The License sub menu allows the administrator to view the licensing status The administrator has the following capabilities with respect to the Licence feature e Ability to register one or more licenses per deployment e Ability to list down all registered licenses with license ID resource counters generation date e Ability to remove a registered license e Ability to keep a track of total resource count in use resource count and oversubscription error Ea Note Active System Manager contains a file that lists device types manufacture models that are gt excluded from consumed license count To view licensing status perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Settings gt License to display the current licensing information and associated live current counters see Figure 16 6 Figure 16 6 Current Licensing Status B admin admin S lt u Active System Manager Active Infrastructure Management HOME SESSIONS TEMPLATES RESOURCES REPORTS SECURITY SETTINGS Settings Database License Script Servers Properties License FP Gat Mew Lona 1D IMPORTED ON GENERATED ON TYPE EXPIRES ON ORDER NUMBER SERVICE TAG RESOURCES 1361477433624 Thu 04 Jul 2013 Thu 21 Feb 2013 Trial Wed 21 Aug 2013 Amy Reed N A 45 MAX OVERSUBSCRIPTION ALLOCATION ERRORS Resource Count 45 2 0 Copyright O 2012 2013 Dell Inc All Rights Reserved 2 Optional Click the counters icon in F
208. ces can also be modeled and must be modeled to schedule and realize those virtual resources Examples of possible host resources would be Vmware ESX ESX1 servers CitrixXen Servers Amazon Cloud Rackspace Cloud Those resources can be of managed or control roles but the associated resource instance must have their virtualization flag set to true This setting indicates to the scheduler that those resources are the ones responsible for creating and destroying virtual resources To modify resource instance core properties perform the following steps 1 Open the resource instance and select the Core Properties section Enter as much information about the core properties as possible Fields that cannot be modified disabled are displayed in gray 2 On the Active System Manager menu bar click File gt Save to save your changes Inventory Management 9 27 Using Resource Instances Modifying Resource Instance Resource Availability Dates The resource instance requires at least one set of availability dates 1 e a from and a to date Availability dates are critical properties of the resource instance because the scheduler uses those dates to allocate the resource To modify the resource availability perform the following steps 1 In the Resource Instances view right click a resource and select Open 2 Scroll down to the Availability section 3 Click Add and enter the availability dates with an optional description within the ta
209. ch as resource types or resource instances are presented in the navigator pane or to group entries based on various properties you can specify Without any grouping options selected the entries are grouped based on their basic elements In the case of resource instances they are listed by their name You use the Group By feature to specify which properties display the resource type and resource instance information within the associated views Determines the hierarchy of resources displayed in the associated folder according to the set of properties you select The default Group By properties include a set of system properties for example but not limited to the following Manufacturer Model Classification Role Domain available only on the Resource Instances view Asset Tag Resource Pool and Status for the Resource Instances view which indicates whether the resource 1s active future or obsolete based on the availability specified in resource A list of Group By custom properties are also available when defined in the resource types Displays the provisioning parameters properties in the Group By dialog box For the Resource Instances view displays inventory parameters for which you can apply group by functionality To access the Group By dialog box see Figure 8 5 for an example in the top right of an associated navigator view click the Group By icon Figure 8 5 Group By Dialog Box Group By Available
210. characters that are designed to provide you with additional information These elements of the calendar are described in the following topics Accessing Calendar Menu Options for Resource Availability Calendar Displaying Aspects of the Resource Availability Calendar Accessing Calendar Menu Options for Resource Availability Calendar Right click the Resource Availability Calendar date bar the area at the top of the calendar that displays the sessions for resource instances within a time frame of a day a week or a month to view the following calendar menu bar options Day Calendar Default displays the calendar in one day segments Week Calendar Displays the calendar in one week segments Month Calendar Displays the calendar in one month segments Quarter Calendar Displays the calendar in quarterly segments Year Calendar Displays the calendar in yearly segments Lock View Locks the calendar so that the time frame remains within the display whenever the window is resized Now Displays the current date within the view Go to Date Displays the Go To Date dialog box Use this dialog box to set the date you want displayed as well as the Day Week Month display The red line shifts to the new date Displaying Aspects of the Resource Availability Calendar The Active System Manager product provides additional information about the sessions displayed within the Resource Instance calendar via the shape and color of the sessio
211. cheduler options e Priority scheduling Most of these settings are inherited from the user preferences E Note Only the administrator and the existing owner can change the ownership otherwise this field is read only 5 Click Next 4 Note Ifthe Global Parameters at Template level exist clicking Next opens the Scheduling E Session Global Parameters screen see Figure 11 9 For more information on Global Parameters refer Global Parameter section on page 11 28 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Templates Figure 11 9 Scheduling Session_Global Parameters E Scheduling Session Global Parameters Select parameter and click on edit button to edit value Marne Value Edit Value Compute 2 DatastoreVolumeSize 100g ImageName san 150 Bootable Imaqes esxi5 1_dell_ 2 InstallationDiskType 5D ESxServerLicenseKkey PJOSJ X8K40 28K41 0M842 A0UNN 2 CenterlP Address 10 128 38 98 GoldDatastoreVolumeNan GoldWolume ISCSWNICS vmnicl veinic3 vennicS vmnic i SCSlvSwitch wSwitchl PodName AS50 1 r AsMserverlP Address 192 168 48 15 vCenterClusterMame AS50ClusterTest1000 wCenterFolderName AS50FolderTest1000 vCenterDatacenter AS50DatacenterTest1000 BootProtocol static Storage StoragePoolName default StorageGroupIP 192 168 55 10 mr Ness Editing Global Parameters In Figure 11 9 select Global Parameter and click Edit Value to edit the value of Global Parameters The Edit
212. chive Bin Rules gt Run This process runs all of the rules specified in the Archive Bin preferences Restoring Archived Sessions To restore an archived session to your Active System Manager workbench perform the following steps 1 Open the Session Archive Bin view on the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Show View gt Other gt Session Archive Bin gt OK 2 Select the associated session and perform one of the following options e Drag it to the desired location within the Session view e Inthe Session Archive view right click and select Restore When prompted to confirm the Restore operation click OK 12 44 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Running Sessions Working with Archive Bin Rules m Note You may want to archive older templates and sessions depending on the Archive Bin rules defined by the Active System Manager administrator Note All users retain the ability to search such templates and sessions within the Active System Manager Archive Bin The following sub sections describe how to work with Archive Bin rules e Setting Archive Bin Rules e Running Archive Bin Rules e Editing Archive Bin Rules e Deleting Archive Bin Rules Setting Archive Bin Rules To set the Archive Bin rules for templates and sessions perform the following steps 1 Open the Preferences Archive Bin dialog box see Figure 12 40 by one of the following methods e On the Active System Man
213. cific resource instances W Keep existing history details Overwrite the template if already exists o AA Note You can modify certain parameters see Table 12 5 on page 12 19 and save any session you create The default name you use for the session in the Session properties dialog box see Figure 12 15 on page 12 19 determines how the session is recognized in the Active System Manager archive 2 Click the Name field and enter a name for the Template Do not use the original name Enter descriptive text in the Description field The current state of your work is saved to a new file in the archive and the original Template is not modified 3 Optional Click the Description field and enter a description for this Template 4 Click the Option field and select one of the following asset tag options e Save all resources as specific resource instances Saves the current state of your network All asset tags that were assigned when the Template was realized are saved in the Template The next time the Template is realized the exact same equipment is used Resources that were authored by resource type in the Template are now by asset tag e Save all resources as generic resource types Removes all asset tags from the Template even from resources that were authored by asset tag e Save resources as originally authored Keeps the by asset tag or by resource type setting of the resources as it wa
214. ck into the session editor is to drag it from the Resource Instances view or the Search results view see the Adding Resource Instances section on page 12 39 To delete resources perform the following steps 1 Open a session editor 2 Select an inactive resource in the editor 3 Right click and select Delete 4 Save the Template for the changes to take effect Using Annotations For detailed information about using annotations see the Using Annotations section on page 11 46 Associating Scripts to Sessions You can associate scripts and test cases associated with the Template being scheduled with sessions at the time of scheduling or post scheduling If there is an association the script will be executed when the session enters a Running state and the Active System Manager server can monitor and report the test case execution result Figure 12 4 on page 12 8 and Table 12 2 on page 12 8 define Active System Manager session states There are three types of scripts that you can execute e Shell scripts CLI based remote hosts should be provisioned with remote shell access or SSH access e HTTP based scripts an administrator should provision at least one HTTP server using the Active System Manager web interface Tools gt Script Servers gt New e Note One or more scripts can be applied to a session To associate a script to a session perform the following steps 1 Perform one of the following tasks to op
215. cluding spaces Click the First Name field and enter a first name Click the Last Name field and enter a last name Click the Role field and select User or Administrator as appropriate An administrator role has full access to the inventory functionality Click the Email field and enter an e mail address g Optional Click the Company and Department fields and enter that information as appropriate h Click the Time Zone field and select a time zone from the range of time zones provided All Active Note e Note System Manager application timestamp data will reflect this preferred time zone as defined in the user profile not the time zone that is defined in the user s desktop When changing the time zone you should reconnect to the server to enforce the new time zone in all displays view editors and so on Scheduling Priority The Scheduler uses this value to identify who has precedence in allocating resources among all users and groups The values range from 1 to 5 where the highest priority is 1 and the lowest priority 1s 5 the default 1s 3 Users with a lower priority may see their sessions rescheduled based on overall system allocations Only administrators can change this value Optional Click the Specify maximum session duration constraint check box to set limits on the number of active sessions a user can run in duration in day hours and minutes The user time zone will be reflected in the application st
216. cluding spaces and special characters to uniquely describe this connection Interface type Interface physical location usually referred to by the manufacturer Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Templates Table 11 9 Default Interface Properties for a Resource Instance continued Tab Name Provisioning Property Name Description IP Address Interface management port Only available when a management port is selected IP Subnet Interface subnet associated with IP address Only available when a management port is selected Gateway Gateway IP address Only available when a management port is selected List of all provisioning parameters that can be overwritten from their default value For information about setting up provisioning parameters see Chapter 8 Using Inventory Modifying Interface Properties Note Only the attributes with values are shown in the interface Properties view the others are omitted To modify interface properties display the interface Properties view and perform the following steps 1 Display the interface Properties view For Resource Type you can modify the editable properties listed on the Interface Inventory and Provisioning tabs For Resource Instance you can modify the editable properties listed on the Interface and Provisioning tabs 2 On the Authoring tab edit the Name field as appropriate 3 On the Configuration tab edit the property Manag
217. configuration By default and based on the Template preference some interfaces might be enabled To enable the interfaces essentially means to request the resource type or resource instance to schedule those interfaces to use in a session For example a Template is a request to the scheduler to book 1t You disable or enable the interfaces on the left or right pane If the interfaces are already enabled to disable interfaces select one or more interfaces in the left pane right click and select Enabled see Figure 11 31 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Templates pe Note The interfaces are disabled when the check mark next to the Enabled menu disappears Figure 11 31 Interface Enabled Preferences type filter text Template Archive Bin General Help Enable resource interfaces on link creation Inventory C Display labels by template name Scheduler Search Security Template Test and Script Execution XML General Restore Defaults Apply a To enable all interfaces of a particular interface type or on the resource right click the interface type and select Enable All Interfaces To disable all interfaces of a particular interface type or on the resource right click the interface type and select Disable All Interfaces When you author by resource instances all interfaces are enabled based on the resource instance s shared property If the property is set to true then you can
218. cript from the repository see Figure 13 8 Figure 13 8 Add Script from Repository Select scripts Select scripts you want to execute Look in fu01shome ssyed gf scripts v Name Size Last Modified Permission Owner E Abhik 4096 Jul 18 12 22 ANXN ssyed E gt Moin 4096 Sep 27 2011 drwxrwxrwx ssyed El abc tel 1060 Aug 8 17 32 PIPA ssyed E abcd xml 253 Jul 3 15 39 EEES ssyed El acquire cfg 96 Jul 3 11 47 EEES ssyed E acquire tcl 891 Aug 8 15 31 PUDO ssyed E atime102 tcl 310 Jun 18 2010 PAI ssyed E commonParser tcl 25857 Jul 311 52 EEES ssyed El script sh 244 Jul 25 11 28 INES ssyed test 4096 Jul 10 11 55 drncrwxryyx ssyed E test xml 635 Jul 3 13 35 INES ssyed gt test123 4096 Aug 10 16 25 drwxr xr x ssyed E testak sh 70 Jun 6 14 07 PUTA ssyed E time1 sh 105 Jun 17 2010 EIA ssyed 8 timedemo 136 Jan 18 2011 PIDA ssyed timescript py 253 May 26 2011 AAC AD ssyed 8 timescriptl py 253 May 31 2011 FIX root E timescript2 py 253 May 31 2011 LIX P XL A root E timescript3 py 253 May 31 2011 FIX P XX root 8 timescript4 py 253 May 31 2011 LIX P XL root E timescriptS py 253 May 31 2011 PAX root lt il a e Add from HTTP Server Adds the HTTP scripts see Figure 13 9 Figure 13 9 Add from HTTP Server Select the scripts you wish to execute O E http 172 16 100 55 rajl sh O E http 172 16 100 55 cgi bin script cai4 O E http 172 16 100 55 cgi binfpankaj cai C El htt
219. ctive consists of the following conflicts also called dependencies It does not allow you to delete resource instances that are included in a session pe Note This is applicable to the active and future session only It does not allow you to delete resource types that have resource instances that are included in a session It does not allow you to modify resource types in a way that might change resource instances or sessions If a dependency is present when you delete an item the Dependencies view displays at the bottom of the screen To resolve resource dependencies by the Quick Fix option perform one of the following operations Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Using Resource Interface Types e Select one or more session dependencies right click and select Quick Fix gt Cancel to cancel the session Table 5 7 describes the results e Note The Quick Fix option tries to automatically delete the conflicting issue However if those resources have dependencies of their own you must resolve them first E Note The Show Previous Dependencies icon located in the top right corner of the Dependencies view allows you to select which level of dependencies to view As you resolve each dependency it is removed from the list When all the dependencies are deleted you can finish modifying or deleting the original resource e Select one entry right click and select Quick Fix gt Update All to update all sessions depend
220. d 6 The following three options are available for the user to specify VLAN IDs e Auto lf the user does not provide any VLAN ID then the scheduler automatically assigns a VLAN ID to the VLAN component The value is assigned randomly from the value range defined for a specific matrix switch e Count TIf the user provides a specific count for example 4 the scheduler assigns any 4 VLAN IDs to the VLAN component These values are assigned randomly by the scheduler from the value range defined for a specific matrix switch for example 3 2 1 7 e Range Apart from setting individual values such as 15 16 17 for supported the VLAN ID the user can provide a value range to VLAN IDs such as 10 19 20 28 34 Note You can create groups for assigning value ranges and provide relevant names to E groups to facilitate users in mapping their VLAN ID requirements by looking at the group names This helps the users in selecting relevant VLAN IDs to serve their purpose rather than selecting random VLAN IDs Double click the Value field to display the Specify VLAN ID Range dialog box Click Add to display the Add Pattern dialog box The pattern format is either a single value n or a value range n m or a value range within a group gp1 n m where n and m are numerals and n is less than m Click OK to accept and generate all VLAN IDs associated with your pattern Note Without one resource set at least in your inventory t
221. d El E Interface gt Ethernet 10 100 100 E hr 1 1 fied ef Fibre Channel Liv A A 5 5 40 41 42 43 44 A5 46 El E Power Supply gt gt 110 22044C O 1 1 ps0 El E File System gt F51 A 0 1 partition Inventory Management 9 35 Linking Resources 3 Select the entry that needs locations and then click in the Locations area The Edit Interface Type Locations dialog box displays see Figure 5 21 Figure 5 21 Edit Interface Type Locations Edit Interface Type Locations Dell Durmmyl Locations for Interface Type GigabitEthernet to generate a bulk set of locations For example location 1 10 QF of ME TL Pattern Locations ethd ethl eth2 eth3 eth4 ifl 7 locations defined 2 OK Cancel 4 Enter the interface locations manually or use the Pattern Generator tool to generate a bulk set of locations in the table 5 Modify any names by selecting them with your mouse 6 Click OK to automatically add the locations to the resource type Linking Resources The Inventory perspective supports links between control equipment and managed equipment or between two pieces of managed equipment When you add managed equipment you must plan the physical connections between the new equipment and the Active System Manager control equipment and inform the Active System Manager software of these connections Note The Resource Instance tree views can display either Managed or Controlled resourc
222. d CSV file Perform a final validation check to ensure that your links are correct Populating the Link Inventory Spreadsheet 5 50 To populate the link inventory spreadsheet perform the following steps l Perform a complete inventory links of all resources in your environment 2 Enter the input field definitions for all links Table 5 18 defines the field properties Use these definitions when you populate the link inventory spreadsheet Table 5 18 Field Properties of Link Inventory Spreadsheet Field Description Link Name Optional Represents the link name If the link name is not provided a link name is automatically generated Link Description Optional Represents the link description From Asset Tag Represents the asset tag of the resource from which the link must be made From Dis Version Optional Represents the resource version If the version is not provided a link is created on the active version of the resource otherwise an error displays From Location Represents the interface location of From Resource to be linked To Asset Tag Represents the asset tag of the resource to which the link must be made Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Importing Connectivity Table 5 18 Field Properties of Link Inventory Spreadsheet continued Field Description To Dis Version Optional Represents the resource version If this is not provided a link is automatically created on the active version of th
223. d attempts to reconnect without user interaction If you are in the middle of a work session we recommend saving your work on a regular basis to ensure that any changes are not lost should a disconnection occur Note Client server compatibility check The Active System Manager client Version 7 1 0 can only Nor connect to an Active System Manager server Version 7 1 0 and above If your installed Active System Manager server is a prior version you must either upgrade the Active System Manager server or downgrade your Active System Manager client Connecting to the Active System Manager Server After Account Setup To connect to the Active System Manager server after creating one or more server accounts perform the following steps 1 Launch the Active System Manager software see the Launching the Active System Manager Client Software on Windows section on page 2 3 The Connect to Active System Manager Server dialog box displays see Figure 2 2 2 Click the Account field and select the account you want to use for your working session 2 6 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Connecting to the Active System Manager Server 3 Click the Username and Password fields and type the associated username up to 25 characters and password with the selected account and click OK 4 Click OK to access the server Note If your server must load a very large inventory database a dialog box may appear that displays the z progress
224. d manage software repositories Access and manage all templates Configure system wide session notifications and reminders Access and manage all sessions Start and stop ASAP Rescheduling along with other associated properties Manage Archive Bins and rules for both templates and sessions Documentation Lineup The current lineup of the Active System Manager product guide documentation for this release includes the following About This Guide Active System Manager User Guide Describes the installation operation and usage of the Active System Manager Control Center client software This guide provides information for end users and system administrator roles Active System Manager Online Help Provides quick online access to the GUI Help and reference material including the Active System Manager User Guide Active System Manager Solution Guide for AS50 Describes the Active System Manager installation and deployment in the context of managing a Dell AS50 converged infrastructure solution Active System Manager Solution Guide for AS200 Describes the Active System Manager installation and deployment in the context of managing a Dell AS200 converged infrastructure solution Active System Manager Solution Guide for AS800 Describes the Active System Manager installation and deployment in the context of managing a Dell AS800 converged infrastructure solution Active System Manager Solution Guide for AS1000 Describes the Active Syste
225. d select one or more resource types All resources of these types are displayed e Resource Instances Click this option and select one or more resources to display e Port Types Click this option and select one or more port types All ports of these types are displayed regardless of where the resources occur 3 Optional Enter a comment to appear at the beginning of your report 4 Click Create to proceed The report can take a few minutes to generate If ports have a relationship then the related ports are grouped in the same color rows The groups are separated from each other by a white space For each port the port location 1s displayed as well as the type of card that 1t 1s on and the location of the card There is also a summary report at the bottom that displays the total count of each interface type and the total count of each card type for which a name has been entered Reports 15 3 Resource Usage Showback Report Running a Session Report The Session report lists the sessions associated with the environment To run a Session report perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Reports gt Session Report The Sessions Filter Options display This filter works in the standard way for the Active System Manager software 2 If no criteria is entered then all sessions are included in the report You can perform an advanced filter search based on the parameters Owner Topolog
226. d select the sessions Right click and select Open Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Running Sessions Figure 12 3 Sessions View O Sessions 8N PEM WY To Present Future Name Status Topology Name Owner Start Date Time End Date Time ID E amp admin AUTO12 Confirmed vittoria admin 10 18 2010 09 58 PM PDT 10 19 2010 01 59 4M PDT 626 O AUTO12 Running CloudTest01 admin 10 18 2010 08 23 PM PDT 10 19 2010 12 26 AM PDT 625 So ForEver Running 1 pico surrounded by a pos admin 10 06 2010 02 37 PM PDT 12 31 2021 11 59 PM PST 622 Kal m E You can re order the default columns by dragging a column header to a different location Adjust the session content by using the grouping and filtering function see the Filtering section on page 1 12 and the Grouping section on page 1 15 The Sessions view displays the Canceled Completed Failed and Running if any status Figure 12 4 illustrates the session state workflow The tree is refreshed dynamically however you can click View gt Refresh Sessions to manually update the tree or press F5 if the focus is on the Sessions view Table 12 2 defines the various modes and states of the Sessions perspective while processing a session request Session Management 12 7 Working with Running Sessions Figure 12 4 Session States Workflow Create Session Operation Save As Operation Create Allocation Operation ancel operation DI
227. dates resource instances component or standard e Creates and updates the resource type for the component resource instance The import process provides the status of each component in the Status column of the Import editor The possible values of status at the import step includes the following e Walidated For a successfully validated chassis card or resource e Resource Server Validation Error For resources that fail the validation at the server e Resource Plugin Validation Error For resources that include incorrect plug in information e Resource Imported For the successfully imported resources This information is provided against the chassis of the resource 5 48 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Importing Connectivity e Resource Import Error For the resource that was successfully validated but failed to import due to dependencies such as the unavailable components Using Forced Import for Resources with Session Conflicts Importing a resource may have dependencies on the sessions running in the environment To import the resource anyway to reflect the changes you must cancel the user sessions Rather than manually canceling these sessions you can use the Forced Import option which automatically deactivates those resources in running sessions To force import for resources with session conflicts in the Import editor right click the resource and select Forced Import The Import editor sends an em
228. delete a session or multiple sessions perform the following steps 1 In the Sessions view or session editor select one or more sessions to delete 2 Right click and select Delete to display the Confirm Delete dialog box 3 Click OK to confirm the deletion Purging Sessions Note Procedure can only be performed by an administrator If you as a user try to purge a session the menu command is disabled To purge a session perform the following steps 1 Delete the session for details about deleting sessions see the Deleting Sessions section Es Note You can only purge a session after 1t has been deleted 2 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Tools gt Purge Sessions The Purge Sessions dialog box displays see Figure 12 16 Session Management 12 21 Working with Running Sessions Figure 12 16 Purge Sessions Select at least one session Owner gt Start Date Time End Date Time Name Template Mame Recycled Bin ID C admin 10 05 2011 11 59 PM PDT 10 07 2011 11 59 PM PDT futureD1 2 Picos by type False 43 admin 10 10 2011 11 59 PM PDT 10 17 2011 11 59 PM PDT futureD2 2 Picos by type False 44 admin 10 06 2011 11 59 PM PDT 10 08 2011 11 59 PM PDT futureDa False 47 admin 10 04 2011 11 59 PM PDT 10 08 2011 11 59 PM PDT now False 50 C admin 10 19 2011 11 59 PM PDT 10 26 2011 11 59 PM PDT later 2 Picos by type false 55 E 4 ii Select All Deselect All o Select at least one session to purge To
229. ds e Creating a New Resource Type e Importing a Resource Type e Copying Existing Resource Types e Updating Multiple Resource Types at Once Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Using Resource Types Creating a New Resource Type To create a new resource type you may need different types of resource information such as the resource data outlined in Table 5 4 Table 5 4 Resource Type Resource Information Resource Description Name Resource type name Manufacturer Resource type manufacturer name Model Resource type model name Role A list of roles available by category listed below Use the appropriate role value based on your Power supplies Console Management ports Interfaces File System How many of each type of interface is present on the resource type Interfaces console ports and power supplies Setup time and cleanup time Runtime image name provisioning parameters Config file name provisioning parameters Inventory Management resource type For Layer 1 or Layer 2 switching infrastructure select Matrix Switch as the role Controlled Advanced Modeling Physical Resources Virtual Resources Equipment Component Managed Equipment Virtual Hub Matrix Switch Patch Panel Power Controller Terminal Server TFTP Server For example 110 VAC 220 VAC or 48 VDC Used for managing the resource locally often a Serial EIA 232 port One or more additional ports Ethernet that are able to manage th
230. duces you to the Operation Center view and gives you insight into dynamic hierarchy of resources displayed in the Operation Center view This section also familiarizes you with the navigational aspects of Operation Center view and the possible operations available per object type in the Operation Center view Note To perform Advanced Discovery and display the current hierarchy of resources in the Operation Center view you are required to integrate the Active System Manager software with the Resource Manager Note The Resource Managers are third party vendors or equipment specific management agents that are used to manage physical and or virtual resources The examples of Resource Manager include VMware vCenter and Cisco UCS Manager The following topics in this section describe Operation Center in detail e Understanding the Operation Center View e Navigating Operation Center View e Managing the Resource Manager Using the Operation Center View e Editing Data Flow Values Understanding the Operation Center View 9 62 The Operation Center view is a Active System Manager feature that displays the dynamic view of a datacenter consisting of virtualized and configurable resources Using integrated Advanced Discovery mechanism the Active System Manager software discovers and displays the current state of resources in the Operation Center view The Active System Manager software retrieves information from vendor specific Resource Managers
231. duled The start time cannot be edited ifthe Yes No see Date Time session is already in progress description Scheduled End Date Time End date and time of when the session is scheduled Can be updated based on resource Yes No see availability that is not booked by someone else description Actual Start Date Time Start date and time of when the session is scheduled The start time cannot be edited ifthe Yes No see session is already in progress description Actual End Date Time End date and time of when the session is scheduled Can be updated based on resource Yes No see availability that is not booked by someone else description Participants List of users that have access to the session Owner is responsible for establishing the Yes participants which can be edited using the Edit Properties menu see Figure 12 15 on page 12 19 Notifications and Reminders Session Notifications Email notification settings for defining who is notified for specific sessions Admin Yes notifications can be applied to all sessions User notifications can be applied if user is the owner or on a per session basis Script Script and Test Case Displays only information related to the script association with a session Yes No see Association description Displays the resource level scripts and the associated test cases Note In case of confirmed session script and test case association is editable 3 Click Apply or OK to accept the modifications
232. e After test execution has begun you can stop it at any time This feature is designed for when you are executing many tests or the execution time 1s lengthy or when you want to change the settings and restart the test e Note It is impossible to resume execution of a stopped test case where it left off but you can start it again from the beginning To stop a test case perform one of the following options e On the Console view toolbar click the Stop Test Case icon This icon function ends the collection of data from a test but it does not necessarily cause the test to abort that is to exit from the operating system If you have a simple test that opens some temporary files does processing and then removes the temporary files you might prefer that a stopped test still ran to completion and deleted those files rather than exiting abruptly e On the Execution Queue view right click the test case and select Stop Working with Test and Script Execution 14 3 Working with Resource Scripts Working with Resource Scripts Resource scripts are executable files located in a script repository on a remote server The repository must follow a strict directory structure to allow for resource level scripts to be executed The directory structure should follow the Manufacturer and Model name as defined per each resource type For example if you have a Resource Adapter for a Cisco7206 resource type your repository should be
233. e NUMA asymmetric memory configurations Enabling this setting can decrease performance Optionally select Integrated RAID Controller if supported by the server configuration Selecting this option also selects the Include RAID configuration option on the RAID Settings page Optionally select Execute Disable to enable Data Execution Prevention DEP memory protection technology DEP is a set of hardware and software technologies that perform additional checks on memory to help protect against malicious code exploits Optionally select Single Root I O Virtualization SR IOV to enable BIOS configuration of Single Root I O Virtualization SR IOV devices SR IOV enables a single PCI Express PCIe based I O device to provide up to 64 virtual functions per 10 Gigabit Ethernet 10GbE port 10 10 Click Next to continue Adding or Editing RAID Information on a Server Template To exclude RAID information from this template deselect Include RAID Configuration If RAID is deselected the RAID setting will not be included any associated Server Profiles Alternately to configure RAID settings that will be applied to servers based on this template l or On the RAID page of the Create Server Template wizard select a Basic RAID Configuration level e RAID 0 Striped no parity e RAID 1 Mirrored no parity e RAID 5 Striped with parity e RAID 0 Good performance reliability and minimal overhead e RAID 1 Better performance
234. e a user ID UID and organizational unit OU The UID used in the figure should be available at the same OU which is specified with the ou attribute otherwise the Active System Manager repository is unable to establish a context with the external security store and hence no further operation retrieving users etc can be performed Secondly the Base DN attribute that is accepted by the Active System Manager software describes the organizational unit level relative to the ou attribute specified under the Bind DN attribute from where the users are to be picked up User Profile Management 4 7 Managing Security Functions For example if the Bind DN attribute is specified as uid admin ou system and the Base DN attribute is specified as ou system then all of the users belonging to the system node will be picked up by the Active System Manager repository and will be presented to the user to import into the Active System Manager repository If the Bind DN attribute is specified as uid admin ou system and the Base DN attribute is specified as ou group1 ou system then all of the users belonging to the group node will be picked up by the Active System Manager software and will be presented to the user to import into the Active System Manager software In other words the users belonging to the system node will not be presented to the user In second example above the users are imported into the Active Sy
235. e VMware VirtualMachine VMware Manufacturer Dell Asset Tag Dell_Chassis Role Managed Equipment Shared Description Domain System v Virtualization Infrastructure This hardware allows multiple operating systems to run concurrently on a host computer Hypervisor Infrastructure V v Availability Specify the resource availability dates Active System Manager scheduler will take account of these dates while scheduling Start Time End Time Description 02 12 2013 06 56 00 AM 12 31 2021 11 59 00 PM All Interfaces Interface Details Add or remove interfaces Specify interface details Location Type Interface 4 i File System T Location TenGigabitEthernet_0 10 File Servers lt Interface 1 Software Repositories Design g Component 192 168 120 171 40500 admin America Los_Angeles 7 0 0 21236 The Active System Manager software allows for management and visibility of each repository content particularly related with operating system OS images and configuration files via the Setup perspective A repository is a collection of organized files called elements to be used to provision a resource under test The Active System Manager software supports three repository types that are used during the Active System Manager process at Template and session times e File servers e Storage arrays Each type supports a wide range of standard protocols File Transfer Protocol FTP
236. e Adapter operations during setup and Read only teardown operations by providing logs Current status is also provided Same information is also visible in the Audit Log Report gt Session Audit Report Configuration Displays how the resource was configured by Resource To change configuration file settings Files Adapters based on the original Template requirement or in the session editor execute last system operation System Operations gt Apply Configurations Image Files Displays how the resource was configured by Resource To change configuration file settings Adapters based on the original Template requirement or in the session editor execute last system operation System Operations gt Apply Image Files Displaying Link Session Properties To display link session properties with a session open click the session editor and select a link or click the Link editor tab If there are multiple links between two resources the link in the Template window is shown with a thicker line Table 12 9 defines tab names description and user action of the Link Session Properties view Table 12 9 Link Session Properties Tab Name Description Link Displays link properties Provisioning List of property name values associated with the link Realization Displays Resource Adapter operations associated with the creation of the connectivity Layer 1 or Layer 2 If Layer 1 routing information with proper endpoints will be identified
237. e Figure on page 5 54 Select an existing resource pool and click Delete A message displays prompting you to confirm the deletion Click OK to confirm the resource pool deletion Managing Maintenance Windows Manager system without allowing users to log in during this time This function can be ideal for critical An administrator uses a maintenance window to perform administrative tasks on the Active System inventory or connectivity changes Another benefit is that user sessions scheduled during this interval are not impacted or terminated The goal of managing maintenance windows is to specify time when the Active System Manager system is down for maintenance The following maintenance period rules apply A normal user is unable to log in during the maintenance period An administrator is allowed to perform all the activities in the Active System Manager during the maintenance period An administrator can update or cancel the maintenance window in the Confirmed and In Progress state At the start of maintenance period a reminder is sent to the administrator During the maintenance window the Active System Manager RCP client displays an indication depicting that the system is under maintenance Administrator s sessions are ignored while finding the impacted sessions Accessing the Maintenance Window To access the Maintenance window on the Active System Manager menu bar click Tools gt Maintenance Window The Ma
238. e Name topology admin Cluster VMware ESA15 1 Hyperrisor deployment PXE boot HDD DHCP Owner admin Type session Status Running Scheduled Start Date Time 02 21 2013 01 44 00 AM Scheduled End Date Time 12 31 2021 11 59 00 PM Actual Start Date Time 02 21 2013 03 00 42 AM Actual End Date Time Participants Ww Name T rh DellDemo Fl vromana El techpubs O if engineering Can be rescheduled Scheduling Priority 1 Deadline 12 31 2021 11 59 00 PM Restore Defaults Most of these properties are also displayed in the Properties view for the selected session in the session editor background see Figure 12 14 2 Modify the properties as appropriate Table 12 5 lists and defines the session s default properties for the Session tab The Editable column defines which properties you can modify Table 12 5 Default Session Properties Property Name General ID Name Template Owner Type Status Session Management Description Internal number assigned for session Name assigned to the session Name of the underlying Template created Name of individual who created the session Session type session Session status see Table 12 2 on page 12 8 Editable No Yes No No No No 12 19 Working with Running Sessions Table 12 5 Default Session Properties continued Property Name Description Editable Scheduled Start Start date and time of when the session is sche
239. e System Manager also enables better infrastructure management decisions through user workloads and multi level graphical views of infrastructure templates These capabilities enable an IT administrator to make better decisions up front and troubleshoot problems more effectively if they do occur thereby minimizing unexpected downtime and improving recovery time Active System Manager Overview 1 1 The Active System Manager enhances the functionality of Active System Manager by providing a more complete end to end automation solution for both physical and virtual resources The software enables a cloud like environment and support pre built provisioning templates and custom orchestrated workflows for a wide range of physical or virtual environments It offers the ability to Table 1 1 Enhance the discovery and inventory of all components across multiple Active Systems Create and manage the capacity of resources and resource pools spanning multiple systems Simplify adding new or existing infrastructure resources to the resource pools with an extensive plug and play capability Automate template based provisioning and de provisioning of multi VM workloads along with the required virtual networking and storage capabilities Create and publish infrastructure templates Associate multiple custom and flexible orchestrations for end to end life cycle management of workloads Schedule allocate and ensure the capacity for co
240. e added at the end of the session Specified in minutes The default value is 0 The value must be in whole numbers By default the cleanup time for a Template is computed based on parameters specified in the resource type for each of the resources in the Template i e the maximum time required for any resource in the Template The Cleanup Time property creates additional cleanup time for a Template The number of minutes that you enter here is added to the normally computed setup or teardown time for the Template Option to execute all scripts when check box is selected By default all setup and teardown resource level scripts do not execute 11 27 Working with Templates Table 11 4 Template Level Properties continued Tab Name Category Property Description Provisioning System Setup Script Script file to run before a session becomes active By default no Template level setup script is used instead the resource level scripts are executed If the Template level scripts are specified the resource level scripts are not executed The Template level scripts provide any needed functionality that would normally be handled by the resource level scripts Provisioning System Setup Time Min Time spent before a session becomes active By default the setup time for a Template is computed based on parameters specified in the SDT for each of the resources in the Template i e the maximum time required for any resou
241. e as 15 9 Printing Reports from an HTML Browser ss 4 00 lt dort dwt 36S od 2S oe REE Rew ROSS eR ONS Ra BOSS Ses 15 9 Printing Reports roma Web Browser peris ii di tone hed edd bend eedaeedawaws 15 9 Chapter 16 Seuings 0 ai een tend A DS E See Me ea 16 1 COMMOUEING SENES side Be ae See rats Pda 16 3 SEAMOS ss a is ei eben thud se tey hide tey ia 16 3 Databases Gone ei eae nak Cie meee sew ete ae e Loans eee 16 4 Database Ts ACU o ae gas at en Bak eel an icra Be ana da dee named eB a ales 16 5 Refreshing Database erario parida 16 5 Database SONCdUICE o essa dina aii di ais di ies 16 5 DatabascsRolated Operations ia AE AAA AAA AAA 16 6 AS O A OS 16 8 SOUL CIS rta aida da dora ota 16 10 Metmine New Script Server ads at 16 10 DEMO SEED td ES AA a ee 16 11 PEONES o a A sb OL Se essa eee 16 11 Update RVOPEMICS a 5 cm ae rncucieie acide eae st bere a eee Ses Shouse AeA Kee nee oS a ee 16 12 IMBOLING PODERES 4 324 ad endi nme AS ii dh eee ee dae dene 16 12 XOOPS FTO De tiles aii aR Gl NI SAA 16 13 Chapter 17 Dashboard 0 esas eS eee eS Se ORE ae be Ped y co ee 17 1 Mandeine Wide ss Bites oe a ae ada at eee eas 17 2 PRIMO a WAG OCU A teary tigre ed aaa a a aie anton eg eee eR ee a ee ees 17 4 O A O me E E Oa a a ee re Oe eae ore ae eae ee ee oe 17 5 CUSTOMMAING A WIdSSL rr rines ES SOE TD OOO Se ie ee eae 17 5 Refreshine Wider Conten 2d dat na bene ede A E A ee teeeae 17 6 NTC ie WV IOC IE deca on ha cc tetera gina ieee hase GS ous A ales a
242. e ee eee eens 14 7 Customizing SCHpUEXCCULION 24550005400 eens dee itn de Se ae eee se ae ea Po a ce a ad ta 14 8 Working with the Execution Queue View 14 10 Startino an EXE CUOTA A DAA teehee 14 11 Stoppine an TEX CCUUOM 20D a A A ii 14 11 Delete an Execution ID A ia ke edad 14 12 Monitoring Execution Output crisis i O A ea iea iaie ai E mw aM ee a 14 12 Reviewing Executom Outputir fio bees Shae ae E eG SSeS BO ee He He AN oh eGR See Rs 14 12 Chapter 15 REDOMS sotana ie hoes ee neh ee boo gs ees bea ey di a a aio its 15 1 Usina Standard User Report PES e anon eee dace ey er Ae peg Wieck oS een AAA 15 1 Running a Control Equipment Summary Report 15 2 Running an Inventory Link Detail Report nnana nee eee e eens 15 2 Running a Managed Equipment Summary Report 15 2 Running a Managed Equipment Detail Report ee eee eee e eens 15 3 Runnino a SESSION Report caste oh shan os Ue ere ee A el eae eRe ewan Ash sain care ee Ae Sed eee Reda aes 15 4 Resource Usage Showback Report 15 4 Running a Session Audit REpOrt aldea oe ee wR ee OR Oe ee hen de a BA ral awn wae dees 15 6 Running Custom REPOSAN a es dk ey a E eee See AA 15 7 Contents 9 Using Standard Administrator Report Types 15 7 Runame a User Management Report ii AS A oho s ee AAA AAA Oke bE eet oe ees 15 8 Running a Template Utilization Report es 3 sobs bbw ed A ORE Or ew Ae AAA 15 8 PARTS IROL Sis de pn Stak a eee eck ol a vane Grea ai ane ncaa smn Me
243. e icon are represented with two concentric circles Table 11 5 lists and defines the default properties for the resource types selected Table 11 5 Default Properties for the Resource Types View Tab Name Resource Property Name Description List of all resource type information related to this Template You can use this tab for a high level view of information for the selected element Name e Template Resource Template name of the Template resource This name is automatically assigned by the Templates perspective e Inventory Resource name as specified in the inventory resource instance editor Exclusive For the Managed Equipment role only Option that determines whether the resource is exclusive or Resource not If a resource is sharable some of its interfaces can be assigned to one session while others are used in other sessions If your requirements include exclusive access to a resource you can prevent it from being shared by turning on the Exclusive property in this Template Any session based on the Template reserves the entire resource and prevents others from sharing it This property forces the Active System Manager scheduler to find a resource that can be allocated in its entirety for example all ports during the life of your session Thus even if you request only a subset of the ports in the resource the scheduler does not give any part of the resource a way to a new requirement for the same time period The
244. e numerical property type The value is equal to the entry e For the date property type The date is equal to the date set less than e For the numerical property type The value is less than equal to the entry e For the date property type The date is earlier than the entry less than or equal to e For the numerical property type The value is less than or equal to the entry e For the date property type The date is earlier than or the same date as the entry greater than e For the numerical property type The value is greater than the entry e For the date property type The date is later than the entry greater than or equal to e For the numerical property type The value is greater than or equal to the entry e For the date property type The date is later than or the same as the entry The modifier options are defined as follows Match All Functions the same way as the AND logic feature All of the rules must be met before the entry displays Match Any Functions the same way as the OR logic feature If any of the rules are met then the entry displays Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Active System Manager User Interface Elements Deleting Rules and Filters To delete a filter or rule select the associated rule or filter and click Delete e Note You can only select more than one rule to delete however you can only select one filter at a time to delete Grouping The Group
245. e prompted by the Active System Manager system as a warning 4 Select at least one user to import and for those to create Active System Manager profiles 5 Click Finish to complete the import process Adding an LDAP AD Repository Ea Note To perform this procedure you must contact your system administrator to populate the following enterprise specific fields Figure 4 5 represents a tree structure where each node represents an organizational unit within the LDAP repository There is one root level organizational unit called system which has two nodes group1 and sroup2 Group has a subgroup named Sub group1 and Group2 has a subgroup named Sub group2 In the Active System Manager application while defining an external authentication repository there are two parameters apart from others which determine the behavior of the application for example e Bind DN Aids in establishing a context with the external security store which is required to perform any operation on the security store e Base DN Used to search users at a particular organizational unit level Figure 4 5 External LDAP Repository ou System uid ad min OLl groupid oOu yroup2 uid naresh uid Abhishek OU Sub group OU Sub group uid bmiarshal uid jparker When a user adds or update a remote security store in the Active System Manager software the value specified under Bind DN has two components 1
246. e resource otherwise an error displays To Location Represents the interface location of To Resource to be linked Sequence Status and Output fields that are populated by the Active System Manager server when Link Error the user validates links imports links and imports valid links Importing CSV Link Files To import CSV link files perform the following steps 1 Access your environment staging server 2 On the Active System Manager menu bar click File gt Import The Import Select dialog box displays 3 Select the CSV Link Import icon and click Next to display the Import dialog box with status information about the CSV link file to import 4 Click the Select input CSV file field and enter the CSV link file to import or click Browse to search for the CSV link file and click Next Figure 5 28 displays a sample excerpt from the CSV Link editor Figure 5 28 CSV Link Editor LJ ATD1 Se AT COMP 001 v3 EX Samplelinks csv X Link Name Link Description From Asset Tag E H SampleLinks csv P 3 ererrerre none AT PICO 003 A AT PICO 004 1 2 name02 none AT PICO 003 AT PICO 004 1 323 AUT 6 1 DESCRI 226 1 AT PICO 001 AT PICO 002 1 Input CSV Editor 5 On the Import dialog box click Finish The Input CSV editor displays The Import Explorer automatically identifies all invalid rows of the CSV file with errors You can view these errors in the following views e Import editor First column i
247. e resource through a network Many resources especially network test resources have a varying number of different kinds of interfaces on the same resource such as DS 1 T1 DS 3 and OC 3 ports You may also need more details For example a DS 1 port can be used with standard Telco time division multiplexing or with Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM signaling In this case you need to select the appropriate interface type in the Inventory perspective either DS 1 or ATM DS 1 An OC 3 port might use standardized Synchronous Optical Network SONET OC 3 signaling or channelized signaling in which case it carries the multiplexed signals of a number of lower speed lines Depending on the resource type you would select a SONET OC 3c port or a CHOC3 port By qualifying the port in this manner you make more information available to users of the resource type More importantly you prevent two incompatible OC 3 interfaces from being connected in a Template heading off unneeded debugging efforts Used for managing the file system The Inventory perspective allows you to set a range the minimum quantity of the type of interface allowed on the resource can be zero or higher You also need to know the maximum number of interfaces allowable If you need an element of a type that is not currently available on the Active System Manager server you can add a new element type For more information see the Adding Interface Types section on page 5
248. e session editor right click and select Execute Session Scripts Based on your selection the script details may be pre populated however when you use the session editor option of opening this dialog box it will appear empty because you must manually add the scripts 1 e you must specify which ones to run By default you execute the scripts in parallel However to run in a specific order click the Execute Sequentially check box to display the following options Click Up or Down to manually change the sequence of scripts to execute Only available when you enable the Execute Sequentially check box Click Add to add a default script or click Add gt Add Default Script or Add gt Add Script from Repository to browse your script repository to add a script entry Click OK after making your selection Click Remove to remove or delete a selected script entry Click each property field and modify the existing values see Table 14 2 The default values are iterated from the preferences you configured in the Script Server Window gt Preferences gt Test and Script Execution gt Script Server Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Figure 14 2 Script Server Properties type filter text Archive Bin gt General gt Help gt Inventory gt Scheduler Search Security gt Template Test and Script Execution Script Server gt XML script Server Customizing Script Execution Select default script Use
249. eate 3 ChapUserDelete 27 ChapUserSetState Delay c GetAndSetVolumeSize lt GetVolumelQN InterfaceStatusChange Operation a Step 1 Q Dell EqualLogicStoragePool VolumeCreate a 2 Step2 Q Dell EqualLogicStoragePool ChapUserCreate a 2 Step 3 a Dell EqualLogicStoragePool VolumeAccessCreateChapUser a 5 Step4 E Dell Servers VMware ConfigureMEMonServer a amp Step5 Q Dell Servers VMware Create VMFS Datastore Mm Lx Cluster VMware ESXi 5 1 Hypervisor dep 52 ecute GY A AD KI E Abort On Error wd K KI KI Working with Templates m 6 Description VolumeCreate ChapUserCreate VolumeAccessCreateChapU Configuring MEM on Server VMware Create VMFS Data Template Management 27 SetGroupPerformanceBalance Q SnapshotCloneCreate Q SnapshotCreate 3 SnapshotDelete A SnapshotRename A SnapshotRestore A SnapshotSetDescription A SnapshotSetlscsiAlias pa SnapshotSetlsnsDiscovery A SnapshotSetMultiHostAccess A SnapshotSetRWPermission A SnapshotSetStatus A SnapshotShow A SnapshotShowConnections SysteminfoShowDetails xo UnAssignIPFromInterface Q VolumeAccessCreate Q VolumeAccessCreateChapUser Q VolumeAccessCreateForAllServers 3 VolumeAccessDelete 3 VolumeAccessDeleteForAllServers ag VolumeAccessRestrict ag VolumeAccessShow xo VolumeAssign ag VolumeBind ag VolumeCancelOperation H VolumeClone 7 4 m p 4 m j
250. ect Close Deleting Perspectives To delete a perspective perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Preferences gt General gt Perspectives to display the Preferences Perspectives dialog box see Figure 2 on page 1 7 2 In the Available perspectives section select the perspective to delete and click Delete gt Apply gt OK The resetting of the available perspectives take effect the next time the perspective 1s opened Note You cannot delete the built in perspectives the Delete button is disabled but you can delete any custom perspectives that you create Views Views support editors and provide alternative presentations and methods to navigate the information in your application Here are the key features of views e Views have their own menus and some views also have their own toolbars The actions represented by buttons on view toolbars only affect the items within that view e A view can appear by itself or stacked with other views in a tabbed notebook e You can change the layout of a perspective by opening and closing views and by docking them in different positions in the application window Note You can refresh the data displayed within views and editors by one of the following methods e Right click the view and select Refresh e Select the view and press F5 e Click File gt Refresh Table 1 5 lists the views available in the Active System Manager software
251. ecting the domain which is the highest hierarchy level in the Operation Center view or on specific selected resource management agents such as vCenter by selecting one or more resource management agents in the Operation Center view Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Managing Virtual Resources Note Synchronize feature is not applicable on repository elements However you need to rediscover the E repository elements to fetch the updated repository elements Viewing Resource Properties To view the properties of any specific resource click the specific resource The resource properties display in the Properties view The Properties view contains information related to the current status of the resource that can be used by the administrator for planning immediate deployments see Figure 5 38 for an example Figure 5 38 Properties Panel E Operation Center USA KO Resource Information No Filteri Me Pe ww Resource Details Mame Status System Domain D Properties gt Sessions 2 Templates monitoring lt gt Audit C3 Assoo_1 AS800 2 Ce GalePod AS800 Name Value sw E CGIJFQV1 Chassis B assettag Dell_Forcel0_2 B 104 NO Module Overview B deviceCommunicationIPAddress 192 168 120 91 s Ej Servers Server Overview APA A E 1 Stet Number goes 1 13 Slot N b ae Estes PEA E ipAddress 192 168 120 91 B 2 Stet Number B 3 Slot Number gt ismanagementagent paras B 4 Slot Number S ma
252. ection on page 4 2 Click Switch To gt repository name ez Note The internal Active System Manager users can be migrated to external store types and physically they are not moved to an external security store without re creating them into the Active System Manager system but they need to be created or exist in the external store being moved Resetting a User Password To reset a user password perform the following steps IN 2 Open the Security Management window see the Accessing a User List section on page 4 2 Select one or more entries for those users one at a time requiring to reset their password and click Reset Password The Change Password dialog box displays prompting you to enter a password for that user Click the Password field and type in the new password Click the Retype field and re enter the new password The Change Password dialog box changes to display the hidden changed password for the selected users Click OK On the Security Management window click Close when you are finished with this user or users Activating Users To activate a user perform the following steps l On the Active System Manager menu bar click Tools gt Users and Groups The Security Management window displays with the Users tab open by default see Figure 4 1 on page 4 2 Select one or more users in the table Click Activate gt OK to confirm the activation operation Activated users will be allowed
253. ectives Modifying Perspective Preferences Perspective preferences are set by default however you can modify them at any time by performing the following steps l On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Preferences gt General gt Perspectives to display the Preferences Perspectives dialog box Modify the preference settings as appropriate see Table 1 11 on page 1 37 Click Apply gt OK to accept the settings Opening Perspectives To open a perspective perform the following steps l Open the Open Perspective dialog box by one of the following methods e On the Active System Manager Perspective toolbar click the icon that represents the perspective you select to open e On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Open Perspective and select a visible perspective or click Other 2 Select the perspective to open and click OK to display the perspective within the application environment Navigating Perspectives You can use the standard procedure to open a perspective but if you are in a working state and want to work with an existing perspective you can navigate to a previous or next perspective To do so perform one of the following tasks Active System Manager Overview 1 7 Active System Manager User Interface Elements On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Navigation gt Next Perspective On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Naviga
254. ed to perform snapshot operation The associated repository is used for saving the snapshot copies The Resource Operation Results display the Asset Tag Result Return Code and Message Click OK when finished reviewing the results al Note This feature is only applicable to devices for which the Snapshot feature is implemented within the a Resource Adapter Executing Custom Based Operations Custom based operations can be performed on managed and control resources These operations are defined in the Resource Type Resource Adapter and marked available for end users For more information see the Working with Resource Adapters section on page 9 16 E Note Custom based and monitoring operations are available if they are defined in the resource adapter System operations are always available For details on executing custom based operations see the following sub sections e Executing Custom Based Operations on Managed Resources e Executing Custom Based Operations on Control Resources Session Management 12 69 Managing Virtual Resources 12 70 Executing Custom Based Operations on Managed Resources To execute custom based operations on managed resources perform the following steps 1 Open a running session right click one or more resources and select Custom Operation gt lt select an operation name gt see Figure 12 57 Figure 12 57 Custom Operation Menu Managed Resources testusertopo 2 Picos By Type
255. editor 2 Make your changes to the fields You can modify any field except for Manufacturer Use the Fill feature see the Fill Feature section on page 1 24 to create new content or to create multiple field values Active System Manager Overview 1 21 Active System Manager User Interface Elements El El 1 22 3 Delete content from the database by highlighting records and selecting either Edit gt Delete using the Delete option on the right click menu or pressing the Delete or Backspace key Note You must resolve any existing dependencies before you delete the record 4 Save your changes to the database either by selecting File gt Save or right clicking and then selecting Save 5 Optional Discard your changes by closing the multi editor without saving your changes or right clicking and selecting Revert The multi editor manages the following functions e Column Header Functionality e Icon Overlays e Pasting Functions e Drag and Drop e Fill Feature e Context Menu Options Using Right Mouse Click Column Header Functionality When viewed in the multi editor the resource types and resource instances display in a tabular format similar to a spreadsheet The column headers support menu options for sorting and hiding the columns The sort order for each column can be switched from ascending to descending with the right click menu or by left clicking the column header The Hide menu controls what column
256. editor right click one or more session links and select Disable see Figure 12 28 Figure 12 28 Disabling Session Links ia T AT PICO 02 Link_1 Lira i Link Custom Operation Open Session Audit Report Delete iaf Disable Switch to Link Editor Po Execute Session Scripts iaf Show Hide Annotations AT PICO 06 Preferences Attach Rendering Using e To enable a session link that you disabled With a session open click the session editor right click one or more session links and select Enable Note Disabled links do not have an impact on underlying physical structure during the Cleaning Up state 12 32 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Running Sessions Handling Link Preemption For information about creating new links and link priority see Chapter 8 Using Inventory If a path segment part of one of your links is preempted while the session is running the preempted link displays in red You can try reconnecting the link by right clicking it and selecting Retry To delete the links right click the links to delete and select Break Link You can add session links by switching to the link editor and dragging the link from one interface to a second one Managing Session Resources You can add resources make them inactive and remove them from ongoing sessions to maximize resource allocation The system scheduler is involved in committing any changes that affects res
257. ee ed OI OG OS 9 1 Associating Elements with Resource Types or Resource Instances 0 0 0 0 cee ee eens 9 12 Pde Repository EleMemMS a E Aa a Ra RES 9 13 Disassociatino mens hat Sh sek ee ne Raid eo ae hal ie eeu eee ba ah ones ghia yokes Wee a aude Eon te aie 9 15 Working with Resource Adapters soria dud dd SED SHAD DONE A 9 16 Openine the Resource Adapters View ostia A A AA oA 9 17 Opening the Resource Adapter Editor 2 bob hanno EAS AA AT AAA RARE 9 18 Oe yy ya ahr io a me A Sn aa ie A ea een Pe meee 9 18 OC AOL hs a eo e es ee ee 9 19 Applications AA A thai es oe wee ee ee eee ee eae ee eee 9 19 PUES roer hatin eRe a nore ned eae en ee eens mee tiene eee oe eet 9 20 A DOUE Ded e odos aah bs Pas eee ce ree es ye en et cies eh eae nese ee 9 20 Edito Resource Adapers casara ens ee Boe oe 9 20 Copying Resource Adapts di aaa cena ocean gee teed Aaa 9 24 Importing Resource Adaplers s 0 4 2 avs E EA RET OE EOE ee A AAA RAR RS 9 24 Exporine Resource A Capers ai ASA A A A 9 25 Delete Resource Adap rata tan ad AAA a 9 26 Chapter 10 Network Management 10 1 Undetstandine Global Identity Pools 3 30 3 As 10 1 Viewing Global Virtual Identity Pools 5 04 dees Aor dew dk oe oS Re RRS AER ea ESE Oh Ral Le Sees 10 1 NPG AVEC Ident CS sarees ae IN a ed de ota a Een ee eo Aaa Rte ee hae hee as 10 2 Adding Vittual MAC Identities se 2 ADE A AA A A CR ROSES 10 2 virtual ON dd Sart feo es E ea een hPa Be ne oe he eae Eads Cae a eee 10 2 Add
258. ee the Opening Templates section on page 11 11 2 In the Template editor right click and select Validate Importing Templates The import feature allows you to either import the Templates individually or to import Templates with Orchestrations For more information on Orchestration see Chapter 13 Orchestration Management To import a Template or Templates with Orchestrations perform the following steps 1 Select a method to open the Import Templates dialog box see Figure 11 6 On the Active System Manager menu bar click File gt Import gt Active System Manager gt Templates gt Next e In the Templates view right click and select Import Figure 11 6 Import Templates Import Templates Choose at least one template to be imported Import Templates with Orchestrations Select root directory O Select Orchestration Jar Import Templates only a Select root directory C Users abhishekp Desktop O Select archive file Templates Finish Template Management 11 15 Working with Templates 2 You can either Import Templates with Orchestrations or Import Templates only a Import Templates with Orchestrations Section e Inthe Select root directory browse to perform a smart search that displays all Templates found in the default directory in Templates section e In the Select Orchestration jar select a Template with Orchestrations from your file system e Select the Select root directory
259. eet eee Ray is os Swen oo eae eae iia 4 11 Rescttina a User PassWord d nde a en ees 4 11 IN A eth e Ot rie ah ent te ghee ets eee aah os eae 4 11 WS AC UV Ae OR SEIS eps area as aa 4 12 Publishmo oom Prones 4 29 tind dd data emake nett ere eases eae de Gaede ede tates 4 12 Customizing Targeted Environment AA A A ATA AAA 4 12 Saving Your Environment as a Login Profile 0 AS AR ARA AAA A SE 4 13 Associating Login Profiles with Users and Groups ccc ee eee eens 4 13 Weletine Loci Prole S a catenin two ot is ee eee eats T eee de ei ewes ee 4 14 AY Ai OVO Ci Ota cS sacaten se 4 carat gee tanta Ghd a ae Ses IA a OE ee ee E 4 15 PNCCESSING AO Lis oo 2 ok ek A dig hie ink halle ee woe ao ga heres a ee ee ae 4 15 A o e See eS 4 16 Edit GrOUPS isa de a dd a ci 4 18 PA A E E O 4 19 Det PerM SONS E A ERES AS Se Ae A AI E 4 19 Modiin Permissions ctas tds rar dp da 4 21 Managing Authentication Repositories 2d A ad a a 4 22 Activating Authentication Repositories nasasa A A AAA AAA 4 22 Deactivatino Authentication Repositories eis haa ee doe AO oad AAA AR 4 23 2 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Chapter 5 Inventory Management 00 eee tent ene eens 5 1 Understanding Resource Modeling rr a dagen Pe Sek RS edhe EG ee A oe eee 5 1 Building a Standard Active System Manager Inventory 5 2 Contento Discovery SEP ai e Skee AS AA A Hee eee E 5 3 Ruins DISCOVER arei AA a aA aa A A Pa EM are O
260. elect the Operations tab to list all system and custom methods defined in the Resource Adapter Perform the following tasks followed by the File gt Save function as appropriate to your needs To view or edit the methods select one method to see associated detailed information and the associated custom attributes definitions You can update the information at will Click File gt Save to save the new content of Resource Adapters To remove a method select one method and click Remove gt File gt Save to save the new content of Resource Adapters To add a method to the Resource Adapter click Add gt a method type Fill in the Operation Details and attributes for this exposed method Reference to the Resource Adapter code such as tcl files must be present on the Active System Manager server to be executed properly Note Operation details such as Available for End Users can be enabled checked or disabled not checked if enabled such operations are made available through the web application or in the application during the life of a session Note Building Resource Adapters requires the Resource Adapter SDK module along with the Active Applications System Manager Resource Adapter Developer Guide This guide highlights the Resource Adapter deployment structure and how to implement your RA interfaces To manage the applications defined in the Resource Adapter perform the following steps l In the Resource Adapters v
261. elete links e Add delete activate and deactivate resource operations dynamic session features e Save the current session configuration e Power on and off resources e Open resource terminals e List and execute test cases e Snapshot e Specify edit Provisioning policies e Edit Global Parameters e Perform system custom operations e Monitor view Resource Adapter logs e Execute session scripts e Activate inactivate resources e Retry setup You can also update the representation of the session rendering by performing the following operations similar to the environment during the Template creation and update processes From a session editor many other functions can be invoked such as working with a resource console adding or deleting links and saving the Template Each resource is shown with its name beneath its icon If a resource is shown in red it indicates that the resource could not be successfully set up for this session by the Active System Manager software A line between resources can represent one or more actual links and also indicates the current status of those links For more information about these functions see Chapter 9 Repository Management To open the session editor perform the following steps 1 Open the Sessions perspective see the Introducing the Sessions Perspective section on page 12 1 2 Select a method to open the session editor from the Sessions view e Double click any
262. ements on the right pane content This is useful when working with a large set of resources and the focus is on specific end devices and connectivity Session Management 12 27 Working with Running Sessions Link Type Selector Creating links usually defines a link as Simplex the default On the action bar see Figure 12 21 you can set other available options by selecting a link and applying a specific link type The default is Simplex Table 12 6 lists and describes the filters available on the link editor You can identify the different types of links through their link end point decorations see each respective figure for each link type to view the end point decorators Table 12 6 Link Editor Filter Options Icon Description Slee Allows links to go in one direction see Figure 12 22 Duplex Allows links to go in both directions see Figure 12 23 2 Multicast Allows links to go to multiple receivers see Figure 12 24 Tap Allows the source end of the connection into move to multiple directions see Figure 12 25 Figure 12 22 Simplex amp Topology_test y act Riinning 2 gt Link editor Eos eee dd Mgd_DIS_02 Mgd_DIS 01 10 100 1000 Ethernet 10 100 1000 Ethernet lt ethl ES Sin plex Link gt ethl eth eth2 eth3 eth3 eth4 eth4 eth5 eth5 FIBER FIBER 4 Fol Fol gt Fb2 gt Fb2 Fb3 lt 4 Fb3 gt Fb4 gt Fb4 lt 4 Fb5 4 Fb5
263. en previously used a dialog box displays prompting you to use another name otherwise skip to step 5 If you see this prompt click OK to return to the New Template dialog box 3 Select the Template Type as Normal Physical or Logical Note Ifyou select the Logical template type the option to choose the associated Physical template displays 4 For each participant select a Permissions option to assign e The Delete permission allows the user to delete the Template e The Update permission allows the user to edit and save the Template updates al Note Only Template owners and administrators can change ownerships participants and permissions Template Management 11 7 Working with Templates 5 Click Finish to complete the new Template creation The new Template opens in the Template editor as a blank page You are now ready to add resource types and resource instances set properties and define interface connectivity For details see the Filtering Templates section on page 11 13 Saving Templates You can modify and save any Template if you have permission or if you are an administrator To save a Template with the working Template open perform the following 1 Select a method to open the Save As dialog box see Figure 11 3 e On the Active System Manager menu bar click File gt Save or click Save as Ea Note On the Active System Manager menu bar you can click File gt Save provided that there are no
264. en the Script Association window page e At the time of scheduling using the scheduling wizard see the Scheduling Templates section on page 11 18 At step 9 in that procedure stop and continue with this procedure e In the Session view edit a session and select the script property and the Association tab The Rescheduling Session Associate Scripts Test Cases dialog box displays see Figure 12 38 Session Management 12 41 Working with Running Sessions Figure 12 38 Associating a Script on a Confirmed Session type Filter text Script O General El Notifications and Reminde Association Sequence ar Script 5 6 O No association O Associate with script or test case Associate Script Testcase Associate Scripts Test Cases Password aK Hostname Username Script Test Case Is Secure Timeout Mins Remove Environment training galese home galese script sh Associate a test case requires AutoTest to be installed Associated Test Cases Test Case Name Timeout Mins Environment C Execute sequentially Restore Defaults Apply I Select the Associate Script Testcase option and add a script see step 3 Associate Script Testcase The hostname username password script and Is Secure and Timeout Mins value can be automatically generated from your preferences that you set up in Figure 12 38 You can modify all six val
265. enable or disable it If the shared property 1s set to false then the resource cannot be shared and therefore all resources are enabled by default This section also describes the following methods for authoring interfaces e Authoring Interfaces by Resource Type e Authoring Interfaces by Resource Instance Authoring Interfaces by Resource Type Note To control the capacity of ports to be shared across session an administrator can provision a resource type with a new inventory parameter called the Capacity attribute at the interface level which is used and enforced by the scheduler not at an inventory level The Capacity attribute works for dynamic connectivity only Fe Note Values should be defined for each resource instance otherwise the interface can be used in an unlimited session the default value is infinite Table 11 8 lists and defines the default properties when selecting interfaces for a resource type You can view the attributes of interfaces on the resource s Properties view and view and edit them on the interface s Properties view Template Management 11 51 Working with Templates Table 11 8 Default Interface Properties for a Resource Type Tab Name Interface Inventory Provisioning Property Name Name Description Type Exclusive System Description Name you assigned to this interface or the default name assigned by the Templates perspective Text string that describes th
266. enance Window aireado aa 5 61 Manaoine Virmal RCSOULCES 205 tadas e a a aaa e A a eda eaa 5 62 Understanding the Operation Center View nunana annann A AS AAA AAA 5 62 Navisatino Operation Center VIEW 45 4 0 AA AS A E 5 63 Managing the Resource Manager Using the Operation Center View 0 0 0 0 ccc aanne neee 5 64 Using Resource Specilic OPENS sis caked Ghats ee eo eR RAG es Ce Ee AES ee oe eee es 5 64 Sy ie WL Onl ZINS RESOUICES aia ed reese Fae oe ee a a a en Ro 5 64 Micwine Resource Properes Ln Sade eae a eae we ek ee Oa oe ba ee ew ee ae 5 65 Auditing Device Related RA Operations estar dost d 04 mea oe De a ONS NEOUS LES 5 65 Dragging and Dropping Resources pi A eke eed te eae Chee eaten sesere 5 70 Montoro IRCSOULCES ii ath ween Oe LAA AAA 5 70 Edito Data Fow V ales nia ES Oe Mae end hh A eee ee oR Sd Ph eee ee 5 71 Chapter 6 Firmware Management 00 cc cece tence eee ne ees 6 1 Creating Active System Manager Software Repositories 0 0 0 0 0c eee eee eens 6 1 Creating Repository with Dell Chassis Firmware Repository Type 0 0 ee ee eee eee 6 1 PESTEQUISILES semanas rap une a I GAN ew ee sce ee 6 1 Steps to Create Repository with Dell Chassis Firmware Repository Type oooooooooooononnoooo o 6 1 Creating Repository with Dell Server Firmware Repository Type 0 0 0 0 ccc cee eee eee eee 6 2 Pie he QUISTES chika tegen ene ee ee et a a een ee ee es 6 2 Steps to Create a Re
267. encies Resources and resource interfaces will be removed from those sessions but the sessions will continue in a Confirmed or Running state Table 5 7 Quick Fix Results Attempted Task Conflict Displayed Quick Fix Action Deleting a resource Resource instances built on the resource Delete the dependent resource instances type type Modifying a resource Standard resource types Delete the dependent resource instances type Deleting a resource Conflicting Sessions Cancel or update sessions by removing instance resources or resource interfaces Modifying a resource Conflicting Resource Instances Delete the conflicting resource instances instance Conflicting sessions Delete the conflicting sessions Breaking a List of affected links Delete the links Compatibility Link Using Resource Interface Types This section lists all the resource interface types and selected interface type compatibility available in your environment You can add or delete interface types and associate certain interface types together Table 5 8 displays the fields associated with resource interface types Table 5 8 Resource Interface Type Fields Field Name Description Console Used for managing the resource locally often a Serial EIA 232 port Interface Information that describes the interface You can add this information when you add an interface type Note For resource types only this field is unavailable Power Supply For example 110 VAC 220 VAC o
268. ening Navi ator VIEWS EA AAA A OR SS 1 16 Navigatino Throuel the VIEWS 0 E SR AA A A A a eae 1 16 CRC AEN OY AG Ws NE e uo a A o A Pec eee 1 16 EIA Uy reas ios a ea esas 1 18 Openin Files Tor BOTAS ii ta a dis i n 1 19 ACV AMOS AA Ge a E EAS Ea 1 19 Modifvine Editot Prcterences can amp oe arden ded dod SPSS aia Cae es 1 19 Til BARES AAA er eh cae ene doe ae tet eel meek eos 1 20 Changing the Tab Placement for Editors 43 4 Ge lt a vu A AAA AA AAA 1 20 Maximizing Minimizing or Restoring the Editor Workspace o ooooooooooooo eens 1 21 IN A E nn O eo ee ee ee es 1 21 sins Munich Gor FUncuons a is A dio 1 21 Context Menu Options Using Right Mouse Click o o ooooooooooooooo eee ees 1 26 e A ack ees ele te i ete Bho ety tis el beh leis wah nal bad deed cc BE ea eh eas 1 27 Contents 1 OE GCN PN ess lentes na ia Gansta A A Fg es 1 34 ICONS ps ec dioss Gaon Aa ee Cet a a oe oe oda 1 34 Chapter 2 Getting Started sis e EA A AA oe A AAS 2 1 Active System Manager Client Application Requirements 0 0 0 0 ccc ee eee eens 2 1 Installing the Active System Manager Client Software 2 1 Installing the Active System Manager Client Software on a Windows OS 00 ccc eee ee eens 2 2 Installing the Active System Manager Client Software on a Mac OS 0 0 teens 2 2 Installing the Active System Manager Client Software on Linux o 2 2 Troubleshooting Active System Manager License Error Messages
269. ent 11 47 Working with Templates Quick Filtering In the Filter text box see Figure 11 26 enter a string to search and filter out elements on the right pane content This is useful when working with a large set of resources and the focus is on specific end devices and connectivity Link Type Selector Creating links usually defines a link as Simplex the default On the action bar see Figure 11 26 you can set other available options by selecting a link and applying a specific link type The default is Simplex Table lists and describes the filters available on the link editor You can identify the different types of links through their link end point decorators see each respective figure for each link type to view the end point decorators Link Editor Filter Options Icon Description gt Simplex Allows links to go in one direction see Figure 11 27 e Duplex Allows links to go in both directions see Figure 11 28 Allows links to go to multiple receivers see Figure 11 29 3 Multicast Allows the source end of the connection into move to multiple directions see Figure 11 30 on Tap Figure 11 27 Simplex de Mantel OA 2 Seer z z Link editor IA A ari El 10GE Pi Ethernet 10 100 1000 100b1 J jen 10gb2 i Fibre Channel LW Ethernet 10 100 1000 HP 40 Gi ied gt Ai El Fibre Channel LW ae d gt A2 pe 40 A 3 e 43 Je 46 gt ad gt A
270. enu Or click the Fast View icon in the bottom left corner e Restore the Resource Instances view to its former location by dragging the view Or reset the perspective by right clicking on the highlighted perspective name In the Resource Instances view the Active System Manager software also provides a calendar function that you can toggle on off to display resource allocation for more information see the Using the Resource Allocation Calendar section on page 8 11 Linking Views with Resource Instances 8 10 To author templates that can be scheduled check to what the resource is connected that is synchronized and be aware of the actual resource connectivity which resources are connected to matrix switches or to other resources and so on To determine if two resources can be connected you can use the Links view or the Resource Instances view to see if they are connected to each other Alternatively you can verify if the two resources are connected to the same matrix switch If they are you can author a Template that should be schedulable Note The term link does not refer to a physical link between resources in this context instead this is actually a feature that synchronizes the link view to the resource selected in the Resource Instances view To link the Links and Resource Instances views perform the following steps 1 In the Resource Instances view select a resource 2 Open the Links view on the Acti
271. equired to set up the software image and so forth Later this resource type 1s accessed and modeled to fit one particular server as a resource instance However more than one resource type may be required if mutually exclusive options are available for the resource model The following topics are described in this section e Building Resource Types e Modifying Core Properties for Resource Types e Adding Resource Interface Types e Adding Provisioning Parameters e Adding Inventory Parameters e Creating Custom Icons for Resource Types e Deleting Resource Types Building Resource Types 5 8 You can build a resource type by copying an existing resource type importing one or creating a new one This section describes some of the guidelines you should follow e Analyze lIdentify what interfaces other components properties and attributes the resource has Compile the information into a spreadsheet for reference e Copy and Modify Find the most similar resource of that type that already resides in the Active System Manager inventory and use it as a starting point Copy that resource and make the changes necessary to the properties and interfaces to match your target resource type e Create a New Resource Type If copying or importing an existing resource type is not practical you can create a new resource type within the Active System Manager software This section describes how to build a resource type using the following metho
272. er GH Select Login Profile For Use er E SOS AA Login Profile Default Reset 4 Select your Login Profile yw Note If you have clicked the Always login using this profile check box in your profile preferences this E dialog box will be skipped and your selected profile will be used 5 Optional Click the Reset check box to retrieve the latest customization from your latest login profile definition However if you select this option you will lose all customizations previously created 6 Click OK Account Management 3 5 Editing Server Accounts i Note You may be prompted to select between different login profiles published by your administrator The Active System Manager product launches with the login profile you selected To modify the login profile settings see the Saving Your Environment as a Login Profile section on page 4 13 and the Deleting Login Profiles section on page 4 14 Editing Server Accounts You can modify the properties of any of the accounts that you create If you modify the properties on the account to which you are currently connected or if you change attributes the Active System Manager client switches accounts to the changed version if required The Active System Manager client disconnects from the server and then reconnects to the server using the edited account properties To edit a server account perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar cl
273. er system without any changes to the operating software The RAF is a fundamental element that provides flexibility and extensibility to the Active System Manager architecture and which enables Active System Manager to be used across a wide range of technologies and applications Resource adapters are built using the Dell software development kit and can be deployed using the Active System Manager application The following topics describe how to work with Resource Adapters Opening the Resource Adapters View Opening the Resource Adapter Editor Deleting Resource Adapters Deleting Resource Adapters Editing Resource Adapters Exporting Resource Adapters Deleting Resource Adapters Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Resource Adapters Opening the Resource Adapters View In the Setup perspective the Resource Adapters navigator view lists all Resource Adapters deployed in the Active System Manager application To open the Resource Adapters view see Figure 9 9 use one of the following methods 1 Open the Setup perspective see the Introducing the Setup Perspective section on page 9 1 2 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Show View gt Other gt Active System Manager gt Resource Adapters Figure 9 9 Resource Adapters Navigator View 3 Resource Adapters 3 File Servers Software Repositories t E T TIT m No Filtering Name Manufacturer Model Version chal Default
274. er to reserve a Template for the session To execute Orchestration perform the following steps 1 Right click a running session and select the Orchestration to execute from Execute Orchestration e Note The right click menu is available both on the session graphical editor and the link editor i Note Clicking Execute Orchestration displays all Setup On Demand and Teardown Orchestrations 7 defined for the selected Template Setup and Teardown Orchestrations run automatically when the session goes into Setup or Cleanup reservation states respectively However you can choose to execute Setup and Cleanup orchestration anytime during the session The list of Orchestrations that appear on clicking Execute Orchestration gives you an option to edit any Orchestration for that particular session before executing 2 Select the Orchestration to be executed The Execute Orchestration dialog box displays see Figure 13 16 Figure 13 16 Execute Orchestration X Execute Orchestration New Orchestration_Test1 FL j Drag and drop operations to create sequenced workflow You can type in operation name to search the desired operation Double click the operations in specified Orchestration to Edit the properties Steps can be renamed by clicking on step label Available Operations View Orchestration View Search dh Add Step a gt ee Operation Execute Abort On Error Description RARA B gt Test Step_1 V V customO
275. erations gt OK to display custom view operation results see Figure 12 58 for an example Note For this to function properly you must have an open running session Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Managing Virtual Resources Figure 12 58 Example Custom View Operation Results AT PICO 01 AT PICO 22 storage Arrays O Custom Operations 3 429 EC Host_115 Execution Output PE PSA No Filtering Id Operation Marne Executed By Device Name Asset Tag Managed Device Fail 1601 Ernail 04282010 131 48h POT PicoBox400_1 AT PICO 01 2 1602 Ernail 04282010 131 Sh POT AT PICO 22 1 AT PICO 22 The Custom Operations view is a ordinary navigation view that supports Filter and Group By functions custom filtering and grouping It allows you to re execute and see the status and history of all those operations Executing Custom Based Operations on Control Resources To execute custom based operations on control resources perform the following steps 1 Open a running session right click a link and select Custom Operation gt lt select a control resource gt see Figure 12 59 Figure 12 59 Custom Operation Menu Control Resources O cua Ala No Filte testusertopo gt 2 Picos By Type ren gt E gt i There al x A 7 e AT PICO 02 Custom Operation Open Session Audit Report Delete Disable x r a te gar J AT PICO 03 Switch to Link
276. erations with success or error messages up to the printout time List of custom methods and input parameters used while setting up orchestration List of custom methods and input parameters used while cleaning up orchestration Screenshot of the session or custom rendering Custom user defined properties associated with the session Provisioning properties associated with the session Documents attached with the session List of links used in the session Running Custom Reports The Active System Manager server comes deployed with BIRT reporting services For more information see the BIRT documentation Administrators have the ability to deploy BIRT reports and make them available to their end users Those reports are accessible using the following procedure To run a custom report on the Active System Manager menu bar click Reports gt Custom Report The web portal report displays with a list of deployed reports Using Standard Administrator Report Types This section describes the following types of administrator reports e Running a User Management Report e Running a Template Utilization Report E Note In addition to the user the Active System Manager administrator can also run all of the Active System Manager user reports Reports 15 7 Using Standard Administrator Report Types Running a User Management Report There are two types of security management reports available The User report lists all of the administrat
277. ere the Active System Manager system builds provisions and interconnects the resources for the defined requirements For example the editor can indicate the following results on the Realization tab for each resource and link e Power Off Resources are displayed as grayed out see Figure 12 6 e Resource Instance Realization Error displays in red and are outlined see Figure 12 7 e Unrealized Links simple are marked in red and are outlined see Figure 12 8 You can retry or discard a failed link To display the properties of the link select the desired link in the Template tree or select the line representing the link in the Template window The properties are displayed in the Properties view Figure 12 6 Power Off Resources Displayed Es testyrd AUTO1245350078631 2 E New E m Session Link E Properties 53 oug a Property Value Name Link_1 Configuration re Description Realization Type Simple Link Priority 1 lt gt Session Management 12 11 Working with Running Sessions Figure 12 7 Resource Instance Realization Error O 3 4 E RESY_3684 O 1 2 TE F 3 gt o rr nay f E gt Sel e Link_2 a Sel 9 BT_21_CN_300INT_3 J BT_21_CN_300INT_4 Session Link E Properties 23 ES m Link Connection Type DYNAMICLINK Realization Realization Status Failure Realization Message Unable to realize path identified as PILOT12 1 09 04 gt PILOT11 1 04 01 gt PILOT9 1 03 09 Real
278. ers key Name datatype ismandatory valuelist iseditable default value scope manufacturer model Description Represents the name of the parent parameter for child parameters Key is Null for root level parameters Represents attribute name Represents attribute type String Default type numeric date password Represents if the attribute is mandatory or not Possible values are Yes or No Default value is No Represents associated value list The values is delimited by the vertical bar for example value value2 Represents whether the value of the attribute can be changed or not in the user interface Possible values are Yes or No default value Represents the default value of the attribute If attribute is marked as mandatory Represents the scope of attribute association with the inventory elements Possible value is manufacturer Represents the name of the resource manufacturer to which the attribute is related Represents the name of the resource model to which the attribute is related The example CSV file below represents the Provisioning parameters as defined in the CSV file see Figure 11 15 Figure 11 15 CSV File Example Provisioning Parameters key os os linux linux windows windows db db Template Management name datatype ismandatcvaluelist iseditable defaultval scope manutfact model windows Yes Yes all linux Yes all os Yes linux win Yes all usernamelinux Yes
279. erty and type edit the property name or value e To remove session based properties select a Custom or Provisioning property and click Remove 9 On the Scheduling Sessions Solutions dialog box select a scheduling solution 10 Optional Click the Session Name and modify the given name 11 Click Next to go to the allocated resource information or click Finish to create the session The top part displays the allocated resource instances selected by the Scheduler including interfaces If you Click the Identify Preemption Opportunities check box the bottom part can list sessions that should be canceled in order to schedule this session 12 Click Next The next wizard page displays the option to associate remote scripts and test cases with the session By default the No Association option is selected For more information about script association see the Managing Session Links section on page 12 27 13 Click Finish to confirm your session A prompt displays confirming your scheduled session The prompt asks 1f you would like to switch to the Sessions perspective to view your sessions 14 Click the Remember my decision check box to allow the software to always switch to the Session Perspective view after scheduling all future sessions yw Note This message displays if you are not in the Sessions perspective If you have clicked E the check box the message does not appear on subsequent session scheduling 15 Click Yes to
280. es the Active System Manager server does not delete the resource type and will display associated dependencies To delete a resource type perform the following steps 1 In the Resource Types view right click a resource type and select Delete 2 Click OK to confirm the deletion Using Resource Instances A resource instance is an actual and specific piece of physical equipment which conforms to the specifications of a resource type and which can be uniquely identified by an asset tag In the inventory model it may also be considered as a a set of unique parameters that define what interfaces are being used in the resource type for an actual piece of hardware in your environment The resource instance also defines the format tasks availability and the communication process used with the other resource instances in your environment The following topics are described in this section e Building Resource Instances e Modifying Core Properties for Resource Instances e Modifying Resource Instance Resource Availability Dates e Modifying Resource Instance Interfaces e Displaying the Resource Availability Calendar View e Deleting Resource Instances e Setting Inventory Parameter Values Inventory Management 5 21 Using Resource Instances Building Resource Instances You can build a resource instance by copying an existing resource instance importing one or creating a new one This section describes some of the guidelines you shou
281. es using the various filters This section describes the following topics e Using Resource Links e Creating Links Between Resources 5 36 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Using Resource Links Linking Resources You specify connections links between the following types of resources and resource components Resource power supplies and power controllers Resource console ports and terminal servers Resource interface ports and matrix switches Resource interface ports and patch panels Resource interface ports and other managed resource interface ports Creating Links Between Resources Links When you create a link the Inventory perspective compares the two associated ports against the following general conditions Are both interface ports compatible Are both interface ports available Are both interface ports currently unassigned to a link Are you trying to link an interface port to itself 34 Note You must create and associate an interface type before you can create the associated link For more information see the Using Resource Interface Types section on page 5 31 To create a virtual link to network environment resources perform the following steps l On the Active System Manager menu bar click Tools gt Links gt Edit The Links editor displays see Figure 5 22 Figure 5 22 v Lab Connectivity Links Editor This section describes all the links currently connected in
282. es view icon navigate to the Resource Instances view and select a resource The resource allocation opens with the resource and all sessions where the resource is currently in use e The standard calendar operations switch view etc and sessions extend move cancel are allowed e This view is refreshed automatically on session or allocation changes The purpose of the Resource Port Allocation view is to display the selected resource with all ports and for each port in which session the ports are being used To access the Resource Port Allocation view select one of the following methods e On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Show View gt Other gt Active System Manager gt Resource Port Allocation gt OK e In the Resource Instances view right click a resource instance and select Show Port Allocation The resource allocation opens with the resource and all sessions where the resource is currently in use Features of the Resource Port Allocation view include e The standard calendar operations switch view etc and sessions extend move cancel are allowed e This view is refreshed automatically on session or allocation changes Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Understanding Resource Allocation Viewing Provisioned Domains List In a distributed multi site environment each site that has an Active System Manager server is referred to as a domain Domains are provisioned by the Active
283. esource Instance e On the Active System Manager toolbar click New gt Resource Instance Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Using Resource Instances Figure 5 16 New Resource Instance New Resource Instance Resource Instance Create a new Resource Instance Select a resource type Name Manufacturer Model Dell BladeServer Dell BladeServer Dell Chassis Dell Chassis Dell Compellent Dell Compellent Dell Dummy Dell Dummy Dell EqualLogic P56110 Dell EqualLogic P56110 Dell Forcel0 54810 Dell Forcel0 54810 Dell IDA Dell IDA DummySwitch Dell Dummyl VMware Host VMware Host Managed Equipment 2 Select an existing resource type To search for a particular existing resource type use the filters and grouping and sorting tools to find the existing resource types that match your criteria 3 Click the Asset Tag Name and Role fields and enter values for the selected resource The Asset Tag value must remain unique across the entire inventory The Role field is automatically filled with the default values based on its type 4 Click the Domain field and select an appropriate domain By default the system domain is selected 5 Click Finish to display the new resource instance in the editor 6 Update add or remove the availability using one of the following methods e Select the availability date and update manually e Select the availability date and click Add e Select the availability
284. esti d0Test Testi 10Test Additionally using more than one numeric value is legal For example if the values 10Test1000 and 20Test999 are used the fields are populated see Figure 1 14 The only limitation is that the numeric values must be separated by at least one alphanumeric character Active System Manager Overview 1 25 Active System Manager User Interface Elements E Figure 1 14 Fill gt Series Option Example 3 10Test1000 20Test999 30Test998 40Test997 SOTest906 MESCE r Test994 o0Testa9s 90Testoge 100Test991 Note The Fill gt Series option only works from the top of the selection to the bottom To use this option going upwards 1 switch the sort order to force the column to list in descending order 2 create the values and 3 then switch back to ascending order Context Menu Options Using Right Mouse Click pa Most of the functionality of the multi editor is accessed through the right click menu Right click any field within the multi editor to access these options Table 1 7 lists the context menu options using right mouse click Note The multi editor for resource types is similar to the multi editor for resource instances but they are not identical The layout and settings are consistent from session to session If you change the sort order or hide any columns those options remain in effect until you reverse them However the layout settings for the resource instances multi edi
285. eter and click Remove see Figure 11 11 on page 11 26 Adding Resource Types pe To add a resource type to your Template open the Resource Types view select the resource type and drag to drop 1t in your working Template Note If you add resource types to your Template by dragging and dropping them in the Template editor you must drag and drop the resources individually one at a time On dragging and dropping the resource types in the working Template the properties of that particular resource type appear in the Properties panel You can update the values of property parameters in the Properties panel Note In case of Provisioning property the Provisioning parameters are loaded in the panel from the CSV file where these parameters are pre defined in the form of input field definitions For more information refer the the Adding Provisioning Parameters Using CSV section on page 11 33 The Outline and Properties views update to reflect what displays in your Template editor When you click a resource type on the Template editor a different set of properties values display in the Properties view in table form and the Outline view in tabular form Note When dragging a virtual resource type for example a resource type with the role set to virtual you can request more than one resource for the same type by setting the Virtual Object Count resource type property in the Properties view The multiple resource types as a singl
286. ethods for accessing your environment inventory E e Group By feature Allows you to group your resource type in a hierarchical fashion You can change the way the Active System Manager software displays the resource type and resource instance information by clicking the Group By icon displayed in the top right portion of the associated views For more information see the Accessing Resources via the Group By Dialog Box section on page 8 7 and the Grouping section on page 1 15 e tl Filters feature You use the Filters feature Filter icon to specify filters that forces the Active System Manager application to only display the resource type and resource instance information that you require within the associated views Built in filters are available and some are enabled by default Figure 8 3 Filters gt Managed Equipment Filter Example Filters All filters Filter rules v Name Add Property Operator Value Type Managed Equipment aca Role contains Managed Equi String Control Equipment Component Equipment Composite Equipment Virtual Equipment VLAN Equipment Schedulable Equipment Equipment in Maintena 4 p Match any of the above rules For more information about filtering see the Accessing Resources via the Filters Dialog Box section on page 8 8 and the Filtering section on page 1 12 e Search feature The Active System Manager
287. etwork type a virtual iSCSI MAC address is assigned to the server For an FCoE network type a virtual FIP MAC address is assigned to the server Adding Virtual MAC Identities You can add as few as one and as many as 1 000 virtual MAC identities at one time The maximum number of virtual MAC identities that Active System Manager can manage is 250 000 1 On the Active System Manager navigation bar menu click the Setup perspective 2 On the Active System Manager toolbar click the Networking perspective The Networking Configuration editor appears 3 In the Global Virtual Identity Pool folder click MAC 4 Click Add Identities Note Adding identities is not necessary as the system automatically generates identities as required based on established prefixes 5 In the Generate New Identities dialog box enter the number of identities to create in the Count field any whole number between 1 1 000 6 Click OK The identities are added to the pool Virtual IQN Identities Virtual IQN SCSI Qualified Name identities are unique device identifiers that facilitate iSCSI communication Each iSCSI identity comprises an initiator iSCSI Qualified Name IQN and an iSCSI MAC address Adding virtual IQN identities enables Active System Manager to automatically assign identity information to an iSCSI virtual NIC during deployment Adding Virtual IQN Identities You can add as few as one and as many as 1 000 virtual iSCSI identities
288. ew The Operation Center view facilitates the following set of operations e Using Resource Specific Operations e Synchronizing Resources e Viewing Resource Properties e Auditing Device Related RA Operations e Dragging and Dropping Resources e Monitoring Resources Using Resource Specific Operations The Operation Center view allows you to perform operations on the visible resources in the hierarchy The object specific right click operations vary based on the resource type and the resource level in the hierarchy However right click operations can also be customized for a specific resource To perform object specific operations click a specific resource type and the supported operations display in the Resource Information editor see Figure 5 37 for an example Figure 5 37 Object Specific Operation Example Supported Operations EN Create Datastore Cluster This operation is used for creating datastore cluster EN Create DySwitch Creates distributed switch Pe Dell Dummyl se Links 3 m Synchronizing Resources 5 64 Es The Synchronize feature allows you to re synchronize the retrieval of resources and display the current logical layout of objects in the Operation Center view hierarchy It updates the resource properties based on the latest status as retrieved from the individual Resource Managers Note The Synchronize operation can either be performed on all resources as viewed in the Operation Center view by sel
289. ew A list of preassociated files are listed You must then select from that list of files If the list is empty then file associations must be made in the repository definition In all cases the repository must be created and elements must be discovered imported and associated with a resource type Note You can click the Show All Image Files check box while selecting an image file This action displays all image files provisioned in the Active System Manager system both associated and non associated Remove Removes the file from the resource type for this Template Open Opens and modifies the configuration files while adding it into the Template Up and Down lf you have at least two files you can rearrange the order in which the files will be applied on the resource by the Active System Manager software For more information about repositories see Chapter 9 Repository Management For information about setting up provisioning parameters see Chapter 8 Using Inventory Name Filename derived from the repository Path Path derived from the repository Repository Repository name assigned or selected Adding Provisioning Parameters Using CSV The Active System Manager software allows you to drag and drop resources in a Template editor Along with the resource types the properties of each resource type are also loaded in the Properties panel of the Template editor see Figure 11 14 Template Management 11 33 Wor
290. ew execution Delete Deletes the execution Review Execution Output Allows you to review the complete execution output of script or test case in a file editor You can bring up the full output of the execution All past executions are saved on the server Expand All Opens all tree nodes Collapse All Collapses all tree nodes Refresh Refreshes the view to a current state Start Starts a new execution Delete Deletes the execution Review Execution Output Allows you to review the complete execution output of script in a file editor You can bring up the full output of the execution All past executions are saved on the server Expand All Opens all tree nodes Collapse All Collapses all tree nodes Refresh Refreshes the view to a current state Start Starts a new execution Delete Deletes the execution Expand All Opens all tree nodes Collapse All Collapses all tree nodes Refresh Refreshes the view to a current state Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with the Execution Queue View Table 14 3 Execution States and Their Related Functions continued State Description Running The execution is in the process of running You can view the start time Menu Function Description Start Starts a new execution Stop Stops the execution Delete Deletes the execution Monitor Execution Output Displays a new view Console where you can monitor the output in an ongoing
291. ewRP Description Association Details er Name Role Select All Fl DellDemo User techpubs User Fl vromana User Deselect All e Click the Resource Pools tab see Figure 5 33 to bundle or create a hierarchy of the existing resource pools Figure 5 33 Modify Resource Pool Resource Pools Resource Pool Management as Add Resource Pool Select assets resource pools users and groups for your resource pool Resource Pool Details Mame newRP Description Association Details Resource Asset Resource Pools Users Groups Select All Deselect All Ce 5 56 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Managing Resource Pools f Click the Groups tab see Figure 5 34 and add one or more groups to the new resource pool Figure 5 34 Add Resource Pool Groups Resource Pool Management 3 Add Resource Pool Select assets resource pools users and groups for your resource pool Resource Pool Details Name new RP Description Association Details v Name Select All if engineering Deselect All 4 Click OK Inventory Management 9 57 Managing Resource Pools Modifying Resource Pools To modify edit existing resource pools perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Tools gt Resource Pools Management The Manage Resource Pool dialog box displays see Figure on page 5 54 2 Select an existing res
292. ext gt a ii 2 Select at least one Template to export or click Select All to select all of the Templates displayed 3 Inthe To directory field type a location to export to or click Browse to select a directory location for your exported Templates If a directory 1s already noted skip this step and go to step 5 34 Note The Active System Manager software remembers the last directory you visited Note You can only perform this step with a valid directory 4 Check Export Orchestrations as well if any check box if you want to export Orchestrations with the Template 5 Click Finish to generate export and save the selected Templates to your desktop Attaching a Template Image You can associate a picture rendering of your Template to make it visible in the Template report or you can attach a custom rendering The default rendering is an image of your Template in jpeg format For details see the following sub sections e Attaching a Template Image from a Screenshot e Attaching a Custom Rendering Template from a File Template Management 11 17 Working with Templates Attaching a Template Image from a Screenshot To attach a Template image from a screenshot perform the following steps 1 Open a Template see the Opening Templates section on page 11 11 2 In the Template editor click the background right click and select Attach Default Rendering gt Screenshot the default 3 Click the Properties
293. f resources Table 5 9 outlines the typical workflow checklist for importing standard resource instance SDI based inventory with the Import tool Inventory Management 5 39 Importing Inventory Populating an SDI Inventory Spreadsheet 5 40 Table 5 9 Typical Workflow Checklist for Importing SDI Based Inventory Task Y 1 Perform a complete inventory of all standard network resources in your environment 2 Use the inventory data from step 1 to populate a network inventory spreadsheet For more information see the Populating an SDI Inventory Spreadsheet section on page 5 40 3 Migrate the data in the network inventory spreadsheet to a CSV file Note The CSV file also includes a set of additional input field definitions that are used by the Active System Manager software 4 Import the CSV file into the Active System Manager client For more information see the Importing Validated Resource Data section on page 5 48 5 Fix any returned CSV errors 6 Re import the validated CSV file into the Active System Manager client For more information see the Importing Validated Resource Data section on page 5 48 Note If you use the CSV editor in the Active System Manager client re importing the CSV file is unnecessary 7 Validate the imported CSV file see the Validating CSV Resource Data section on page 5 47 8 Fix any remaining errors and re import the validated CSV file For more information see the
294. f the tools used in the Setup perspective Tabs in the Workspace indicate the resources that are currently open for editing An asterisk indicates that an editor has unsaved changes 9 1 Introducing the Setup Perspective Setup Table 9 1 View or Editor Name Properties Templates Discovery Explorer Links Import Explorer Import CSV Editor Setup Perspective Elements continued View or Editor View View View View View Editor Description Displays the properties for the selected session Template or configuration file It is a set of property values that are reflected in what you see in the editors Lists the available templates previously created Supports built in filters From this view you can customize filters or group the Template organization by tree For more information see Chapter 1 Active System Manager Overview Lists the resource data populated into your inventory when you run the Discovery Explorer Lists the links between control equipment and managed equipment or between two pieces of managed equipment Displays the plug in data used by Inventory Import Tool IIT during the inventory import The following resource data is displayed e Attributes e Component Location Generator e Resource Location Generator e Icon Path e Slot Information e Hypervisor e Simple Resource Location Generator Allows the Active System Manager administrator to validate the inp
295. fault Runtime Environment Variables To set default runtime environment variables that will be passed to each resource script executions perform one of the following options 1 Open the Script Server preferences e On the Active System Manager menu toolbar click Window gt Preferences gt Test and Script Execution gt Script Server e Inthe Resource Scripts view select one or more resource scripts right click and select Preferences 2 In the Runtime Variable section select Resource Level Script or Session Level Script Table 14 1 lists the default environment variables Table 14 1 Default Environment Variables Context Default Environment Variables Resource Level Script Asset Tag Version Manufacturer Model Session ID Session Name Template Name Owner Session Level Script Session ID Session Name Template Name Owner 3 Build the default environment variable list for each context clicking Variables to select from the default variables list or enter manually your environment name Each variable must be separated by a space 4 Click Apply or OK to save your preferences Starting a Resource Script To start a resource script perform the following steps 1 Open the Resource Scripts view 2 Open a running session open in your session editor workspace and select a resource in that session 3 In the Resource Scripts view select one or more resource scripts right click and select Start The Execute Scripts dia
296. file template 8 Click Sessions in the left hand tool bar 9 In the Sessions view click on the Dell Servers object in the session that is to be updated with Firmware on Right click in the Sessions panel update and select Custom Operation gt Attach Server Profile 10 In the Custom Operation window select the server profile to be applied and click OK As part of attach server profile the firmware is updated as well as any other requested configurations Minimum Firmware Versions for Active System Manager Components Table 6 1 lists the minimum firmware versions for Active System Manager components Table 6 1 Minimum Firmware Versions Component Name Minimum Firmware Version Lifecycle Controller 1 1 1 18 iDRAC7 1 37 35 CMC 4 31 Broadcom NIC 74 8 M420 BIOS 1 5 1 M620 BIOS 1 6 1 M820 BIOS 1 5 1 R620 BIOS 1 6 0 R720 BIOS 1 6 0 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Chapter 7 Server Template and Profiles This chapter describes Active System Manager Server Templates and Profiles Server Templates allow you to configure a server s BIOS RAID firmware networking virtual NIC and boot mode Creating a Server Template Use the Create Server Template wizard to create a Server Template that defines the basic configuration of a deployed physical server including BIOS settings RAID settings network settings boot mode firmware versions and I O identity settings Before you begin it is recommended to
297. finished adding accounts The Connect to Active System Manager Server dialog box displays see Figure 3 1 on page 3 1 7 On the Connect to Server dialog box perform the following steps a Click the Username field and enter a username up to 25 characters Note Your username establishes what access permissions you have When the Active System Manager software starts you have the option of connecting with an existing account or creating a new account b Click the Password field and enter a password 8 Click OK to access the Active System Manager server g Note Some initialization windows may appear depending on the network connectivity and your machine E configuration The Welcome Home page displays confirming the connection see Figure 3 4 For more information about verifying the connection status see the Verifying the Connection Status section on page 2 7 Account Management 3 3 Creating New Server Accounts Figure 3 4 Active System Manager Welcome Page Connected Active System Manage File Edit Navigate Tools Reports Window Help Active System Manager Release 7 1 0 Welcome Dell Active Systems is a new converged infrastructure offering that was developed from the ground up to have superior infrastructure integration and an intuitive management experience IT organizations System in the form of a pre integrated system such as the Active System 800 a reference architecture or as a custom implementa
298. for all three main phases of the session life cycle Setup Teardown and Snapshot operations end users have the ability to define and change the sequencing of operations for each resource available in the Template If provisioning policies are not overwritten the Active System Manager system will execute its default policy Policy changes are saved with the Template content Changing the Default Policy Associated with a Template To change the default policy associated with your Template open the Specify Provisioning Policies window by one of the following methods e Inthe Template editor right click and select Set Policies e From the Template property gt Provisioning tab click Sequencing The Provisioning Sequencing window displays and lists the default policies along with all resources and resource types available in the Template There is only one set of provisioning policies per Template that can be defined Figure 11 19 Specify Provisioning Policies 1 Specify Provisioning Policies specify Provisioning Policies Select the Operation whose provisioning policies needs to be specified Operation Setup r Policies for Setup operation Default Policy Configured Policy Dell Dummy Reset Filter Generic Use Ctrl or Shift button for multiple selection Use Ctrl and Shift button for multiple selection drag and drop 2 Cancel Policies that can be overwritten are e Setup I
299. for those to create Active System Manager profiles 7 Click Finish to complete the import process Importing Users from an Existing Repository To import users from an existing repository perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Tools gt Users and Groups The Security Management window displays with the Users tab open by default see Figure 4 1 on page 4 2 2 Click Add gt Remote The Remote Repository dialog box displays with the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP repository and Network Information Service NIS repository options 3 Click the Use existing repository option click the drop down list and select a repository The User Authentication Repository dialog box displays which lists all users in a remote repository You can use the Show new accounts only check box to remove users that are already in the Active System Manager system to avoid duplication If duplicates are found you are prompted by the Active System Manager system as a warning 4 Select at least one user to import and for those to create Active System Manager profiles An administrator can change the user s role being imported either as a user the default or as an administrator 5 Click Finish to complete the import process Editing User Profiles To edit an existing user profile perform the following steps 1 Open the Security Management window see the Accessing a User List section on pa
300. for you to view modify and save sessions as well as interact with equipment in running sessions The Sessions perspective controls the layout of the user interface the Active System Manager software uses to display information for your test cases including which views are displayed and their positions within the Active System Manager software Introducing the Sessions Perspective The Sessions perspective the default perspective controls the layout of the user interface the Active System Manager software uses to display information for your sessions and test cases including which views are displayed and their positions within the Active System Manager software You can save the modifications you make to the Sessions perspective as you create them making your own custom user interface for viewing and executing sessions and test cases You can view and execute sessions and test cases locally and remotely via the Sessions perspective E Note You can use various Active System Manager perspectives to perform many of the same tasks For example you can also use the Sessions perspective to view monitor observe output and stop the sessions or test cases that are associated with your previously defined templates To open the Sessions perspective see Figure 12 1 perform one of these tasks e On the Active System Manager toolbar click Windows gt Perspective icon and select Sessions e On the Active System Manager toolbar click the Sessions pe
301. formation in a given category not just the information displaying on the screen Printing Reports from a Web Browser To print reports from your web browser perform the following steps 1 Click File gt Page Setup 2 Set the orientation to Landscape mode 3 Verify that the Print background colors and images option is enabled 4 Exit the Page Setup dialog box 5 Click File gt Print Alternatively you can use the link at the upper right of the report to export the report as a PDF Reports 15 9 Printing Reports 15 10 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Settings Chapter 16 Settings This chapter describes the Settings menu option this option allows the administrator to set a variety of system settings To access the Settings page on the Active System Manager menu bar click Tools gt Settings The Settings page displays with the Settings sub menu open by default see Figure 16 1 16 1 16 2 Figure 16 1 Settings Main Page Email Notification Script Server Active System Manager Active Infrastructure Management HOME SESSIONS TEMPLATES RESOURCES REPORTS SECURITY SETTINGS Settings Database License Script Servers Properties Settings Email Notification Settings Specify your Email settings for outbound notifications SMTP Server Host From Field support dell com To Field support dell com Email Subject Active System Manager Feedback Script Server Settings Specify you
302. g Click the Provisioning tab and set the values of the following Provisioning properties Template Management 11 45 Working with Templates VLANCount VLANCount Provisioning property facilitates the user to fetch the user defined range of VLAN IDs from a group associated with VLAN component If the VLANCount value is blank the Active System Manager software selects a VLAN ID randomly from the associated group and allocates it to the VLAN component On the other hand if count is specified and VLAN group name is not provided then Active System Manager will randomly pick the VLAN IDs and will associate it with the corresponding VLAN component VLANId Single or multiple VLAN IDs is associated with the VLAN component in a template However in case of multiple VLAN IDs the value can be provided in the value range format 10 15 If the VLANId is blank the VLAN ID is automatically supplied by the Active System Manager software at the time of the realization otherwise the ID must be a valid number that you set in your inventory e Inventory Click the Inventory tab and set the values of the following Inventory properties VLANGroup Facilitates the user to provide VLAN IDs ina group VLAN groups are created on a matrix switch where the user is required to create a VLAN group name that can have VLAN ID ranges along with individual VLAN IDs The user can associate only one group at a time with VLAN component If the user has specified
303. g resource type perform the following steps 1 Select the resource to copy by highlighting it 2 Right click the resource and select Save As The Save As Clone a Resource Type dialog box displays see Figure 5 10 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Using Resource Types Figure 5 10 Save As Clone a Resource Type Save As ES Save As Clone a Resource Type Name Dell Chassis Manufacturer Dell Model Chassis Roles E Component Hub Managed Equipment Matrix Switch Patch Panel Power Controller TFTP Server Terminal Server Virtual generic gif 3 Once you have created a new resource type from the existing resource type you can modify the following information e Core properties see the Modifying Core Properties for Resource Types section on page 5 14 e Interface types see the Adding Resource Interface Types section on page 5 15 e Provisioning parameters see the Adding Provisioning Parameters section on page 5 16 e Inventory parameters see the Adding Inventory Parameters section on page 5 17 Updating Multiple Resource Types at Once To update multiple resource types at once perform the following steps 1 In the Resource Types view select one or more resource types right click and select Open with Multi Editor The selected resource types open in a spreadsheet editor For more information about using multi editors see Chapter 1 Active System Manager Ove
304. gather the following information e Model recommended number of CPUs and amount of memory for servers based on this template exact number or minimum e Desired BIOS settings e Desired RAID settings e Desired firmware versions e Boot mode and sequence e Virtual NIC configuration s for servers deployed with this template e JO identity settings To create a Server Template 1 Click Operations in the left menu bar 2 In the Operations Center view click the Server Templates and Profiles tab 3 Click the Server Templates And Profiles tab near the top of the Operation Center view 4 Click the Create Server Profile Template button 5 On the Server Template Settings page enter a Name and Description to help identify this template for future use Note It is recommended to choose a name that reflects the template s purpose for example WebServer Datacenterl Valid characters include uppercase and lowercase letters and numbers The names of Server Templates must not contain spaces The following special characters are also allowed Server Template and Profiles 7 1 Enter the Model Number of CPUs and amount of Memory GB recommended to ensure good performance for servers based on this template When the template is deployed Active System Manager will recommend servers that meet these specifications Click Next Editing a Server Template Note Changes will not apply automatically to devices currently using th
305. ge 4 2 2 From the user list select a user to edit and click Edit You can only select one user at a time to edit The Edit User dialog box displays with all of the previously entered settings displayed in the Profile tab 3 Click the Password field enter the password modify the other fields as appropriate and click OK The Security Management Users tab window displays the updated information User Profile Management 4 9 Managing Security Functions Copying Users Some administrators use a time saving method for creating users by copying the users Instead of manually configuring each new user s permissions the administrator can create a template user prior to the creation This template user already has the basic groups and permissions that are common to all users When a new user has is created the administrator copies the template user and makes any individual modifications as necessary To copy a user perform the following steps 1 Open the Security Management window see the Accessing a User List section on page 4 2 2 Select the entry for the user that you want to use as a starting point and click Copy 3 The New User Add User dialog box displays prompting you to enter a password for that user see Figure 4 2 on page 4 3 All of the fields except for the Password field are filled in as for the original user You can modify these fields as appropriate 4 Click OK when you have completed step 3 The
306. ger Overview 1 23 Active System Manager User Interface Elements 1 24 Sometimes you need to enter dummy values for the read only columns When working with text programs such as Notepad or Word each value must be separated by tabs Figure 1 9 display the ReadOnly string bracketed by tabs When this text is pasted into the multi editor the ReadOnly values are discarded and the other values are pasted into the proper columns Figure 1 9 Text Based Information Example E Untitled Notepad Ea ix File Edit Format view Help Readon ly Modelsoog Readon ly Model3000 Readon ly Model3000 Readonly Model13000 Readonly Model3000 Drag and Drop The multi editor supports the drag and drop function from navigator views You can select one or more items and drag them into an open multi editor however you cannot drag and drop a group Fill Feature The multi editor includes a Fill feature that is similar to the fill function available in some popular spreadsheets Using the Fill feature you can insert an entire series of values for any column that is not read only You can duplicate the entry for a single cell across the entire column or generate a series of labels with incremental numbering The Fill menu is accessible by right clicking any field within the multi editor The Fill gt Up option creates field values based on the field at the bottom of the selection see Figure 1 10 Figure 1 10 Fill gt Up Option Example n
307. gt Repositories c On the Active System Manager toolbar click the New icon select Other gt Active System Manager gt Repositories The wizard displays a new dialog box for you to create a new repository Click Next to create a new repository Select Software Repository Select the Dell Server Firmware Repository from the New drop down list Click Next to display and enter information about the new repository Enter a Name and Description for the repository Ao E ay A 2 fe In the Repository Properties enter the correct http URL in the URL field to access the repository The URL Path can contain sub folders The URL defines the complete path to discover and use the update binaries for the server to be updated 9 Enter the HTTP Root path to the Linux machine where the server is hosted Active System Manager will extract subfolders from URL and prefix HTTPRootPath to discover the update binaries over ssh 10 Make sure the update files are present in lt HTTP Root Path gt lt folders present in URL gt 11 Enter the SSH username and SSH password for access by Active System Manager 12 Press Next to continue 13 Click Discover to start the browsing and discovery process and to view the associated file elements This could take a few minutes The discovery would only show the update binaries which can be applied on a server 14 Select the elements to be associated with the repository and click Finish to complete setting up the
308. gt Test and Script Execution 2 Click the Script and Folder Location fields and set the default values respectively These field preferences point to your Active System Manager file system The Secure check box represents secure communication from and to the execution host 3 Click OK Viewing Session Script Properties To view session script properties perform the following steps 1 In the Sessions view or session editor right click a session and select Edit gt Script The script properties display see Figure 12 38 on page 12 42 for an example The properties are read only and display the properties defined at scheduling time You can modify these properties only when the session is in a Confirmed state 2 Click OK to save and exit Archiving Sessions Typically you may want to archive older sessions depending on the archive rules defined by your Active System Manager administrator You retain the ability to search such sessions within the Archive Bin You can archive sessions using either of the following views e Archiving Sessions Using the Sessions View e Archiving Sessions Using the Session Archive Bin View e Restoring Archived Sessions Archiving Sessions Using the Sessions View To archive sessions using the Sessions view perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Show View gt Sessions gt OK 2 In the Sessions view right click a session and select Move to Arch
309. gt Window gt Open Perspective and Window gt Show View menus Select the shortcuts to add as cascade items to the submenus displayed in the Customize Perspective dialog box Your selections only affect the current perspective Click the Command Groups Availability tab and select the command groups that you want the Active System Manager software to add to the perspective Click the Toolbar Visibility tab to organize how you want to view the Active System Manager Perspective toolbar options Click the Menu Visibility tab to control which menu options to display on the Active System Manager menu bar e Note These tab options control the visibility of the menu items in the left panel If you deselect these items they become unavailable for use 7 Click OK Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Active System Manager User Interface Elements Saving Your Perspective As If you have modified a perspective by adding deleting or moving views or if multiple users are using the same computer and have different preferences you can save your changes for future To do so perform the following steps 1 Select a method to open the Save Perspective As dialog box e On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Save Perspective As 2 Click the Name field and type a new name for the perspective or click a perspective from the Existing Perspectives list to automatically display in the Name field 3 Click
310. hannel Le erei Common Features of the Link Editor Below are some of the common features of the link editor SAA E0 El l O AT PICO 06 e Pico Box400 E i Fibre Chat lt gt Fibre 1 ae Fibre _ Simplex e Duplex o Multicast Ss Tap ae Fibre Channel Li p Fibre Channel Ly ape Fibre Channel Li Fibre Channel Li Delle Fibre Channel LW aie Fibre Channel Li e The link editor comprises three parts a left pane with the selected element the middle pane that displays any links and the right pane that displays the other elements in a tree view e The top action bar see Figure 11 26 that allows you to define link types as well as building better connectivity Figure 11 26 Top Action Bar Link Editor Filter WA e When you create a link in the link editor the links also display in the Template editor To avoid confusion the link editor displays links from left to right The right pane displays the connectivity from one resource to another but the source is unknown To find the source in the right pane select the resource right click and select Move to Left The resource moves to the left pane e You can share the resource for example you can request the scheduler to allow for a subset of the interfaces e While the link editor is the primary place to create links you can also create links in the Palette view which is only displayed in the Template editor Template Managem
311. hapter describes the Active System Manager software s Orchestration feature The Orchestration feature helps you to create a template like structure called Orchestration for executing a sequence of operations in steps This chapter describes how to create update and delete Orchestrations The advanced features allow you to learn how to view the graphical representation of Orchestration while executing troubleshooting errors in Orchestration and linking Orchestrations with a selected template Understanding Orchestration The Active System Manager software s Orchestration feature is a logical grouping of administrative operations for management agents It is a set of ordered or grouped Resource Adapter RA method calls against an authored resource The Orchestration strings together a series of custom operations and scripts which can be executed during the life cycle of the session or by on demand by session owner or participants e Custom operations The custom operations are defined in RAs and can be associated with any step in Orchestration A set of required or optional parameters are usually needed to invoke an RA operation e Scripts are found in repositories defined in the Active System Manager The scripts have access to all the session level parameters that can be passed explicitly to the script call For more information about repository management see Chapter 9 Repository Management The Orchestrations are associated
312. hassis San1_Chassis_1 San1_Chassis_1 E100 1 E100 1 172 16 100 100 2 1_Card50 Sani_Card50_1 Sani_Card50_1 s0 OC 200 1 E100 1 100 1 172 16 100 10 31 cardso Sani_Card50_3 Sani_Card50_3 s2 OC 200 3 E100 3 E100 1 E100 2 E100 4 172 16 100 30 172 16 100 3 E Ror C Input CSV Editor Figure 5 27 Error on Validate Invocation Right Side O BE outline 2 320 ion Component Slot Component Interface Component Management Interfaces Component Management Interface IP Address Component Management El 3 Input CSV Editor E100 1 E100 1 172 16 100 100 255 255 255 0 a Sani_Chassis_1 s0 OC 200 1 E100 1 E100 1 172 16 100 10 255 255 255 0 San1_Card50_1 s2 OC 200 3 E100 3 EMS 172 16 100 30 172 16 100 31 172 16 100 32 255 255 255 0 255 55 ge San1_Card50_3 Row 3 Component Management Interfaces No interface found for the management port specified iv Importing Validated Resource Data To import your resource data as specified in the loader spreadsheet right click in the upper left corner of the file displayed in the Import editor and select Import Ea Note The Import menu option is enabled only when there are no validation errors The resource data and its component data are only updated when there are no validation errors in the resource SDI The Import editor imports the resource data and performs the following tasks at the server e Creates and updates resource types component or standard e Creates and up
313. he Active System Manager Resource Adapter uses the added edited parameters Name Description Default Value Encrypted Add Image MW Add Configuration A 3 Available for the Add function Modify the Name Description Default Value and Encrypted fields as necessary i Note To set the newly added provisioning parameter as Password data type check the Encrypted check box Note These parameters are case sensitive and must be entered exactly as shown 4 Click File gt Save to save the changes to the server You can also set resource type editor preferences to display warnings for incompatible provisioning parameters on the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Preferences gt Inventory and then click the Resource Type Multi Editor check box see Figure 5 15 Note When using the Resource Types view provisioning parameters are available for custom resource type filtering and grouping Adding Inventory Parameters You can define many types of custom inventory parameters for resource types and assign values for these parameters for each resource instance Inventory parameters can include such things as environment site location size speed acquisition date vendor style color etc The following topics describe how to add inventory parameters e Adding Inventory Parameters for Resource Based Scheduling e Adding Inventory Parameters for Capacity Based Scheduling
314. he Active System Manager folder and move the file contents to this location Execute the Active System Manager app file Installing the Active System Manager Client Software on Linux 2 2 To install the Active System Manager client software on an Apple Mac OS perform the following steps I Download the Active System Manager linux gtk x86_ 64 7 1 0 _xyzt zip file or copy the file from your CD Unzip the file into a specific folder destination on your hard drive Create the Dell folder and move the file contents to this location In the console execute the Active System Manager file Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Launching the Active System Manager Client Software on Windows Troubleshooting Active System Manager License Error Messages Table 2 1 lists the Active System Manager license error messages including their respective server message and suggested action Table 2 1 Active System Manager License Error Messages Error Message Client Type Invalid license Please install Web new license We could not find a proper Web license file deployed in your environment Active System Manager ran Web out of resource licenses Resource license allocation shows you are using 4 license resource seats out of a pool of 0 allowed Running without proper licenses may limit you in managing your active infrastructure fully Cannot establish connection RCP with Active System Manager Thick c
315. he Template does not work because the Scheduler expects this component in the Template Defining Templates with VLAN To define Templates with VLAN you must add a VLAN component into your Template To do so perform the following steps I 11 44 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Show View gt Components to display the Components view Inthe Components view select the VLAN component and drag it into the Template editor By default the Components view does not have an editor you can only drag it into the Template editor Create a link for each resource that must be added into the VLAN from the resource to the VLAN component endpoint Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Templates Figure 11 23 Enabling VLAN in Template Y AT VSWITCH 01 Layer 3 gt oO Link 7206VXR_004 7206vxR 003 Linkli e VLAN Auto Link_3 7206VXR_005 4 Switch to the Link editor see Figure 11 24 Figure 11 24 Link Editor VLAN Display AT FPABRIC 01 E singlePicowithFourPorts vitboria oi E A VLAN Auto 6 4 10 12 12 72 v1 lt b VLAN Port Eb Ethernet y Ethernet _0 a AT PICO 05 Ebi Ethernet 10 100 1000 eo ic 5 Set the VLAN ID either implicitly the default behavior or explicitly user defined a In the Template editor or link editor select the VLAN component b In the Properties view perform the following actions e Provisionin
316. he following steps 1 Identify the existing repositories on the Active System Manager menu bar click Tools gt Repositories The Repository Asset Association dialog box displays see Figure 9 5 Figure 9 5 Repository Asset Association P Repositories El eS Repository Asset Association A Select the repository to view association details Repositories Name Type eqfirmRepoDis Equallogic Firmware Re W EqualLogic Sto Equallogic Firmware Re EqualLogic Sto Equallogic Resource Po ISO Bootable I Trivial File Transfer Prot ISO Repository VM Boot Image Inventory ISO_REP VM Boot Image Inventory Association Details A Asset Manufacturer Model Default Add Remove o TD Gane Repository Management 9 11 Managing Repositories 2 Select one or more repositories and click Remove You cannot delete repositories if the elements of the repository exist in the Active System Manager view a dependency error displays see Figure 9 6 as an example Figure 9 6 Dependency Error Delete Repository x Delete file Repository failed due to integrity error ie Press Details to see the list of files Casio 3 Click OK Associating Elements with Resource Types or Resource Instances 9 12 Repository elements of any types must be associated with resource types or resource instances This association facilitates the workflow when you must
317. he selected Template To view Orchestrations of a selected Template select a Template and click the Linking icon in Orchestrations for example select the Amazon VPC template and click the Linking icon to see all related Orchestrations see Figure 13 15 Note By default the Linking icon is enabled and all related orchestrations display in the Orchestration panel Figure 13 15 Linking Orchestration with Template Mo Filtering aS admin E 1000 Topo topolagy adminj 1104 5 E vox El gt topologyfadmin 1104 EE Ondemand dl copy of s5 bi a Save As The Save As feature allows you to save the Orchestration with a different name In this case the saved Orchestration along with its associated Orchestration steps are cloned To clone Orchestration perform the following steps 1 Right click an Orchestration in the Orchestrations view 2 Click Save As to display the Clone Orchestration dialog box 3 Click the Specify Orchestration Name field enter a name and click OK Note By default the Orchestration name is pre fixed by copy of a selected Orchestration name Orchestration Management 13 15 Executing Orchestration Executing Orchestration Note On Demand Orchestrations are executed in a running Session You are required to schedule a Template before executing related Orchestrations in a running session To do this right click a Template and click Schedule Follow the scheduling process thereaft
318. he session in the session editor background You can display properties and later modify those that allow for editing see Table 12 5 on page 12 19 Most of these properties displayed in the Properties view for the selected session are in the session editor background see Figure 12 14 For reference see the Running a Session Audit Report section on page 15 6 Figure 12 14 Session Properties View __ Properties ma Session Mame Value Add Global Parameter System AS Provisioning Actual End Date Time Unknown rl I Actual Start Date Time 06 11 2015 10 34 PM PDT Open Attachments ee ETE a Duration 2 days 4 hours End Date Time 06 14 2013 02 33 AM PDT ID 15 Mame abhi_sessionl Owner admin Dsrtirinante Ladenin 12 16 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Running Sessions Table 12 4 lists and defines the session level properties Table 12 4 Session Level Properties Tab Name Category Session Custom Session Custom Session System Session System Session System System System System Session Management Property Name Name Actual End Date Time Actual Start Date Time Duration End Date Time ID Name Owner Participants Start Date Time Description Contains a set of custom and system session level property names and values Note A default set of properties may be available based on your Active System Manager deployment configuration You can add or
319. heck box for one or more system domains systems or system elements from the Active System Manager Configuration section g Note The Discovery Setup allows you to configure and perform Discovery operations on all or selected system elements However if you want to perform Discovery at system level then by default all the system elements of that respective system are selected for discovery Figure 5 1 Discovery Configuration Setup Discovery Configuration Setup Use this UI to discover one or more Dell Active Systems with associated servers storage arrays and switches TOR Before you proceed it is recommended to Gather IP addresses and access credentials associated with the chassis blade infrastructure elements storage arrays and switches TOR e Make sure all elements have network connectivity and the associated element management interfaces are accessible From the Active System Manager server System properties Name is mandatory and should be unique w Add System CERES Add Center Active System Manager Configuration Select elements to view supdate details E m System 6 4 El as200_2 Dell Equallogic P56110 322 Dell Force10 54810 Dell Force10 54810 Dell Servers Add Hyperw w Add Element e 8 8 4 Dell Servers a p E asso W Equalogici11 Dell Equallogicst a m El aseoo_1 ss Dell Chassis Dell Equallogic P56110 Dell Force10 54810 C 33 Dell Force10 54810 Sf E Hyperv_1 Se SC MM161 Mic
320. hem in the resource instance In each resource instance associated with the resource type you can specify default values for these scripts pe Note These parameters are case sensitive and must be entered exactly as shown g Note Inventory parameters are automatically available for custom resource instance filtering and E grouping when using the Resource Instances view 4 Note Do not encrypt system level inventory parameters like resourceSetUp or resourceTearDown that E will be used by resource integrations Adding Inventory Parameters for Capacity Based Scheduling Capacity based scheduling is used in the context of virtualized resources The scheduler must identify the host resource that is responsible for creating and destroying the virtual resources based on its internal capacity It can be CPU bound disk bound or memory bound To add an inventory parameter for resource scheduling perform the following steps 1 In the Resource Types view right click a resource type and select Open The resource type core properties display within the specified perspective 2 Scroll down to the Inventory Parameters section see Figure 5 14 on page 5 18 and click Add to add a blank parameter 3 Modify the inventory parameters as follows a A default name is already provided Click the Name and Description fields and modify as appropriate b Click the Type field and select the Numeric type Only numerical data is allowed in the inventor
321. hen Manufacturer then Model For more information about how to group and display resources using this function see the Accessing Resources via the Group By Dialog Box section on page 8 7 From the Resource Types view drop down menu see Figure 8 4 select Expand All Figure 8 4 Resource Types View Expand All Menu a Resource Types No Filtering a 2 Dell Dell BladeServer Dell Chassis Dell Compellent Dell EqualLogic PS6110 Dell EqualLogicStorageP ool Dell Forcel10 54810 Dell IDA Dell Servers Sa fa So do do jo jo jo a 2 VMware A VMware Host A VMware VirtualMachine In the Resource Types view select resource types and observe that the instances displayed follow the types selected Close the Resource Types view and then re open it on the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Show View Or click the Fast View icon in the bottom left corner Restore the Resource Types view to its former location by dragging the view Or reset the perspective by right clicking the highlighted perspective name Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Accessing Inventory This section describes the following topics Accessing Resources via the Group By Dialog Box Accessing Resources via the Filters Dialog Box Accessing Resources via the Group By Dialog Box Using Inventory The Group By function dialog box includes the following features Allows you to modify the way entries su
322. here is also a supported modifier for the pattern generator You can use the percent symbol to limit the upper limit of a range For example the Cisco AA 2ZZ C range only produces names from Cisco AAto Cisco ZC This modifier works with numeric ranges but it is only useful for alphabetical ranges Note There must be an equal number of unique asset tags and unique names Duplicated resource names are not allowed If you create duplicate names an Add Resource Failed error message displays Inventory Management 5 25 Using Resource Instances E A Copying Resource Instances Using the Advanced Clone Tool To copy a resource instance via the Advanced Clone tool perform the following steps 1 Open the Inventory perspective see the Opening Perspectives section on page 1 7 2 In the Resource Instances view right click a resource instance and select Advanced Clone to display the Advanced Clone of Resource Instance dialog box Note To create a single copy in the Resource Instance editor right click a resource instance and select Save As Enter a unique name and click OK This dialog box accepts one or two column inputs from Excel If you have a spreadsheet with two columns of unique names you can paste them into the bulk save dialog box If there are names already in the list or if you are only pasting one column the Inventory perspective prompts you to overwrite the existing names or append the new data and confirms which co
323. hestration Execution with Console View Session Editor The Session Editor view contains the watermark that indicates in the background the Orchestration and the real time step being executed see Figure 13 17 Figure 13 17 Session Editor Test Session Running 3 m A E resourceInstance Session Link Orchestration Management 13 17 Executing Orchestration Orchestration Execution with Default Operation Properties View The Orchestration Execution view displays the Orchestration and its status Completed Aborted In Progress Skipped skipped status displays when Execute is unchecked for the opened running session in a tree structure It also facilitates viewing the hierarchical representation of real time Orchestration step execution In the selected session editor hierarchical view each Step displays the Success or Failure of the step along with all operations when you click on the step Each step is linked to the complete Properties view of the selected step To view the status of operations in each step expand each step by clicking icon To view the hierarchical representation of Orchestration step execution click the visible Orchestration in the Orchestration Executions view then click 5857 Orchestration The hierarchial representation of 5857 Orchestration displays Click the step to view the related properties of operations in each step existing in 5857 Orchestration in the Properties view Clicking on the
324. history notes in the same manner For more information about filtering see the Filtering section on page 1 12 You can manage Template history details by using the following procedures e Adding History Note Details e Displaying History Note Details Adding History Note Details To add history note details perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager toolbar click Window gt Show View gt Templates 2 In the Templates view right click the Template and select Open 11 12 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Templates 3 In the Template editor right click and select Add History The History Note dialog box displays 4 Type a description and click OK Note You can add and modify history notes but you cannot delete prior history notes Displaying History Note Details To display history note details perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager toolbar click Window gt Show View gt Templates 2 In the Templates view right click the Template and select Open 3 On the Active System Manager toolbar click Window gt Show View gt Other gt General gt Properties gt OK 4 In the Properties view click the History tab to display the following properties e Date Displays the date when the note was created e Author Can be the Template owner or any administrator e Notes The Template history information you enter see the Adding History Note Details
325. iated with a reserved Template You can then select one of those test cases to execute on the remote host You can also execute multiple tests on the Template from the session editor While other Session perspective sessions can connect to the same session only the session that starts the test case can monitor it or execute commands on it To start a test case perform the following steps 1 Ensure that you are connected to the relevant session The test case Console view is refreshed automatically when you open a session editor in Running State For information about session states see Table 12 2 on page 12 8 Use the expand buttons in the associated Test Cases view to display the project folder work environment and suite containing the desired test case 2 Select and open a running session in your session editor 3 Open the Test Cases view The view content should be refreshed automatically based on the opened running session e Note To execute any test script you must have a running session open 4 Navigate the project hierarchy to select your test cases 5 In the associated Test Cases view select one or more test cases to execute right click the desired test case and select Start A new execution entry will be listed in the Execution Queue view Viewing Test Case Properties To view test case properties in the session editor or Test Cases view select a test case and open the Properties view Stopping a Test Cas
326. ick File gt Connect to Server to display the Connect to Active System Manager Server dialog box see Figure 3 1 on page 3 1 2 Click Setup to display the Setting Up Accounts dialog box see Figure 3 2 on page 3 2 3 Select the appropriate account and click Edit to display the Edit Account Information dialog box see Figure 3 6 Figure 3 6 Edit Account Information Edit Account Information pu Account ASM 0 Server 192 168 120 171 Port 40500 Transport Normal over HTTP ox cancer 4 Modify the Account Server Port and Transport field values as appropriate For details about the field values see the Creating New Server Accounts section on page 3 1 Note You can only edit or delete the accounts you are not currently logged into 5 Click OK when you have completed your modifications Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Deleting Server Accounts Deleting Server Accounts To delete a server account perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click File gt Connect to Server The Connect to Active System Manager Server dialog box appear see Figure 3 1 on page 3 1 2 On the Connect to Active System Manager Server dialog box click Setup The Setting Up Accounts dialog box displays see Figure 3 2 on page 3 2 3 Select the account name and click Delete E Note You can only edit or delete the accounts you are not currently logged into 4 Click OK gt Close to c
327. ieee A eG DSRS MO Ho WEEE A A 5 25 Updating Multiple Resource Instances at Once 5 26 Modifying Core Properties for Resource Instances eee eee e eens 5 27 Modifying Resource Instance Resource Availability Dates 0 0 0 eee enn nes 5 28 Modifying Resource Instance Interfaces annn nunnana 5 28 Displaying the Resource Availability Calendar View 0 0 0 eee eens 5 28 Deletine Resource Instances ri td AA A tags Rieck A Grete Bid Be A pond ses 5 30 Setting Inventory Parameter Valles ii A OER SAR ie CIR AOE NE Se td 5 30 Resolving Resource Dependencies ni ab wae bk ee eae he Geko Gk WERE MO ak WES AE BE REESE EO 5 30 Using Resource Interlace Types aiii deka eee A cake caer at dae Reus ks de ses 5 31 Addie Interface IPS IA A A AS Ai EI AAA de 5 33 Associating interlace PES DA E AAA eae Sd a ido sd e 5 34 Disassociatino Interface TIPOS epa a A ii a oe Re dol 5 34 Deletine ntertace pes noc abe be sec ad e A AA A AT ade ey 5 34 Modifying Resource Interface Type Location Information 0 0 0 0 00 000 eee eens 5 35 Using Resource Interface Type Location Names 00 eee ne ees 5 35 Generating Unique Location Names 1 eee cen e ene e eens 5 35 Lankans ResOurces lt 4 0 eh asas Selene vee et odie cane news eee hese sa ae eee 5 36 Usm Resource LINKS taa da Said eked A Pow ated at ek Ore are AOS ee ee Son 5 37 Creatine Links Between IRESOUICES di IS A A AA A OS Pe eee eee eas 5 37 Delina Like we ha wee waco ganas Pe oe
328. ield and type a new name for the perspective or click a perspective from the Existing Perspectives list to automatically display in the Name field 6 Click OK to add the name of the new perspective to the Window gt Open Perspective gt Other menu Creating a Fast View A fast view is hidden and can be quickly opened and closed It works like other views except that it does ee not take up space in your Active System Manager window A fast view is represented by toolbar buttons a a on the fast view action bar the horizontal toolbar on the bottom left of the Active System Manager window ar view When you click the toolbar button for a fast view that view opens temporarily in the current perspective When you click outside that view it is hidden again To create a new fast view click and drag any open view to the shortcut bar or right click the icon to the left end of the view s title bar and select Fast View bE HE Dia ne You can dock the fast view bar on the right and left side of the Active System Manager window by F left right clicking the bottom left corner and selecting the location AA EE vo Active System Manager Overview 1 17 Active System Manager User Interface Elements Editors Review the following tasks for using editors Opening Files for Editing Activating Editors Modifying Editor Preferences Tiling Editors Changing the Tab Placement for Editors Maximizing Minimizing or Restoring the Ed
329. ies Do you want to open or save this file x Name inventory_attributes csv Type Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Values File From 192 168 120 171 he While files from the Intemet can be useful some files can potentially g ham your computer f you do not trust the source do not open or E save this file What s the risk 2 Click Open or Save to a designated location 3 Open the file from the designated location and update the properties in the csv file Settings 16 13 Properties 16 14 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Chapter 17 Dashboard This chapter describes the Dashboard perspective and its features The Dashboard perspective provides an at a glance birds eye view of your Active System Manager To use this view you can manage add or remove widgets to share with the administrator a solid understanding of your physical and virtualized infrastructure Figure 17 1 displays an example of the Dashboard perspective Figure 17 1 Dashboard Perspective File Edit Navigate Tools Reports Window Help 6 y ET A A po Search v gt New Import Export ive Save as vel O al Active System Manager GaleForce Dashboard al gt 7 DashBoard se En ul Cluster Utilization Consolidated os CPU Memory Utilization Over Time Graph M Setup a a de Cluster s CPU Utilization we Inventory 22 cru a 0 6
330. iew open the Resource Adapter editor select a Resource Adapter right click and select Open In the Resource Adapter editor select the Applications tab to list all applications that can be launched from the application or web portal associated with the opened Resource Adapter Two application types are supported e Direct allows an administrator to link to a native application or specific URL that will be launched directly from the Active System Manager application or web portal e Resolve Indirect allows an administrator to invoke an appropriate RA method before launching the application or web portal For more information about building such an application method see the Active System Manager Resource Adapter Developer Guide Repository Management 9 19 Working with Resource Adapters Files About 3 Perform the following tasks followed by the File gt Save function as appropriate to your needs e To view or edit the applications select one application to see associated detailed information You can update the information at will Click File gt Save to save the new content of Resource Adapters e To remove an application select an application and click Remove Click File gt Save to save the new content of Resource Adapters e To add an application to the Resource Adapter click Add gt an application type Fill in the Operation Details for this exposed method application You can add or edit property value content
331. ific filter 5 Click to select or deselect the check box next to the filter name to turn it on and off Adding Rules to a Filter To add rules to a filter perform the following steps 1 Click the Filters icon to open the Filters dialog box see Figure 1 2 2 In the Filters rule section click Add There are three fields to modify to add a rule Active System Manager Overview 1 13 Active System Manager User Interface Elements 3 Select a property and an operator The list of operators will change based on the property type The parameters available in the Property field vary depending on what dialog box you access Set a value The Value field contains any text string or numeric value that you want to filter Press Ctrl Spacebar to view the available data in the database Repeat step 1 to step 5 as needed Table 1 6 describes the values for each filter rule These parameters represent fields in the database for each type of equipment Table 1 6 Filter Rules Property Type Operator Value String contains The entry must contain the value string anywhere in the field does not contain The entry must not contain the string anywhere in the field IS The value string must match the entry exactly is Not The value string must not match the entry starts with The entry must match value string from the first character ends with The entry must match value string to the final character Numeric or Date is equal to ie th
332. igns a random VLAN ID to the VLAN component However if both the assettag and VLANGroup properties contain a value then the scheduler assigns a VLAN ID to the VLAN component from the selected VLANGroup range On saving the value assigned to the Assettag property the schedular assigns a VLAN ID to the VLAN component see Figure 12 47 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Running Sessions Figure 12 47 VLAN ID Assigned to VLAN Component amp UTO1347945075344 Running 3 a P 1 f VLAN 79 Session Link Deleting a VLAN Component from a Running Session To delete a VLAN component from a running session perform the following tasks 1 Right click a VLAN component select Status and click Inactive see Figure 12 48 Figure 12 48 Inactivating VLAN Component 0 tesk session Running 3 m 7 f PT y all i A Resource Adapter Log i a a Ce Open Session Audit Report Set Policies Inactive Switch to Link Editor Open Resource Instance Editor Open Resource Type Editor Revert Changes Execute Session Scripts Show o Preferences h Attach Rendering Using Session Link Session Management 12 55 Working with Running Sessions 2 Click Save 3 Right click the VLAN component and click Delete see Figure 12 49 Figure 12 49 Deleting VLAN Component CO test_session Running 3 E S Open Session Audit Re
333. igure 16 6 to refresh the resource count and display the currently allocated resources 3 Optional Click Get New License to deploy or install a new product license 4 When the next license screen displays Figure 16 7 send an email support dell com to the Dell Support team to request a product license 16 8 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Settings Figure 16 7 Get New License bout Active System Manager Active Infrastructure Management Request Product License Send email NOW or contact Dell Support team at support dell com to obtain a software license Deploy Product License Paste the license file you have received from the Dell Support team and press the Submit button below License File Copyright 2012 2013 Dell Inc All Rights Reserved License 5 When the Dell Support team responds to your software license request paste the license file provided and click Submit 16 9 Script Servers Script Servers The Script Servers sub menu allows the administrator add and view the list of added script servers To view and add script servers perform the following steps 1 Click Settings gt Script Servers to display the list of existing script servers see Figure 16 8 Figure 16 8 Script Servers Settings Database License Script Servers Properties Script servers Defining New Script Server Y SERVER NAME SERVER PORT SERVER IP ADDRESS 172 16 100 219 Deleting Server
334. iles for editing or select resources for operations such as exporting Figure 1 1 displays an example of a generic navigator view Figure 1 1 z amp E S 12 Sample Project Some Folder anotherfile txt File txt somefile txt project sample txt Navigator View Example For a graphical representation of the application icons that are available on a navigator view Active System Manager Overview Active System Manager User Interface Elements Filtering To open a pop up menu that allows you to perform operations such as filtering grouping creating a new view expanding or collapsing the view right click any resource in a navigator view and select the menu that best suits your needs For more information about opening views see the Opening Navigator Views section on page 1 16 To see a description of each menu s function move the selection highlight to that menu item and press the context sensitive help key for example press F1 To display a system menu on a view that is currently open click Window gt Navigation gt Show System Menu All navigator views support the Filters and Group By functions that is they have built in system filters that you can customize Depending on the view you can filter and group by different properties For more information about these functions see the Filtering section below and the Grouping section on page 1 15 You can use the fil
335. in Profiles Customizing Targeted Environment To define a new login profile you first must rearrange your environment by creating and customizing perspectives views displayed and accessible on each perspective menu bar items shortcut views and toolbar items The way you set up your own environment perspectives and views 1s how you define your perspectives and views for your end users There is no other tool within the application to define your environment To learn how to customize a perspective see the Customizing Perspectives section on page 1 8 4 12 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Managing Security Functions Saving Your Environment as a Login Profile To save your environment as a login profile perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Tools gt Login Profile gt Save As The Save As Login Profile dialog box displays Note All Login profiles will be displayed as defined by all administrators of the system along with the Default Profile available with each Active System Manager deployment 2 Click the Name field type the profile name and click OK Or in the Existing Profiles list select one of the existing profiles to save and click OK If you select one of the existing profiles to save for your profile a prompt may display to overwrite the existing profile Ea Note You are unable to add and remove perspectives and views to an administrator defined login
336. in template and session Maximum resource count Set a maximum number of resources for which graphical editor can be opened This is a performance setting for RCP client 5 In the Schedular Options Settings section specify the scheduler options for the fields described in Table 16 4 Table 16 4 Scheduler Options Settings Fields Fields Description Generate scheduler solution Specify whether or not to generate logs in lux log file identifying solutions for the identification logs given template request Use randomness while finding Specifies that while finding solution one can introduce the randomness within the resource identified candidates such that in overall Active System Manager system one set of resource is not consumed more than other Here solution is no longer dependent on the sequence of resource in database But this will have drastic impact on the Power management solution for VM resource Solution of differing resource Specify that while finding multiple solutions for a template whether scheduler should give solutions which are differing in interfaces or it should differ in allocated resource instances 6 Click Save to save settings or click Cancel to cancel the settings operation The Database sub menu allows the administrator to backup the database and schedule backup operation for the database To back up and schedule database perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Sessions gt
337. ind and sets the entry s state to Confirmed If other sessions cancel or finish early there is an opportunity for a previously confirmed ASAP session to move up to an earlier time slot ASAP does this automatically The Active System Manager administrator can enable or disable this feature and the Active System Manager web GUI Welcome page displays its status Typically rescheduling occurs when a session is canceled or edited to terminate early Before canceling multiple sessions it is sometimes useful to stop the ASAP Rescheduling engine You can start and stop ASAP Rescheduling by one of the following methods On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Preferences gt Scheduler gt ASAP Rescheduling Make necessary schedule updates and click OK From the session resource calender right click a session and select Start Automatic Rescheduling or the Stop Automatic Rescheduling menu see Figure 12 55 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Managing Virtual Resources Figure 12 55 Start and Stop Automatic Rescheduling Menu Options Sessions 22 Execution Queue Past Present Future D AUTO1296176645665 Running ED ForEver Running Rae ahah LD 2servers Failed Open Topology D 5MINS Failed Edit Splusi Failed Amazon Linux Failed Cancel Amazon Linux YM Failed Reschedule Amazon Linux YM Failed Amazon Linux YM Failed Start Automatic Rescheduling lt gt lt Stop Automatic Re
338. ing Sessions e Purging Sessions e Rescheduling Sessions e Managing Session Links e Handling Link Preemption e Managing Session Resources e Archiving Sessions e Associating Scripts to Sessions Scheduling a Session Using Templates To schedule a new session perform the following steps 1 Select a method to open the Scheduling Template dialog box see Figure 12 2 e On the Active System Manager menu bar click File gt New gt Other gt Active System Manager gt Session e On the Active System Manager menu bar click File gt New gt Session e On the Active System Manager toolbar click the New icon select Other gt Active System Manager gt Session gt Next e On the Active System Manager toolbar click the New icon select Session and click Next e Inthe Templates view right click a template and select Schedule 12 4 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Running Sessions Figure 12 2 Scheduling Session pe Scheduling Session EJ xs Scheduling Session Select your session parameters Press Next to schedule ty Template Selection No Filtering gt E Name Owner f 2 admin 4162 admin 3 E 4417 admin aa admin CreateVM admin sec admin gt Test admin Tmpl admin Scheduling Behavior with Date Time and or Duration Settings Behavior As Soon As Possible ASAP v Duration 0 Day s 4 Hour s 0 Minute s D lt Back Next gt Finish Can
339. ing Template Links Authoring links essentially means to create connectivity links between or among the interfaces of the resources The following topics describe how to author links e Creating Links e Defining Custom Attributes for Links e Disabling and Enabling Template Links Creating Links You can only create a link for interfaces based on user preferences If the preferences Enable resource interfaces on link creation check box is selected see Figure 11 31 on page 11 51 you can link the interfaces even if some of the interfaces are disabled If it is not selected you cannot create links using disabled interfaces Links have properties By default they are automatically named for example Link _n Link names must be unique If you have 10 names all links must have different names if not you cannot save the Template To display link properties perform one of the following methods e In the link editor select a link e Inthe Outline view select a link Template Management 11 53 Working with Templates To create a simple link select an interface in the left pane and drag it to the right pane or from right to left To modify the link properties click a property field and enter an appropriate value Figure 11 32 Link Properties Example Niti AUTO1326283492229 Can Nit_Nex_03 Nit_Nex_04 Links Nit_Nex_04 Sal Link editor Filter Nit_Nex_04 1 Nit_Nex_03_1 10 100 1000 Base T 10
340. ing Virmal ION Identities on sind eons ets Bae ad dd pia 10 2 Virtual WW NIN and WWPN Identities 17244 0i0c44ee is is 10 3 Adding WWNN or W WEN Identities vv os ois ois seek baad ea eRe ee bese dwt hd aS Cee eens bees 10 3 Understanding INGiW OLKS a hoe Sa a ead eae Wc oe aw Be Oe EI Es 10 4 Nemo o AMM o II ee rae ere een arte tesa ose 10 4 Viewing onlieured NEtWOEKS dal nadie id teehee Gy ed eed ee tae ae 10 4 I Mabie ties VELAN ID dE sa A ee Sees 10 5 Addie Or EGitin a INCIWONC E AS Meee AS A O A 10 5 A A A O ee ee ee ee 10 6 Edito an IP Address Ranges is a ii A A eee iaa 10 7 Dele ine ar 1 Address Rane rs EI ia A Atos 10 7 Naming Conventions when using Orchestrations cece eens 10 7 Chapter 11 Template Management 000 ee eee enn tenn een ees 11 1 AMMA TYDES estaa AE onsen Ga Cea em oa ee bate oe aires 11 3 Physical TEMPIE a he oe ee ee EAS A AE AS As 11 3 Logical template ero raras ts arta rr dorada 11 4 Wotkino With Tempas 20d sd ic e 11 6 Creatine New emp lates taa rd aa ads 11 6 say me Templates sa o a EA o a a ci 11 8 Changing Template Ownership and Permissions 0 e teen eens 11 10 Opening templates conse oa do cae ta tat nee eS oh eRe eee awe Sed Ge de deans 11 11 Opening a melo Template erreseina tian EAS RAE AS AAA RSE 11 11 Opening Multiple Templates pd EEES Ae ee AS AAA Se ee 11 11 Closmekemplatos tata its ea atan tos db daa ada 11 12 Dilema Templates tt e Ao ate hd E a A 11 12 Manas
341. ing the Dashboard Layout e Rearranging Dashboard Content Adding a Widget To add a widget perform the following steps 1 Open the Dashboard perspective and view the widgets use one of the following methods e On the Active System Manager navigation menu click Dashboard e On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Open Perspective gt Dashboard 2 Within the dashboard editor on the top right click the Add Widget link see Figure 17 1 The Widget Directory dialog box displays the widgets to select see Figure 17 2 Figure 17 2 Widget Directory Widget Directory i Session mM Add it Now Add it Now Resource Allocation By TM Add it Now Resource Allocation By Host Cancel 3 Select the widget to add and click Add it Now The view changes to refreshed display of the widgets including the one you just added 17 4 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Managing Widgets Editing a Widget To edit a widget perform the following steps 1 Open the Dashboard perspective and view the widgets use one of the following methods e On the Active System Manager navigation menu click Dashboard e On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Open Perspective gt Dashboard 2 Select a widget on the title bar click the down arrow icon A and select Edit see Figure 17 3 Figure 17 3 Editing Minimizing Refreshing or Deleting a Widget
342. ino Template History Details 6 4 3 AR AA AAA AAA R SS 11 12 Addie History Note Details E Gane ad eae Me O ee wae be wake A 11 12 Displaying History Note Details sesos hark dad BSS OES woe an ORR ee 11 13 Pilternmo Templates sets a dda aie A Geer GAs oe ea we Ao ae rs 11 13 6 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Validating Templates as raid be hi oe Oboe A A AAA A hep ana Ronen 11 13 Validating Templates Automatically ence eee e nn ees 11 14 Validating Templates On Demand 4 904 243244 AA AA 8 24 OSA dees See Nes Meee Ree 11 15 Importine Templates eos cida 11 15 Expone Templates dat da A A AA dais dai 11 16 Attaching a Template MIES 000 RA AA deg Snes ete AAA ER AAA wees de 11 17 Attaching a Template Image from a Sereenshot o o ooooooorrrr cee eee een eens 11 18 Attaching a Custom Rendering Template froma File 0 0 2 0 0 cee ees 11 18 echeduline Templates iso cate ae ae ES A Aue ke ene lada 11 18 Archiving Templates using the Templates View eee nee e teen eens 11 24 Restorino Archived Templates vis qn A A A ee eae i eh eGR Rene Rs 11 24 Updating Templates using the Template Editor 11 25 Viewing and Modifying Template Properties o o o o oooooor ee eee n eens 11 25 Addine Resource INDESEADAS a 11 31 Setting Resource Type Properties for Scheduling 0 0c ee nee eee nne 11 36 Deleting Resource Types sie anna d eee h eo Sat A ho MARE A bak MELE Ree eee 11 37
343. intenance Window dialog box displays listing all of the maintenance windows already defined Inventory Management 5 59 Managing Maintenance Windows Adding a Maintenance Window 5 60 To add a maintenance window perform the following steps 1 Access the Maintenance Window dialog box 2 Click Add to display and define the maintenance window During the selected maintenance hours regular users will be unable to log in to the Active System Manager system only administrators can log in Click the Name field and enter a name for the maintenance window Click the Reason field and enter a reason for maintenance An administrator can identify or specify a maintenance window with following two options e ASAP within fixed time frame tThe administrator can specify two date and time options 1 the date time range start date time and end date time and 2 the duration of the maintenance period With these input request parameters the system tries to search time period when there is no user session defined except for the administrator owned sessions If there is any such time period available then the same 1s returned an error displays a message that the request cannot be accepted The administrator can then select one of the time periods from the existing list and accept the same e Fixed start and end date This option is applicable when the administrator already knows the time period for the maintenance period and wants to apply the
344. ion describes how to configure session notifications e Setting Session Notifications and Reminders e Adding Session Notifications e Editing Session Notifications e Deleting Session Notifications e Adding Session Reminders e Editing Session Reminders e Deleting Session Reminders Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Configuring Session Notifications and Reminders Setting Session Notifications and Reminders To set session notifications and reminders perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Preferences gt Scheduler gt Notifications and Reminders The Preferences Notifications Reminders dialog box displays see Figure 12 51 Figure 12 51 Preferences Notifications Reminders for Sessions Dialog Box TTT Preferences to si a type filter ted Notifications and Reminders lt gt E Archive Bin al Global Session Notifications and Reminders Help Activate the rule by selecting the rule checkbox and Apply button Inventory Active ID Scope Owner Name Description Ty gt Add Schedul yA A Ae 1 System eae Default Email default N Advanced Scheduling 2 System Wide Sessions admin Default Calen This ts default N Notifications and Remi Search Security Template Test and Script Execution XML U r M Select All Deselect All z Restore Defaults Apply o E cae 2 In the Glo
345. ions abhi_topol bopo_exc topology_creation vlan_topo approvaltestuseri 1 EL userx2 3 T ia T D H m E Resource Center gt Orchestrations Itopology creation to E w X E gt Jtopologyfadminftopolagy_creation 1 2 Ondemand 1 Mew Orchestration_Test 1 Preferences 9 Reset The Orchestrations view displays by default with the Template view Note The alternate way to access the Orchestrations view is as follows 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Show View gt Other 2 Click Active System Manager gt Orchestrations 3 Click OK to open the Orchestrations view Creating Orchestrations The On Demand Orchestration can be set as Setup Orchestration or Teardown Orchestration Any Template can contain a maximum of one designated Setup and Teardown Orchestration The context menu to change Orchestration type is based on applicability for example for an Orchestration that is of type Setup the visible context menu to change the Orchestration type contains On Demand and Teardown Orchestration types To create a new Orchestration perform the following steps 1 Access the New Orchestration dialog box using one of the following methods e On the Active System Manager menu bar click File gt New gt Other gt Active System Manager gt New Orchestration E Note The Template perspective should be pre selected to access the Ne
346. ip Permissions Login Profiles vE Name Role El A admin Administrator Fl vromana User El techpubs User O ii engineering 7 Click the Permissions tab to select and set permissions for your new group With this feature you can perform the following tasks to set the permissions e Sort the permissions by clicking the Name field e Select more than one permission at a time by clicking the respective permission check boxes e Select all permissions by clicking Select All e Remove all permissions from a group or user by clicking Deselect All For more information about permissions see the Defining Permissions section on page 4 19 8 Click OK User Profile Management 4 17 Managing Groups Editing Groups 4 18 To edit a group perform the following steps 1 Open the Security Management window see the Accessing a Group List section on page 4 15 2 From the group list select a group to edit and click Edit You can only select one group at a time to edit The Group group name Edit Group dialog box displays with the previously entered name displayed see Figure 4 10 Figure 4 10 Group group name Edit Group Group engineering Edit Group Edit Group profile membership and permissions Group Membership Permissions Login Profiles Resources Name engineering Scheduling Priority 3 El Specify maximum session duration constraint 0 Day s 0 Hourfs 0 Minu
347. is interface The string can be unlimited in length and composed of alphanumeric characters including spaces and special characters to uniquely describe this connection Interface type Indicates that the interface can be shared across multiple sessions at the same time Lists all inventory parameters to schedule in the associated types e cardlocation Location on the card resource containing this interface e cardname Name of the card containing this interface e cardtype Type of the card containing this interface e location Interface s location on the resource This is a selection from a drop down list whose options are set by the resource type Specifies a particular port rather than just the type Properties are entered in the form of a conditional expression lt Property name gt lt Operator gt lt Value gt where e Property name is the name of the property whose value is to be checked This can be one of the system properties listed above or a custom property defined in the resource type e Operator can be either the IS or IS NOT mathematical symbols e Value is a string whose value is to be matched The string is not case sensitive Both the property value and the string you enter is translated to lower case before the comparison is performed More than one property can be specified for a resource or interface The conditional expressions for the properties are logically AND ed That is all specified p
348. is list at the bottom of the File menu The default value is 4 Show multiple editor tabs Allows more than one editor tab to display in your workspace If active you can specify the number of editors to open before they are recycled Restore editor state on startup Restores the original settings for the editor Prompt to save on close even if still open elsewhere Save the editor when you close the application even if an editor is open elsewhere Close editors automatically Specifies whether or not to recycle editors in the Active System Manager software If active you can specify the number of editors to open before they are recycled The default value is 16 For example if you have 16 resources and you open a 17 resource the first resource is closed If it has unsaved changes you are prompted to save your changes Number of opened editors before closing For each file that is opened in an editor it is stored in a list of recently used files before closing the editor The default value is 10 When all editors are dirty or pinned You can also specify if a prompt dialog box should be opened or if a new editor should be opened when all the current editors are have unsaved information Once it is turned on the Pin Editor action is added to the toolbar and editor tab menu Pinned editors are not recycled To pin an editor so that it is not automatically closed right click the editor s tab and select Pin Editor Allows you t
349. is template To apply changes reapply the changes by attaching and detaching the changes Click Operations in the left menu bar In the Operations Center pane click the Server Templates and Profiles tab Double click any template in the Server Templates and Profiles tab to open the Edit Server Profile Template wizard Use the wizard to edit the template Adding or Editing BIOS Information on a Server Template To exclude BIOS information from this template deselect Include BIOS Configuration If BIOS is deselected the BIOS setting will not be included any associated Server Profiles Alternately to configure BIOS settings that will be applied to servers based on this template l On the BIOS page of the Create Server Template wizard select a System Profile to apply for power management The system profile sets the power management configuration for a server Profile options include e Active Power Controller Enables Demand Based Power Management DBPM to optimize for performance per watt All processor performance information is passed from the system BIOS to the operating system for control The operating system sets processor performance based on processor utilization Memory frequency is set to Maximum Performance and the fan is set to Minimum Power e Dense Configuration Optimized Optimizes power settings for reliability in systems with a large number of DIMMs CPU power management is set to Dell Advanced Power Contr
350. issions by clicking the Name field e Select more than one permission at a time by clicking the respective permission check boxes e Select all permissions by clicking Select All e Remove all permissions from a group or user by clicking Deselect All User Profile Management 4 5 Managing Security Functions For more information about permissions see the Defining Permissions section on page 4 19 6 Click OK The Security Management window adds the new user to the list of existing users 7 Click Close to complete the procedure Adding LDAP AD Users Adding an LDAP AD user remotely is performed using an import wizard It consists of importing users from remote authentication repositories based on standards LDAP AD To add LDAP AD users and create profiles for those users perform the following procedures e Importing Users from a New LDAP Repository e Importing Users from an Existing Repository Importing Users from a New LDAP Repository To import users from a new LDAP repository perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Tools gt Users and Groups The Security Management window displays with the Users tab open by default see Figure 4 1 on page 4 2 2 Click Add gt Remote The Remote Repository dialog box displays with the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP repository default and Network Information Service NIS repository options 3 Keep the Create a new LDAP repos
351. ists no record of creation date and time of devices that are either E imported or created manually Also the audit information remains unaffected if the device is updated or deleted yw Note Auditing is performed upon all device level operations starting from operations used in the discovery of the device till the operations used in tear down of the device However in case of Active System Manager upgrade before version 7 1 incomplete audit information displays 1 e no record for previously executed virtual operations is displayed As mentioned earlier the audit 1s performed upon all device related RA operations that are executed as a part of the following e Discovery Operations Details such as discovery performed by whom when the device physical virtual was discovered discovery creation date and time are displayed e Virtual Operations Audits operations performed upon Operation Center View are displayed e Device Operations Audit performed upon the following three types of operations are displayed System Operations Audit information about set up and tear down script execution is displayed Custom Operations Audit information about any custom operation on device 1 e on demand operations is displayed Session Orchestration If the device is a part of any session orchestration then audit information about orchestration details along with session information 1s displayed Refer Table 5 19 below to view the li
352. itating Template searches see Figure 11 8 11 18 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Templates Figure 11 8 Scheduling Session Scheduling Session scheduling Session Select your session parameters Press Next to schedule Template Selection No Filtering Name 2 admin 4162 4417 aa CreateVM tr Sec Test Tmpl Owner admin admin admin admin admin admin admin Scheduling Behavior with Date Time and or Duration Settings le le Behavior As Soon As Possible ASAP Duration 0 Day s 4 5 Hours 0 Minute s Finish OS 2 In the Template Selection section select a Template if not done already 3 Click the Behavior field and select a behavior see Table 11 3 for the scheduling preferences Table 11 3 Behavior Scheduling Preferences Behavior As Soon As Possible ASAP ASAP within fixed ti frame Fixed start and end date Group based Recurring Session Permanent Template Management me Definition Scheduler attempts to find the first available time slot where all resources are available for the proposed duration Scheduler attempts to find the first available time slot where all resources are available within the proposed start and end time and specified duration Scheduler attempts to find available resources within those date constraints Scheduler books more than one session for the same start and end time You can indic
353. itor open a running session 2 Right click a resource and select Monitoring Methods gt select a monitoring operation gt and enter optional parameters if required Executing Applications Each resource type Resource Adapter may contain one or more application definitions Those applications can be launched either from the Active System Manager system or from the Active System Manager portal To execute applications from the Active System Manager system perform the following steps 1 In the session editor open a running session 2 Right click a resource and select Applications gt select an appropriate application gt and enter optional parameters if required Opening Resource Adapter Log The Active System Manager application provides access to the Resource Adapter log on the Active System Manager server for each resource in a running session or session To open the Resource Adapter log perform the following steps 1 In the Sessions view open a running session 2 Right click a resource and select Resource Adapter Log gt View The log displays in a file editor on the workspace see Figure 12 60 12 72 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Managing Virtual Resources Figure 12 60 Resource Adapter Log Output Example Es SinglePicoWithFourPorts AUTO1255719902303 FourAMIs Cloud tHE Script Started by GaleForce Domain Execution Service fF H A Ommand tclsh fhome pdeloulay galeforcesi pm i
354. itor Workspace Navigating Editors Using Multi Editor Functions Context Menu Options Using Right Mouse Click An editor is a pane that modifies data or objects The Active System Manager application contains all documents that are open for modification Most perspectives are comprised of an editor area and one or more views Below are some basic guidelines to follow that can help you navigate more easily You can associate different editors with different types of files For example when you open a file for editing by double clicking it in one of the navigator views the associated editor opens in the application If there is no associated editor for a resource the Active System Manager application attempts to launch an external editor outside the application By default 10 editors can be open but only one can be active at a time see Window gt Preferences gt General gt Editors in the The main menu bar and toolbar for the Active System Manager window contains operations that are applicable to the active editor You can change the number of editors that can be open under the editor preferences The workspace can contain more than one Template but you cannot drag views into the editor workspace The editor remains constant regardless of how you rearrange your views Click any element in the editor and the views update to represent that element Tabs in the editor area indicate the names of resources that are currently open for edi
355. itory 4 Click Secondary Source in the Possible Values pane and select the Sub Type of the Value Source for example select a particular type of Software Repository Note step 3 on page 13 5 and step 4 on page 13 5 is for advanced users or administrators By default the Active System Manager software s RA pre populates the Primary Source and Secondary Source entries in most cases However step 3 on page 13 5 and step 4 on page 13 5 allow you to select value from Primary Source and Secondary Source from a list of context specific values 5 Check the required parameter value from the list of values displayed to auto populate the Value field with selected value This value is referred to determine the actual runtime value of the parameter at execution time 6 Click OK to add the custom operation in Orchestration Working with Orchestrations The direct access to Template and Orchestration view is available through the Perspective navigation bar that appears on the extreme left of Active System Manager software Accessing the Orchestrations View To access Orchestrations view through Perspective navigation bar perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager navigation bar menu click the Template perspective see Figure 13 3 Orchestration Management 13 5 Working with Orchestrations Figure 13 3 Navigating Orchestration a gt Templates No Filtering B admin Setup Inventory a Operat
356. itory option selected and click Next to open the LDAP Repository Definition dialog box gt Next to open the LDAP User Filter dialog box 4 Click Next to open the User Authentication Repository dialog box which lists all users in a remote repository 5 Select at least one user to import and for those to create Active System Manager profiles An administrator can change the user s role being imported either as a user the default or as an administrator 6 Click Finish to complete the import process Importing Users from an Existing Repository To import users from an existing repository perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Tools gt Users and Groups The Security Management window displays with the Users tab open by default see Figure 4 1 on page 4 2 2 Click Add gt Remote The Remote Repository dialog box displays with the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP repository default and Network Information Service NIS repository options Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Managing Security Functions 3 Click the Use existing repository option click the drop down list and select a repository The User Authentication Repository dialog box displays which lists all users in a remote repository You can use the Show new accounts only check box to remove users that are already in the Active System Manager system to avoid duplication If duplicates are found you ar
357. ity check box to display the Associate and Disassociate buttons 3 Hold down the Ctrl key and select the interface types to disassociate 4 Select the secondary interface types and click Disassociate to automatically save your changes Deleting Interface Types To delete an interface type perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Tools gt Interface Types The Interface Type Definition and Compatibility dialog box displays see Figure 5 18 on page 5 33 2 Select the interface type and click Delete E Note You cannot delete interface types that are associated with other types or that are being used by resource types resource instances links and so on 5 34 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Using Resource Interface Types Modifying Resource Interface Type Location Information This section including the following topics describes how you modify the interface type location information for your resource types e Using Resource Interface Type Location Names e Generating Unique Location Names Using Resource Interface Type Location Names You can use the Inventory perspective to generate resource location names with unique identifiers The Active System Manager Pattern Generator tool can generate assets and resource names with unique identifiers Using a range you can create a long list of names and asset tags that have either letters or numbers appended to the string The format
358. ivating Users section on page 4 11 To activate authentication repositories perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Tools gt Authentication Repositories The Preferences Security dialog box displays see Figure 4 11 on page 4 22 2 Select the repositories to activate 3 Click Apply gt OK Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Managing Authentication Repositories Deactivating Authentication Repositories To deactivate authentication repositories perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Tools gt Authentication Repositories The Preferences Security dialog box displays see Figure 4 11 on page 4 22 2 Select to deselect disable the repositories to deactivate 3 Click Apply gt OK User Profile Management 4 23 Managing Authentication Repositories 4 24 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 me Chapter 5 Inventory Management Note This chapter describes tasks and functions that are administrator specific This chapter describes the Active System Manager Inventory perspective and associated tools that you use to catalog and define the equipment in your network environment You use the Inventory perspective to manage resource types resource instances and connectivity to reflect the physical inventory of your environment Understanding Resource Modeling To build your inventory you should decide which modeling
359. ive Bin 3 Click OK when the Confirm Archiving Operation dialog box displays Session Management 12 43 Working with Running Sessions Archiving Sessions Using the Session Archive Bin View To archive sessions using the Session Archive Bin view perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Show View gt Other gt Session Archive Bin gt OK The Session Archive Bin view displays see Figure 12 39 Figure 12 39 Session Archive Bin View E Properties Resource Scripts O Custom Operations Session Archive Bin BN BEE Y To Status Topology Mame Owner Start Date Time Failed admin 06 17 2010 12 38 AM PC Failed admin 06 17 2010 12 48 AM PC E Failed Apache Linus admin 09 16 2009 11 09 AM PC ine 9 Windows Failed One Amazon AMI Windows admin 03 28 2010 09 31 PM POT Windows YM Failed One Amazon AMI Windows admin 07 15 2009 10 49 AM Por 2 Select the session you want to archive within the Sessions view 3 Drag the selected session from the Sessions view to the Session Archive Bin Note You can also specify an Archive Bin rule by one of these methods e E e On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Preferences gt Archive Bin e On the Active System Manager menu bar click Tools gt Archive Bin Rules gt Edit You can create an Archive Bin rule for a session or Template and then execute these rules on the Active System Manager menu bar click Tools gt Ar
360. ix Switch role that supports the VLAN option enabled see Figure 11 22 and optional VLAN IDs in custom inventory properties Figure 11 22 Supports VLAN Option Check Box Switching Layer 2 Infrastructure This hardware allows support For L2 Switching Supports L2 Switching For more information about supporting Layer 2 switching see the following subsections e Setting Up Layer 2 Switching e Defining Templates with VLAN Setting Up Layer 2 Switching To set up your Layer 2 switching perform the following steps 1 Open your Resource Instances view select a resource instance of role Matrix Switch Use filters to search for such resource instances for more information about filtering see the Filtering section on page 1 12 2 Ensure that you have a resource instance with the Supports L2 Switching check box enabled The Supports VLAN check box is located in the resource instance editor It is only available when the role is set to Matrix Switch The values for the matrix switch can be defined in three different formats e Individual Value For example 10 11 12 15 17 e Value Range For example 10 15 25 34 e Group Value Range For example gp1 10 20 gp2 21 30 gp1 31 40 Template Management 11 43 Working with Templates 3 In the resource instance editor in the Inventory Parameters section set the values for the supported VLAN ID E Note The Supported VLAN ID property cannot be remove
361. ization Path Asset Tag Version From Location To Location Figure 12 8 Resource Instance Realization Error O34 AUTO1214541487296 2 a A E a A f Po i r sel ER inkl ted y BT_21_CN_SOINT_16 ROBT 21 CN SOINT 7 a Session Link E Properties pi T e Status Failure Configuration Setting Up Power On Operation Passed PA an System Integrations passed Realization Connected to the device BT 21 CN _SOINT_ 1 gt successfully Loaded Image osversion successfully Applied configuration fenv SS HOME var 3961 RAV Ext successfully a Cleaning up System Integrations passed ClearConfig Completed on the device 1 a ClearConfig Completed on the device 2 ClearConfig Completed on the device 3 Device Level Script passed Device Level Tear Down Script w For reference see Running a Session Audit Report section on page 15 6 Retry Setup on Failed Resource Realization When the resource setup Resource Adapter methods have failed during the realization phase you can retry the realization process for the failed resource realization To do so select the failed resource right click and select Retry Setup You can view the setup result in a dialog box in the Session Audit Report or in the Realization tab in the Properties view Note In case of realization errors the resource icon is displayed in red 12 12 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with R
362. k Window gt Preferences gt General gt Display Options to edit preferences to set the colors Edits existing sessions or extends or reduces the time frame for selected sessions Displays specific sessions for more information see the Filtering section on page 1 12 and the Grouping section on page 1 15 Indicates the selected session in the tree view within the left side of the Sessions view This color highlights the selected row for that session Indicates a date and time you select When you select goto the red bar displays the specific time frame indicated with the red vertical marker When you select Now the red vertical marker moves to the present time Pressing F9 when the focus is on the calendar is equivalent to selecting Now Creates new sessions Displays your sessions Displays all sessions or only the ones you own and the ones of which you are a participant The calendar display distinguishes between those sessions you own vs the other sessions For an example see Figure 12 11 Hides and shows the calendar component When turned on the time marker that indicates the current time is visible Displays only the sessions you own and the ones of which you are a participant The calendar display distinguishes between those sessions you own vs the other sessions For an example see Figure 12 10 You access this feature by deselecting the Show All Sessions icon If you are viewing a session you ca
363. king with Templates 11 34 Figure 11 14 Properties Panel ankurtest 23 m f A f 1 1 j J ResTyp1_1 Template Link Properties F y x 7 z Resource Name Yalue Scheduling Permission ns 3 db Provisioning Remove i i oracle Allow to edit Abbot mysql Allow to edit Configuration Files linux Image Files usernamelinux Allow to edit passwordlinux Allow to edit os windows H Allow to edit linux Allow to edit windows usernamewindows Allow to edit passwordwindows Allow to edit os amp Allow to edit db oracle Allow to edit lt gt In the Properties panel the Provisioning parameters of dragged and dropped resources are loaded from the CSV file called provisioning attributes csv These parameters exist in the form of input field definitions in the CSV The Active System Manager administrator inputs these provisioning parameters according to the rules set for the CSV field definitions into the Active System Manager software The Provisioning parameters display in a tree structure in the Properties panel as grouped in the CSV file see Figure 11 14 Note The Provisioning parameters in the CSV file are grouped on the basis of the key parameter Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Templates Table 11 6 describes the Provisioning parameters input fields defined in the CSV file Table 11 6 Provisioning Parameters in a CSV File Provisioning Paramet
364. l 7 Press OK to start the firmware update After the firmware update is complete a success message or any errors are displayed In the case of virtual operations an auto inventory will be performed after the successful completion of firmware update for the resource instance After the auto inventory is successful the new updated firmware versions will be visible for the administrator in Operation Center Updating Dell Server Firmware The following sections describe how to update Dell server firmware Server firmware update can be performed from the Operations view as part of a session through orchestration or custom operation or by attaching a server profile template Only one active firmware update operation on a particular resource can be done at a time this is to prevent multiple updates from causing the resource instance to enter an unconditional bad state Updating Dell Blade Rack Servers Firmware from the Operation Center Complete the following steps to update server firmware from the Operation Center Prerequisites e Server Firmware Repository must be set up e Blade Rack server should be in healthy state and iDRAC should be responding Steps to Update Dell Blade Rack Servers Firmware from the Operation Center 1 Click on Operations in the left hand tool bar 6 4 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Updating Dell Server Firmware In the Operation Center view select the server for firmware update and selec
365. l running VMs with respect to the allocated capacity To configure Open the Operations perspective select a discovered host and right click to execute monitoring on that host Provides information about how much CPU and memory resources are utilized on a cluster by all running virtual machines with respect to the allocated capacity Provides storage utilization as a percentage of allocated storage for hypervisor clusters Displays CPU and memory utilization of hosts in percentage over a give period of time eg Weekly 3Days Daily Hourly To configure start monitoring on the host utilization data will be pushed to the database which will be retrieved depending on time intervals Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Managing Widgets Table 17 1 Default Set of Widgets continued Widget Description CPU Memory Utilization Displays CPU and memory utilization of clusters in percentage over a Over Time Graph for give period of time eg Weekly 3Days Daily Hourly Clusters To configure start monitoring on the cluster utilization data is pushed to the database utilization data is then retrieved depending on time intervals E Note More widgets will be added in future releases Dashboard 17 3 Managing Widgets The following topics describe how to use and manage the Dashboard content e Adding a Widget e Editing a Widget e Customizing a Widget e Refreshing Widget Content e Deleting a Widget e Chang
366. late Name must not contain spaces Naming conventions for VM NICs For each Server Template created the names of the VM NICs must match the following names e The Server Template for ASSO Hyper V must use the following VM NIC names nicO nicl nic2 nic3 nic4 nic5 nic6 nic7 e The Server Template for ASSO VMware must use the following VM NIC names vmnic0 vmnicl vmnic2 vmnic3 vmnic4 vmnics5 vmnic6 vmnic7 e The Server Template for AS200 Hyper V must use the following VM NIC names NIC 1 e The Server Template for AS200 VMware must use the following VM NIC names HypervisorManagement vMotion Server Template and Profiles 7 5 Workload iSCSI The Server Template for AS800 Hyper V must use the following VM NIC names NIC 1 The Server Template for AS800 VMware must use the following VM NIC names HypervisorManagement vMotion Workload iSCSI The Server Template for AS1000 Hyper V must use the following VM NIC names LAN NIC SAN NIC The Server Templates for AS1000 VMware must use the following VM NIC names HypervisorManagement vMotion Workload Adding or Editing a Virtual NIC Configuration Adding a virtual NIC configuration to a Server Template enables NIC partitioning on servers to which the template is applied l Za Enter a Name for the virtual NIC configuration Select a Connection Type
367. lcome The bottom status bar on the Welcome Home page indicates whether or not you are successfully connected A red light indicates that you are not connected a green light see Figure 2 5 indicates that you are connected Getting Started 2 7 Uninstalling the Active System Manager Client Software Figure 2 5 Active System Manager Welcome Page Connected E Active System Manager silt Mi En Bees Di lt lt lho ee File Edit Navigate Tools Reports Window Help Active System Manager Release 7 1 0 Welcome Dell Active Systems is a new converged infrastructure offering that was developed from the ground up to have superior infrastructure integration and an intuitive management experience IT organizations have the flexibility to adopt Active System in the form of a pre integrated system such as the Active System 800 a reference architecture or as a custom implementation all of which can be managed by Active System Manager Active System Manager is an easy to use and workload centric converged infrastructure manager that streamlines infrastructure configuration and on going lifecycle management Through the use of templates Dell Active System Manager drives centralized infrastructure requirements capturing automated configuration of infrastructure elements and infrastructure lifecycle management spanning discovery inventory deployment and on going management of the underlying infrastructure To support scale and rapid recovery fr
368. ld follow e Analyze Identify what interfaces other components properties and attributes does the resource instance have Compile the information into a spreadsheet for reference e Copy and Modify Find the most similar resource instance of that type that already resides in the Active System Manager inventory and use it as a starting point Copy that resource instance and make the changes necessary to the properties and interfaces to match your target resource type e Create a New Resource Instance If copying or importing an existing resource instance is not practical you can create a new resource instance within the Active System Manager software This section describes how to build a resource instance via the following methods e Creating Resource Instances e Importing Resource Instances e Copying Resource Instances e Updating Multiple Resource Instances at Once Creating Resource Instances 9 22 You can use the Inventory perspective to create a new resource instance You add each of the needed element types interfaces power supplies console and so on and each of the appropriate attributes to your new resource To create a new resource instance perform the following steps 1 Select a method to open the New Resource Instance dialog box see Figure 5 16 e On the Active System Manager menu bar click File gt New gt Resource Instance e In the Resource Instances view right click any resource type and select New R
369. ld resides in the clipboard only a single field can be selected before the Paste option can function Note When pasting multiple rows or columns of values the Active System Manager software clears the contents of the clipboard after each paste You can paste a column of data from another Windows program into a multi editor column For example Figure 1 7 displays a spreadsheet used as a source and the resulting changes to the multi editor column Figure 1 7 Pasting Columns Example f NewName 01 X DeviceD1 DeviceD2 Device03 DeviceD4 DeviceD5 Device06 DeviceD DeviceDs DeviceD9 Bo Eo Bo Bo Eo Bo Bo Eo Eo Eo Device10 Target It is not necessary to select the entire target range in the multi editor you can select a single field as a target however the information 1s pasted from left to right and from top to bottom so the field should be the top left corner You can paste multiple columns of values into the multi editor in a similar manner as pasting a single column see Figure 1 8 but there are some restrictions Some multi editor columns such as Manufacturer are read only therefore the source must be formatted correctly For spreadsheets you must leave a blank column within your selection for the read only column Any values that attempt to paste into a read only multi editor columns are automatically discarded Figure 1 8 Pasting Multiple Columns Example Manufacturer Model Active System Mana
370. lient server Suggested Action Contact Dell Technical Support team at support dell com or contact the administrator to obtain a software license Contact Dell Technical Support team at support dell com or click on Get New License button and enter the required details to obtain a new license Contact Dell Technical Support team at support dell com or click on Get New License button and enter the required details to obtain a new license Contact the administrator to know how to establish the connection with Active System Manager Launching the Active System Manager Client Software on Windows Getting Started To launch the Active System Manager client software on Windows perform the following steps 1 Select one of the following two options to launch the software e The first time you install the software at the end of the installation process after that you launch the software from your desktop e On your desktop click Start gt All Programs gt Dell gt Active System Manager 7 1 0 Either option produces the Dell Active System Manager splash screen see Figure 2 1 followed by the Connect to Active System Manager Server dialog box see Figure 2 4 on page 2 5 Launching the Active System Manager Client Software on Windows Figure 2 1 Dell Active System Manager 7 1 0 Active System Manager Release 7 1 Copyright 2013 Dell Inc All Rights Reserved This program is protected by copyright law and internati
371. ll be set in the session editor 4 Right click and select one of the operations for this resource Displaying Resource and Link Status The Active System Manager software can monitor resources and connectivity by invoking specific Resource Adapter methods on end resources end resource interfaces and underlying physical Layer 1 or Layer 2 switches responsible for establishing logical connectivity in the running sessions The status for resource and connectivity translates into color in the session editor Note The following feature is only available if the underlying Resource Adapter supports such x functionality Please check your Resource Adapter README About content to check for Status Monitoring support Note Session resources and links are assigned colors Status colors can be customized per deployment and not per user profile Figure 12 30 Session with Monitoring on Daroca rms O A SS Cloud01 D Cloudt 12 34 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Displaying Resource Status Working with Running Sessions To display a resource s status perform the following steps 1 Open a session editor see the Opening the Session Editor section on page 12 9 2 Inthe session editor select a resource and click the Link Editor tab The resource and interface status displays in the label see Figure 12 31 Figure 12 31 Resource Status Link editor a 100 lt MA a 4 EMPMC 36RJ 4 EMPMC
372. log box displays Depending on how many scripts you select that number of scripts will appear in the Execute Scripts dialog box E Note To execute any test script you must have a running session open 4 Optional Update individual script location or host information Working with Test and Script Execution 14 5 Working with Session Scripts 5 Optional Select a script and click Environment to overwrite the default execution environment settings For more information about the global settings see the Setting Preferences for Resource Scripts section on page 14 4 Click OK to start the resource scripts For more information about script execution see the Customizing Script Execution section on page 14 8 Viewing Resource Script Output The Active System Manager software opens a Console view when the resource script starts and displays the results in that view You can view resource scripts via the Session perspective that are associated with a running session by perform the following steps l On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Show View gt Execution Queue to display the Execution Queue view 2 Select your test case right click and select Monitor Execution Output A Console view with the test case ID displays the complete output in progress Stopping a Resource Script After resource script execution has begun you can stop it at any time This feature is designed for when you are exec
373. ls and attributes for this exposed method Reference to the RA code such as tcl files must be present on the Active System Manager server to be executed properly Repository Management 9 23 Working with Resource Adapters Copying Resource Adapters To copy a Provisioning Manager Resource Adapter directory structure under a different Manufacturer Model perform the following steps 1 In the Resource Adapters view select a Resource Adapter right click and select Copy Resource Adapters The Copy Resource Adapters dialog box displays see Figure 9 12 Figure 9 12 Copy Resource Adapters Copy Resource Adapters py pt 2 Click the Destination Domain pull down menu select a domain and click OK Importing Resource Adapters To import Resource Adapter Package RAP files rap files from your file system perform the following steps 1 In the Resource Adapters view select a Resource Adapter right click and select Import The core properties for that selection display by default see Figure 9 13 By default the Select root directory radio button is selected Figure 9 13 Resource Adapter Properties Import Resource Adapters Choose at least one Resource Adapter to be imported Select root directory C Users wvittoriad 0 Select Resource Adapter Package file Domain Resource Adapters Manufacturer Model Select All Deselect All Finish 9 24 Active System Manager User Guide Release
374. lumn to paste the data If there are two columns it assumes the asset tags are in the left column 3 Enter a unique Asset Tag Pattern and click the Generator icon For example AT 1 10 will generate AT1 AT2 AT10 distinct tags 4 Enter a unique Name Pattern and click the generator 5 Click the Open generated resource instances in workspace option to open in the workspace Note There is also a Keep availability flag to copy the availabilities of the copied resource instances Caution Risk of poor computer performance Dell recommends that you not perform this if you create a large number of copies It can affect your computer s performance 6 Click OK to automatically add the resource instance to the server and open it in the workspace Note Dell recommends that you not create more resource instances than you have your preferences allocated for under the Preferences section Updating Multiple Resource Instances at Once 5 26 To update multiple resource instances at once perform the following steps 1 Inthe Resource Instances view select one or more resource instances right click and select Open with Multi Editor The selected resource instances open in a spreadsheet editor For more information about using multi editors see Chapter 1 Active System Manager Overview 2 Update the resource instances as appropriate see the next section Modifying Core Properties for Resource Instances for updating
375. m Manager installation and deployment in the context of managing a Dell AS1000 converged infrastructure solution Active System Manager Release Notes Provides a summary of the latest Active System Manager features software changes and system requirements as well as the customer facing known issues and resolved issues unique to each particular release xiii Documentation Lineup Xiv Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Chapter 1 Active System Manager Overview The Active System Manager solution sits at the center of the Active System and simplifies infrastructure configuration collapses management tools and drives automation and consistency Through capabilities such as template based provisioning automated configuration and infrastructure life cycle management the Active System Manager product enables IT to respond rapidly to business needs maximize data center efficiency and strengthen quality of IT service delivery Rapidly Respond to Business Needs Active System Manager streamlines the complex and tedious task of infrastructure configuration It enables IT to quickly on board new infrastructure or rapidly reconfigure existing infrastructure This significantly speeds time to production for new workloads or scaling of resources for existing workloads This dramatic simplification in infrastructure configuration 1s achieved through automated discovery and inventory of bladed infrastructure and centralization of infra
376. m Manager software uses resource types as templates to model the various types of hardware resources in your environment A resource type is the basic building block of the Inventory perspective A resource type does not represent a particular piece of network hardware instead it describes the structure of the base model for that equipment A resource instance is a particular piece of network equipment residing somewhere in the environment that has an asset tag A resource instance can also be considered as a set of provisioning parameters that defines the interfaces and properties that are being used in the resource type for an actual and specific piece of hardware For example if you want to work with a resource by just its type or model rather than a specific piece of equipment work with the specific resource type and let the Active System Manager scheduler decide on the actual equipment for your Template This method provides you with additional flexibility since you get more choices any of environment s equipment that matches the same resource type can be used and a better overall use of your network environment On the other hand to use a specific piece of equipment you would author the Template by the resource instance Accessing Inventory The Inventory perspective is one of the default perspectives and is used to view and manage your inventory The two important navigator views for the Inventory perspective are the Resource Types view
377. meter q AE Y Completed Provisioning Actual End Date Time Unknown le 9 812 Coll Atenehs Actual Start Date Time 02 21 2013 03 00 AM PST Open Reset Duration 3235 days 22 hours 15 minutes End Date Time 12 31 2021 11 59 PM PST m Fol m A T 192 168 120 171 40500 admin America Los_Angeles 7 0 0 21236 Using the Session Outline View with the Session Editor The Session Outline view content that lists the resources and links can be customized using the Show icons e Show Outline The default outline view content Lists all resources and links in the session editor This session outline is bidirectional selecting an element from that view automatically selects the element from the editor e Show Overview Displays a graphical overview of the Template Allows you to navigate large Template content in a graphical manner e Show Elements Displays all resources with associated configuration and image files that were used at realization time There are no links that can be found e Show Hosts Displays relationships between virtual resources and their hosted environment There are no physical resources nor links that can be found 12 10 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Running Sessions Viewing the Session Realization Information When opening a session editor for a running session you can view the session realization information The realization phase is wh
378. ml file g Note The Active System Manager considers the minimum value as the default value while adding new systems to the discovery configuration Set the system properties by clicking on any particular system The System Properties section opens see Figure 5 3 Figure 5 3 System Properties System properties Mame is mandatory and should be unique Hyperv_1 4 Click Add vCenter and populate the information required for each element such as username password IP addresses and so on Mandatory fields are marked in red with an asterisk For specific details that maps your environment refer to the Active System Manager Solution Guide 5 Click Add HyperV and populate the information required for each element such as username password IP addresses and so on Mandatory fields are marked in red with an asterisk For specific details that maps your environment refer to the Active System Manager Solution Guide Note You can add multiple vCenter HyperV AS50 AS200 AS1000 and AS800 systems Ea Note VMware vCenter is currently supported for this release Inventory Management 5 5 Configuring Discovery Setup 9 6 E 6 Optional Click Add Element and populate the information required for each element such as username password IP addresses and so on Mandatory fields are marked in red with an asterisk For specific details that maps your environment refer to the Active System Manager Solution Guide Note
379. more than one group at a time by holding down the Ctrl key and highlighting multiple groups The Confirm Delete dialog box displays prompting you to confirm the deletion 3 Click OK to delete the selected group or groups The Security Management Groups tab window displays the updated information with the group or groups removed Defining Permissions Table 4 1 defines the built in permissions based on a user s role Table 4 1 Functionality Inventory Discovery Security Authoring Scheduling Sessions Session Notifications Archiving User Profile Management Built In Permissions Based on Roles Administrator Role e Full access to inventory management types instances connectivity links e Manage dependencies e Manage interface type and compatibility matrix Access to Discovery functions Manage all users includes user profile memberships and permissions Manage all groups includes group profile memberships and permissions Create modify and share all templates Open and Save As All templates Delete all templates Import all templates Export all templates e Manage owned sessions Access to all sessions Purge sessions Define system wide notifications Define owned session notifications Define specific session notifications Define system wide archiving rules Archive restore owned templates and sessions Archive restore any session User Role Read only view
380. most practical applications almost all of your inventory is defined as managed To access the Filters dialog box in the top right part of an associated navigator view click the Filters icon _ Figure 8 6 displays an example of Filters dialog box Figure 8 6 Filters Dialog Box Filters All filters Filter rules Name Property Operator Value Type Managed Equipment Zon Role contains Managed Equi Strin SEN EL Managed OAT aa Delete red Delete E Control Equipment E Component Equipment E Composite Equipment E Virtual Equipment E VLAN Equipment F Schedulable Equipment E Equipment in Maintena Match any of the above rules The Filters dialog box includes the following built in filters for Resource Types and Resource Instances views only e Managed Equipment The device under test DUT or equipment under test EUT Resources are modeled by type which are specifications by manufacturer and model that can be authored as generic elements in templates and by instance which are specific resources with unique asset tags e Control Equipment The infrastructure of the automated environment including matrix switches Layer 1 or 2 electrical optical or virtual power controllers and terminal servers e Virtual Equipment Available only on the Resource Instances view e VLAN Equipment Available only on the Resource Instances view e Schedulable Equipment Available only on the
381. mplate while being aware of your underlying physical connectivity and compatibility between interface types e Show Static or Switched Interfaces Only To use this icon option you must first select a resource type or resource instance Effectively this option removes interfaces that are not connected via the underlying infrastructure e Show Existing Physical Connectivity Shows or hides all possible connectivity Select one or more of the drawn links and right click Create Link m Note To display current possible connectivity perform the following steps E 1 Select a resource instance and interface end point 2 Right click or press F2 to display the Quick Connectivity dialog box 3 Select an entry in the dialog box to author the resource and interface into the Template 12 30 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Running Sessions Creating Session Links To create a session link perform the following steps 1 Select an interface in the left pane and drag it to the right pane or from right to left The Create Link dialog box displays see Figure 12 26 Figure 12 26 Create Link Create Link Create a new link Mame Description This is a link description Configuration Mame myconfigi Remove Priority 2 By default a link with assigned properties is automatically named for example Link _ n Link names must be unique To change the link name click the Name field and enter
382. mplates oi 556 os oh in we PES eC eRe Pe ae he RN wae Dee Nie ee kes 12 4 Creatine an Ms tant SESSION a ates ay acne ewe a he A AAA we Pee 12 5 Open SESSIONS 1 dew eee ee oie Se ORS A A eee Oe rs A 12 6 Opening the Session BqtOt ssc sud pace ead A A A MASS MP A 12 9 Using the Session Outline View with the Session Editor 0 0 0 0 0 00 cece eens 12 10 Viewing the Session Realization Information nananana aaaeeeaeo 12 11 Retry Setup on Failed Resource Realization o o oo ooo oooorr eee eee een eens 12 12 Using the Sessions Calendar e on cage ciate es Swe ee eee ald AAA Ree ew eas 12 13 Using Sessions View Features ensaladas kes 12 13 Opening the Session Calendar ic ii Re gd E been AREA NM was ba 12 15 Vicwille SESSION Properties 4 4 Gos ene A BE AA A Sete ta 12 16 Editing Default Session Properties 0 2 ce ee ee eee bee need eee eee e eee eeees 12 18 Assigning and Changing Session Ownership 0 0 0 00 ccc ee eee e nent eee nee 12 20 Using the Scheduling Wizard at Creation Time 0 0 eee eens 12 20 Using the Edit Session Properties 4 60422 5 2244 A A oa SG DAG BO GS eg Be Ved SERER ERE ES 12 20 CANCCHNG SESSIONS ida Ra wa ar bak BO ee eur Rees 12 21 Deletino Sessa BO te eae Alek coe ae we ee Gb OSE Re eae te a ai ket 12 21 PU OTN SESSIONS si sr ds 12 21 Contents 7 Rescacdulmo SESSIONS eto aa ar bere Sloe eee psd ee ee 12 22 Manasino Session INKS A ts hee edd ade es 12 27 Add Connec id SE AE AAA 12
383. mplex workloads at current or future times Provide an Infrastructure as a Service laaS portal for the IT administrator Features Inventory Automation Orchestration Scheduling and Allocation Enterprise Integration Capacity Optimization Features and Benefits Function Discovery and management of resources Fully automated provisioning of end to end physical and virtual infrastructure using a visual drag and drop authoring interface Pre built and custom orchestrated provisioning workflows for fine grained control of provisioning methods and policies for setup run time and tear down Advanced scheduling and reservation system for highly efficient allocation of resources and guaranteed resource commitments LDAP AD capabilities and role based access control for enterprise management Unified management of both physical and virtual resources along with capacity based scheduling capabilities Benefit e Accelerates the manual and often laborious process of discovering and providing an inventory of new infrastructure Ensures a solid high quality foundation for new workloads Speeds up the deployment of new infrastructure Pre built workflows offer straight forward guidance based on best practices Customization offers flexibility required for unique enterprise needs Ensure business and in turn their applications get prioritized access to the resources they demand and pay f
384. n 4 20 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Modifying Permissions Modifying Permissions The Active System Manager software allows you to set permissions for access to a number of privileges such as making sessions and importing and exporting files from the templates There are three types of entities that have permissions assigned and that can be managed using the Users and Groups tabs e Users Can perform core Active System Manager functions such as making sessions and working with templates e Administrators By default administrators have all permissions that cannot be changed e Groups Can be composed of administrators users and other groups You can assign any number of users to a group and then set the permissions for the group All users have those permissions without having to set them for each user individually E Note Initially the Active System Manager software is available with only one predefined administrator username admin with no users The administrator often has the responsibility of preempting sessions To do this you should log in as a user and create a separate user ID with user not administrator privileges This user should have permission to create and modify sessions You can set permissions for a number of very specific types of access For example for the Active System Manager templates you can determine whether users can create sessions or create functions with the Active
385. n bar displayed for the associated time frame of that session These display aspects include the following A normal color for a session bar is grey blue Color changes to a darker and bolder blue when the session intersects with the red indicator line g Note You can customize the colors and labels via the Preferences dialog box on the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Preferences gt General gt Display Options Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Using the Resource Allocation Calendar Analyzing Resource Instance Availability in Existing Sessions The Resource Availability calendar enables you to quickly analyze how specific Resource Instances are allocated within past present and future sessions as well as which resource instances are available for new sessions including what percentage of each resource remains available You can use the Resource Availability calendar to access the following types of session information Display on a per resource basis the sessions for which the resource is allocated View additional resource session information via a mouse over action To view this additional information mouse over a colored bar within the Resource Availability calendar The following session information displays for each resource instance Start date and time End date and time Session Name Type within the Resource Availability calendar and the Session calendar the session t
386. n Notification Add Session Notification Add a session notification by specifying rule properties events email format and recipients Rule Name demotest Description demo Scope My Sessions Owned Email Recipients Owner Participants El Other Note Use semicolons between email addresses in the Other field Email Format Plain Text Pl iCalendar Mark event as Session Management 12 61 Configuring Session Notifications and Reminders 7 In the Email Recipients section select one or more email recipients e Owner Owner of the session notification e Participants Participants of the session notification e Other List of email addresses you enter separated by a semicolon 8 Inthe Email Format section select the email format that the Active System Manager system sends out e Plain text Email is provided in plain text format e 1Calendar Email is provided in a Microsoft Exchange or Mozilla compatible format Select between Free or Busy to display in your calendar 9 Click OK gt Apply gt OK Editing Session Notifications To edit session notifications perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Preferences gt Scheduler gt Notifications amp Reminders The Preferences Notifications Reminders dialog box displays see Figure 12 51 on page 12 59 2 Select one and only one session notification or reminder to edit and click Edit
387. n double click within the associated yellow bar for that session and the Active System Manager software opens and displays the sessions Use the Show In Calendar menu option right click the session and select Show In Calendar to display the selected session directly in the center of the session calendar a red vertical marker identifies the selected session Figure 12 10 Show Mine Sessions Example G a DE Py TO Present Future ee Status 4 Topology Name Owner Sun 17 Oct 2010 W43 Mon 18 Oct 2010 W43 Tue 19 Oct 2010 43 Wed 20 Oct 2010 1443 Thu 21 Oct 2010 1443 E amp admin Q AUTO1287460706297 Confirmed vittoria admin AUTO1287458390405 Running CloudTest01 admin ED ForEver Running 1 pico surrounded admin Cp Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Running Sessions Figure 12 11 Show All Sessions Example OS X Present Future Sun 20 Jul 2008 W30 Sun 27 Jul 2008 W31 Sun 3 Aug 2008 1432 Sun 10 Aug 2008 W33 Status a Type Topology Name Owner E gt session i AUTO1217528295092 Confirmed session demo02 admin AUTO i AUTO1217529140898 j Q AUTO1217529140898 Confirmed session demo02 pdeloulay i AUTO1217529149840 Confirmed session demo02 pdeloulay AUTO1217529149840 ED AUTO1217480047491 Running session demo02 admin i ED AUTO1217522811977 Running session demo02 pdeloulay i D AUTO1217529089078 Running session demo02 admin i AUTO12175
388. n is already in progress End date and time of when the environment session is scheduled Can be updated based on resource availability that is not booked by someone else Session status see the Viewing Session Properties section on page 12 16 The valid session status that can be specified is one of the following e Canceled e Completed e Failed Name of individual who created the session Templates archive Description Owner Name of individual who created the Template Created On Date when the Template was created e Note For the archive type the Owner and Created On properties are available 12 46 c Click the Operator field and select one of the following values e Is Available only with the Template Name Status Owner properties The value string must match the entry exactly e Is After Available only with the Start Date Time and End Date Time properties e Is Before Available only with the Start Date Time and End Date Time properties 4 Click the Value field and set a date in mm dd year format To view a list of possible valid values mouse over the light bulb icon or press Ctrl Space to view the options Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Running Sessions 5 Click the Match all or any of the above rules field and select all or any e The all option functions the same way as the AND logic feature All of the rules must be met before the entry displays
389. n sessions by users groups for the specified time period 15 4 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Resource Usage Showback Report To run the Resource Usage Showback report perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Reports gt Resource Usage Showback Report see Figure 15 1 Figure 15 1 Resource Usage Showback Report lt u Active System Manager Active Infrastructure Management HOME SESSIONS TEMPLATES RESOURCES REPORTS SECURITY SETTINGS Resource Usage Showback Report Specify Date Range Period Last week Specific Time Start Date de at 0 Hours 00 Minutes End Date HH at 23 Hours 59 Minutes Filter Options Security Store AL Groups E USERNAME FIRST NAME LAST NAME Copyright 2012 2013 Dell Inc All Rights Reserved 2 Select the required information from the following parameters e Specify Date Range Allows you to select a period of time or specific start and end times e Period Allows you to set the Utilization report on the prior week or the last 30 60 or 90 days e Specific Time Allows you to specify a start and end time to define the time frame the report covers e Filter Options Allows you to select the resources the report is based upon e Security Store An Active System Manager repository of secured store credentials users and groups The Active System Manager software supports a local and remote security store via Acti
390. n specify the name description and encrypted parameters If you click the Encrypted check box for inventory the encryption works on the inventory parameter value which is defined in the resource instance Adding Provisioning Parameters 5 16 Provisioning parameters are used for resources that have Active System Manager resource integrations installed Provisioning parameters can include operating software image files and files with configuration commands for the resource The attributes can be different both in name and number for different resource types To add a provisioning parameter to the new resource type perform the following steps 1 In the Resource Types view right click a resource type and select Open The resource type core properties display within the specified perspective 2 Scroll down to the Provisioning Parameters section see Figure 5 13 and add a provisioning parameter as follows e Click Add to add a blank parameter to the section Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Using Resource Types e Click Add Image to add a reference to an image file from one of your repositories see Chapter 9 Repository Management e Click Add Configuration to add a reference to a configuration file from one of your repositories see Chapter 9 Repository Management Figure 5 13 Provisioning Parameters Provisioning Parameters Add Edit the provisioning parameters for the selected resource T
391. n the Active System Manager software being unable to find any suitable times to schedule your session For example the resources in your Template may not be available during the time window you requested or the time window you entered may be too short for the time slot length that you requested One of the following possible responses are available at this time 11 22 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Templates e Ifthe request can be satisfied you see a list of session time options e Ifanon preemptive request cannot be satisfied you will be prompted If other sessions conflict with a preemptive request a list of possible sessions display using resources already assigned to other sessions If no solutions are found tentative time slots display and are marked with the Caution icon instead of the Solution icon 7 Select a solution and then click Next to identify those blocking sessions This wizard page displays resource allocation conflicts at both resource and interface level You can remove conflicts to proceed with scheduling Caution Removing conflicts will update your Template content and will not affect your confirmed and running sessions by deactivating resources 8 At scheduling time you can add remove or edit session based properties e To add session based properties click Add gt Custom or Add gt Provisioning e To edit session based properties click a Custom or Provisioning prop
392. n the Purge Audit Data screen see Figure 5 43 Figure 5 43 Purge Audit Data Active System Manager 7 0 Purge Audit Data 3 Settings Database License Script Servers Properties Purge Audit Data Select Duration 1 month s The data older than the selected month s is available in database dump 3 Select Duration and click Purge Inventory Management 5 69 Managing Virtual Resources Dragging and Dropping Resources The drag and drop operation allows you to drag and drop blades from the Operation Center view to an active session or a template pe Note The drag and drop operation is available on blades in a subsequent manner Monitoring Resources To monitor the usage of CPU and Memory using the Monitoring feature perform the following steps 1 Click Operations perspective 2 In Operation Center gt Resources select a virtual resource for example clusters hosts that has Monitoring methods defined in the associated resource adapters e Note Status indicates if the state of monitoring methods 3 Click Monitoring pe Note Optional The Frequency can be edited 4 Select the monitoring methods and click Start to view the resource utilization graph CPU and Memory yw Note After initiation the Monitoring services get executed at a specified Frequency The Dashboard gets E populated with this information and displays the resource utilization graph For more information on Dashboard see
393. n the associated Server Template If Include BIOS Configuration is deselected in the Server Template no BIOS settings will be applicable in the profiles associated with that template For more information about the BIOS settings open the associated Server Template and view the BIOS Settings page Ifthe BIOS Settings page does not appear in the profile wizard it means BIOS settings are not included in the template Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 RAID Settings View the RAID setting that have been set in the associated Server Template If Include RAID Configuration is deselected in Server Template no RAID settings will be applicable in the profiles associated with that template For more information about the RAID settings open the associated Server Template and view the RAID Settings page Firmware Settings View the firmware setting that have been set in the associated Server Template If Include Firmware Configuration is deselected in the Server Template no Firmware settings will be applicable in the profiles associated with that template For more information about the firmware settings open the associated Server Template and view the Firmware Settings page Network Settings View the Network setting that have been set in the associated Server Template If Include Network Configuration is deselected in the Server Template no Network settings will be applicable in the profiles associated with that template For more inf
394. n the first two fields For more information see the Fill Feature section on page 1 24 Inserts a blank resource type above the currently selected row and copies the Manufacturer value Unique Name and Model values are generated in the name lt gt format where lt gt is the next highest numerical value available Inserts a blank row below the currently selected row and copies the Manufacturer value Unique Name and Model values are generated in the name lt gt format where lt gt is the next numerical value available Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Active System Manager Overview Active System Manager User Interface Elements Table 1 7 Context Menu Options Using Right Mouse Click continued Menu Description Insert Works similarly to the Insert Before and Insert After options It prompts you for the number of records you want to Multiple create and then copies the Manufacturer value of the currently selected content Note There is a Insert After check box If this is enabled the records are inserted below the current selection if it is turned off they are inserted above The main difference for Insert Multiple is that the Name field and the Model field are automatically generated in the name lt gt format where lt gt is the next numerical value available in addition to copying the Manufacturer value The number of records that can be generated is limited only by your computer s
395. n the import editor for the invalid row as an image marked with red e Import editor The details of the error in the columns Link Error Inventory Management 5 51 Importing Connectivity e Outline view Corresponding row information in the outline You can also right click the row in which the error is indicated and select Error Details e Error Indication Ruler An error indication ruler attached on the right side of Import editor which overviews the error status in an opened CSV file This ruler displays the error in red color and shows error details in the tooltip when you hover your mouse Clicking the error indicator selects and highlights the corresponding erroneous row in the Import editor You can also view the associated error details by right clicking the erroneous row and clicking Details Validating CSV Link Files To validate CSV link files perform the following steps 1 Right click in the upper left corner of the file displayed in the Import editor and select Validate ES Note The Validate menu is only enabled when there are no validation errors The validated CSV link files displays see Figure 5 29 Figure 5 29 Validated CSV Link Files CDI_Resource_1339651730904 csw 3 m Resource Manufacturer Resource Model Resource Asset Tag Resource Display Name Resource Category Resource Description Component Manufacturer Component Model Com 1 A Cisco Nexuss546 GPOC Nexus001 GPOC Nexus001 MANAGEDD
396. nagement HOME SESSIONS TEMPLATES RESOURCES REPORTS SECURITY SETTINGS Settings Database License Script Servers Properties Properties Inventory ou Template Session Template Link Preferences Provisioning DATATYPE ISMANDATORY DEFAULTVALUE MANUFACTURER Copyright 2012 2013 Dell Inc All Rights Reserved Settings 16 11 Properties Updating Properties You can update the properties of the following Active System Manager components by exporting csv file properties e Inventory e Template e Session e Template Link e Preferences E Note The Import see the Importing Properties section on page 16 12 and Export see the Exporting Properties section on page 16 13 operation works in a similar manner for all components Importing Properties To import properties perform the following steps 1 On the Properties screen click Import see Figure 16 10 The Import page displays see Figure 16 11 Figure 16 11 Import Inventory Properties page Import Inventory Properties Choose Inventory property file Please select file CSV file format only for Inventory a 2 Click Browse to browse and select file csv file format only 3 Click Import to import file 16 12 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Properties Exporting Properties To export properties perform the following steps 1 On the Properties screen click Export see Figure 16 10 Figure 16 12 Exporting Propert
397. nagement 5 11 Using Resource Types Figure 5 9 Import Resource Types Import Resource Types ES Root directory does not exists a Select root directory C Users smisra AVULET Desktop 0 Select archive file Resource type specifications Manufacturer Model Select All Deselect All Refresh ae iiil 2 By default the Select root directory option is enabled to allow you to manually type in the root directory location or you can click Browse and navigate to the desired location 3 Select the Select archive file option and type the archive file or click Browse and navigate to the desired location 4 In the Resource type specifications section select a resource type or click Select All to select all of the resource types available 5 Click Finish Note Each imported resource type will open its own editor You can modify this behavior by performing E the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Preferences gt General gt Editors 2 Click the Close editors automatically check box 3 Click the Number of opened editors before closing field and type a number of editors you want opened as the default number Copying Existing Resource Types 9 12 To make one or more copies of a resource quickly you can use the Copy function When you copy the currently selected resource the copies are added to the Inventory perspective s workspace To copy an existin
398. nctions must be saved to save those property changes click File gt Save Note These user defined properties can now be used in the Template view for grouping based on the category Contains a set of custom and system Template level lt custom values gt property names and values You can add or remove the custom Template level properties The Sequencing function allows you to move the properties in a specific order To add a custom Template property that must be overwritten with a editable value click Add You can set scheduling permissions on each custom provisioning property The permissions allows end users at scheduling time to display or edit those property values The permissions are e Allow to Edit The property will be editable at scheduling time e Allow to Show The property displays at scheduling time e Hide The property is not displayed at scheduling time To remove a custom Template property select a row and click Remove Note All of the Add Remove or Sequencing functions must be saved to save those property changes click File gt Save For more information about sequencing functions see the Updating the Policy Sequencing section on page 11 42 Note These custom properties can now be used in the Template view for grouping filtering and searching Invoked during the session setup phase Invoked during the session Save or Save as Invoked during the teardown setup phase Tim
399. nd WWNN to each FCoE virtual NIC during deployment Adding WWNN or WWPN Identities You can add as few as one and as many as 1 000 virtual FCoE identities at one time The maximum number of virtual FCoE identities that Active System Manager can manage is 250 000 l Zz On the Active System Manager navigation bar menu click the Setup perspective On the Active System Manager toolbar click the Networking perspective The Networking Configuration editor appears In the Global Virtual Identity Pool folder click WWNN or WWPN Click Add Identities In the Generate New Identities dialog box enter the number of identities to create in the Count field any whole number between 1 1 000 Click OK The identities are added to the respective pool Network Management 10 3 Understanding Networks Understanding Networks Active System Manager manages LAN private public hypervisor management SAN iSCSI FCoE and out of band management networks To facilitate network communication you can add ranges of static IP addresses that Active System Manager will assign to devices for out of band management and iSCSI initiators Network Types Active System Manager manages the following network types Private LAN Used to access network resources for functions such as vMotion traffic or heartbeat communication If associated with a virtual NIC the VLAN ID is used to configure the I O module s server facing ports Can be static or
400. nd applied to resources in proper sequence and method Introducing the Setup Perspective The Setup perspective controls the layout of the user interface the Active System Manager software uses to display information for your inventory including which views are displayed and their positions within the Active System Manager application You can save the modifications you make to the Setup perspective as you create them making your own custom user interface Table 9 1 outlines the default views available when you open the Setup perspective see Figure 9 1 for a graphical representation of the views which appear in tabular form Table 9 1 Setup Perspective Elements View View or or Editor Name Editor Resource View Types Resource View Instances Outline View Workspace Area Repository Management Description Displays all of the resource types that have been added to the inventory This view can be filtered grouped and sorted to increase data accessibility Displays all of the resource instances that have been added to the inventory This view can be filtered grouped and sorted to increase data accessibility and includes the resource availability calendar Lists the selected inventory resources in an outline format It represents a high level summary of an open editor and allows you to navigate or find information Area where most of the data entry and modification takes place It contains the data editors and most o
401. ne of the following options e The same resources at the same time because no better options were available e Different but equivalent typed resources at the same time e A better time with either the same or equivalent resources Note A session never loses a time slot or gets a later time slot due to ASAP rescheduling Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Table 1 8 Preference Type Scheduler gt Advanced Scheduling Scheduler gt Notifications and Reminders Search Security Template Template gt Template Editor Active System Manager User Interface Elements Preference Types Configurable Parameters continued Configurable Parameters and Description General Tab Assigns default ownership Administrator task only Allows you to set the following Quick Scheduling parameters Behavior As Soon As Possible ASAP ASAP within fixed time frame Fixed start and end date Recurring Session Duration Days Hours Minutes Number of solutions requested lt number gt within lt time gt specified Optimization Method Multiple Times or Multiple Resources Identify Blocking Sessions Include Setup and Teardown time in overall scheduling time Session Realization Disables Runtime OS Image load operation during session setup Scheduling Priority Allows the Scheduler to reschedule sessions based on their priority When enabling the Allow session to be rescheduled check box the Scheduler uses this pri
402. new user is created with the same permissions as the original user You can modify the permissions if necessary as described in the the Defining Permissions section on page 4 19 Deleting Users To delete a user perform the following steps 1 Open the Security Management window see Accessing a User List section on page 4 2 2 From the user list select one or more users to delete You can select more than one user at a time by holding down the Ctrl key and highlighting multiple users The Confirm Delete dialog box displays prompting you to confirm the deletion 3 Click OK to delete the selected user or users The Security Management Users tab window displays the updated information with the user or users removed Note You cannot delete users that have active sessions and associated templates Instead you must q re associate the sessions to a different user Instead of deleting the user update its profile by disabling the Allow Login permission Upon saving the profile the user will be unable to perform any Active System Manager tasks and log into the Active System Manager system 4 10 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Managing Security Functions Switching User Repositories To switch user repositories to migrate user authentication from the existing repository to a different one perform the following steps E 2 Open the Security Management window see the Accessing a User List s
403. nformation regarding the managed equipment report see the Running a Managed Equipment Summary Report section on page 15 2 and the Running a Managed Equipment Detail Report section on page 15 3 To run a Control Equipment Summary report perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Reports gt Control Equipment Summary Report The Control Equipment Summary Report for your environment displays in your web browser This report lists each item of your control equipment grouped by category matrix switch TFTP server and so on Any category of equipment that has no resources in it is skipped Running an Inventory Link Detail Report The Inventory Link Detail report lists each of the links to your equipment by resource You can filter the resources used for creating the report in the dialog box provided by your web browser To run an Inventory Link Detail report perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Reports gt Inventory Link Detail Report The Inventory Link Detail report filter options dialog box displays in your default web browser 2 Modify the report filter options as appropriate and click Create Running a Managed Equipment Summary Report The Managed Equipment Summary report displays summary information for the managed equipment in inventory For each item of your managed equipment it displays its name manufacturer model asset tag version and de
404. ng IP Address and then click Save IP Range Repeat until all ranges are added ES Note IP address ranges cannot overlap For example you cannot create an IP address range of 9 10 10 10 1 10 10 10 100 and another range of 10 10 10 50 10 10 10 150 Management networks do not require a VLAN ID because management networks are not configured on I O modules Active System Manager uses the VLAN ID specifically to configure I O modules to enable network traffic to flow from the server to configured networks during deployment Click OK Deleting a Network 10 6 L 2 On the Active System Manager navigation bar menu click the Setup perspective On the Active System Manager toolbar click the Networking perspective The Networking Configuration editor appears In the Configured Networks folder click the type of network to delete Select the network and then click Delete Click OK to delete the network Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Understanding Networks E Note Network cannot be deleted if it is referenced as VMC configuration of a Server Profile Template Editing an I Ze Ll Po A a IP Address Range On the Active System Manager navigation bar menu click the Setup perspective On the Active System Manager toolbar click the Networking perspective The Networking Configuration editor appears In the Configured Networks folder click SAN iSCSI From the list of SAN 1SCSI networks select a ne
405. ng Templates Attaching a Template Image Scheduling Templates Archiving Templates using the Templates View Restoring Archived Templates Updating Templates using the Template Editor Updating Templates using the Link Editor Associating an Orchestration Workflow with Templates Creating New Templates 11 6 To create a new Template perform the following steps l Select a method to open the New Template dialog box On the Active System Manager menu bar click File gt New gt Template On the Active System Manager toolbar click File gt New gt Other expand the Active System Manager folder and click the Template icon On the Active System Manager toolbar click the New icon and select Template On the Active System Manager toolbar click the New icon select Other expand the Active System Manager folder click the Template icon and click Next The New Template wizard displays see Figure 11 2 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Templates Figure 11 2 New Template New Template Template Create a new template Mame newtemplate Description Template Type Normal Physical Logical Participants Mame E techpubs Remove Permissions Permissions E Delete A Update 2 Click the Name field and enter a name for the new Template E Note The Template name can be up to 80 alphanumeric characters including spaces If you enter a name that has be
406. ng custom reports refer to the available BIRT documentation Note For all reports you can print the output from your browser or use the Export information in PDF format link to create a PDF file and display it in your browser or to create a CSV file The PDF file can be printed or saved from the browser To access the available built in reports on the Active System Manager menu bar click Reports Using Standard User Report Types The Active System Manager software includes a variety of standard report types for you to use including Reports Running a Control Equipment Summary Report Running an Inventory Link Detail Report Running a Managed Equipment Summary Report Running a Managed Equipment Detail Report Running a Session Report Resource Usage Showback Report Running a Session Audit Report available only with a Running session Running Custom Reports 15 1 Using Standard User Report Types Running a Control Equipment Summary Report The Active System Manager software provides two types of inventory equipment summaries one for managed equipment and one for control equipment The Control Equipment Summary report displays summary information on the control equipment in inventory on the current server This report lists each item of your control equipment grouped by category matrix switch Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP server and so on Any category of equipment that has no resources in it is skipped For i
407. ng state and click Stop al Note You can only perform this function in the Running state On session cleanup the Active System Manager software will abort all running scripts Working with Test and Script Execution 14 11 Working with the Execution Queue View Deleting an Execution ID To delete an execution ID in the Execution Queue view right click an execution ID in any state see Table 14 3 and select Delete Monitoring Execution Output To monitor the execution output in the Execution Queue view right click an execution ID only in the Running state and click Monitor Execution Output The output displays in the Console view 4 Note You can only perform this function in the Running state Reviewing Execution Output To review the execution output in the editor in the Execution Queue view right click an execution ID only in the Aborted Completed or Running state and select Review Execution Output Note You can only perform this function in the Aborted Completed or Running state 14 12 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Chapter 15 Reports The Active System Manager software has several built in reports for tracking the usage of your environment s inventory They are usually displayed in your default web browser and can be printed or exported to PDF You can also use the Active System Manager software to create a wide array of custom reports For additional information on creati
408. ng steps 1 With two or more files open in the editor area select one of the editor tabs 2 Holding down the left mouse button drag the editor over the left right top or bottom border of the editor area The mouse pointer changes to a drop cursor that indicates where the editor session will be moved when you release the mouse button 3 Optional Drag the borders of the editor area or each editor to resize as needed Changing the Tab Placement for Editors The tabs for stacked views or editors can appear at the top or bottom of the area that contains them To change the placement of the tabs perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Preferences gt General gt Appearance to display the Preferences Appearance dialog box see Figure 1 6 Figure 1 6 Preferences Appearance Preferences type filter text Appearance Archive Bin Current presentation General Appearance Active System Manager Presentation current Display Options Editors Login Profile Editor tab positions Perspectives Top Bottom Web Browser Help View tab positions Inventory Top Bottom Scheduler Search Security Template Test and Script Execution XML Current theme Default current Description Enable animations Show heap status Override presentation settings Perspective switcher positions Left Top Left W Show
409. nks between the VLAN component and the VMs on the Logical template are Logical so the link feasibility between these can be skipped while scheduling a session For the same reason during provisioning such links will be marked as realized without actually realizing them VLAN IDs for the VLAN component should be within the range provisioned in the session Also the VLAN component in the Logical template should be in AUTO mode Note As per the Precondition t he VLAN component on the chosen Physical session as El well as the current Logical session should be shared If either Physical session or the Logical session are exclusive then the VLAN IDs on physical session cannot be used However if the Physical based session is associated with a Logical template and PBS is also set on devices in the Logical template then the session bound mechanism overrides In such as a case the resources for realizing devices from Logical template are used from the associated session Template Management 11 5 Working with Templates Working with Templates The Active System Manager software allows you to perform a variety of additional functions using the Templates perspective including Creating New Templates Saving Templates Changing Template Ownership and Permissions Opening Templates Closing Templates Deleting Templates Managing Template History Details Filtering Templates Validating Templates Importing Templates Exporti
410. nnected Resource Instance Resource Instance Bulk Resource Instance Component Resource Type Resource Type Component Resource Unknown Filesystem Filters Filter Control Filter Managed Group e lu LO lt GOO ae Default Perspective Session Console Inventory Session Session Console Inventory Template Connection not a perspective Session Console Session Console Inventory Connection Inventory Inventory Inventory Inventory Inventory Template Inventory Inventory Setup Session Template Inventory Inventory N A Window Type Views Views Views Editors Views Application Views Views Application Views Editors Views Views Editors Views Editors Views Views Views Views Views Editors Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Active System Manager User Interface Elements Table 1 10 Active System Manager Application Icons continued Icon Icon Name Default Perspective Window Type ES Group By Inventory Test Session Template Views La Interface Category Inventory Views Editors El Interface Ghost Inventory Views A Interface Type Inventory Views Editors a Inventory Parameters Inventory Editors n a Links Inventory Template Views Editors i u Power Supply Inventory Views ea Relationship Inventory Views Editors e yA Report Reporting Application i A Session Scheduler Views Simple Link Inve
411. no statistics are displayed e Resource partially allocated A resource that is currently allocated to at least one session with a subset of its port Statistics are displayed from 1 to 99 e Resource fully allocated Either in one session if one resource is not shared or many sessions if resource is shared No percentage of statistics For all categories the statistics reflect present time when displayed Statistics can change when a session goes into a setup or teardown state Setup ports become busy teardown ports become free Note If you expand a session within a yellow highlighted row only the associated resources for that selected session are affected a 3 As a Active System Manager administrator you can use the information in the calendar view to help users make changes and resolve conflicts You can also use the Resource Availability calendar to perform the same functions as the users check status and look for alternatives however the difference 1s that the administrator can go to the specific Session view to change the session Changes made in the Session view calendar may not be reflected within the Active System Manager workbench until you refresh press F5 your workspace Inventory Management 5 29 Using Resource Instances Deleting Resource Instances To delete a resource instance perform the following steps l In the Resource Instances view right click a resource instance and select Delete
412. non traffic interface locations The following location generator files are described e Theicon location generator file retrieves the icon from a specified location for a particular manufacturer or model Table 5 14 lists the icon location generator file properties Table 5 14 Icon Location Generator File Properties Property Name Property Description Configuration File Property Name Tceonfm 1intormation t 1le Default File Name LOON OGLE O2 CSV File format CSV file contains only one row with two columns First column will specify the icon name Second column will specify the icon location absolute path 5 44 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Importing Inventory e Configuration inventory parameters generator file You use the configuration inventory parameters generator file to gather the configuration and inventory parameters for a specific manufacturer or model Table 5 15 lists the configuration inventory generator file properties Table 5 15 Configuration Inventory Parameters Generator File Properties Property Name Configuration File Property Name Default File Name File format CSV file contain two rows one for provisioning parameters and other for inventory parameters Inventory Management Property Description parameters information file invconfigparams csv A row for provisioning parameters requires the following e config keyword in first column e In successive columns
413. ns 12 73 Chapter 13 Orchestration Management 00 ccc teen tenes 13 1 Uaderstandine Orchnesttduon is ds cau dee eed AA E A oes ae eed nae te ewe A 13 1 8 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Otehestration PES ais ps Se eee ted tae EA AA kaise 13 3 Selecting Custom Operations ereraa whens Shwe ged hes Geeks ina gk does inns Pee eed hl a WR RS ore BOS ee eS ae 13 4 Selecting Context Sensitive Valles is05 cs NA AAA RE eee ee AAA A SRA 13 4 W orkine with OrcnesttallOns suis baa benn A cine noes a a a ico eat 13 5 Accessing the Orchestrations VIEW 4 2a icine A eee eee OL eR eee t A A nda ned wd es 13 5 Creating OrehestralionS A A AAA lage Madea de Rect pectin Shas Rubles pons Gack 13 6 Adding Steps in the Orchestration View 0 0 06 ee eee een e eee eee eens 13 8 Re Exccutino Failed Steps wite cu waving ideo toi AA SAL e we Ged Tee eee 13 11 Error Handling Abort On ETORRI ene kee 13 12 Editing OrchestratOns decis dari qld ii Beh teak Sells Gilde ROR AEG hee BORE ee a 13 13 Deletino OrchestanOns za 13 15 Linking Orchestrations with Template Selection 0 00 ccc eee ee eee eens 13 15 Ge eS ee ek a ee sae ete it ae eens tne a a RR A 13 15 EXECUtMO ONC MeSH AMON id AS A A di IAE Oia de 13 16 Monitorine Orchestration Execution 0 A A A A AAA ts Ok 13 17 Chapter 14 Working with Test and Script Execution o ooooooooooooormooomooo o 14 1 Workmo with Test Cases asin a A A da a AS ee eS et 14
414. nstances available 5 Click Finish yw Note Each imported resource instance will open its own editor You can modify this behavior by E performing the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Preferences gt General gt Editors 2 Click the Close editors automatically check box 3 Click the Number of opened editors before closing field and type a number of editors you want opened as the default number 5 24 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Using Resource Instances Copying Resource Instances You can copy resource instances via the Inventory perspective s Advanced Clone tool Using the Advanced Clone tool to copy resource instances speeds the process for creating large numbers of resource instances Based on an existing resource instance the Inventory perspective copies the existing component and interface configuration but does not copy any of the existing availability dates The availability date is set to the default from the Preferences dialog box The Keep availability check box option retains the availability of the source resource Key features of the Advanced Clone tool include e Supports cutting and pasting e In addition to the standard Ctrl key combinations there are three dialog box buttons for cutting copying and pasting e There are also undo and redo buttons that allow you to navigate through the lists of generated names They function similarly to the Forward
415. nt Active System Manager to the folder storing your custom icons for Standard Resource Types t Inventory Browse b Scheduler Search Resource Type Multi Editor Security Show warning for incompatible and thus hidden inventory confiquration parameters on editor open b Template b Test and Script Execution Resource Instance Multi Editor p gt XML Show warning for incompatible and thus hidden inventory parameters on editor open Domain Information fete Note This Domain Name will be used as default in resource instance Add and Import operations Virtualization Settings Enable resource virtualization by default for newly created inventory Restore Defaults Apply o For information about configuring preferences see the Preferences section on page 1 27 8 16 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Chapter 9 Repository Management The Active System Manager software provides a set of provisioning capabilities including major features to software firmware and configuration file management Those features include the following e Support of virtually any software repository type including file servers change control systems and Storage Area Network SAN and Network Attached Storage NAS based storage arrays e An enhanced user Setup perspective interface which allows single or multiple software or firmware images or configuration files to be easily selected from associated repositories a
416. ntegrations Amazon AMT acquire acquire tel port model AMT run HH Script Started by GaleForce Domaih Execution Service ommand tclsh A A A A tel port mode Script Started by GaleForce Domain Execution Service 3 ommand tclsh AA port model AMI run FFF Script Started by GaleForce Domain Execution Service EFE ommand telah dE AAA A A ES tel port model AMI run InputXMLPath with A a _CloudinputXML 1255716667496131 xml outputrXMLPath with home pdeloulay galeforcesi pm temp 254_CloudoutputxXML 1255716667496132 xm Operation attributeList with username level usertype name type operation username with admin operation level with device Monitoring Resource Adapter Execution You can monitor Resource Adapter operation logs live while they are executing To do so perform the following steps 1 Open a running session editor session editor 2 Right click a resource and select Resource Adapter Log gt Monitor A new view displays where the Resource Adapter execution output can be viewed while it is being executed see Figure 12 61 View content can be frozen and also saved using the View action bar functions Figure 12 61 Resource Adapter Log Execution Output Example Fri Occ 16 14 10 19 PDT 2005 Starting Session Management 12 73 Managing Virtual Resources 12 74 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Chapter 13 Orchestration Management This c
417. nterfaces Manufacturer Dell El Console Model Chassis File System 52 Cluster VMware ESXi 5 1 Hypervisor deployment ISO boot HDD p Interface Cluster VMware ESXi 5 1 Hypervisor deployment ISO boot HDD DHCP Asset Tag Dell_Chassis Power Supply Cluster VMware ESXi 5 1 Hypervisor deployment PXE boot Version 1 E Inventory Parameters Cluster VMware ESXi 5 1 Hypervisor deployment PXE boot HDD Cluster VMware ESXi 5 1 Hypervisor deployment PXE boot HDD DHCP Standalone VMware ESXi 5 1 Hypervisor deploment PXE boot Role Managed Equipment Shared Standalone VMware ESXi 5 1 Hypervisor deploment PXE boot HDD DHCP Description Standalone VMware ESXi 5 1 Hypervisor deployment ISO boot 2 Standalone VMware ESXi 5 1 Hypervisor deployment ISO boot Customized SD Domain E Demo Compellent E Operation Center gt Orchestrations No Filtering System v Virtualization Infrastructure This hardware allows multiple operating systems to run concurren tt e zr 4 m Design Properties 3 admin 11 Property 4 m 192 168 120 171 40500 admin America Los_Angeles 7 0 0 21236 Table 11 1 outlines the default views available when you open the Templates perspective Table 11 1 Template Perspective Elements View or Editor Name Templates Template Editor Resource Types Resource Instances Outline View or Editor View Editor View
418. ntory Template Views a a ay Solution Scheduler temporary 12 a Synchronize Link to Inventory Views Resources E E Template Template Views a User N A Views Table 1 11 lists the icon overlays available in the Active System Manager application Table 1 11 Icon Overlays Icon Description Preferred Perspective Window Type Add Inventory Editors i Managed Interface Inventory Editors m Orange Ball Inventory Editors Active System Manager Overview 1 37 Active System Manager User Interface Elements 1 38 Table 1 11 Icon Description Deadlock a Delete Remove Ol Dirty Future State Past State Invalid Interface E Running State f Interface Inactive E Invalid Resource ea Warning ih Icon Overlays continued Preferred Perspective Inventory Inventory Inventory Inventory Session Inventory Session Inventory Session Inventory Inventory Inventory Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Window Type Views Editors Editors Views Views Editors Views Views Editors Editors Views Editors Chapter 2 Getting Started This chapter provides the basic information you need to install configure launch and uninstall the Dell Active System Manager client software It also describes how to connect to the Active System Manager server and verify the connection status Active System Manager Client Application Requirements The Active System Manager client applicati
419. ntory management for example integrating new resource types into the software adding managed and control resources and links to the environment and viewing modifying and deleting existing entries System administration for maintaining the Active System Manager software and hardware environment This preface contains the following topics About This Guide Intended Audience Organization Conventions Documentation Lineup Intended Audience Intended Audience This guide is intended for system and network administrators who are responsible for managing an environment with the Active System Manager software and should be familiar with the following concepts Basic principles and use of the Active System Manager product Inventory and change management UNIX operating system and common UNIX commands Physical environment layout connectivity inventory Oracle database administration Licensing concepts Web applications and XML language In addition to these concepts Dell also recommends reading the Active System Manager Web Interface User Guide in conjunction with this guide Organization This guide is organized as follows Chapter 1 Active System Manager Overview Describes the overall Dell Automation Suite including the key benefits all high level functions concepts and features Chapter 2 Getting Started Provides the basic information you need to install configure launch and uninstall the
420. ntory perspective and all of the functions available for you to manage repositories and Resource Adapters Chapter 10 Network Management Describes the Active System Manager Networking perspective and associated tools that you use to configure the global virtual identity pools and networks to reflect the existing identity pools and networks in your environment Chapter 11 Template Management Describes the Templates perspective and all of the functions available for you to create open update save and close templates It also describes how to import and export templates directly from the Active System Manager Topology view into the Templates perspective Lastly it describes how to work with configuration files to use in a template for equipment provisioning Chapter 12 Session Management Describes the Active System Manager Sessions perspective and all of the functions available for you to view modify and save the template of an running session and remotely run test cases associated with it You can also start and stop resource console sessions execute remote commands or power on and power off managed resources Chapter 13 Orchestration Management Describes how to work with Orchestrations in the Active System Manager and helps you learn how to create update and delete orchestrations The advanced feature allows you to view the graphical view of orchestration while execution error handling in orchestration
421. nual tThe session owner or participants can pick from a list of other hypervisors available in the Active System Manager inventory e Note The hypervisor list does not filter elements matching the capacity constraint of the selected virtual resource 3 Click OK The original virtual resource becomes inactive and a new virtual resource is now available on the session editor To check the new hypervisor resource identification select the new resource click the Resource tab and search for the Host Asset Tag 4 Optional Select the inactive virtual resource right click and select Delete 5 Click File gt Save 12 66 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Managing Virtual Resources Scaling Up Virtual Resources Scaling up a virtual resource allows for administrators and session owners to request and immediately change the capacity based properties of the virtual resources This feature can also be used in the context of relocation if necessary The current capacity property values can be found in the Elasticity tab To scale up virtual resources perform the following steps 1 Open a session editor see the Opening the Session Editor section on page 12 9 2 Select a virtual resource 3 Inthe Properties view click the Resource tab to view all capacity based properties associated with the selected virtual resource To scale up virtual resources and optionally relocate them perform the following steps
422. nufacturer Den GB 6 Slot Number E model Forcel0 S4810 B 7b Slot Number B resourcePassword fENC33b1 eS AfAFAFO SA bdee263b864fc74b6c2f7f84 210 rescore leerNiame admin B 7d Slot Number GP Dell_Storage DellEquallogic 52 192 168 120 90 ForcelOSwitch Supported Operations s 33 192 168 120 91 ForcelOSwitch amp VLAN ID VLAN ES Configure New VLAN Configure New VLAN AP ES Configure Switch This method configures both ForcelO ToR switches Switch configuration includes applying the FTOS image configuration files atrixSwitc s vCenter_1 Center s 192 168 120 125 Center OF ddddd DataCenter OF Gale DataCenter 7 192 168 120 192 wCenter Ss vCenter_2 vCenter Dell Dummyl 252 Links 22 Auditing Device Related RA Operations The Audit feature in Operation Center View displays the details such as execution time executed by category operation name operation started by etc of all device related RA operations This feature tracks all device operations being used in discovery process virtual operations and session operations system operations custom operations and session orchestration for example the details of session related device operations such as Acquire Power On Power Off Make Link Break Link etc are audited and displayed under the Audit tab in the Operation Center View Click on a particular device in Operation Center View to view the corresponding audit details of the
423. nvoked during the session setup phase e Snapshot Invoked during the session Save or Save as e Teardown Invoked during the teardown setup phase Template owners users with update permissions on the Template and administrators can define different sequences on each policy Template Management 11 41 Working with Templates 11 42 T Updating the Policy Sequencing To update the policy sequencing perform the following steps 1 Select the policy impacted and drag one or more resources or resource types in to the sequencing box A new sequence is automatically created such as sequence1 You can add or remove resources or resource types at will by either dragging back resources or inserting new sequencing directly in the sequencing box right click while operating elements 2 Repeat step 1 for other policies 1 and 2 Figure 11 20 Right Click Menu Options E Sequence 1 E Sequence z io hu AT PICO4O0 02 ae SEQUENCE 3 Add a Sequence Insert Sequence Remove Sequence 3 Click Reset to Default see Figure 11 19 to re apply the default policy not the one saved 4 Use the Filter text box Fite ______ to automatically filter out the resource or resource type list This is helpful when you need to search for a specific resource in your sequencing Note The timer cannot be defined between each sequence Sequencing simply allows the policy execution to happen in a sequential manner as opposed to a parallel execu
424. o assign a login profile to your selection and click Profiles The Update Login Profiles dialog box displays 3 Select at least one user profile and click OK 4 On the Security Management Users and Groups dialog box see Figure 4 6 you can also select one individual user or group click Edit navigate to the Login Profiles tab to update or assign new login profiles and click OK 5 Select at least one user profile from the profile selection and click OK to display the Users and Groups dialog box displays see Figure 4 6 Deleting Login Profiles To delete an existing login profile perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Tools gt Login Profile gt Delete The Delete Login Profiles dialog box displays 2 Select to click one or more login profiles to delete and click OK A message displays prompting you to confirm the deletion 3 Click OK to confirm the login profile deletion 4 14 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Managing Groups Managing Groups The following topics describe the procedures you follow to manage groups e Accessing a Group List e Adding Groups e Editing Groups e Deleting Groups Accessing a Group List To access a group list on the Active System Manager menu bar perform the following steps 1 Click Tools gt Users and Groups The Security Management window displays with the Users tab open by default see Figure 4 1 on page 4 2 2 Click the Groups
425. o define a custom attribute perform the following steps 1 In the Template editor select the link 2 In the Properties view select the Provisioning tab 3 Click Add to add the name and value of the custom attribute Disabling and Enabling Template Links By default Template links are enabled While scheduling Templates disabled links are not considered for link feasibility validation Disabled links will not use any physical infrastructure To disable and enable Template links perform the following steps e To disable with a Template open click the Template editor right click one ore more Template links and select Disable see Figure 11 34 Template Management 11 55 Working with Templates Figure 11 34 Disabling Template Links Add History Export as Disable A Cisco POZO WAR Switch Eo Link Editor Test Cases Schedule Preferences Validate Attach Default Rendering e To enable a Template link that you disabled With a Template open click the Template editor right click one ore more Template links and select Enable E Note Disabled links do not have a direct impact on an underlying physical structure during the session a Cleaning Up state Associating an Orchestration Workflow with Templates An orchestration workflow is a set of operations that can be defined within a Template The workflow is executed automatically by the Active System Manager software when a session comes into a Running st
426. o select a default login profile for subsequent logins Click the Always log in using this profile check box to set your default login profile By default when you launch the Active System Manager software a profile Default is assigned by the administrator see Figure 3 5 on page 3 5 To modify the login profile settings see the Saving Your Environment as a Login Profile section on page 4 13 and the Deleting Login Profiles section on page 4 14 Open a new perspective Controls whether opening a new perspective in the Active System Manager software is handled by the current window or in a new window In the same window Opens a new perspective in the same window as your working application In anew window Opens a new perspective in a new window separate from your working application Open a new view Turns the Fast View setting on and off for new views e Within the perspective Opens a new view in the same window as your working perspective As fast view Opens a new view in a fast view for more information about fast views see the Creating a Fast View section on page 1 17 Available Perspectives Lists the available perspectives where you can set one as a default or restore the defaults e Set the default perspective select a perspective and click Make Default e Reset the perspective to its original set of views and layout based on its definition by clicking Reset You can also perform the s
427. of such virtual resources include Amazon AMI Instances VMware virtual machines and Citrix Xen virtual machines When creating a virtual resource type use the procedure for creating a resource type 2 For each new resource enter a unique Name Manufacturer and Model select the Roles and search click Browse for an Icon g Note You can create your own set of custom icons For more information see the Creating Custom Icons for Resource Types section on page 5 20 3 Click Finish 4 Once you have created a new resource type you can then add the following associated information e Core properties see the Modifying Core Properties for Resource Types section on page 5 14 e Interface types see the Adding Resource Interface Types section on page 5 15 e Provisioning parameters see the Adding Provisioning Parameters section on page 5 16 e Inventory parameters see the Adding Inventory Parameters section on page 5 17 Importing a Resource Type To import a resource type perform the following steps 1 Select a method to open the Import dialog box see Figure 5 9 e On the Active System Manager menu bar click File gt Import gt Active System Manager gt Resource Types gt Next e In the Resource Types view right click and select Import gt Resource Types gt Next e On the Active System Manager toolbar click Import gt Active System Manager gt Resource Types gt Next Inventory Ma
428. of the entire inventory R O view of interface types None Update its user profile only Create modify and share templates Update owned templates Open only private and public owned templates Delete owned templates Import export templates Manage owned sessions Create update delete owned sessions Delete user defined notifications Define owned session notifications Define specific session notifications Archive restore owned templates and sessions 4 19 Defining Permissions Table 4 1 Built In Permissions Based on Roles continued Functionality Administrator Role User Role Reporting e Access to all reports e Access to user based reports only e Create and execute custom reports e Execute custom reports Session e Access and to all sessions Access and manage only owned e Manage console access sessions or one user is a participant Table 4 2 describes the individual permissions of access that you can control Table 4 2 Permissions for Users or Groups Permissions Allow Login Create Repository Element Create Session Sessions Delete Repository Element Delete Resource Adapter Package Export Template Import Template Import Resource Adapter Package Modify Repository Element Description Allows users to access the Active System Manager server Allows the creation of repository elements For details see the Creating a New Repository section on page 9 6 Allows the creation of sessions based
429. ol DAPC memory frequency is reduced to the minimum level turbo boost is disabled the patrol scrub rate is extended and memory operating voltage is set to 1 5V to increase memory margins e Max Performance Disables DBPM The BIOS sets the processor P state to the highest supported level e OS Control Enables DBPM All supported processor P states are available to the operating system in the ACPI table Select the configuration for User Accessible USB Ports to turn on or off all of the user accessible USB ports Select the Number of Cores Per Processor If set to All the maximum number of cores in each processor is enabled Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Ga Optionally select Processor Virtualization Technology to permit virtualization software to use Virtualization Technology functions incorporated in the processor design This feature can only be used by software that supports Virtualization Technology for example you can enable this feature for ESXi servers Optionally select Logical Processor to monitor both logical processors on servers that support Simultaneous Multi Threading SMT technology If disabled only the first logical processor of each processor installed in the system is used by the operating system Optionally select Memory Node Interleaving to enable memory interleaving on servers with a symmetric memory configuration If disabled the system supports Non Uniform Memory Architectur
430. om hardware failures Active System Manager enables IT to quickly migrate workloads to new or re purposed infrastructure The development of Active System Manager focused on a simplified and efficient user experience It offers guided user workflows and multi level graphical views that make it easy for IT administrators to make better decisions and achieve consistent results Active System Manager also acts as a single point of control for most infrastructure configuration and on going management functions enabling IT organizations to collapse management consoles needed for common day to day data center management tasks IT organizations can expect to achieve significant benefits from the adoption of the management framework that Active System Manager enables To learn more on Active System Manager visit Dell com convergence U E 172 16 100 78 40500 admin America Los_Angeles 7 1 0 683 2 Log on to the Active System Manager software to successfully connect to the server see the Connecting to the Active System Manager Server section on page 2 6 Uninstalling the Active System Manager Client Software This section describes the uninstallation procedures for removing the Active System Manager client software from a Windows workstation To uninstall the Active System Manager client software on a Windows workstation perform the following Steps 1 Click Start gt All Programs gt Dell gt Active System Manager gt Uninstall Acti
431. omMethod customMethod cfg discover i Users Virtual for End Users Y de Pool AddMember Execution Contest Q Pool Create Pool Delete Pool Rename Q Volume AccessCreate A Volume AccessDelete ag Volume AccessRestrict a ita Specify the input output parameters of the operation m ag Volume AccessShow E Volume Clone Input parameters Output Parameters OS Name Type Default Value Possible Values Unit Mandatory Editable Common HA Volume Delete LY Volume Offline volumeName string Y Y She Volume Online ag Volume Show Overview Operations Applications Files About 3 Click the Operations tab To add or remove a specific operation click Add 4 Select a specific custom or virtual operation for editing attribute values for example select the Syslog Configuration for All Servers operation to edit attribute values On the right in the Attributes panel all attributes related to the Syslog Configuration for All Servers display see Figure 9 11 9 22 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Figure 9 11 Attributes Specify the input output parameters of the operation Input parameters Output Parameters Name DatastoreName yCenterIPAddress vCenterPassword vCenterUsername Type Default Value string string string password Possible Values Unit Mandatory Editable Common Primary Source Secondary Source Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Working with Resource Adapters Operation Attribu
432. omatically updates the UI display when you make changes via the Preferences dialog box you do not have to restart the client 1 27 Active System Manager User Interface Elements Figure 1 15 Preferences Dialog Box Default Archive Bin Archive Bin General Help All filters Filter rules Administrative rules applied to templates and sessions to be moved into the Archive Bin Inventory di Property Operator Scheduler Search Security Template Test and Script Execution AML Restore Defaults Apply as Table 1 8 describes the parameters you can configure for your user preferences by preference type The last column provides a figure reference where you can view the dialog box and read how to configure the preference type setting Table 1 8 Preference Types Configurable Parameters Preference Type Configurable Parameters and Description Reference Archive Bin Filters amp Filter Rules Defines the filters and filter rules Active System Manager Figure 1 15 applies to templates and sessions to be moved into the Archive Bin Connectivity Driver Definitions Allows you to add edit remove or copy available driver BIRT documentation definitions Note Used for BIRT reports only For more information about setting up connectivity see Chapter 9 Repository Management and Chapter 10 Network Management Resource Allows you to select the domains to be used by the Discovery Engine Chapter 5 In
433. on Resource Session Session Configuration Repositories Servers Output Organization Properties Objects Properties s Virtual y X y X X X y Operation Custom Ni y y y y y y y Operation To edit RAs perform the following steps _ Note While creating or editing RA operations in RA editor the values in Primary Source drop down display dynamically and are populated with possible values retrieved from specific value source in corresponding operation definition in RA 1 Right click a specific RA in the Resource Adapters view 2 Click Open to open Resource Adapter editor see Figure 9 10 Figure 9 10 Resource Adapter Editor Operations supported by Dell EqualLogicPS4100X Supported Operations v Operation Details 2 Select Operations to view details Specify the operation details Name Display Name and Command contents are mandatory Search Type the operation name Name VolumeOffline Display Name VolumeOffline VolumeAccessDelete v Add Acronym ag VolumeAccessRestrict ag VolumeAccessShow Remove Warning Message VolumeClone Description VolumeOffline Q VolumeCreate A VolumeDelete 4 VolumeOffline Type costes Se VolumeOnline ag VolumeShow Role All X o oP ie iia Command Content Senv SSDOMAIN_ HOME integrations Dell Equall ogicPS4100X CustomMethod customMethod tcl l System acquire Time Out clearconfig Configuration Senv SSDOMAIN_HOME integrations Dell Equall ogicPS4100X Cust
434. on requires the following hardware components 1 GHz 32 bit x86 or 64 bit x64 processor 512 MB of system memory 1 GB recommended Minimum hard drive free space prior to installation 1 GB For the latest client software requirements see the Active System Manager Release Notes Installing the Active System Manager Client Software This section describes the procedures for installing the Active System Manager client software on a Windows Mac OS or Linux workstation and describes the Active System Manager software license error messages and associated remedies for each in the following subsections Getting Started Installing the Active System Manager Client Software on a Windows OS Installing the Active System Manager Client Software on a Mac OS Installing the Active System Manager Client Software on Linux Troubleshooting Active System Manager License Error Messages Installing the Active System Manager Client Software Installing the Active System Manager Client Software on a Windows OS Note This procedure describes only how to install the Active System Manager software To upgrade your Active System Manager client software you must first uninstall the current version and then install the new version For information about uninstalling your version of the Active System Manager software see the Uninstalling the Active System Manager Client Software section on page 2 8 To install the Active System Manager client software
435. on resource availability Deletes the repository elements For details see the Deleting Repository Definitions section on page 9 11 Deletes Resource Adapters For details see the Deleting Resource Adapters section on page 9 26 Exports templates For details see the Exporting Templates section on page 11 16 Imports templates For details see the Importing Templates section on page 11 15 Imports RA packages Updates the repository elements For details see the Updating Repository Content section on page 9 10 You can assign permissions to a new user or group and can modify those permissions at a later time The following basic guidelines outline permission access e Ifyou do not set any permissions for a user and you have assigned the user to a group then that group s permissions are inherited e Ifauser that has no permissions assigned is not part of a group then that user is denied any access e Ifyou set many of the permissions for a user but leave some unspecified the group s settings are used for those permissions that were unspecified for the user If those permissions are also unspecified for the group or the user does not belong to a group then those types of access are denied e Ifauser s permission and their group s permission disagree then the user s permission is accepted Note Ifyou have specified a permission for a user then that overrides the group permissio
436. on web client displays see Figure 5 42 5 68 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Managing Virtual Resources Figure 5 42 Active System Manager System Settings Resource Details Properties m9 Sessions gt Templates Monitoring Audit Pp EME Name Result Status Message Completion Time Category SessionId Session Name Session State amp Session 3 amp Acquire Success Resource adapter is not provisioned Skippin 04 15 2013 11 16 AM IST Session 77 AUTO1366004246135 Setting up amp Acquire Success Resource adapter is not provisioned Skippin 04 15 2013 12 18 PM IST Session 83 AUTO1366008065934 Setting up te Acquire Failure No response received from resource adapter 05 16 2013 04 46 PM IST Session 151 AUTO1368702909884 Setting up de Acquire Failure No response received from resource adapter 05 16 2013 05 44 PM IST Session 151 AUTO1368702909884 Running 7 BY Armocion Cuisrarr Armena anaratinan marred z NLAC IM12NE AO DAA TCT Carriage ici ALITA IE0T7NINANGO A Desi in a 5 m Supported Operations E Active System Manager System Settings 3 Settings Database License Script Servers Properties ll gt Setti ngs Purge Audit Data Download Logs Email Notification Settings Specify your Email settings for outbound notifications SMTP Server Host From Field support dell com 2 Click Purge Audit Data to ope
437. onal treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law Figure 2 2 Connect to Active System Manager Server Dialog Box B Connect to Active System Manager Server 2 Connect to the Active System Manager server see the Connecting to the Active System Manager Server section on page 2 6 If you are logged on as an administrator the Select Login Profile User dialog box displays see Figure 2 3 2 4 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Launching the Active System Manager Client Software on Windows Figure 2 3 Login Profile Login Profile Reset 3 Click OK to display the Active System Manager home page Figure 2 4 Active System Manager Home Page G8 Active System Manager f File Edit Navigate Tools Reports Window Help l elas al gt EJ El 127 Data ES Discovery Setup ala Discover New Import Export Save Saveas Save ll ay Users Groups 4 Resource Pools K Maintenance Bi Resource A 2 File Servers Software Re No Filtering A Marne Manufacturer os Default System os 4162 4162 4162 os abcdef abcdef abcdef c Varun Managed01 Varun os Varun VRTMEOL Varun os Varun VRTRTOL Varun a os VMDash VMDash VMDash os VMDash VMDashl VMDash Inventory Operations E Templates Eo Sessions y
438. onfirm the deletion and return to the Connect to Active System Manager Server dialog box Account Management 3 7 Deleting Server Accounts 3 8 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Chapter 4 User Profile Management Note This chapter describes tasks and functions that are administrator specific A user can have administrator privileges based on its profile role For a list of the built in permissions based on administrator and user roles see Table 4 1 on page 4 19 The Active System Manager software allows you to set permissions for access to a number of privileges Active System Manager users are defined by Active System Manager administrators however users have the ability to reset their password and edit their profile This chapter describes the following user profile management topics Managing Security Functions Managing Groups Defining Permissions Modifying Permissions Managing Authentication Repositories Managing Security Functions This section describes the administrator s role for managing security functions for the Active System Manager software Managing Users or Administrators This section describes how you can use the Active System Manager software to manage users or administrators The following topics are described here Accessing a User List Adding New Users Adding an LDAP AD Repository Adding NIS Users User Profile Management 4 1 Managing Security Functions Accessing a User
439. ool Resource Pool Management Manage Resource Pool Add edit and delete resource pools EE Reserved Resource Pool Edit Delete 5 54 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Managing Resource Pools 2 Click Add to display the Add Resource Pool dialog box see Figure 5 31 Figure 5 31 Add Resource Pool Resource Pool Management Add Resource Pool S Please specify a valid name for Resource Pool Resource Pool Details Mame Description Association Details Resource Asset Resource Pools Users _ Groups F gt Dell F E 1D0vL3v1 FU 4DRBQV1 MU 6ZPBQV1 F E 21MDTV1 O U 36VBQV1 F E Dell_Chassis O Y Dell_Storage O Y Dell_Storage_Comp_001 O Q Dummy_001 FDRBQVI F WD GaleArray01 Test O GDRBQV1 MA GZPROVI Cancel 3 Configure the Resource Pool and Association Details as follows a Click the Name field and enter a name for the new resource pool b Optional Click the Description field and enter a description for the new resource pool c In the Resource Asset tab select the resources assets to associate with this new resource pool d Click the Users tab see Figure 5 32 and select one or more users to add to this resource pool Inventory Management 9 55 Managing Resource Pools Figure 5 32 Add Resource Pool Users Resource Pool Management Add Resource Pool Select assets resource pools users and groups for your resource pool Resource Pool Details Name n
440. or Drive efficiency in the datacenter by minimizing oversubscription of costly resources Simple and efficient integration with enterprise resources Provides optimized resource allocation and ensures high asset utilization Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Active System Manager User Roles Active System Manager supports two different roles users and administrators Roles are associated to a user profile for more information see Chapter 4 User Profile Management Each role comes with a specific set of built in permissions where user profile permissions are configurable and built in permissions are not configurable The administrator has access to a larger set of functionality within the Active System Manager system The role of the Active System Manager administrator includes all of the capabilities of Active System Manager users Any user with the administrator role has the authority to grant other users additional responsibilities for inventory management Template management session management and report management For example the Active System Manager administrator can perform the following functions not available for standard users e Manage resource types and instances including resource pools e Define user groups and permissions e Define and manage software repositories e Access and manage all templates e Configure system wide session notifications and reminders e Access and manage all
441. or more information see the Filtering section on page 1 12 and the the Grouping section on page 1 15 Sessions follow a session life cycle and states change over time For a graphical representation of the Session workflow including the states see Figure 12 4 Displays the archived sessions Lists the available templates Displays resource level scripts Displays a graphical representation of the allocated network configuration Displays the content of the running sessions in an outline format It represents a high level summary of an open editor and allows you to navigate or find information quickly When you select a node or link in this view it also is selected in the session editor and the properties for the selected session change as appropriate in the Properties view Tracks resource instance properties associated with sessions It is a set of property values that are reflected in what you see in the session and link editors Working with Running Sessions The Active System Manager software allows you to perform a variety of functions using the Sessions perspective Scheduling a Session Using Templates Creating an Instant Session Opening Sessions Opening the Session Editor Using the Sessions Calendar Viewing Session Properties Editing Default Session Properties Assigning and Changing Session Ownership Canceling Sessions Session Management 12 3 Working with Running Sessions e Delet
442. oragePool System E Dell Forcel0 54810 System E Dell EqualLogic PS6110 System E Template VMwareLib System E VMware VirtualMachine System E VMware Host System To directory C Users vittoriad 2 Review the Resource Adapter values see Table 9 8 on page 9 17 and either click Select All to select all of the Resource Adapters to export or click Deselect All to deselect the selected Resource Adapters 3 Inthe To directory field type a directory path or click Browse to select a directory location for your exported RAP files 4 Click Finish Deleting Resource Adapters To delete Resource Adapters and the associated Resource Adapter directory structure on the Active System Manager server perform the following steps 1 In the Resource Adapters view select one or more Resource Adapters right click and select Delete A confirmation prompt for the deletion displays 2 Click OK 9 26 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Chapter 10 Network Management lo e Note This chapter describes tasks and functions that are administrator specific 5 This chapter describes the Active System Manager Networking perspective and associated tools that you use to configure the global virtual identity pools and networks to reflect the existing identity pools and networks in your environment Understanding Global Identity Pools In Active System Manager pools provide a conceptual way to categorize the virtual identities tha
443. orer View c Import Explorer ES No Filtering 2 Defaults Dell VMware chal Attributes pevn Component Location Generator a Hypervisor cal Icon Path chal Resource Location Generator c Simple Resource Location Generator cal Slot Information Table 5 16 lists the plug ins out of the box are available Table 5 16 Import Explorer View Properties Plug In Attributes Hypervisor Icon Path Simple Resource Location Generator Slot Information Purpose Used for defining the configuration and inventory parameter that will be applied to the resources when a resource will be imported Used for marking the resource as virtual The Hypervisor plug in is used to apply the hypervisor property enable virtualization to a set of resources specifying the particular criteria The plug in file for the hypervisor plug in is hypervisor csv Used to specify the icon that will be applied to the resource imported Used for the interface location generation of the standard resource instance The simple location generator plug in and plug in file for the simple location generator is simpleresourcelocgenerator tcl Used to specify the extra non traffic interfaces to be added to the components other than the generated by the location generator plug in 2 In the Import Explorer view right click and select New The New Inventory Import Plugin dialog box displays see Figure 5 25 5 46 Active System Manager User
444. ority to identify who has precedence in allocating resources among all users and groups The values range from 1 to 5 where the highest priority is 1 and the lowest priority is 5 the default is 3 Users with a lower priority may see their sessions rescheduled based on overall system allocations Administrators can change the value users can change the value equal or lower to the value assigned in their user profile The Deadline is the maximum duration of time your session can be scheduled and pushed out Permission Tab Assigns owners default users and groups to newly created and running sessions Allows you to set email and calendar notification rules Allows you to set the search options and categories as appropriate for your search Authentication Security Repositories Administrator task only Allows you to enable or disable the external security repositories associated with the system Allows you to set the following Template options e Enable resource interfaces on link creation Allows you to create links without enabling resource interfaces Display labels by Template name Displays resource and interface Template names in the Template editor or resource and interface names or will use preference settings associated with general display options General gt Display Options Bulk Connectivity with VLAN Allows you to create links in the Template editor using the Palette view Refactoring Warn user on automatic ref
445. ormation about the networks settings open the associated Server Template and view the Networks Settings page Boot Settings View the boot setting that have been set in the associated Server Template If Include Boot Configuration is deselected in the Server Template no Boot settings will be applicable in the profiles associated with that template For more information about the boot settings open the associated Server Template and view the Boot Settings page IO Identity Settings Specify the identity values for your networks If Auto assign the IO Identity was selected in the template Active System Manager generates profile values except for Boot LUN and WWNN These must be manually entered for profiles that require them If Manually assign the IO Identity was selected in the template all profile values must be manually entered Apply Server Profiles Verify that there are the correct number of profiles and they are associated with the correct server and click Finish Edit Server Profiles e Ifthe profile is in the idle or running state you can only modify the description You can modify IO Identities if they were originally entered manually e Ifthe profile is in an error state or configuring state you cannot modify anything in the Server Profile Delete Server Profiles e Ifthe profile is in the idle state you can delete the Server Profile e Ifthe profile is in running or error state You cannot delete a server profile Se
446. ors in the first section and then all of the non administrator users in the next section Within each section entries are listed alphabetically by last name then first name The Group Definition report lists all of the groups that have been defined in the Active System Manager software For each group every member is listed as well as whether the member is an administrator or user To run a User Management report on the Active System Manager menu bar click Reports gt User Management Report The User Report for your environment resource displays Running a Template Utilization Report 15 8 The Template Utilization report displays details of top templates used by selected users To run a Template Utilization report perform the following steps l 2 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Reports gt Template Utilization Report Complete the required fields e Specify Date Range Allows you to select a period of time or specific start and end times e Period Allows you to set the Utilization report on the prior week or the last 30 60 or 90 days e Specific Time Allows you to specify a start and end time to define the time frame the report covers e Filter Options Allows you to select the resources the report is based upon e Security Store An Active System Manager repository of secured store credentials users and groups The Active System Manager software supports a local and remote security store vi
447. ote The Import menu option is enabled only when there are no validation errors The Active System Manager software only updates the link data when there is no validation error in the links The Import editor imports the link data and performs the following tasks at the server e Creates links e Creates interface compatibility e Generates events for link creation and interface compatibility This option imports links if there are no errors in the CSV file The Active System Manager client returns all links if a single error exists in the CSV file If there are existing invalid links you can use the Import Valid Links option to force the import of the valid links The Import Explorer validates the CSV link files according to the following protocols e Conflicts with the already existing inventory data on the server e Accuracy of the applicable information provided in the plug ins including Invalid characters Mandatory fields Length of each field supported by the Active System Manager software e Validation also calculates the action for each component and the resource The action is provided in the Import editor in the Status column where the following values are possible Link Imported TIf the link is successfully imported Link Data Validation Error If basic validation fails Link Server Validation Error For server dependencies Inventory Management 9 93 Exporting Connectivity Exporting Connectivity
448. other countries IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation 2013 12 Rev A00 Contents ADOT TAS GUO serrat e ae gc ee he ww DR ow ARA Ban thn 1X o A ah arch h tiie a toe aa het ay SA cs viet Pan ch Minn AU eh a arte Singh Ge Gk A ws he X OLA IZA ON eeraa aaa a ASA r ii X OMS CAO rr En o AO ee A E oa xii IOC E aaa tasa aa E EE xii Synas CONVENIOS aerea a aad ied is ee Gita ee eee ed eh aed et eee eee Ree xii Administ Aor Ole CON l Ea ed r ee wae E a a od E xili Documento e esai nn A E eons E ales ahead EE ee Rae EEE xiii Chapter 1 Active System Manager Overview 0 0 0 cc ccc teen eee n tenes 1 1 Active oy stem Manager User ROLES EA AA AAA AAA AAA aea 1 3 Active System Manager User Interface Elements sd we pies bo AR A AAA A AA 1 5 Active System Manager Software Menu Options 0 eee e eee e eens 1 5 DESPENSA het eee Rene ees 1 6 Modityino Perspective Preferences axati dis oes 1 7 A A A A eae eee 1 7 Nayivatino Perspectives sacas reads a ee ee 1 7 Castomizino P er pectivEs mdd A antes AR 1 8 Sayino Your Perspective AS E EA AAA ARA AA Ra RRR A 1 9 IG Serine PERS PECES IS ERES AO A A ee ee 1 9 Closing One or AIL Perspectives orton da roedor dada 1 10 Delete Por peces a ue dee da eins is is 1 10 MIES LE aid bs dies Saad dis diia oe 1 10 sine NayviSator VIEWS a A A A E A Ea 1 11 o O ae a ee ee 1 12 COUPE scx im te eed adds ceed Ra RG een eA oe E ee ae ee ee derek eae 1 15 Op
449. ouping or to highlight an area of specific importance within a Template or Template editor Rectangle Allows you to draw around a Template environment as a grouping or to highlight an area of specific importance within a Template or Template editor Annotations Connection Allows you to link to the Template or Templates from one annotation to another or from one annotation to a specific Template environment Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 For all annotation functions Working with Templates e The properties display in the Properties tab where you can assign or modify the Border and Fill parameters such as font style font size color line style line width and opacity e You can set the default preferences for those properties in the Preferences dialog box click Window gt Preferences gt Template gt Template Editor gt Annotations Updating Templates using the Link Editor The link editor is an editing tool used to author resource or resource type interfaces and create connectivity between resource elements Figure 11 25 displays an example of the link editor Figure 11 25 Link Editor Example gt testusertopa E 2 Picos By Type El Link editor Filter E A Pico Box400 e Fibre Channel LW P Fibre Channel Liw Fibre Channel Lw Fibre Channel LW m ae Fibre Channel Li Es gt Fibre Channel yy m ee site Fibre Channel Liv le N e Fibre Channel Liv A P Fibre C
450. ource operations such as Resource Adapter setup methods will be executed once the resource has been allocated B Note Ifthe scheduler cannot allocate this resource for this session the dependency manager will list all sessions Substitution Resource Instances Resource instances can be swapped or substituted as soon as a session is in a Confirmed or Running state To substitute resource instances perform the following steps E 2 Open a Running or Confirmed session In the Template editor select a resource instance right click and select Substitute The Resource Substitution dialog box displays with the Automatic Substitution Option selected by default see Figure 12 36 Figure 12 36 Resource Substitution Resource Substitute Operation Select the desired option For resource substitute Substitute Options 2 Automatic Allow GaleForce to select appropriate resource select resource from reserved pool For Administrators Only O Manual Allow me to select resources Select resources Session Management 12 39 Working with Running Sessions 3 Select a substitute option e Automatic Allows the Active System Manager software to determine based on current allocation and availability a new resource that satisfies the original requirement e Select resource from reserved pool For Administrators Only For more information about WO resource pooling see the Managing Resource Pools section on p
451. ource allocation The following sub sections describe how to manage session resources e Understanding Resource Representation e Displaying Resource and Link Status e Displaying Resource Instance Properties e Adding Resource Instances e Substitution Resource Instances e Deactivating and Activating Resources e Deleting Resources Understanding Resource Representation Managed Equipment are represented with a single icon Virtual equipment can be represented as groups in a single icon to facilitate the management of a larger set of resources see Figure 12 29 Figure 12 29 Session Example with 1 Virtual Group of 5 Resources and 1 Managed Resource importData 1438 c35w E eirtual u g Virtual Group O AT PICO 03 Session Link To interact with a Managed Equipment resource perform the following steps 1 Open a session editor see the Opening the Session Editor section on page 12 9 2 Inthe session editor select the resource 3 Right click and select one of the operations for this resource Session Management 12 33 Working with Running Sessions When interacting with a group of virtual resources you must first identify the resource in the group to interact with as follows 1 Open a session editor see the Opening the Session Editor section on page 12 9 2 In the session editor select the group 3 Right click and select Switch To gt resource ID gt resource by name The selected resource name wi
452. ource pool and click Edit to display the Modify Resource Pool dialog box see Figure 5 35 Figure 5 35 Modify Resource Pool Resource Pool Management Modify Reserved Resource Pool Select assets for your reserved resource pool Resource Pool Details Name Pool Description Pool Exarnple Association Details Resource Asset L gt El er El 1DYL3v1 HU 6ZPBQV1 El 21MDTV1 O 36VBQV1 O Dell_Chassis O Y Dell_Storage O Q Dell_Storage_Comp_001 E Dummy_001 Fl FDRBQV1 O O GaleArray01 Test Eo GDREOQVI ma G7PROVI 3 Modify the Resource Pool and Association Details as follows a Click the Name field and enter a new name for the resource pool b Optional Click the Description field and enter a new description for the resource pool c In the Resource Asset tab select the resources assets to associate with the resource pool d Click the Resource Pools tab to modify the hierarchy of the existing resource pools e Click the Users tab and modify the users associated to this resource pool f Click the Groups tab and modify the groups associated to this resource pool 4 Click OK 5 58 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Managing Maintenance Windows Deleting Resource Pools To delete existing resource pools perform the following steps l On the Active System Manager menu bar click Tools gt Resource Pools Management The Manage Resource Pool dialog box displays se
453. p 11172 16 100 55 cgi binfpankajl cai O E http 1 172 16 100 55 cgi bin pankaj2 cai O E http 172 16 100 55 cgi bin pankaj3 cai O E http 1 172 16 100 55 cgi bin pankaj4 cai 13 10 C E http 11172 16 100 55 cgi bin ravi coi txowner Owner8 lt Mi gt Select All Deselect All o Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Orchestrations e Resource Level Script Adds resource level scripts see Figure 13 10 Figure 13 10 Add Resource Level Script Remote Scripts ES Select at least one resource script aoe iim ee vM B C resourcelnstance E gt HTTP Script Cl ee raj O l timedemo B C Script fh 172 16 100 55 O E timedemo a 6 Click OK to add the custom operation or script to the step in the Orchestration View pane Note At each Orchestration step you can choose to execute or skip executing any particular step in an el orchestration For more details refer Re Executing Failed Steps section on page 13 11 At each Orchestration step you can choose to abort or skip 1f any error occurs For more details see the Error Handling A bort on Error section on page 13 12 Re Executing Failed Steps The Execute check box provides a way to enable or disable execution of steps in Orchestration by checking or un checking Execute check box that appears next to each step in Orchestration It provides you with the ability to re execute any step or set of steps in Orchestration e
454. p the resource s software Cleanup Time Min Amount of time required to remove the resource s software Icon Icon for this resource type 2 Enter as much information about the core properties as possible Fields that cannot be modified are displayed in gray disabled 3 On the Active System Manager menu bar click File gt Save to save your changes to the server Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Using Resource Types Adding Resource Interface Types Once you create a resource type you can define the associated interface types for that resource type For more information regarding interface types see the Using Resource Interface Types section on page 5 31 To add resource interface types for your new resource type perform the following steps 1 In the Resource Types view right click a resource type and select Open The resource type core properties display within the specified perspective 2 Scroll down to the Interface Types section see Figure 5 11 for an example Figure 5 11 Resource Type lInterface Types Section Interface Type Definition and Compatibility Interface Type This section lists all the interface types and the selected interface type compatibility available for your environment Elo Gi Name Type Compon Description El Console Console aii Interface Interface aff 10 100 1000 Base T Interface a LOGigabitEthernet Interface lt p TenGigabitEthernet Interface Componen
455. page 1 20 e Ul Presentation current e Override presentation settings Overrides the presentation settings previously set by choosing a different presentation style e Editor tab positions Specifies either top or bottom to indicate where you want tabs for stacked editors to appear e View tab positions Specifies either top or bottom to indicate where you want tabs for stacked views to appear e Perspective switcher positions Specifies the location of the perspective switcher bar e Current theme Specifies the currently active theme color and font set e Default current e Reduced Palette e Classic Theme e Description Allows you to provide a description for the settings you configure e Show traditional style tabs Specifies whether traditional square tabs should be used in place of the curved tabs e Enable animations Enables or disables the feature where views animate to their location when closed or opened e Use mixed fonts and colors for labels e Show heap status General gt Display Inventory Chapter 8 Using Options e Resource Types Displays resource types by Name or Manufacturer amp Model Inventory and default Chapter 10 Network e Resource Instances Displays resource instances by Name or Asset Tag Management default e Resource Interfaces Displays resource interface by Name or Location default Session Calendar e Display Session Label Displays the session label by Session Name default or by
456. peration2 oe resourceInstance customOperation1 this operation is for apply s S fu01 home ssyed of scripts timescript py gt Test Step_2 Y oe resourceInstance customOperation1 this operation is For apply s O 13 16 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Executing Orchestration 3 When selecting an Orchestration the Execute Orchestration Update dialog box displays Before executing you can update the Orchestration The selected Orchestration details display in Orchestration View pane prior to execution If you change the Orchestration and then execute it the original Orchestration associated with Template will remain unchanged The change applies to that particular session where the Template is executed 4 Click OK Monitoring Orchestration Execution The Orchestration execution monitoring refers to monitoring the real time status of execution of steps in the Orchestration while the session is in a running state It allows you to visually track the status of Orchestrations running in a Session To monitor Orchestration execution perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Open Perspective gt Session E Note To access Session perspective directly on the Perspective menu bar click Session You can monitor the Orchestration execution status in the following different views e Session Editor e Orchestration Execution with default Operation Properties View e Orc
457. plate Before you can execute an environment session you must define a requirement Template The Active System Manager Templates perspective provides a graphical user interface GUI for creating author Templates Once defined the Template can be saved and reused or it can be modified to create variations To open the Templates perspective perform one of these tasks e On the Active System Manager toolbar click the Open Perspective icon and select Templates e On the Active System Manager toolbar click the Templates perspective icon e On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Open Perspective gt Templates Template Management 11 1 Figure 11 1 Templates Perspective dp DashBoard Inventory O Operations Templates 11 2 yal A Import Export Es Templates No Filtering poi Search Cl o A E E File Edit Navigate Tools Reports Window Help J Instances S Types D Components 3x Dell Chassis System B Dell_Chassis 3 i w E Y X Resource Instance a 2 admin 3 a amp logical 2 E Logical Template With One VM Connected To A VLAN E Logical Template With Two VMs Connected To a VLAN 4 amp physical 11 2 AS 800 Deployment Cluster VMware ESXi 5 1 Hypervisor deployment ISO boot 2 Resource Instance v Core Properties amp Core Properties Specify basic details for the resource E Virtualization Infrastructure Name cmc CGJFQV1 es B All I
458. plete the following steps to update server firmware using the attach server profile custom operation You can specify the firmware images to be applied to a server on the Firmware page of the Server Profile Template wizard Firmware updates can only be performed on servers in which no other firmware update operation 1s running as part of another operation or any virtual operation Prerequisite Server Firmware Repository must be set up While selecting firmware in the Firmware Settings screen select firmware Dell Update Packages from a single repository only Steps to Update Dell Blade Rack Servers Firmware Using the Attach Server Profile Custom Operation l 2 3 Click Operations in the left hand tool bar Click the Server Templates and Profiles tab in Operation Center view Right click in the Operation Center and select Create Template to create a new template or right click on an existing template and select Edit to edit an existing server profile template Complete the template pages and click Next until you reach the Firmware Settings page Firmware Management 6 7 Minimum Firmware Versions for Active System Manager Components 5 On the Firmware Settings page browse to the relevant firmware update images in your Firmware update repository 6 Select the Include Firmware Settings check box so that firmware settings are included in the server profile 7 Complete the wizard and click Finish to create a new server pro
459. port 3 Delete Set Policies Status Switch to Link Editor Open Resource Instance Editor Open Resource Type Editor Execute Session Scripts Show Attach Rendering Using Session Link 4 Click Save to delete the VLAN component Saving Sessions The session editor allows you to save the current configuration at any time and the Template is saved to the Active System Manager archive so that the next time you use the equipment you can continue from where you last worked on that session To save the session as a Template the following conditions must be met e The session must be in a running state e All resources must be powered on To save a session with the working Template open perform the following tasks 1 Select a method to access the Save As dialog box see Figure 12 50 and apply the save to the currently selected session e On the Active System Manager menu bar click File gt Save As e In the Sessions view right click a running session and select Snapshot 12 56 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Running Sessions Figure 12 50 Saving the Session as a New Template Snapshot session Pawan Cluster Enter a template name description and save option to save a new template Mame Cluster VMware ESXi 51 Hypervisor deployment PAE boot HDD DHCP Description Cluster VMware ESXi 5 1 Hypervisor deployment PXE boot HDD DHCP Option Save all resources as spe
460. ports not being used during the requirement can still be used during the session realization because the resource is virtually owned by the session owner and participants Note If you do not specify Exclusive for a sharable resource then by default others are allowed to use it concurrently Manufacturer Manufacturer name of the resource Used for reference only cannot be edited Template Management 11 31 Working with Templates Table 11 5 Default Properties for the Resource Types View continued Tab Name Provisioning Inventory 11 32 Property Name Model Description Virtual Object Count Name Value Scheduling Permission Encrypted e Custom e System Description Model name of resource Used for reference only cannot be edited Description of the resource type For the virtual resource types role only Allows you to set the number of virtual resources to be created at realization time List of all provisioning parameters that can be overwritten from their default value The Type value is only string To add the custom Template property that must be overwritten with a editable value click Add You can set scheduling permissions on each custom provisioning property The permissions allow end users to display or edit property values at scheduling time The permissions are e Allow to Edit The property will be editable at scheduling time e Allow to Show The property displays at scheduling time
461. pository with Dell Server Firmware Repository Type 0 0 cece eee eee 6 2 Updating Dell Chassis Firmware from the Operations Center 6 3 RESTE QUISTES e asin Bae ea ine GRE ne ee a ee ee een bees 6 3 Steps to Update Dell Chassis Firmware from the Operations Center 0 0 0 00 ccc eens 6 4 Updating Dell Server PEMWAES cra ara A OS eee eee 6 4 Updating Dell Blade Rack Servers Firmware from the Operation Center 0 0 0 0 0 0 cece ees 6 4 RESTE qUisilES gt cani iaa dos Rs eros rr Ross 6 4 Steps to Update Dell Blade Rack Servers Firmware from the Operation Center 0 0 0 0 000 6 4 Updating Dell Blade Rack Servers Firmware from an Active Session 0 0 0 0 ccc cc eee ees 6 5 Prsrequisite is de ated Si ahs Rasen aaa Ae eRe T aE ed a pide eee a es 6 5 Steps to Update Dell Blade Rack Servers Firmware from an Active Session 0 0 c cece eee 6 5 Updating Dell Blade Rack Servers Firmware Using the Attach Server Profile Virtual Operation 6 6 Perco SG estro oie acca tasd oe ine wR ax Aa eo es a 6 6 Steps to Update Dell Blade Rack Servers Firmware Using the Attach Server Profile Virtual Operation 6 6 Updating Dell Blade Rack Servers Firmware through an Orchestration 0 0 0 00 0 6 6 PrEstequisttos pp roni a CAL ee oe ee ee ee ee es 6 7 Steps to Update Dell Blade Rack Servers Firmware through an Orchestration o o oooooooooooooo o 6 7 Updating Dell Blade Rack Servers Fi
462. ppropriate For more information about permissions and the allowable functions to set or modify permissions see the Defining Permissions section on page 4 19 5 Click OK to update the permissions for your user or group or groups Managing Authentication Repositories To retrieve a complete list of authentication repositories defined during the import of new users on remote servers LDAP or NIS on the Active System Manager menu bar click Tools gt Authentication Repositories The Preferences Security dialog box displays see Figure 4 11 Figure 4 11 Preferences Security Preferences type filter text Archive Bin General Help Inventory Scheduler Search Security Template Test and Script Execution AML Security This is an administrative provisioning only Active security repositories will allow users to authenticate to Active System Manager Default security repository will be used by Active System Manager for auto provisioning of user Authentication Security Repositories Active Name Restore Defaults Apply For more information about managing authentication repositories see the following sub sections e Activating Authentication Repositories e Deactivating Authentication Repositories Activating Authentication Repositories 4 22 The authentication repository must be activated for users to be authenticated This setting will override the user level activation status see the Act
463. properties Selected properties Classification Manufacturer Model Role DHCP ServerlP DHCP ServerPassword DHCP ServerUsername DiskFormat GuestCustomizationRequired GuestDNSDomain GuestHostName GuestType GuestWindowsDomain GuestWindowsDomainAdminF GuestWindowsDomainAdmint E ii F You can group by multiple folders and set the grouping order for example Role Manufacturer Model You can also group by custom properties if they have been created for the resource types in your system For more information see the Grouping section on page 1 15 Accessing Inventory Both the Resource Types and Resource Instances views allow grouping the Group By icon 1s available at E the top right of the Resource Types and Resource Instances view menu bars Note For many Active System Manager users your site s custom properties may be the most relevant properties for you to use while grouping and organizing your inventory Accessing Resources via the Filters Dialog Box You can use a filter to modify the display of your inventory resources Both the Resource Types and Resource Instances views allow filtering You use the Filters feature to specify filters that force the Active System Manager application to only display the resource type and resource instance information that you require within the associated views In general you should set your resource types or resource instances filter to Managed Equipment because for
464. r 48 VDC File System Used for managing the file system The following topics are described in this section Inventory Management 5 31 Using Resource Interface Types e Adding Interface Types e Associating Interface Types e Disassociating Interface Types e Deleting Interface Types e Modifying Resource Interface Type Location Information 5 32 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Using Resource Interface Types Adding Interface Types To add an interface type perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Tools gt Interface Types The Interface Type Definition and Compatibility dialog box displays see Figure 5 18 Figure 5 18 Interface Type Definition and Compatibility Interface Type Definition and Compatibility Interface Type This section lists all the interface types and the selected interface type compatibility available for your environment Belo Mame Type Compon Description El Console Console so Interface Interface ef 10 100 1000 Base T Interface a 10GigabitEthernet Interface TenGigabitEthernet Interface p Component Interface aif Fibre Channel LW Interface aif Fibre Channel SW Interface a FortyGigE Interface a GigabitEthernet Interface ManagementEthernet Interface a TenGigabitEthernet Interface p 10GigabitEthernet Interface so VIRTUAL Interface i Power Supply Power Su A File System File System E Generic File System Delete
465. r Profiles but all Server Profiles in IDLE state the following apply Server Template Settings Users can change any value except Name BIOS Settings Users can change any value except for Integrated RAID Controller RAID Settings Users can change all values except Integrated RAID Controller Firmware Settings Users can change all values Network Settings Users can change Bandwidth Oversubscription and Virtual NIC Mapping Order Users cannot add or delete NICs Users can Edit NICs with the stipulations below Edit VNIC Users can add new networks and can modify the Select Network s list Users cannot change the Native VLAN network Boot Settings User cannot change any values Server Template and Profiles 7 7 Deleting a Server Template Note You cannot delete a template that is attached to a server 1 Click Operations gt Server Templates and Profiles 2 Right click the template that you want to delete and then select Delete 3 Click OK to delete the template Server Profiles A Server Profile is an instance of a Server Template that has specific networking identities allocated and associated with it These identities include items such as MAC WWPN and WWNN There can be multiple server profiles based on a single template A server profile is applied on a server with matching configuration Note Server Profiles created by users are used by virtual operations and not during orchestration
466. r User Guide Release 7 1 Managing Virtual Resources the highest level of datacenter down to the individual VM This is presented in a hierarchical manner in the vCenter hierarchy Operation Center view see Figure 5 36 Figure 5 36 vCenter Hierarchy in Operation Center View El Operation Center hd No Filtering Mame Status CE System Domain Ce AS800_1 45800 Ce GalePod 45800 E CGJFQVI Chassis IOA 10 Module Overview Servers Server Overview 1 Slot Number 13 Slot Number 2 Slot Number 3 Slot Number 4 Slot Number 6 Slot Number Tb Slot Number 7d Slot Number ral Dell_ Storage DellEqualLogic ss 192 168 120 90 Forcel0Switch ss 192 168 120 91 Forcel0Switch da VLAN ID VLAN O ManagedEquipment a Matricswrtch vCenter_l vCenter 192 168 120 125 vCenter F ddddd DataCenter ig Gale DataCenter 192 168 120 192 vCenter vCenter_3 vCenter Note Figure 5 36 displays the typical hierarchical scenario of vCenter objects However there may exist scenarios where the root level of objects may vary depending upon the object type Navigating Operation Center View E Note By default the Operation Center view is a part of the Inventory perspective To navigate to the Operation Center view on the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Show View gt Operation Center Inventory Management 5 63 Managing Virtual Resources Managing the Resource Manager Using the Operation Center Vi
467. r entering values against input parameters You can either enter these parameter values in the Value field manually or by selecting a value from the Possible Values pane Note The star pre fixed in the icons in the Name column Parameters section indicates mandatory values that you must enter e Possible Values Pane Displays all elements contained in selected the Value Source The information related to the Primary and Secondary Source is already embedded in a specific RA If required this panel allows you to select values from the Primary Source and Secondary Source drop down list 2 Select a parameter in the Parameters pane 3 Click Primary Source In the Possible Values pane and select the Value Source for the selected parameter for example select Software Repository Inventory Management 9 71 Managing Virtual Resources 4 Click Secondary Source in the Possible Values pane and select the Value Source Sub Type for example select a specific type of Software Repository Note For advanced users step 4 on page 5 72 and step 5 on page 5 72 fulfill the requirements By default the Active System Manager RA pre populates the Primary Source and Secondary Source entries in most cases However step 4 on page 5 72 and step 5 on page 5 72 allow you to select a value from the Primary Source and Secondary Source values 5 Check the required parameter value to auto populate the Value field This value is referenced to
468. r script server settings that will be used by Active System Manager for remote scripts execution Host Username Password Remote Script Location Resource Script Location Reservation Script Parameters Note Each parameters should be space separated Example Session ID Session Name Template Name Owner Device Script Parameters Note Parameters should be space separated Example Session ID Session Name Template Name Owner Asset Tag Version Manufacturer Model E Secure Communication General Settings E Enable preference based graphical editor support in Active System Manager RCP client Maximum resource 200 E count Scheduler Options Setup scheduler options Y Append Scheduler Analysis in Application logs E Apply a random factor on Scheduler solution lt Y Prioritize Breadth Resource over Depth Port Active System Manager Session Approval Settings El Deploy Active System Manager Session Approval Session Approval Buffer Time in Minutes Save Cancel Check this option if the deployment involves huge templates If this flag is true RCP allows preference based graphical editor support in template and session Set a maximum number of resources for which graphical editor can be opened This is a performance setting for RCP client Scheduler can output more information related to its activities in the Active System Manager lux log application log Selecting this
469. r toolbar click the New icon select Other gt Active System Manager gt Repositories The wizard displays a New dialog box for you to create a new repository Click Next to create a new repository Select the required repository type and protocol Click Next to display and enter information about the new repository Click Next to list and discover the files on the repository Click Discover to start the browsing and initiate the discovery process and to view the associated file elements This could take a few minutes Identify element levels to be marked as Base or Patch elements To mark them as a base file select one or more rows right click and select Set As Base e To not mark them as a patch file in the Base column click the check boxes to deselect your identified elements Note Steps 7 8 and 9 are required in order to use the provisioning feature in the Active System Manager application Element types must be identified as an image file or an element or a configuration file To do so select one or more elements right click and select Set Type gt Element Image File Configuration File Set the association select a row and click Associate To set the association to multiple images or configuration files click Bulk Associate Note This operation is required to facilitate provisioning of resources under test for specific vendors 10 Select all files to import into the repository view using the check
470. ration allows you to create a log file of the selected database from the list for future reference To create a log file of selected database entry perform the following steps 1 Click Log File in Action column The Log File page displays see Figure 16 5 Figure 16 5 Log File Dialog Box Opening galeforce_db_backup_05212012_162829 log X Database Refresh You have chosen to open galeforce_db_backup_05212012_162829 log Scheduler gt which is a XML Document from http 172 16 100 210 41106 NAME What should Firefox do with this File ACTION Open with XML Editor default galeforce_db_backup_05212012 162829 dmp Log File gt O Save File C Do this automatically For files like this From now on galeforce_db_backup_05282012_145731 dmp select 2 2 Open the file in XML editor or choose your own program to open the selected file 3 Save the file in a designated location 4 Click the Do this automatically for files like this from now on check box if required 5 Click OK to open or save the log file Delete To delete an existing database record from the list click Delete see Figure 16 4 Restore A Restore message prompts you to restart your server to effect the change click Restore E Note The Restore option is available only when the back up operation is successfully completed If the Restore operation is unsuccessful the option does not appear in the drop down box 16 7 Li
471. rators can change ownerships participants and permissions 6 Click OK For more information about permissions see the Defining Permissions section on page 4 19 and the Modifying Permissions section on page 4 21 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Templates Opening Templates To open one or more Templates see the following sub sections e Opening a Single Template e Opening Multiple Templates Opening a Single Template To open a single Template perform one of the following options e Inthe Templates view right click the Template and select Open e In the Templates view double click the Template e In the Sessions view right click the Template and select Open g Note Upon opening a Template validation is invoked For more information see the Validating E Templates section on page 11 13 Opening Multiple Templates To open one or more Templates from the Template view you can open from the Templates perspective or the Sessions perspective Sessions view and perform the following steps 1 Select the method to open the Template or Sessions perspective e On the Active System Manager toolbar click the Template or Sessions perspective icon e Onthe Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Open Perspective gt Template or click Window gt Open Perspective gt Session 2 Select the method to display the Templates or Sessions view e On the Active System Manager menu bar
472. rce in the Template The SetUp Time property allows you to create additional setup time for a Template The number of minutes you enter is added to the normally computed setup time for the Template Provisioning System Teardown Script Script file to run at the end of a session By default no Template level setup script is used instead the resource level scripts are executed If the Template level scripts are specified the resource level scripts are not executed The Template level scripts provide any needed functionality that would normally be handled by the resource level scripts Attachments Name You can add or remove attachments To add a file Description attachment click Add select a file from your file system click Open and the file attachment is added To open the file attachment select one and click Open To remove a file attachment select a file attachment and click Remove History Date Lists all history For more information see the Managing Author Template History Details section on page 11 12 Notes Value Located on the Active System Manager server Specified in minutes The default value is O The value must be in whole numbers Located on the Active System Manager server a Note The Active System Manager server can be preconfigured with a default set of custom Sa E Template level properties and default values for all sessions created in the system For information on how to set your defaul
473. res password less SSH configured between Active System Manager server and Database server Backup Location home delladmin asm galeforce gf common DBBackup Enable DB Backup schedule E ave NAME TYPE START TIME END TIME SIZE STATUS ACTION Copyright 2012 2013 Dell Inc All Rights Reserved Table 16 5 lists and defines the fields to be set for scheduling database backup Table 16 5 Schedule Database Backup Fields Fields Description Backup Location Enter backup location for database Enable DB Backup Check to enable DB backup schedule schedule How Often Select from Daily Weekly Monthly scheduling options What day Select a particular day of the months when backup scheduling begins What time Select scheduling time Click Save to save scheduling options Database Related Operations The available database related operations include the following see Figure 16 4 Figure 16 4 Database Related Operations START TIME ENT TIHE paleftoce dib_bechop 06082012 110000 dma Scheduled Tus amp May 2602 Tus 6 May 2012 Emb Complessd peda F 1100 EST 1102157 Cselect 3 keg File galetonce db baca 060873012 155836 dep instant Tie B May 2002 Tue May 2012 5 mb Compieted Bait TR Sh 1ST 15 57 IST As seen in Figure 16 4 database related actions available on each resultant record e Log File e Delete e Restore 16 6 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Settings Configuring Settings Log File The Log File ope
474. rescheduling operations e Enable perspective switching on new session Prompts you to switch to the application Session perspective at the end of scheduling or rescheduling operations e Scheduler Policy During scheduling or rescheduling operations if no solutions are found by the scheduler based on your request you can enable the following options and the scheduler will automatically try again e Identify blocking sessions e Retry with ASAP scheduling Administrator task only Enables the ASAP Engine click the Enable automatic See the Working with rescheduling for ASAP sessions check box to specify the minimum duration for Running Sessions the engine to monitor sessions You can specify the evaluation time in days hours section on page 12 3 and minutes Based on the specified duration the ASAP Engine only considers session sessions to be updated if their start time is confirmed future from the specified duration time and are then rescheduled at that time If other sessions cancel or finish early there is an opportunity for a previously confirmed ASAP session to move up to an earlier time slot ASAP does this automatically The Active System Manager administrator can enable or disable this feature and the Active System Manager Welcome page displays its status Typically rescheduling occurs when a session is canceled or edited to terminate early ASAP rescheduling uses the following rules Other sessions that have no
475. rface Types check box 7 Click OK Note To update the properties for the resource and its interfaces see Figure 11 5 for definitions Adding Resource Instances To add a resource instance to your Template select a method to locate a resource instance to drop in your working Template e Click the Resource Instances view on the Active System Manager toolbar click the Search field enter the resource s name or asset tag and click the Search icon e Click the Search icon to locate a resource instance ye Note Only managed resource instances can be added in a Template You can set your filter in the Resource Instances view accordingly For filtering details see the Filtering section on page 1 12 E Note If you add resource instances to your Template by dragging and dropping them on to the Template editor you must drag and drop the resources individually one at a time The Resource Instances view displays all types of resource instances but you are only allowed to author the managed resources The Outline and Properties views update to reflect what displays in your Template editor When you click a resource instance on the Template editor a different set of properties 11 38 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Templates values display in the Properties view displayed in table form The Outline view displayed in tabular form does not update automatically with the specific resource selection i
476. rm the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Preferences gt General gt Editors see Figure 1 5 Figure 1 5 Preferences Editors Preferences type filter text Editors Archive Bin ae Size of recently opened files list 0 Appearance Display Options Show multiple editor tabs Editors E Restore editor state on startup ee Prompt to save on close even if still open elsewhere Perspectives 4 Close editors automatically Web Browser Help Number of opened editors before closing 10 Inventory Scheduler Search Security Template When all editors are dirty or pinned C Prompt to save and reuse Open new editor Test and Script Execution AML Restore Defaults Apply ee 2 Optional Modify your preferences as appropriate For information about the configurable parameters see the parameter descriptions in Table 1 11 on page 1 37 3 Click Apply gt OK Active System Manager Overview 1 19 Active System Manager User Interface Elements Tiling Editors By default editors are stacked in the editor area but you can choose to tile them to view source files simultaneously The Active System Manager application allows you to have multiple files open in multiple editors Unlike views editors cannot be dragged outside the application to create new windows However you can tile editor sessions to view source files side by side To do so perform the followi
477. rmware Using the Attach Server Profile Custom Operation 6 7 ie he Use caca ostia died tc oia eae 6 7 Steps to Update Dell Blade Rack Servers Firmware Using the Attach Server Profile Custom Operation 6 7 Minimum Firmware Versions for Active System Manager Components o 6 8 4 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Chapter 7 Server Template and Profiles 0 0 000000 cee eee eens 7 1 Creatine a Server Template cerrada ii a ii ede bl Hie UTS Ore OO ee es a 7 1 Editora Server Template ni AE A See Tee es Beka a Roe 7 2 Adding or Editing BIOS Information on a Server Template 00 ccc eee eee 7 2 Adding or Editing RAID Information on a Server Template 0 00 cee eens 7 3 Adding or Editing Firmware Settings on a Server Template 0 0 eens 7 3 Adding or Editing Networks Settings on a Server Template 0 0 ccs 7 4 Naming Conventions when using OrchestrationS 0 0 cee e eee e eens 7 5 Naming conventions tor VM NICS 3064 idea es A chews dae di E dae Gh oes 7 5 Adding or Editing a Virtual NIC Configuration 0 0 0 0 0 0 anaana aaaeeeaeo 7 6 Adding or Editing Boot Settings on a Server Template 0 0 00 ccc cee een eens 7 7 Limitations on Editing Server Templates and Profiles 0 0 eee oo 7 7 Delene a Server Template 244 aia eed owned we AAA A aoe ees 7 8 Server PEE o ai a pi a rd el Peat 7 8 Creating a Server Profile and Server Profile Set
478. roperties must match the values that you entered for that resource or interface This applies to all elements of a resource being considered by the scheduler That is all conditions specified for the resource must match and all conditions specified for each interface required by the Template must match Any property name can only be used once for a particular resource or interface For example you can not enter both Author Name John Doe and Author Name John Smith for a resource This is the equivalent of a logical OR operation on the conditional expressions and is not permitted List of all provisioning parameters that can be overwritten from their default value For information about setting up provisioning parameters see Chapter 8 Using Inventory Authoring Interfaces by Resource Instance Table 11 9 lists and defines the default properties when selecting interfaces for a resource instance You can view the attributes of interfaces on the resource s Properties view and view and edit them on the interface s Properties view Table 11 9 Default Interface Properties for a Resource Instance Tab Name Interface 11 52 Property Name Name Description Type Location Description Name you assigned to this interface or the default name assigned by the Templates perspective Text string that describes this interface The string can be unlimited in length and composed of alphanumeric characters in
479. rosoft Host 0 4 El Hyperv_4 ss Microsoft Host a p E vcenter_1 se Center Demo VMware Host S F El vcenter_3 58 Mware Host Remove b m Di Configuration Inventory Management 5 3 Configuring Discovery Setup E Note The Discovery Configuration Setup editor enables you to configure the discovery for the following Es pa Note Dell Active System Manager elements chassis servers storage arrays and switches top of rack TOR and infrastructure Before you proceed 1t 1s recommended to e Gather IP addresses and access credentials associated with the chassis or blade infrastructure elements storage arrays and switches TOR e Ensure that all elements have network connectivity and that the associated element management interfaces are accessible from the Active System Manager server By default all the Active System Manager systems and system elements that are added to the discovery configuration are checked However the discovery 1s performed on all the checked systems and system elements To eliminate a system from the discovery process un check that particular system see Figure 5 1 The system domain 1s pre configured with the Active System Manager Based on your deployment your administrator can have configure multiple domains 3 Click Add System to select your Active System type and populate the information required for each element such as username password IP addresses and so on Manda
480. rovisioning e Scheduling Template to Create a Session e Provisioning Template Management 11 3 pa pe Linking Editor The first step in the workflow consists of connecting raw blades and L2 matrix switch in the linking editor Creating a Physical Template The next step consists of dragging and dropping the managed devices in the Template editor to provision Hypervisors You are also required to drag some VLAN components in the Template editor and assign some VLAN ID range to it or auto schedule it Then connect managed devices to VLAN component Note The managed devices to be used in the Physical template should not be shared This is because the device being provisioned with a Hypervisor in a session should not be used in another session For more information see the Creating New Templates section on page 11 6 Creating Orchestration for Provisioning In the next step create a Setup type orchestration to be mapped to the Physical template The steps to create orchestration are as follows e Create clusters on the vCenter e Create a Hypervisor on the blades e Register Hypervisors with the vCenter e Add hosts to the cluster created e Run discovery to populate the Active System Manager inventory vCenter discovery with cluster entities Scheduling Template to Create a Session The next step consists of scheduling Template to create a session Note The session scheduled from the Physical template is of perm
481. rspective icon e On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Open Perspective gt Sessions Session Management 12 1 Introducing the Sessions Perspective Figure 12 1 Sessions Perspective Co ee ines File Edit Navigate Tools Reports Window Help v ET A a A D Search v gt m Operations Ej Scripts 5 Execution Ex Purge Sessions New Import Export ive Save AS E5 E Dell Chassis System 9 Dell_Chassis 52 O ES Outline Present Future b Eep ww x Resource Instance r Name Status Resource Instance gt admin v Core Properties Core Properties i b lp DashBoard D ISO BOOT DHCP Awadhesh Running Specify basic details for the resource B Virtualization Infrastructure D Standalone PXE HDD DHCP Running Name cmc CGJFQV1 Availability 3 B All Interfaces Manufacturer Dell El Console Model Chassis File System lt Interface Asset Tag Dell_Chassis Scar Saal Version 1 E Inventory Parameters Role Managed Equipment Shared Description Domain System v Virtualization Infrastructure This hardware allows multiple operating systems to run concurrently on a host computer a s ne 4 m rg all r Design E Orchestration Executions penes Open a session to see orchestration executions Property m 192 168 120 171 40500 admin America Los_Angeles 7 0 0 21236 Table 12 1 outlines the default
482. rver Template and Profiles 7 9 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Chapter 8 Using Inventory This chapter describes the Active System Manager Inventory perspective that catalogs and defines the inventory in your network environment You can then use all of the Active System Manager perspectives to access your environment inventory For a complete description of how the Active System Manager administrator builds the Active System Manager inventory see Chapter 5 Inventory Management Introducing the Inventory Perspective Using Inventory The Inventory perspective controls the layout of the user interface the Active System Manager software uses to display information for your inventory including which views are displayed and their positions within the Active System Manager application You can save the modifications you make to the Inventory perspective as you create them making your own custom user interface Table 8 1 outlines the default views available when you open the Inventory perspective see Figure 8 1 for a graphical representation of the views which appear in tabular form Table 8 1 Inventory Perspective Elements View View or or Editor Name Editor Description Resource View Displays all of the resource types that have been added to the inventory This view can Types be filtered grouped and sorted to increase data accessibility Resource View Displays all of the resource instances that have been added to
483. rview 2 Update the resource types as appropriate Inventory Management 5 13 Using Resource Types Modifying Core Properties for Resource Types 5 14 The core properties data is used throughout the Active System Manager software Adding as much information about the core properties makes it easy to create test cases and templates To modify resource type core properties perform the following steps 1 In the Resource Types view right click a resource type and select Open to display the resource type core properties within the specified perspective Table 5 5 displays the resource type core properties Table 5 5 Resource Type Core Properties Property Name Property Description Manufacturer Resource manufacturer name Model Model number or name of the resource type Version Version number for the resource hardware Roles Resource role of a resource created from this model managed Resource or for an Active System Manager control resource such as a Component Hub Matrix Switch Patch Panel Power Controller Terminal Server or TFTP Server Name Name of the resource Description Text string describing this resource Families Family of resources to which this resource belongs This represents another way of describing the resource This property is optional Classification Descriptive field used to classify the resource It is used mostly for component resource types Setup Time Min Amount of time required to set u
484. ry configur QwestDemo tRepository configur QwestDemo TE E Juniper ERepository configur QwestDemo en Juniper E Repositories tRepository configur QwestDemo QuestDemo ERepository configur QwestDemo tRepository configur QwestDemo Expand all Collapse All Import Export OwestDema 4 When the Confirm Delete dialog box displays click Yes E Note Ifyou click the Delete element from repository as well check box and click Yes this action also deletes the file element from the repository Repository Management 9 9 Managing Repositories Removing Elements from a Bundle To remove elements from a bundle perform the following steps 1 Open your repository navigator view 2 Identify your bundle select one or more elements within the bundle right click and perform one of the following options e Select Remove from group to remove it from the group but not from the repository e Select Delete to delete from the repository and from the bundle Updating Repository Content To update the repository content by adding elements perform the following steps 1 In the Setup perspective perform one of the following options to display the New dialog box e On the File Servers view right click an element and select Repositories e On the Active System Manager menu bar click File gt New gt Repositories e On the Active System Manager toolbar click the New icon and select Repositories
485. s The actual time frame resolution depends on whether you are viewing the Day Week feature Month Quarter Year time frame From the calendar header right click and select from the following to switch the time resolution e Day Calendar e Week Calendar e Month Calendar e Quarter Calendar e Year Calendar colored bars feature The Active System Manager software displays the following information for each session e Start and end date and time e Session Name e Type session e Status e Owner e Participants To view this additional information mouse over a colored bar within the Session calendar Session Management 12 13 Working with Running Sessions 12 14 Icon Feature Menu Option color schemes feature Drag feature Filters and Group By icons light yellow horizontal line feature red vertical marker feature e goto menu e Now menu e F9 feature e New menu session bar shape changes feature Show All Sessions icon Show Calendar icon Show Mine feature yellow bar feature Show In Calendar Table 12 3 Sessions View Features Calendar Components continued Description You can customize the Calendar color schemes for sessions that you currently own or are a participant of Sessions that you do not own will always display with a white background with black border Right click in the calendar and select Preferences or on the Active System Manager toolbar clic
486. s are visible in the multi editor Use the Hide and Show options to control the column display You can rearrange the columns by dragging the headers with your mouse pointer In addition you can create new columns for the configuration parameter and inventory parameter values and then use the special Paste or Fill functions to populate the fields which is effective at ensuring global consistency for these values Icon Overlays The icon overlays are unique to the multi editor The plus sign signifies that the record is new and has not been saved to the database The minus sign signifies that the record has been marked for deletion from the database The asterisk signifies that the record exists in the database and has been modified in the multi editor but those changes have not yet been saved to the database When you save your changes to the database these options go into effect and the icon overlays disappear For a listing of icon overlays see Table 1 11 on page 1 37 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Active System Manager User Interface Elements Pasting Functions The multi editor supports the cut copy and paste functionality of a Windows clipboard but there are several restrictions for the Paste function e The most common restriction is that if an entire record has been copied to the clipboard the first column must be selected before the Paste option can function e Alternatively if only a single fie
487. s in the original Template 5 Select an archive option e Select the Public button to make this Template available to all Active System Manager users e Select Private if you do not want anyone else to access it 6 Click the Keep existing history details check box to carry the existing notes to the new Template Deselect the check box to clear all existing notes The default is for the check box to be enabled 7 Click OK to save the session as a Template The watermark in the session editor changes its states during the process of saving Session Management 12 57 Configuring Session Notifications and Reminders Note Only the Template is saved with or without asset tags as you request The configuration files in the Active System Manager archive are not changed Note The Save feature only commits changes to templates in the Public or Private area within the system Use a new Template name when using the Save As feature If you save a Template the Active System Manager software adds it to the Active System Manager archive To view changes made to the saved Template perform the following steps 1 With a working session open select the Templates view 2 Select the Template to view and ensure that your Template is displayed with the Public or Private archive mode You can check the archive mode in one of two ways e Select the editor background and click the Properties view e Check the filtering rules assigned for more
488. s used as the default domain in resource instance Add and Import operations Virtualization Settings When enabled checked by default enables resource virtualization for newly created inventory Email notifications Allows you to send notifications of a forced import to e Owner e Participants e None Note Notifications are applicable in case of a forced import only Specific Availability Allows you to specify availability as follows e Always available e Specify start current or specific start time or end always or specific end time Editor Options Allows you to set the viewing and errors options as follows e View Original or Hierarchical setting Reference N A Setting the Default Domain section on page 8 15 Chapter 8 Using Inventory and Chapter 9 Repository Management e Errors Multiple Syntax or Single Syntax Errors 1 31 Active System Manager Overview Active System Manager User Interface Elements Table 1 8 Preference Types Configurable Parameters continued Preference Type Scheduler Scheduler gt ASAP Rescheduling 1 32 Configurable Parameters and Description Reference e Scheduler Wizard Allows you to set the following wizard options See the Working with Running Sessions e Show advanced scheduling options page during scheduling or rescheduling section on page 12 3 operations e Show provisioning sequencing options page during scheduling or
489. s you to rename the selected step by right clicking or double clicking on the step Select Execute All Allows you to select all steps for execution on a single click Deselect Execute All Allows you to deselect all selected steps on a single click Execute From Here Allows you to select all steps from a particular point in Orchestration Error Handling Abort on Error The Abort on Error feature allows you to choose to abort execution of step s in Orchestration While executing if the error occurs at a step where Abort on Error is checked the steps thereafter do not execute and are aborted You can choose to abort on error for each step while creating or updating an Orchestration To specify Abort on error per Orchestration steps perform the following steps 1 Check Abort on Error on steps that you want to abort on error see Figure 13 12 13 12 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Orchestrations Figure 13 12 Abort on Error Orchestration New Orchestration_Testl Steps can be renamed by clicking on step label Available Operations view Orchestration view Type in operation name to search the desired operatior E 2 resourcelnstance ep Add Step 3 Remove Step Jb Insert Step L4 Add Script Operation Execute Abort On Error Description 5 E ES Test Step_1 y customeperation 1 sE resourcelnstance customOperation1 this operation is For apply s eS customOperation2 g u0 fhome ssyed gf scripts
490. same In this option the administrator provides the start date time and end date time as input for setting the maintenance period The system will check 1f any session 1s scheduled for that time period and return those session as an impacted session If there is any impacted user session the administrator can opt for a forced setting where all those sessions will be ignored during the confirmation process Click Next to determine possible time slots If sessions are expected to be active during this time frame you will be presented with a list of sessions a Select the Acknowledge blocking sessions check box to proceed with the creation b Select one entry from the proposed options c Click Finish to create the maintenance window An email notification will be sent out to all when the maintenance window session gets confirmed and active running Users who are trying to connect via the RCP or web portal are prompted with an information message 6 Click OK Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Managing Maintenance Windows Modifying a Maintenance Window An administrator can update or cancel the maintenance window in the Confirmed and In Progress states To edit a maintenance window perform the following steps 1 Access the Maintenance Window dialog box 2 Click Edit to display the Update Maintenance Window and edit the existing settings 3 Modify the settings as follows a Optional Click the Name field and enter
491. scheduling Topologies 2 gt t Y O testug Preferences Managing Virtual Resources UTO1296176645665 A p 939 90 Mon 7 Feb 2011 147 Tue 8 Feb 2011 147 A BE outline 3 0 Note All operations associated with managing session resources applies to virtual resources only For gt information about inventory management used to model virtual resource types and resources see Chapter 5 Inventory Management If you are working with session elements modeled as virtual resources there are few more operations available to you Those operations reflect enhanced management capability around the use of virtual resources those that reside and run on hypervisor class resources To understand more about virtual modeling see Chapter 5 Inventory Management This section describes the following topics e Verifying Virtual Resource Data e Duplicating Virtual Resources e Relocating Virtual Resources e Scaling Up Virtual Resources Verifying Virtual Resource Data To verify virtual resource data perform the following steps 1 Open a session editor see the Opening the Session Editor section on page 12 9 2 Select a virtual resource 3 In the Properties view a Click the Resource tab b Check the Hypervisor Host properties Manufacturer Model and Asset Tag to determine where this virtual resource is actually running 4 Inthe Properties view click the Elasticity tab to understand the c
492. scription This report lists the number of entries and those entries are alphabetically sorted by Manufacturer and Model To run a Managed Equipment Summary report perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Reports gt Managed Equipment Summary Report The Managed Equipment Summary Report for your environment displays 2 Modify the report filter options as appropriate and click Create 15 2 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Using Standard User Report Types Running a Managed Equipment Detail Report The Managed Equipment Detail report lists the ports on each resource what card they are located on and relationships that apply to them Use this report to help you manage your environment physically and as a network In particular this report provides the following information e What cards are present on a resource e What is the location of each card e What ports are present e Which ports are on which cards e What is the total number of ports for each interface type and for each card type To run a Managed Equipment Detail report perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Reports gt Managed Equipment Detail Report The Managed Equipment Detail report filter options display 2 Select one of the following Filter Options e All Resources Displays information for all managed resources in your inventory e Resource Types Click this option an
493. section describes how to add a new user and create a profile for the new user e Adding Internal Users e Adding LDAP AD Users e Importing Users from a New LDAP Repository e Importing Users from an Existing Repository e Adding NIS Users e Importing Users from a New NIS Repository e Importing Users from an Existing Repository Adding Internal Users To add an internal user and create a profile for that user perform the following steps 1 Open the Security Management window see the Accessing a User List section on page 4 2 2 Click Add gt Internal The New User dialog box displays with the Profile tab open by default see Figure 4 2 Figure 4 2 New User Profile Tab ya New User Add User ES Username field must be at least 3 characters minimum Profile Membership Permissions Login Profiles Resources Username Password First Name Last Name Role Email Company Department Time Zone Africa Abidjan Scheduling Priority 3 Specify maximum session duration constraint 0 Day s 0 Hour s 0 Minute s Specify maximum concurrent session constraint Cancel User Profile Management 4 3 Managing Security Functions 3 Configure the profile settings as appropriate a b Click the Username field and enter a username of at least three characters Click the Password field and enter a password between 6 and 25 alphanumeric characters in
494. select all sessions click Select All to change your selected sessions click Deselect All or click the session to deselect it Note The utilization statistics are also purged 3 Click OK Rescheduling Sessions You can reschedule an existing session by using the underlying Template or the original allocated resources To reschedule a session perform the following steps 1 In the Sessions view or session editor right click a session and select Reschedule The Rescheduling Session dialog box displays see Figure 12 17 Figure 12 17 Rescheduling Session Rescheduling Session Rescheduling Session Define whether you are Rescheduling by original requirement or previously allocated resources Press Next to go to the Advanced Page Resources Use authored resources resource types and instances Behavior As Soon As Possible ASAP Date Time Options Duration 1 Day s 4 Hour s 5 Minute s Finish Cancel 2 Click the Resources field to select one of the session resources e Use authored resources resource types and instances Uses the underlying Template associated with the session you want to reschedule 12 22 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Running Sessions e Use same resource instances Uses previously allocated resources with that session 3 Click the Behavior field to reschedule the session see Table 11 2 on page 11 3 for definitions e As Soon As Possible
495. session e Right click any session and select Open see Figure 12 5 for an example session editor displayed For further details about the session editor see the next section Using the Session Outline View with the Session Editor Session Management 12 9 Working with Running Sessions Figure 12 5 Opening Session Example r i Active System Manager o 6B X File Edit View Navigate Tools Reports Window Help MD A ti FA ta T ET A E gi SP Search gt gt ord Operations 8 Scripts Execution X Purge Sessions A Audit Report New Import Export Save as Save All 100 fm Sessions 33 gt 2 Dell Dummyl 323 Links Dell Compellent System gt newtemplate Pawan Cluster Running 3 m Outline Tem eS 7s 5 Present Future v 4 No Filtering o aw PE EDS gt admin 9 DashBoard status amp logical 2 L E gt physical 12 PP admin L APIDemo Setup D Pawan Cluster Running ae z al DD TestVM_Sumitl Running A Es test Inventory VMware_Test VMwareTesting D SCH Traffic VMwareTesting ISO aa A Dell Servers de VLAN 255 B Dell EquallogicStoragePool_1 Templates a ry Al z paan iia a gt re E Orchestration 3 Session Link Sessions ee la Properties 3 a Sl Id Sta if Aborted Name jaku 3 Preferences 1001 Ab Global Para
496. sessions e Start and stop ASAP Rescheduling along with other associated properties e Manage Archive Bins and rules for both templates and sessions Table 1 2 lists and describes the Active System Manager administrator tasks Table 1 2 Active System Manager Administrator Tasks Task Description Installing upgrading Typically the Active System Manager administrator is responsible for installing upgrading and uninstalling and uninstalling the the Active System Manager client and server software The administrator owns the lt Active System Active System Manager Manager home gt directory where the Active System Manager server software is installed The Active software System Manager administrator makes the Active System Manager server available to all users The Active System Manager client software is designed to be installed by all Active System Manager users on their client hardware platforms For information on how to install and configure the Active System Manager server software see the Active System Manager Server Installation Guide For information about installing the Active System Manager client software see Chapter 2 Getting Started Consulting the Active Configuring the Active System Manager software can be a complex and time consuming task depending on System Manager user the level of customization required in your organization Further because the Active System Manager community software addresses the needs of many differen
497. sing For Force10 54810 Dell element of A5200_6 systen 12 IP Address is missing For Force10 54810 Dellfelement of A5200_6 systen 7 Save your configuration environment Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Running Discovery Running Discovery After configuring discovery to start resource discovery perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Tools gt Discovery gt Start A prompt asks if you wish to start the discovery process 2 Click OK to start the discovery process The discovery process takes some time due to certain factors such as the number of inventories to discover network connectivity bandwidth and system element response time etc At the bottom of the screen the status displays that the discovery 1s in progress see Figure 5 6 Figure 5 6 Discovery Progress Status 192 168 120 171 40500 admin America 236 Resource discovery is in progress While the discovery process is in progress you can switch to the Inventory or Operation perspective to dynamically display the discovered elements see Figure 5 7 Figure 5 7 Discovery Report Active System Manager Active Infrastructure Management Discovery Report Discovery Information Tue 18 Jun 2013 01 41 AM PDT Tue 18 Jun 2013 01 45 AM PDT admin Domain System SYSTEM HYPERV 1 MANUFACTURER IP ADDRESS MODEL ASSET TAG DISCOVERY STATUS MESSAGE IMPORT STATUS OP
498. sion Properties section on page 12 18 Read only Read only Read only Read only Can be changed see the Editing Default Session Properties section on page 12 18 Read only Can be changed see the Editing Default Session Properties section on page 12 18 12 17 Working with Running Sessions Table 12 4 Session Level Properties continued Tab Name Category Property Description Value System Status Session status see Table 12 2 on Read only page 12 8 Current status of your session for that Template Pending sessions always display as Confirmed The status for sessions currently running is Active System Time Left Computed time left in days hours Read only minutes System Template Name of the underlying Template created No System Type Session type session No Global User defined User defined Contains a set of user defined Template User defined Parameter level property names and values in a particular session You can edit these user defined Template level properties For more information on editing Global Parameters refer the Editing Global Parameters section on page 11 21 Note The Edit function must be saved to save those property changes click File gt Save Provisioning Custom lt custom names gt Contains a set of custom and system lt custom values gt session level property names and values You can add or remove the custom session level properties The
499. snapReserve string thinPrevision string thinMinReserve string thinGrowthWarn string thinGrowthMax string thinWarnSoftThres string thin WarnHardT hres string multihost ccess string Enter RA input values in Parameters wherever required Note For ease of use Active System Manager facilitates context assistance for custom operations see Possible Values in Figure 13 6 Note In case of Password Data Type the Value is displayed as encrypted 13 8 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Orchestrations 4 Incase of Add Script yw Note The Active System Manager software has the ability to execute arbitrary scripts from the E orchestration You can associate script s with any step of orchestration The scripts have access to all the session level parameters that can be passed explicitly to the script call The execution of scripts in a running session is similar to the execution of custom operation The Add Scripts dialog box displays see Figure 13 7 Figure 13 7 Add Scripts Add scripts Specify the script details you wank to add Hostname Username Password Script Test Cas Add Default Script Add Script From Repository Add From HTTP Server Resource Level Script Orchestration Management 13 9 Working with Orchestrations 5 Click Add to add any of the following four script types e Add Default Script Adds the default script e Add Script from Repository Adds the s
500. solved based on the hierarchy you select For example if you group first by Role and then by Model the result is a list of roles with pertinent models in the subfolders Alternatively if you group first by Model and then by Role the result is a list of each model type with the pertinent roles in the subfolders 4 Click OK Active System Manager Overview 1 15 Active System Manager User Interface Elements Opening Navigator Views To open a navigator view on the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Show View and select one of the views For a list of all available views by perspective see Table 1 5 on page 1 11 Navigating Through the Views You can use the standard procedure of opening a view but if you are in a working state and want to work with an existing view you can navigate to a previous or next view e On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Navigation gt Next View e On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Navigation gt Previous View To minimize or maximize a view perform one of the following options e Inthe active view click the Maximize icon or on the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Navigation gt Maximize Active View or Editor To restore it back to its original view click the Minimize icon e Inthe active view click the Minimize icon or on the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Navigation gt Minimize Active View or Editor
501. ssage Device status passed Interface status passed Interface status passed Interface status passed Interface status passed Interface status passed Interface status passed Interface status passed Interface status passed Interface status passed Interface status passed Interface status failed Interface status passed Interface status passed Interface status passed Interface status passed Interface status passed Interface status passed Interface status passed Interface status passed Interface status passed Interface status passed Interface status passed Interface status passed Interface status passed Interface status passed Interface status passed Interface status passed Interface status passed Interface status passed Interface status passed Displaying Resource Instance Properties Timestamp 10 08 2010 10 52 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 52 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 52 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 52 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 52 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 52 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 52 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 52 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 52 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 52 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 52 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 52 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 52 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 52 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 52 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 52 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 52 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 52 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 52 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 52 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 52 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 52 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 52 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 52 PM IST 10 08 2010 10 52 PM IS
502. st Forcel0 S4810 Forcel0 S4810 EqualLogic P Chassis Chassis EqualLogic P To Type TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet GigabitEthernet GigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet 10GigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet 10GigabitEthernet cul m m 9 37 Linking Resources 2 Click New E Note It does not matter which New button you click they all access the same dialog box The Inventory perspective displays the New Link dialog box see Figure 5 23 Figure 5 23 New Link Link Management New Link Link Management Define your link by selecting both resource and interface end points Resources should have overlapping availability dates and interface locations should be of compatible types From To Selected 192 168 50 117 BB Selected 192 168 50 117 Dell gt 2 Dell 2 VMware i a 2 VMware Host a 2 Host Y 192 168 50 117 y 192 168 50 117 9 192 168 120 107 Y 192 168 120 107 From Selected ethO Selected eth3 Location Location El Console El Console A File System 8 File System so Interface aii Interface a GigabitEthernet GigabitEthernet i ethO B i ethO lt j ethl gt ethl ae ethe ae ethe ae eth3 ae eth3 je ethd aj ethd ae ethS aie eth5 Name Description a 3 Select interface locations for both resources and then click Apply to create a new link or multiple links 4 Click Close If there is a problem
503. st of device level RA operation details displayed in the Audit feature Table 5 19 Device Level RA Operation Details Field Name Description Name Displays the operation name 5 66 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Managing Virtual Resources Table 5 19 Device Level RA Operation Details Field Name Description Result Displays the result Success Failure of the operation Status Message Displays the status message as a result of that particular operation Completion Time Displays the completion time of the operation Category Displays the operation category such as session discovery etc Session ld Displays the session id if executed under any session Session Name Displays the session name if executed under any session Session State Displays the session status such as setting up running cleaning up etc Initiated By Displays the name of the user who initiated the operation The following operations are available on the Audit feature e Configure Filter e Configure Grouping e Expand All e Collapse All e Purge Audit Data Configure Filter The Configure Filter feature allows you to filter audit results based on the filters set On the top right of the Audit feature click icon to open the Configure Filter screen see Figure 5 40 as an example i Figure 5 40 Configure Filter Filters All filters v Name I Property Operator E Session Errors Contains Sessi 15 E Last 24 Hours E Last 7 Da
504. state Review Execution Output Allows you to review the complete execution output of script in a file editor You can bring up the full output of the execution All past executions are saved on the server Expand All Opens all tree nodes Collapse All Collapses all tree nodes Refresh Refreshes the view to a current state The following sections describe more about working with the Execution Queue view e Starting an Execution e Stopping an Execution e Deleting an Execution ID e Monitoring Execution Output e Reviewing Execution Output Starting an Execution To start an execution perform one of the following options e In the Test Cases view select one or more test cases right click and select Start When the Execute Scripts Test Cases dialog box displays follow the procedure in the Customizing Script Execution section on page 14 8 starting with step 2 on page 14 8 e Inthe Resource Scripts view select one or more test cases or scripts right click and select Start When the Execute Scripts dialog box displays follow the procedure in the Customizing Script Execution section on page 14 8 starting with step 2 on page 14 8 e Inthe Execution Queue view right click an execution ID in any state see Table 14 3 and select Start The new execution displays in the Execution Queue view Stopping an Execution To stop an execution in the Execution Queue view right click an execution ID only in the Runni
505. stem Manager repository however using those user IDs a user is unable to log into the Active System Manager application because when a user tries to log in the Active System Manager software creates a context with the external security provider by using the Bind DN attribute associated with that security store In this case the Bind DN attribute uid admin ou system 1s used but before that the UID is replaced by the user ID of the user who is trying to log in For example naresh attempts to log in then the Bind DN attribute uid Naresh ou system 1s used This fails because the user naresh does not belong to ou system In conclusion while configuring a security store in the Active System Manager repository the OU specified with the Bind DN attribute should be of the lowest level in the hierarchy if the users belonging to that level must be imported Further the Base DN attribute should have a hierarchical OU specification 1 e Starting from the lower level to highest level In the second example above for this to work properly the Bind DN attribute should be specified as uid admin ou group1 ou system and the Base DN attribute should be ou groupl1 ou system Adding NIS Users 4 8 Adding NIS users remotely is performed using an import wizard It consists of importing users from remote authentication repositories based on standards NIS To add NIS users and create profiles for those users perform the procedures in the following
506. structure This hardware allows multiple operating systems to run concurrently on a host computer F Resource Instances _ Hypervisor Infrastructure Dell Chassis b ESPE x amp Dell 1 e Chassis 1 ai Availability 9 Dell_Chassis Specify the resource availability dates Active System Manager scheduler will take account of these date Start Time End Time Description 02 12 2013 06 56 00 AM 12 31 2021 11 59 00 PM All Interfaces Interface Details Add or remove interfaces Specify interface details Location 2 Type Interface File System E Location TenGigabitEther a Mr p r Design E 192 168 120 171 40500 admin America Los_Angeles 7 0 0 21236 For information on how to customize the Inventory perspective preferences see the Customizing Perspectives section on page 1 8 Using Inventory 8 3 About Resource Types and Resource Instances About Resource Types and Resource Instances You use the Active System Manager Inventory perspective to access your managed environment equipment Managed equipment refers to the resources or equipment under test EUT Resources are modeled by type which are specifications by manufacturer and model that you can use as generic elements in templates you author and by instance which are specific resources with unique asset tags The generic hardware type is called a resource type The Active Syste
507. structure requirements in the form of templates Once defined templates within Active System Manager can be repeatedly and consistently utilized to streamline workload deployment Maximize Data Center Efficiency Active System Manager empowers IT to achieve higher efficiencies through automation By reducing and in most cases eliminating manual steps IT organizations can free up time to focus on initiatives that make a deeper impact on their organization and the business While automation is a cornerstone of efficiency many IT organizations today are also encumbered with multiple management consoles Active System Manager offers an intuitive single point of control for key infrastructure configuration and management functions enabling IT to minimize the number of consoles that are needed on a regular basis Strengthen Quality of IT Service Delivery Assuring service levels is always tricky there are just too many variables that can impact service delivery Active System Manager addresses key factors that impact service levels namely infrastructure configuration errors incorrect problem troubleshooting and slow recovery from failures Active System Manager dramatically improves accuracy of infrastructure configuration by reducing manual touch points If an unexpected error such as a hardware fault occurs or if business needs change Active System Manager enables rapid and smooth workload migration thereby improving recovery time Activ
508. sub sections e Importing Users from a New NIS Repository e Importing Users from an Existing Repository Importing Users from a New NIS Repository To import users from a new NIS repository perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Tools gt Users and Groups The Security Management window displays with the Users tab open by default see Figure 4 1 on page 4 2 2 Click Add gt Remote The Remote Repository dialog box displays with the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP repository default and Network Information Service NIS repository options 3 Select the Network Information Service NIS option select the Create a new NIS repository option and click Next to open the NIS Repository Definition dialog box Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Managing Security Functions 4 Configure the following connection settings a Click the Name field and enter a name for the NIS repository b Click the Domain field and provide an NIS domain name c Click the Host field and provide an NIS hostname or IP address 5 Click Next to open the User Authentication Repository dialog box which lists all users in a remote repository To avoid duplication use the Show new accounts only check box to remove users that are already in the Active System Manager system If duplicates are found the Active System Manager system prompts as a warning 6 Select at least one user to import and
509. t The dashboard can contain many different types of widgets If you need to delete a widget perform the following steps 1 Open the Dashboard perspective and view the widgets use one of the following methods e On the Active System Manager navigation menu click Dashboard e On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Open Perspective gt Dashboard 2 Select a widget on the title bar click the down arrow icon and select Delete see Figure 17 3 on page 17 5 Maximizing or Minimizing a Widget To maximize a widget perform the following steps 1 Open the Dashboard perspective and view the widgets use one of the following methods e On the Active System Manager navigation menu click Dashboard e On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Open Perspective gt Dashboard 2 Select a widget If the widget is empty click the Edit layout link see Figure 17 4 2 Select a widget on the widget title bar select the window icon to maximize or minimize depending on which state the widget is in which extends or minimizes the width and height of the selected widget Alternatively to minimize the widget you can also click the down arrow icon and select Minimize 3 To reset the widget position on the widget title bar re select the window kl icon 17 6 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Managing Widgets Changing the Dashboard Layout Depending on how you want to view the Dashboard content
510. t Interface aif Fibre Channel LW Interface e Fibre Channel SW Interface ai FortyGigE Interface GigabitEthernet Interface ManagementEthernet Interface lt p TenGigabitEthernet Interface sj 10GigabitEthernet Interface so VIRTUAL Interface i Power Supply Power Su E File System File System Fl Generic File System _ m O m z E E m m m E m m 3 Click Add The Interface Type Selection dialog box displays see Figure 5 12 Inventory Management 5 15 Using Resource Types Figure 5 12 Interface Type Selection Interface Type Selection Choose an interface type to be added Type Classificati G Interface i 10 100 1000 Base T a 10GigabitEthernet aif Fibre Channel LW aif Fibre Channel SW aie FortyGigE GigabitEthernet ManagementEthernet TenGigabitEthernet Gr File System aif Generic Nota valid selection 4 Select the desired interface type and click OK to update the resource type with the new interface type information 5 Optional If you add a new Console interface type you can also update the Console parameters for the configuration and inventory as follows a Navigate to the Console section which is below the Interface section for the resource type see Figure 5 11 b Click Add to add the desired provisioning parameters You can specify the name description and default value for each c Click the Inventory tab to add the necessary inventory parameters You ca
511. t Restore When prompted to confirm the Restore operation click OK 11 24 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Templates Updating Templates using the Template Editor Once you have created a blank Template define the network configuration that you want to manage or test by adding elements such as resource types resource instances interfaces properties and connectivity For more details see the following topics e Viewing and Modifying Template Properties e Adding Resource Types e Setting Resource Type Properties for Scheduling e Deleting Resource Types e Adding Resource Instances e Deleting Resource Instances e Modifying Resource Properties e Defining Provisioning Policies e Supporting Layer 2 Switching e Using Annotations Viewing and Modifying Template Properties You can modify a variety of Template properties including e Template level properties for a specific Template e Resource type level and resource instance level properties for the selected resource e Interface level properties for the selected interface e Link properties for the selected link To view the Template properties select the Template in the editor background Properties are typically displayed when you first add an element type You can display properties and later modify them Note Ifany properties are marked as Required by the administrator the property value must be entered E before saving and scheduling the Template
512. t Update firmware on server from the list of Supported Operations In the Update firmware on server window enter the firmware update image to be updated Select the Primary Source and Secondary Source where the firmware update image resides In the Elements folder select the firmware to be applied The selected firmware version has to be greater or equal to the minimum firmware version specified in Table 6 1 If firmware version selected is less than the minimum firmware version then firmware update will fail Press OK to start the firmware update During the upgrade checks are made to see if the server instance is part of any session if it is the administrator in notified and the firmware update will not be performed After the firmware update is complete a success message or a list of errors is displayed In the case of virtual operations an auto inventory will be performed after the successful completion of firmware update for the resource instance After the auto inventory is successful the new updated firmware versions will be visible for the administrator in Operation Center Updating Dell Blade Rack Servers Firmware from an Active Session Complete the following steps to update server firmware from the active session Firmware updates can only be performed on servers in which no other firmware update operation 1s running as part of another operation or any virtual operation Prerequisite Server Firmware Repository must
513. t begun and were originally scheduled in an ASAP manner are reviewed by the scheduler to determine if they can be advanced to an earlier start time thereby optimizing or repacking the schedule The scheduler considers confirmed ASAP sessions one at a time to attempt to find each an earlier time It begins with the next session based on the time that the session is due to start its setup period rather than on the session start time There is a configurable value set by the administrator used to determine the minimum opportunity time difference required before a session is considered for rescheduling For example if a session is scheduled to start five minutes from now there would be no sense in trying to find an earlier time for it Once the first candidate session is evaluated and is either changed or not changed the remaining candidate sessions on the list are evaluated one ata time and given rescheduling opportunities based upon whether or not the prior sessions in the list have been cancelled or rescheduled Email notification of schedule changes is provided Note E mail notification is sent to the session owner participants and anyone included in the TO and CC lists defined in config properties Mail notification can be modified either in config properties or by the Active System Manager administrator on the System Properties tab After considering an ASAP session for rescheduling the result is that it obtains o
514. t facilitate network communication You can create a pool containing the following types of identities e MAC addresses e IQN iSCSI Qualified Name e WWWN World Wide Node Names for FCoE e WWPN World Wide Port Names for FCoE Active System Manager assigns these virtual identities to virtual NICs Adding a virtual NIC configuration to a Template enables NIC partitioning on servers to which the template is applied Viewing Global Virtual Identity Pools 1 On the Active System Manager navigation bar menu click the Setup perspective 2 On the Active System Manager toolbar click the Networking perspective The Networking Configuration editor appears 3 In the Global Virtual Identity Pool folder click the type of pool to view Active System Manager displays the Identity name and Usage for each identity Network Management 10 1 Understanding Global Identity Pools Virtual MAC Identities Virtual MAC identities are unique device identifiers that facilitate Ethernet communication in a local area network LAN Adding virtual MAC identities enables Active System Manager to automatically assign Ethernet MAC addresses to LAN virtual NICs during deployment MAC Addresses are displayed in the format XX XX XX YY YY YY Note The virtual MAC identity that Active System Manager assigns to the NIC depends on the network type selected when adding a network For a LAN network type a virtual MAC address is assigned to the server For an iSCSI n
515. t only displays the selection corresponding to the resource in the Template editor Table 11 7 lists and defines the default properties when authoring resource instances Table 11 7 Default Properties for the Resource Instances View Tab Name Resource Provisioning Template Management Property Name Name in Template Name in Inventory Exclusive Resource Exclusive Resource Asset Tag Version Manufacturer Model Description Domain lt custom or user defined gt Description List of all resource instance information related to this Template You can use this tab for a high level view of information for the selected element Name of the Template resource This name is automatically assigned by the Templates perspective You can change this name in the Properties view of the resource in the Template editor Name of the resource in the inventory Option that determines whether the resource is exclusive or not If a resource is shareable some of its interfaces can be assigned to one session while others are used in other sessions If your requirements include exclusive access to a resource you can prevent it from being shared by turning on the Exclusive property in this Template Any session based on the Template reserves the entire resource and prevent others from sharing it This property forces the Active System Manager scheduler to find a resource that can be allocated in its entirety for example all por
516. t template support for unit list of default values IsEditable attribute definition Global Parameter The Global Parameter feature facilitates you to define global parameters name category and values at Template level and use them throughout the system These pre defined Global Parameters exist in the system and their value can be edited at the time of the following instances Note The Global Parameters defined for a Template are specific to that particular Template 11 28 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Templates e Scheduling a template For more information on editing Global Parameters at the time of Template scheduling refer Editing Global Parameters section on page 11 21 e Scheduling a session For more information on editing Global Parameters at the time of Session scheduling refer Editing Global Parameters section on page 11 21 However the Global Parameters are used while supplying the value to custom operation parameters at the time of orchestration execution see Figure 11 12 Figure 11 12 Global Parameter Usage During Orchestration Execution Specify Input Values q iS Pe specify Input Values for VolumeCreate Enter the input values for the operation or select value from Possible Values indicates mandatory values Parameters Mame Value Data Type Unit volumeName string volumeSize DatastoreVolumeSsize string poolName StoragePoolName string snap
517. t types of users from individual environment users to department managers there can be several different interpretations of how best to configure the environment depending on the tasks the user needs to perform and the user s role in the organization Consulting the Active Before modifying the Active System Manager environment the Active System Manager administrator should System Manager user consult with environment planners environment developers QA managers and other key members of the community testing team to determine what site specific changes and customizations are needed In general it is best to install the product then implement and test system wide changes before deploying the product for general use Integrating the Active The Active System Manager administrator is responsible for installing integrations with third party products System Manager The Active System Manager software integrates with configuration management tools ClearCase and software with other Concurrent Versions Systems CVS products Active System Manager Overview 1 3 Table 1 2 Task Managing inventory Managing Active System Manager templates and sessions Managing Active System Manager server profile templates and server profiles Creating administrator or custom reports Managing security privileges 1 4 Active System Manager Administrator Tasks continued Description The Active System Manager administrator is responsible for
518. t1 PartitionO then Port1 Partitionl and so on Selecting PCI Function assigns virtual NICs by alternating between ports for example Port1 Partition0 then Port2 Partition0 and so on Different operating systems have different mapping order requirements for example RHEL 6 2 and ESX 5 0 both use PCI function to enumerate partitions 3 Click Add to create one or more new virtual NIC configurations or Edit an existing virtual NIC configuration or Remove to delete the configuration from the template i Note You cannot change the order of the NICs after they ve been configured The assignment is determined by the order in which the NICs appear on the list 4 Click Next Ea Note You can create up to 32 profiles at once You can choose to have the system auto assign values for the virtual NICs or you can manually assign them Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Es Note If you are planning to configure servers to boot from iSCSI or FCoE you must create a VNIC connected to the appropriate SCSI or FCoE network before proceeding The Boot settings page will require you to create the appropriate VNIC before allowing you to set the boot type Naming Conventions when using Orchestrations Following points should be considered while using Server Templates in Orchestrations e Naming conventions for VM NICs are to be followed For more information refer Naming conventions for VM NICs section on page 7 5 e Server Temp
519. te A notification rule cannot be saved without a name b Click the Description field and type a corresponding description for the notification rule c Click the Scope field and select All Sessions System Wide By default the administrator can view and access two scope types e All Sessions System Wide e My Sessions Owned 4 In the Session Notification Criteria section select one or more session notification criteria e On date time start end changes e On ASAP rescheduling e On name change only e On participants list change e On ownership change 12 60 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Configuring Session Notifications and Reminders e On session resource change e On status change 5 Optional If you select the On status change check box in step 4 select the session status to change If not skip this step and go to step 6 Status options include e Canceled e Cleaning Up e Completed e Confirmed e Deleted e Failed e Running e Setting Up e Snapshot Figure 12 4 on page 12 8 illustrates the session state workflow associated with these sessions and Table 12 2 on page 12 8 provides a description of those states as well as defines the various modes and states of the Sessions perspective while processing a session request 6 Click the Format tab The Add Session Notification Format Tab dialog box displays see Figure 12 53 Figure 12 53 Add Session Notification Format Tab Sessio
520. te s El Specify maximum concurrent session constraint 0 J ox Cancel 3 Optional Click the Specify maximum session duration constraint check box to set boundaries on the session duration Specify the duration in day hours and minutes 4 Click the Membership tab and select the users and groups to include as members of your new group You can click to select the check box next to each user and group to include individually or to select all users and groups click Select All see Figure on page 4 17 Alternatively to remove users and groups as members of your group click Deselect All 5 Click the Permissions tab to select and edit permissions for your new group With this feature you can perform the following tasks to set the permissions e Sort the permissions by clicking the Name field e Select more than one permission at a time by clicking the respective permission check boxes e Select all permissions by clicking Select All e Remove all permissions from a group or user by clicking Deselect All For more information about permissions see the Defining Permissions section on page 4 19 6 Click OK Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Deleting Groups To delete a group perform the following steps Defining Permissions 1 Open the Security Management window see the Accessing a User List section on page 4 2 2 From the group list select a group or groups to delete You can select
521. ter to display a preferred subset of the entries in a list Editors that allow filtering have the Filters icon available You use the Filters feature to specify filters that forces the Active System Manager application to only display the resource type and resource instance information that you require within the associated views Each view comes with a set of built in filters These filters screen resources based on their defined roles The list of pre defined filters cannot be removed and their status disabled vs enabled can change based on the user or administrator profile role For more information about these pre defined filters see Chapter 8 Using Inventory To access the filter options or change the way the resource type and resource instance information 1s displayed perform one of the following methods e In the navigation view click the Menu icon and select a filter type e In the navigation view click the Filters icon and the Filters dialog box displays with a list of filter options in the left pane For more information see the Accessing Resources via the Filters Dialog Box section on page 8 8 As an added feature user role based users now have their default inventory views types and instances automatically set with the Filters gt Managed Equipment The following topics describe filtering functions e Creating a Filter e Adding Rules to a Filter e Deleting Rules and Filters Active System Manager User G
522. tes Table 9 12 lists and describes the operation attribute types as displayed in Figure 9 11 Table 9 12 Operation Attribute Types Attributes Name Type Default Value Possible Values Unit Mandatory Editable Common Value Source Sub Type Description Lists all parameters related to selected operation Lists parameter types as String Number or Password Note In case of Password type all other attributes are deactivated i e other attributes cannot be selected or edited except Mandatory Editable and Common attributes Allows to enter default parameter value Allows to select value from a list of pre defined possible values Allows to enter unit value Allows to select parameter as Mandatory Allows to select the parameter as Editable Allows to select parameter as Common Allows you to select value from a list of pre defined context sensitive values Allows you to select value from a list of pre defined values based on Value Sources 5 Optional View or edit the methods select one method to see associated detailed information and the associated custom attributes definitions You can update the information at will Click File gt Save to save the new content of RA content Optional Remove a method select a method and click Remove gt File gt Save to save the new RA Optional Add a method to the RA click Add gt a method type Fill in the Operation Detai
523. text on the perspective bar Show traditional style tabs Use mixed fonts and colors for labels Restore Defaults Apply 2 In the Editor tab and View tab positions options select from the options displayed to arrange the tabs at the top or bottom 3 Click Apply or OK to automatically move the tabs to their new locations 1 20 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Active System Manager User Interface Elements Maximizing Minimizing or Restoring the Editor Workspace To maximize or minimize the editor workspace perform one of the following options e In the editor workspace click the Maximize icon or on the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Navigation gt Maximize Active View or Editor To restore it back to its original view click the Minimize icon e In the editor workspace click the Minimize icon or on the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Navigation gt Minimize Active View or Editor To restore it back to its original view right click the editor and select Minimize To restore the editor workspace back to its original state double click the editor tab twice Navigating Editors The Active System Manager software allows you to navigate editors via the submenu options on the Window gt Navigation menu The Navigation menu options for editors include e Maximize Active View or Editor Allows you to maximize the active view or editor e Minimize Active Vie
524. the Execution Queue View Working with the Execution Queue View Table 14 3 State Aborted Completed Pending 14 10 The Execution Queue view displays all test case and script session startup or session level or resource level executions The Execution Queue view has a default set of filters e Scripts e HTTP Scripts e Test Cases Each execution is identified by a unique identifier ID which is recorded in the execution output and displayed in the Execution Queue view Each execution ID equals one script You can group execution IDs by using the Filtering gt Group By option Group By options to optimize view include Type Execution Level Session ID Status Start By Stop By Group ID Table 14 3 lists and describes the execution states available for the Execution Queue view It also list and describes the functions you can perform in each state when you right click the execution ID related to the State Description The user aborted the execution Includes a start and end date created manually or automatically When you stop a running session and when script execution fails script non available status not available etc then the script goes into an Aborted state The execution was successful Includes a start and end date created manually or automatically The execution will start soon automatically Execution States and Their Related Functions Menu Function Description Start Starts a n
525. the following methods e On the Active System Manager menu bar click Tools gt Archive Bin Rules gt Edit e On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Preferences gt Archive Bin 2 In the All filters section select and click the Archive Bin filters to delete 3 In the Filter rules section select and click the Archive Bin rules to delete 4 Click Apply gt OK Session Management 12 47 Working with Running Sessions Supporting Layer 2 Switching 12 48 During the life of a running session session owners can operate on a VLAN in similar ways as in Template authoring The following operations are allowed in the session when it comes to VLAN management l Zz A new VLAN component can be introduced to indicate new VLAN connections between resources Adding resources into a VLAN by setting proper VLAN IDs or allowing the underlying switch select the VLAN ID while creating a link between the VLAN component and the resource Multiple VLAN IDs can be specified on the same VLAN component in the running session The specified VLAN IDs can be in the form of range as well VLAN groups can be accessed from any session Removing resources from an existing VLAN by breaking the virtual link Remove a VLAN Layer 2 switching component from the session which will automatically break the VLANs VLAN switching is also available when multiple VLAN IDs are available in the session This allows an automatic re allocation of
526. the priority of any link that the priority has not been set including links in old Templates that predate the Active System Manager link priority feature These values can be changed on the server in the config properties file e Note You can also perform loopbacks for example a loop back to itself on two different ports Loopbacks are only allowed in the left pane not the right pane 11 54 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Templates Links can point to the same interfaces see Figure 11 33 that is interfaces can have multiple links associated in Templates and sessions For example when enabling a resource interface a new interface level property in the Template Exclusive is present indicating that the interface cannot be shared across multiple sessions at the same time Figure 11 33 Shared Interfaces Es Gigabit Testing e FUJITSU MHT20308R Cisco 10 1966 015FP ES testurd WA E A Pico Box400 a A Pico Box400 f Fibre Channel Lw f Fibre Channel Lw se Fibre Channel Lv id Fibre Channel LW sje Fibre Channel Lv aije Fibre Channel Lv sije Fibre Channel Lv sije Fibre Channel Lw sije Fibre Channel Lw be Fibre Channel Lw aije Fibre Channel Lv i Fibre Channel Lw e Fibre Channel Lv e Fibre Channel Lv Fibre Channel Lv a Fibre Channel Ly a Fibre Channel Lv a Fibre Channel Lv Topology Link Defining Custom Attributes for Links You can define custom attributes for the links T
527. the resource instance core properties Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Using Resource Instances Modifying Core Properties for Resource Instances The information in the core properties section provides a basic description of the resource instance Table 5 6 lists the default resource instance core properties Table 5 6 Resource Instance Core Properties Property Name Name Manufacturer Model Asset tag Version Role Shared Description Domain Property Description Name of the resource Read only Resource manufacturer name Read only Model number or name of the resource type Unique identifier for the resource model Version number for the resource hardware Read only Role of a resource created from this model managed resource or for an Active System Manager control resource such as a Virtual Component Hub Managed Equipment Matrix Switch Patch Panel Power Controller Terminal Server or TFTP Server e If this property is selected then the resource instance can be used in multiple sessions simultaneously as long as it has interface ports available e If this property is not selected the resource instance can only belong to one session at a time Text string describing this resource Domain name that manages that piece of equipment Note Virtual resources are usually hosted within other resources called Hypervisors or hosts or o clouds in a more abstract manner Host resour
528. ties tab view and select the link 4 Click the Realization tab The Realization path properties identify both end points of the underlying connectivity see Figure 12 33 Figure 12 33 Realization Path Properties Properties 23 Link Connection Type Provisioning Realization Status Realization Realization Message Realization Path A EE DYNAMICLINK SUCCESS GurmeetMS3 1 if2 iflJ gt success a From Location To Location Asset Tag Version M GurmeetMs3 1 E r M a You can also look at the underlying Layer 1 or Layer 2 port level status by selecting a realization path in link realization tab and right click Show Status Details Or you can bring up a port level diagnostic tool To do so perform the following steps 1 Open the Resource Instance view and navigate to the Layer 1 or Layer3 matrix switch type resource 2 Select the resource right click Show Resource Status or press F2 A list of all ports displays with the latest status message and timestamp Figure 12 34 displays the resource status example using the right click Show Resource Status option Figure 12 34 Resource Status Using the Right Click Show Resource Status Option El Properties Search Results amp Resource Status M Ethernet 10 100 _ife1 M Ethernet 10 100 _ife2 M Ethernet 10 100 _ife3 M Ethernet 10 100 _ifet M Ethernet 10 100 _ife5 M Ethernet 10 100 _ifes M Ethernet 10 100 _ife7 M Ethernet 10 100 _ifes thernet 10
529. timescript py E LS Test Step 2 a resourcelnstance custom peration1 this operation is For apply 5 topology _creation New Orchestration_Test1 2 Click Finish to save settings Note By default the Abort on Error check box is deselected Editing Orchestrations Orchestrations can be edited from e Orchestrations View for Setup On Demand and Teardown Type Orchestrations e Running Session Before Execution Note When Orchestration is edited from Orchestrations view the update is permanent and is applicable ll to any Session that uses the edited Orchestration thereafter However when updating Orchestration in a running session the updates are associated with that particular On Demand Orchestration and the original Orchestration does not get updated It is an on the spot update that can be done as required before executing a current On Demand Orchestration The updates in this case are not available for new On Demand Orchestration Orchestration Management 13 13 Working with Orchestrations To edit an existing Orchestration perform the following steps 1 Right click or double click an existing Orchestration and click Open see Figure 13 13 Figure 13 13 Context Menu for Updating Orchestration gt Templates Mo Filtering testi TEST_TEMPLATE_O1 testlog bestTemp dev TestyStartsd topology creation Resource Center Orchestrations l ftopologyfadmin topology_creation 5 Ev xX
530. ting An asterisk indicates that an editor has unsaved changes Click File gt Save to commit your changes to the server The File gt Save All command commits all changes in all open editors to the server If you have made changes to a resource and want to undo those changes click File gt Revert This returns the resource configuration to the values stored on the server It is the same process as closing an editor without saving your changes and then re opening it Ee Note You can refresh the data displayed within views by pressing FS Editors modify the values for resource types resource instances and links To switch between editors press Ctri F6 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Active System Manager User Interface Elements Opening Files for Editing You can open an editor for a given file in one of two ways e Right click the file in one of the navigator views and select Open e Double click the file in one of the navigator views Either option opens the file in the default editor for that file type To open a file in a different editor select Open With from the file s pop up menu Activating Editors You can activate an available editor on the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Navigation gt Activate Editor Modifying Editor Preferences The Active System Manager software has preferences that control how editors open close and display resources To modify editor preferences perfo
531. ting notes The default 1s for the check box to be enabled Template Management 11 9 Working with Templates Changing Template Ownership and Permissions 11 10 Template owners can share Templates with other users and groups To do so perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar open the Templates view click Window gt Show View gt Templates to open the Templates view 2 In the Templates view right click a Template and select Edit The properties for that selected Template display see Figure 11 4 for an example Figure 11 4 Properties for a Selected Template P Properties for newtemplate g 2s t Template Template y Y Name topology admin newtemplate Description Owner admin v Topology Type Normal Physical Logical Participants a a Name Add techpubs Permission E y Permissions Delete Update 3 Click the Owner field and select a new owner 4 Click the Participants field and Add or Remove participants as necessary Only non administrator users are listed ES Note Active System Manager administrators have access to all Templates 5 For each participant select a Permissions option to assign either Delete or Update e The Delete permission allows the user to delete the Template e The Update permission allows the user to edit and save the Template updates Ea Note Only Template owners and administ
532. tings 2 2 0 0c ccc ccc en eens 7 8 BIOS SEUIN OS oa watt oon cs Se eae soto A aa 7 8 RATO Sctimes 2 2 ti sete dum iis deine Shed ooh tee cae e ane wens ae Rea eat Aa dee es 7 9 a AID WAL CULL OS id a dd aia ra dr Pak Ede tele eds ae GAT ee BOS aoe es 7 9 Network SCtimos pi Raton nah tee SS Neh sain A A io eRe 7 9 PSO Ob Se MOS sa vas aig Geet aah wae ia Os Boe dB eR ee ow Sado oa 7 9 As A O eae Oa ote Seer 7 9 Apply Server PIO MICS raserna he dente Sane he AA pons oa 7 9 Edi Server Pron eS epre Laika eka ood CERAM BEA RNG ah ehhh a renee Gab Oe TALE 7 9 Delete Server PLOIMNES ssl a nen Goh baa OSS Bee hare wa ao Sew ates 7 9 Chapter 8 Using Inventory vccomacsa suas si cos hod evan AA Ake Pies Rew Weds A ae on a ER 8 1 Introducing the Inventory Perspective o404404 2ues4 A RIA AAA ewe ee ee yee bene SRE 8 1 About Resource Types and Resource Instances 0 0 eee eee e eee e teens 8 4 ACCESSING INVENIO ue os Aurea Ase RA eee aw Eee eee ae oe Bw oes de awa eh oad aoe dens 8 4 Usne Resource PES aii E A a awh hg OR potas Rane gw eet Src dees Ser Bree ra 8 6 Accessing Resources via the Group By Dialog BOX 0 ccc cee eee een eens 8 7 Accessing Resources via the Filters Dialog Box 0 0 0 ce eee eee eee ene ees 8 8 Usins Resource Instances 3 44 5 0 005 As A thd dae eae wens ae kee eet ha dak hea 8 9 Linking Views with Resource Instances nunnana eee nen ee eee eens 8 10 Using Links View Filters da E ad G ne da RO
533. tion Users do not have any control on the results of those operations all are executed independently of the prior sequence All operations are saved in the Session Audit report 5 Click OK to save the changes and then click File gt Save to save the Template definition Quick Policy Status Check To verify the policy status perform the following steps 1 Open the Template Properties view and navigate to the Provisioning tab The policy group displays for each policy if the policy is set to Default or Defined Figure 11 21 2 Click Sequencing to update if necessary Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Templates Figure 11 21 Provisioning Policy Status 23 E Resource scripts E Custom Operations a Topology Mame value Scheduling Per Provisioning E Custom las es topologyCost 0 Allow to edit fopelogMode busy ae topologyPower 350 Allow to show Remove amp Policy Setup Defined Hide Snapshot Default Hide Teardown Defined Hide El System Cleanup Time Min O Hide Execute All Scripts 0 Hide Setup Script Hide Setup Time Min oO Hide Teardown Script Hide Supporting Layer 2 Switching Contrary to Layer 1 switch management where Layer 1 switches are entered in the inventory as control based resources and underlying physical connectivity must also be pre defined Layer 2 switching requires inventory At least one Layer 2 switch must be defined in your inventory with the Matr
534. tion all of which can be managed by Active System Manager Activ and workload centric converged infrastructure manager that streamlines infrastructure configuration and on going lifecycle management Through the use of templates Dell Active System Manager drives centralized infrastructure requirements capturing automated configuration of infrastructure elements and infrastructure lifecycle manac inventory deployment and on going management of the underlying infrastructure To support scale and rapid recovery from hardware failures Active System Manager enables IT to quickly migrate workl infrastructure The development of Active System Manager focused on a simplified and efficient user experience It offers guided user workflows and multi level graphical views that make it easy for IT administrators to consistent results Active System Manager also acts as a single point of control for most infrastructure configuration and on going management functions enabling IT organizations to collapse manager day to day data center management tasks IT organizations can expect to achieve significant benefits from the adoption of the management framework that Active System Manager enables To learn more on Active System Manager visit Dell com convergence 9 Connect to the server using a designated account see the Connecting to the Active System Manager Server section on page 2 6 3 4 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Connecting to Server
535. tion gt Previous Perspective By default the Session perspective displays on the perspective toolbar Customizing Perspectives You can customize perspectives based on your workflow By default when you launch the Active System Manager software the last perspective you worked with opens To customize a perspective perform the following steps l Open or switch to the perspective you want to customize see the Opening Perspectives section on page 1 7 Select a method to open the Customize Perspective dialog box e On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Customize Perspective The Customize Perspective dialog box displays with the Shortcuts tab open by default However the Tool Bar Visibility Menu Visibility Command Groups Availability tabs are all functional in customizing a perspective e The Tool Bar Visibility tab allows you to select and organize which toolbar menu options to display on the Active System Manager toolbar for the specified perspective e The Menu Visibility tab allows you to select and organize which menu options to display for the specified perspective e The Command Groups Availability tab allows you to select and organize the command groups to display with the specified perspective When you select a command group the menu bar toolbar details display respective to the selected command group The Shortcuts options control the items that are available on the File gt New
536. tion from this template deselect Include Network Configuration If Network is deselected the Network setting will not be included any associated Server Profiles Alternately to configure Network settings that will be applied to servers based on this template 1 Select Enable Bandwidth Over subscription to allow you to set a higher maximum bandwidth for each of the virtual NICs on a server so that their total exceeds 100 of the network bandwidth available to the NIC port to which the virtual NIC is assigned This enables the various virtual NICs to use as much bandwidth as possible as their individual traffic flows change For example if bandwidth oversubscription is enabled on a server with four virtual NICs and a total available bandwidth of 10 GB then you can assign a maximum bandwidth as high as 10 GB for each virtual NIC In this case if traffic flow is high on one virtual NIC and low on another then the virtual NIC with high traffic flow will consume the excess bandwidth of the low traffic virtual NIC However if bandwidth oversubscription is disabled then the total bandwidth of the virtual NICs assigned to a 10GB port is less than or equal to 10GB 2 Select the Virtual NIC Mapping Order Physical Partition or PCI Function The Virtual NIC Mapping Order determines how virtual NICs are mapped to the partitions on each port of an adapter Selecting Physical Partition consecutively assigns virtual NICs to partitions for example Por
537. to log on provided that the log on permission is set User Profile Management 4 11 Managing Security Functions Deactivating Users To deactivate a user perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Tools gt Users and Groups The Security Management window displays with the Users tab open by default see Figure 4 1 on page 4 2 2 Select one or more users in the table 3 Click Deactivate gt OK to confirm the deactivation operation Deactivated users will not be allowed to log on even if the permission to log on to their profile is set E Note When changing the time zone you should reconnect to the server to enforce the new time zone in all displays view editors and so on Publishing Login Profiles The Active System Manager product allows you to create a login profile and assign them to users or groups A login profile 1s a collection of perspectives that have been customized and published to users and groups By default there 1s a login profile already deployed with the Active System Manager product The default user interface profile is composed of the following perspectives Test Session Provisioning Inventory and Template This login profile is known as Default To publish new login profiles you must perform the following tasks e Customizing Targeted Environment e Saving Your Environment as a Login Profile e Associating Login Profiles with Users and Groups e Deleting Log
538. to view the associated file elements This could take a few minutes The discovery will only show the update binaries which can be applied on a Chassis 13 Select the elements to be associated with the repository and click Finish to complete setting up the repository Creating Repository with Dell Server Firmware Repository Type Prerequisites Following are the pre requisites before creating a repository with Dell server repository type e Software repositories must be created to contain the firmware Dell Update Packages e The following procedure creates a HTTP based repository Server firmware update also supports repositories of type FTP TFTP If you need to create a FTP or TFTP based repository see the repository section of the Active System Manager User Guide e The repository server where the firmware Dell Update Packages are hosted must be a Linux server e Firmware Update images must be windows based exe files However it can be either 32 bit or 64 bit versions Steps to Create a Repository with Dell Server Firmware Repository Type 1 In the Setup perspective perform one of the following options to display the New Repository dialog box a On the File Servers view right click an element and select Repositories 6 2 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Updating Dell Chassis Firmware from the Operations Center b On the Active System Manager menu bar click File gt New gt Other gt Active System Manager
539. tor are separate and persistent in their own right Table 1 7 Context Menu Options Using Right Mouse Click Menu Open Cut Copy Paste Fill gt Up Fill gt Down Fill gt Series Insert Before Insert After 1 26 Description Opens each selected row in a separate editor You may open multiple editors simultaneously this way Cuts the text of the selected field to the clipboard If you select a row the entire row content is cut to the clipboard and is available to paste over another row You can cut copy or paste multiple rows simultaneously Copies the text of the selected field to the clipboard If you select a row the entire row content is copied to the clipboard and is available to paste You can cut copy or paste multiple rows simultaneously Pastes the contents of the clipboard to the field or row You can cut copy or paste multiple rows simultaneously If you highlight a number of fields in a single column and select Fill gt Up the contents of the field at the bottom of the selection is copied to all of the other records If you highlight a number of fields in a single column and select Fill gt Down the contents of the field at the top of the selection is copied to all of the other records For more information see the Fill Feature section on page 1 24 If you highlight multiple fields in a single column and select Fill gt Series the fields are populated based on the numerical difference betwee
540. tory fields are marked in red with an asterisk For specific details that maps your environment refer to the Active System Manager Solution Guide Note Note As per the current element definition available in the OVF the following system types are supported by the Active System Manager AS50 AS200 AS800 AS1000 vCenter HyperV In case of AS800 and AS1000 systems the IOA blade servers are configured during Discovery and their IP addresses change if the user specifies static or DHCP blade servers and IOAs However if you have IOMs or SAN switches in your Chassis then ensure that the root password and community string entered in Chassis Discover and Configuration Attributes section must match the root password and community string already configured on the switches For each system type server storage networking the minimum and maximum number of system elements to be included in the Discovery configuration are already defined in the system If the number of elements in the Discovery configuration is less than the defined number the system displays the following error Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Configuring Discovery Setup Figure 5 2 Save Discovery Configuration Save Discovery Configuration Save discovery configuration Failed Press Details to see the list of Failed validations Number of Servers with manufacturer Dell model Servers violates the minimum constraint defined in PodDetinition x
541. tring 5 Repeat step 1 to step 4 for each resource type Deleting Resource Types In the Template editor to remove the resource type from the Template and not from the inventory click the resource type right click and select Delete E Note Ifthere is any connectivity in the Template with other resource types or resource instances the links attached to the resource type or resource instance that you select will also be deleted Adding Resource Types Based on Manufacturer Only To add a resource type to your Template based on manufacturer only perform the following steps 1 Open or create a new Template 2 Open the Components view and locate the Generic gt Generic component 3 Drag the Generic gt Generic component to the Template editor to display the Select Manufacturer dialog box see Figure 11 17 Figure 11 17 Select Manufacturer Select Manufacturer Select a manufacturer from the list a Template Management 11 37 Working with Templates 4 Select a manufacturer from the existing list and click OK 5 Right click the component and select Add Interfaces to display the Add Interface dialog box Figure 11 18 Figure 11 18 Add Interface Add Interface Select the interface and specify the count Interface Type E 10 100 1000 Base T E 10GigabitEthernet El Show all Interface types a 6 Select the interface type and specify the count To display all interface types click the Show All Inte
542. ts during the life of your session Thus even if you request only a subset of the ports in the resource the scheduler does not give any part of the resource a way to a new Requirement for the same time period The ports not being used during the requirement can still be used during the session realization because the resource is virtually owned by the session owner and participants Note If you do not specify Exclusive for a shareable resource then by default others are allowed to use it concurrently Unique identifier assigned to each managed element of inventory Version associated with the current hardware configuration Manufacturer resource name Used for reference only cannot be edited Model resource name Used for reference only cannot be edited Description of the resource instance Name of the domain List of all provisioning parameters that can be overwritten from their default value The Type value is only string Use the Add or Remove buttons to manage your provisioning properties To add a custom Template property that must be overwritten with a editable value click Add You can set scheduling permissions on each custom provisioning property The permissions allows end users at scheduling time to display or edit those property values The permissions are e Allow to Edit The property will be editable at scheduling time e Allow to Show The property displays at scheduling time e Hide The proper
543. tual Resources E Properties Sessions Templates Monitoring Audit Check the monitoring methods you wish to start or stop Select the monitoring method to view resource utilization v Methods Status Frequency mins Last Updated Start Resource Utilization 7 Monitor Utilization Running 1 Fri Jul 26 17 32 00 I 100 4 E E Memory E cpu In 3 Supported Operations Add DataStore To Host Q Apply Host Profile Q Create Profile from Host Display Resource Utilization Bl Enter Maintenance Mode Exit Maintenance Mode El List Host Datastore Add datastore to an existing host Applying the Host Profile Creating the Host Profile Display the resource utilization of the host Enter into maintenance mode Exit from maintenance mode List datastores on the host The Active System Manager software allows you to edit parameter values while executing a virtual operation from the Operation Center view To edit data flow values perform the following steps 1 Right click any node or resource type in the Operation Center view The list of virtual operations applicable on the selected resource type display Select the operation to perform from the list of menus for example select Create Mac Pool The Create Mac Pool dialog box contains the following two panes e Parameters Pane Contains general execution details such as operation names and the Value field fo
544. twork 1 On the Active System Manager navigation bar menu click the Setup perspective Network Management 10 5 Understanding Networks 7 2S SS On the Active System Manager toolbar click the Networking perspective The Networking Configuration editor appears In the Configured Networks folder click the type of network to add or edit The network information appears Click Add or Edit On the Add a Network Configuration dialog box enter a unique Name for the network Optionally enter a Description for the network Enter a VLAN ID between 1 and 4094 A VLAN ID is a unique identifier that enables switching and routing of network traffic Active System Manager uses the VLAN ID specifically to configure I O modules to enable network traffic to flow from the server to configured networks during deployment Fora SAN iSCSI or Management Network select Configure static IP address ranges and do the following E Note This step is optional for SAN iSCSI networks and required for Management Networks After a network is created you cannot select or deselect the option to configure static IP address pools a Enter the default Gateway IP address for routing network traffic b Enter the Subnet Mask c Optionally enter the IP addresses of the Primary DNS required and Secondary DNS optional d Optionally enter the DNS Suffix to append for host name resolution e Click Add IP Range enter a Starting IP Address and Endi
545. twork and click Edit On the Edit Vetwork Configuration dialog box click Edit IP Range Make your desired changes Click Save IP Range Click OK Deleting an IP Address Range Note Attempting to delete an IP address range that includes addresses currently assigned to a resource will cause an error On the Active System Manager navigation bar menu click the Setup perspective On the Active System Manager toolbar click the Networking perspective The Networking Configuration editor appears In the Configured Networks folder click SAN iSCSI or Management network From the list of networks select a network and click Edit On the Edit Network Configuration dialog box select the IP range to delete and click Delete IP Range Click OK Naming Conventions when using Orchestrations For each network created the name of the network must contain one of the following strings HypervisorManagement SANISCSI Workload HyperVClusterPrivate vMotionLiveMigration Network Management 10 7 Understanding Networks 10 8 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Chapter 11 Template Management This chapter describes the Active System Manager Templates perspective and all of the functions available including how to import and export Templates directly from the Active System Manager Template view into the Templates perspective Lastly it describes how to work with configuration files for equipment provisioning in a Tem
546. ty is not displayed at scheduling time Note You must save the changes 11 39 Working with Templates Table 11 7 Default Properties for the Resource Instances View continued Tab Name Configuration Files Image Files Configuration Files Image Files Property Name Name Path Repository Version Tag Modifying Resource Properties Description Used if you want to provision the resource Each tab allows you to select files from the newly created repositories for more information about repositories see Chapter 9 Repository Management The following menu options are available on each tab e Add Before you type the filename you can add an image file or configuration by clicking Add in the Properties view A list of preassociated files are listed You must then select from that list of files If the list is empty then file associations must be made in the repository definition In all cases the repository must be created and elements must be discovered imported and associated with a resource instance Remove Removes the file from the resource type for this Template Open Opens and modifies the configuration files while adding it into the Template Up and Down lf you have at least two files you can rearrange the order in which the files will be applied on the resource by the Active System Manager software Versions Applies for source control repositories Specific versions of files can
547. ues if necessary Selecting the Secure check box encrypts all communication between the Active System Manager application and the remote script execution Script names with a full path should be provided for example home user testing validatenetwork sh For the Associate Script Testcase option only you can add or remove script definitions using the Add or Remove buttons You can add from three different repositories e Add Default Script e Add from Repository built in e Add from HTTP Server Optional Click the Description field and enter a description for the association Optional Click the Execute Sequentially check box to force the executions in a sequential order Click Next in the scheduling wizard or otherwise click OK On completion of the wizard a new session is created 12 42 The Sessions view displays sessions associated with scripts A new indicator displays for each new session The Execution Queue view has an added script that reflects the script association properties associated with a session Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Running Sessions To set or view script association preferences see the following sub sections e Setting Script Association Preferences e Viewing Session Script Properties Setting Script Association Preferences To set script association preferences perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Preferences
548. uide Release 7 1 Active System Manager User Interface Elements Creating a Filter Creating a filter 1s a two step process creating a filter and then adding rules to the filter To create a filter perform the following steps pos 1 Click the Filters icon within the top right toolbar area of the perspective or view The Filters dialog box displays an example from the Session perspective Template view see Figure 1 2 Each perspective has their own unique display Figure 1 2 Filters Dialog Box Filters All filters Filter rules wo Name I Property Operator Value Type Managed Equipment Delete Role contains Managed Equi String A Control Equipment E Component Equipment E Composite Equipment E Virtual Equipment E VLAN Equipment A Schedulable Equipment E Equipment in Maintena of the above rules 2 In the All filters section click Add By default this creates an empty filter called Filter1 3 Select the default name and enter a new filter name 4 Define your filter by setting your rules using the Filter rules section see right pane in Figure 1 2 using the Add or Delete button as appropriate For more information about adding and deleting rules for a filter see the next sections Adding Rules to a Filter and Deleting Rules and Filters respectively Note Users cannot modify built in filters You can only enable or disable the default filters by clicking to select or deselect a spec
549. unning Sessions Using the Sessions Calendar The Sessions view calendar toolbar see Figure 12 9 assists planners and managers with planning scheduling tracking and allocating environment resources The Sessions view calendar toolbar enables you to view availability and session status of inventory or sessions as well as resolve scheduling conflicts against a variable time frame that displays schedule status and the availability of selected items Essentially the Sessions view calendar toolbar is a visual aid for your overall Active System Manager session status to help you schedule sessions monitor activities and perform future session planning This section includes the following topics e Using Sessions View Features e Opening the Session Calendar Using Sessions View Features Figure 12 3 on page 12 7 displays the Sessions view including the tree and calendar components Figure 12 9 displays the Sessions view toolbar and Table 12 3 lists and describes the icons features and menu options found in the Sessions view You access each icon via the Sessions view toolbar Figure 12 10 displays an example of Show Mine Sessions results using the calendar components Figure 12 11 displays an example of Show All Sessions results using the calendar components Figure 12 9 Sessions View Toolbar Sp E Table 12 3 Sessions View Features Calendar Components Icon Feature Menu Option Description Calendar menu option
550. ut field definitions specified within the CSV file provide status error data on the associated inventory and then upload the inventory links data into the Active System Manager server To support this the Dell software includes a specific perspective Provisioning and views to manage the content of the repositories To open the Setup perspective perform one of the following options e On the Active System Manager navigation menu click Setup e On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Open Perspective gt Setup Figure 9 1 displays an example of the Setup perspective Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Introducing the Setup Perspective Figure 9 1 Setup Perspective Yemen m aw File Edit Navigate Tools Reports Window Help 0 y ET A ai A pod Search y gt Le Discovery Setup Bla Discover 4h Users Groups Resource Pools x Maintenance New Import Export ve Save as 1 E33 Resource Adapters Dell Chassis System 22 I Dell_Chassis 2 b ilteri ES al No Filtering ES 7 Resource Instance Name Manufacturer DashBoard v Core Properties ch Default f Ss Se Specify basic details for the resource gt Dell Chassis Dell Name cmc CGJFQV1 Dell Compellent Dell Dell EqualLogic PS6110 Dell gt Dell EqualLogicStoragePool Dell Model Chassis Dell Forcel0 S4810 Dell Dell IOA Dell Dell Servers Dell Version 1 Template VMwareLib Template VMware Host VMwar
551. uting many resource scripts or the execution time is lengthy or when you want to change the settings and restart the resource script To stop a resource script perform one of the following options On the Console view toolbar click the Stop Execution icon This icon function ends the collection of data from a resource script but it does not necessarily cause the resource script to abort that is to exit from the operating system If you have a simple resource script that opens some temporary files does processing and then removes the temporary files you might prefer that a stopped test still ran to completion and deleted those files rather than exiting abruptly Open the Execution Queue view navigate to your resource script From here you can either right click the resource script and select Stop or right click the resource script and select Monitor Execution Output For more information about the latter two functions see the Monitoring Execution Output section on page 14 12 and Reviewing Execution Output section on page 14 12 respectively Working with Session Scripts 14 6 Session scripts are executable files located in a script repository on a remote server Sessions scripts can only be invoked from a running session editor This section describes Setting Preferences for Session Scripts Browsing and Executing Session Scripts Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Session
552. vailable Operations View Type in operation name to search the desired operation Search gt abhil ox customOperation1 Organization of Steps in Orchestration Orchestration View ap Add Step Operation Execute Abort On Error Description gt Test Step_1 Y oe abhi1 customOperation1 customOperation1 gt Test Step_2 Y a e abhi1 customOperation1 customOperation1 topology_creation New Orchestration_Test 1 In Figure 13 1 the Available Operations View pane displays the template resources along with a list of custom operations related to each visible template resource You can drag and drop these custom operations in Orchestration View pane to create ordered steps collectively also called Orchestration There can be multiple steps in an Orchestration and each step can contain one or more operations manner Note If any step in an Orchestration contains more than one operation then the operations are executed in parallel However if multiple steps exist in an Orchestration each step is executed in a sequential An Orchestration can either be created by an administrator or by the template owner You can create three different types of Orchestrations see the Orchestration Types section on page 13 3 for more information The Orchestration feature facilitates ease of use and reduces operational complexity by automating the repeated operations that are performed in the en
553. value condition are the first choice The Active System Manager scheduler attempts to find a solution that fulfills all of the requirements in the Template including matches for the preferred properties If the preferred properties are not found the scheduler seeks solutions that are not restricted to the specified properties e Clicking the Required check box means that only resources or interfaces that match this property value condition can be used If an exact match cannot be found any attempts to schedule a session based on this Template fails In the property list 1f a check box is selected next to a property this indicates that the property is Required 3 Click the Operator column field and select an operator The list of operators depends on the property type 4 Click the Value column field for the associated property and enter a value When the light bulb displays it means that control assistance is enabled Press Ctrl spacebar to search and display all possible values for that property see Figure 11 16 11 36 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Templates Figure 11 16 Inventory Properties Resource Level E Properties x AAA Enforced Property Operator Value Type Unit CPU i Mumeric MHZ Inventor A m z purchasedon Date Timestamp Configuration Files scheduledme E String Image Files assettag i String authorcompany String authoremail i String authorname i String domain i S
554. ve Directory or LDAP for example e Groups Lists all the groups that have been defined in the Active System Manager software For each group every member is listed as well as whether the member is an administrator or user Reports 15 5 Resource Usage Showback Report e Users Lists all the administrators in the first section and then all the non administrator users in the next section Within each section entries are listed alphabetically by last name then first name You can select a user and click Remove or Edit at any time to remove or edit the participants 3 Click Run Report The Resource Usage Showback report displays see Figure 15 2 Figure 15 2 Resource Usage Showback Report Output Example Report Information Start Date Thu 28 Mar 2013 07 52 PDT End Date Tue 25 Jun 2013 07 52 PDT Security Store AL p ge C VM_4_6 1115 91 867 93 lum_3_6 2202 24 1644 5 vm_2_23 15 3 31334 4 AAA a gma Virtual Machine Template Start Time Duration Hours VM_4_6 6 NishithvM admin NishithvM_1 9 7 Jun 7 2013 1 59 AM Jun 12 2013 5 59 AM 123 99 6 NishithWM admin NishithvM1_1 12 11 Jun 7 2013 1 59 AM Jun 11 2013 4 28 AM 98 47 6 NishithWvM admin NishithvM1_1 20 11 Jun 11 2013 4 28 AM Jun 11 2013 4 28 AM 0 01 6 NishithvM admin NishithvM1_1 40 22 Jun 11 2013 4 28 AM Jun 12 2013 5 59 AM 25 51 The Resource Usage Showback report displays in a new window in your default web browser see
555. ve Equipment icon however as a user it is already selected If set this filter displays only resources that have active versions 1 e resources with availability dates intersecting with present time From the Resource Instances view drop down menu see Figure 8 7 select Expand All Figure 8 7 Resource Instances View Expand All Menu Resource Instances No Filtering a 2 Dell 6 a 2 BladeServer 9 ig 1DYL3v1 3 4DRBQVL 6ZPBQVI 21MDTV1 36VBQV1 FDRBQVI ig GDRBQVI GZPBQVI HOMDTV1 a 2 Chassis 1 O Dell_Chassis a 2 Compellent 1 O Dell_Storage_Comp_001 a 2 Equallogic PS6110 2 D Dell_Storage a 2 Forcel0 54810 2 O Dell ForcelO 1 O Dell ForcelO_2 In the Resource Instances view select the Link with a resource type icon with a resource type to synchronize the instance displayed with any selected resource type In the Resource Instances view right click multiple instances and select Open to display those instances in the multi editor as a tabular list of resource instances Accessing Inventory a e Click Link with a resource type in the Resource Instances view to synchronize the instance shown with any selected resource type Select resource types from the Resource Types view and observe that the instances displayed follow the types selected e Close the Resource Instances view and re open it on the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Show View m
556. ve System Manager 7 1 0 The Dell Uninstall wizard displays and guides you through the uninstall process 2 Click Finish g Note To perform an upgrade of the Active System Manager client software you must first uninstall your current version and then install the new version If you upgrade from one major release to another e g from Release 3 x to Release 7 1 0 your settings and preferences will not automatically migrate 2 8 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Chapter 3 Account Management This chapter defines how to set up one or more Active System Manager server accounts and to switch between a number of Active System Manager servers Creating New Server Accounts After launching the Active System Manager client software you can create or add one or more server accounts by performing the following steps 1 Launch the Active System Manager client software see the Launching the Active System Manager Client Software on Windows section on page 2 3 The Connect to Active System Manager server dialog box displays see Figure 3 1 Figure 3 1 Connect to Active System Manager Server Dialog Box Connect to Active System Manager Server Active System Manager Account ASM 7 1 US Username admin Password Account Management 3 1 Creating New Server Accounts 2 Click Setup to display the Setting Up Accounts dialog box see Figure 3 2 Figure 3 2 Setting Up Accounts
557. ve System Manager menu bar click Window gt Show View gt Links 3 On the Links toolbar click the Link with a Resource Instance icon The associated links for that resource display Note If you click the Link with a Resource Instance icon the Links view works in q conjunction with the selection in the Resource Instances view that is it only displays links associated with the selected resource instances in the Resource Instances view As for any Active System Manager navigator view you can also group and filter the information displayed within the view This filter dialog is unique for more information see the next section Using Links View Filters Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Using the Resource Allocation Calendar Using Links View Filters The Active System Manager software includes four preset Links view filters e Managed to Managed resource to resource links Displays the links created between two managed resources e Managed to Control Displays the links between the interface of a managed resource to the interface of a control resource e Control to Managed Displays the links between the interface of a control resource to the interface of a managed resource e Control to Control Displays the links created between two managed resources You can also create additional custom filters to determine if one resource is connected to another resource For example to view everything connected to
558. ventory Discovery Management General e Always run in background The Active System Manager software performs specific actions in the background without disturbing the user Keep next previous editor view and perspectives dialog open Keeps the editor and view cycle dialog boxes open when their activation key is released In normal conditions dialog boxes close as soon as the key combination is released Show Heap Status Displays memory usage in the lower right corner of the interface Double click Single clicking a resource selects it and double clicking it opens it in an editor Single click select on hover Hovering the mouse cursor over the resource selects it and clicking it once opens it in an editor 1 28 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Active System Manager User Interface Elements Table 1 8 Preference Types Configurable Parameters continued Preference Type Configurable Parameters and Description Reference General e Single click open when using arrow keys Selecting a resource with the N A arrow keys opens it in an editor Note Depending on which view has focus selecting and opening a resource may have different behavior This preference may not take affect on all views General gt e Lists the available current presentation styles look and feel See the Changing the Appearance Classic Presentation Tab Placement for Editors section on page 1 20 and Default Figure 1 6 on
559. vironment It is a powerful feature that is capable of creating some complex and highly interactive automated step based procedures 13 2 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Understanding Orchestration Orchestration Types The Active System Manager software facilitates the template owner with the ability to specify the Orchestration on the basis of three different reservation states where Orchestrations can be executed Table 13 1 lists and describes the various Orchestration types based on reservation states Table 13 1 Orchestration Types Orchestration Type Description Setup The Setup Orchestrations can be defined per template and each template can contain a maximum of one Setup Orchestration When a template with a Setup Orchestration is scheduled and when the session attains a Setting Up reservation state the Active System Manager software execution service implements the Setup Orchestration automatically The custom operations defined in the Setup Orchestration steps run one after the other thus avoiding manual intervention During a Setup Orchestration the following steps effect in sequence 1 The devices are powered on 2 The device connectivity is checked 3 Resource level scripts are executed 4 Reservation scripts are executed 5 The Setup Orchestration is executed Note Setup Orchestrations are executed after the generation of reservation scripts On demand The On Demand Orchestration enables the a
560. virtual operations the Active System Manager software provides you with an enhanced capability of selecting the parameter value from the Value Source defined for custom and virtual operations rather than entering parameter values manually Primary Source Value Source and its Secondary Source SubType The Active System Manager software manages certain types of resources such as template session and repositories The Value Source refers to such objects that have been recognized and categorized as Value Source in the Active System Manager software for convenience of use Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Resource Adapters In Active System Manager software a Value Source is a context based list of values that dynamically displays values to choose from based on operation properties It 1s the categorization of system managed objects into possible list of broad categories from where an operation can fetch parameter values The Sub Type of Value Source further categorizes each categorized object in Value Source to provide you with a double defined value set for example consider Resource Properties to be a managed object which serves as a Value Source for fetching parameter value for any operation while execution if you define Resource Properties as a Value Source in operation definition However the Resource Properties can further be categorized into Provisioning properties which serves as the Sub Type
561. w Orchestration dialog box using this method e From the Template view select a Template right click and select New Orchestration e On the Orchestrations view right click and select New Orchestration 2 Select the Template for which the new Orchestration is to be created and specify the name for the new orchestration sequence see Figure 13 4 13 6 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Working with Orchestrations Figure 13 4 New Orchestration New Orchestration sE New Orchestration Create a new Orchestration Select Template No Filtering Name Owner 2 admin AS800 Deployment admin T Cluster VMware ESXi 5 1 Hypervisor deployment ISO boot admin T Cluster VMware ESXi 5 1 Hypervisor deployment ISO boot HDD admin T Cluster VMware ESXi 5 1 Hypervisor deployment ISO boot HDD DHCP admin T Cluster VMware ESXi 5 1 Hypervisor deployment PXE boot admin T Cluster VMware ESXi 5 1 Hypervisor deployment PXE boot HDD admin T Cluster VMware ESXi 5 1 Hypervisor deployment PXE boot HDD DHCP admin E Demo Compellent admin E Logical Template With One VM Connected To A VLAN admin Name AS 3 Click Finish to open the Orchestration editor from where you can add steps to the Orchestration see Figure 13 5 Figure 13 5 Orchestration Editor Orchestration Configure ESXi Server using ISO Boot Click step label to rename steps Available Operations
562. w or Editor Allows you to maximize the active view or editor e Activate Editors Displays the active editor for your working Template or session e Next Editor Displays the next editor within your working Template or session e Previous Editor Displays the previous editor within your working Template or session e Quick Switch Editor Allows you to switch from one editor to another Using Multi Editor Functions Multi editors allow you to manage large amounts of editors in a spreadsheet like manner that is you can manipulate rows and columns to perform bulk like operations The multi editor is an advanced feature that lets you create multiple copies of resource types or resource instances simultaneously The multi editor modifies all of the core properties except for Manufacturer for multiple resource types for resource instances it modifies all of the core properties except for Manufacturer Model Asset Tag and Version The Role property 1s modifiable for CRIs but only if they are Version zero v0 A CRI is vO until it has an availability time assigned to it then 1t becomes Version 1 v1 To use the multi editor perform the following steps 1 Right click the content you want to view and select Open with Multi Editor You can select a single record multiple records a folder and all of its records multiple folders or multiple sub folders within different branches You may also open multiple instances of the multi
563. with the link you have selected a warning message displays at the top of the dialog box Follow the instructions in the warning message to correct the problem 5 When you have created all your links on the Active System Manager menu bar click File gt Save to save your changes to the server Note You can create a new link in the Resource Instances view right click and select Link gt Edit Links to modify or add new links or click Link gt View Links to view them in the Links view Once you have defined the physical link connections you can create the links between your resource instances For more information see Chapter 9 Repository Management 5 38 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Importing Inventory Deleting Links To delete links perform the following steps 1 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Tools gt Links gt Edit to display the Links editor with available links see Figure 5 22 on page 5 37 2 Select one or more links and click Delete 3 Click File gt Save to save this operation Note You can only delete physical links if they are not used by any Running sessions If they are in use 7 the Dependencies view will display automatically and list one or more sessions To remove the session links first use the Quick Fix gt Update All option and then save the link editor one last time Importing Inventory The Active System Manager Inventory Import tool enables the administr
564. y Name Session Name Status Select one or more of the status values from the list All Active Canceled For example you can choose to see only sessions whose status is Running or Setting Up You can press Ctrl click to select additional entries from the list Press Shift click to select a range of entries If you leave this field blank then the field is not used as a selection criterion that is any value is acceptable Start Date Select a start date by clicking on the calendar Select gt from the box at the beginning of the line to select sessions that started after the specified date and time or lt to select earlier dates End Date Select an end date by clicking on the calendar Select gt from the box at the beginning of the line to select sessions that ended after the specified date and time or lt for earlier dates Click the Show only my sessions check box for those sessions to display 3 Click Create to display the Administrator Session Report for your environment Session information is displayed for both session and allocation sessions The current status of each session 1s included Entries are sorted first by Owner alphabetically then by Start Time with the most recent listed first Resource Usage Showback Report The Resource Usage Showback Report displays the summary and detailed information about the Virtual Machine Template usage and Compute Resource CPU and Memory usage i
565. y parameter value c Optional Click the Unit field and type a unit that best associates to the parameter name d Click the Capacity check box to use the resource type for capacity based scheduling 4 Click File gt Save to save your changes to the server Inventory Management 5 19 Using Resource Types Creating Custom Icons for Resource Types 5 20 The Inventory perspective contains a selection of custom icons for network resources You can create custom icon images for your resource types The image files must be of the GIF file type They should not be any larger than 80 pixels wide and 80 pixels high Each user can specify their own custom icon Library folder However it would be more efficient for all of the users to agree on a folder that resides on a server so that everyone has access to the same files Or each environment can have a unique icon library on a server To build a library of custom icons and update the Active System Manager server properties contact your administrator Note When a custom icon is used it is copied to the database and attached to the entry If you modify the original icon file you must re attach it to the resource type To create a custom Library folder perform the following steps 1 Copy the icon GIF files to the target folder 2 On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Preferences gt Inventory The Preferences Inventory dialog box displays see Figure 5 15 Figure 5
566. you can manipulate the layout as follows 1 Open the Dashboard perspective and view the widgets use one of the following methods e On the Active System Manager navigation menu click Dashboard e On the Active System Manager menu bar click Window gt Open Perspective gt Dashboard 2 Select a widget If the widget is empty click the Edit layout link see Figure 17 4 Figure 17 4 Edit Layout Link Add Widget Edit layout Top Ten Resource Allocation reg Resource Allocation By Session ret Top Ten Users CPU Allocation a cru l 1 25 No VM found Click e to configure i E CPU 4 3 Select from one of the five proposed layouts see Figure 17 5 Figure 17 5 Edit Layout Options Edit layout x Choose dashboard layout ZS Rearranging Dashboard Content To arrange your dashboard content you can select and drag each widget to a new position To do so select the widget title bar and drag it to a new location on the dashboard Dashboard 17 7 Managing Widgets 17 8 Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1
567. your lab This section can also be filtered based on the selected Resource Instance Asset Tag 4 gt Dell a 2 Chassis lt Dell_Chassis lt Dell_Chassis a 2 Dummyl DummySwitchl DummySwitchl a amp EqualLogic PS6110 Dell_Storage Dell_Storage a gt Forcel0 S4810 gt Dell Forcel0_1 Dell Forcel0 1 Dell_Forcel0_2 j Dell_Forcel0 2 Link Name AUTO13615268 AUTO13615268 AUTO13617890 AUTO13615296 AUTO13615268 AUTO13615268 AUTO13615268 AUTO13615268 AUTO13615268 AUTO13615268 Inventory Management Manufacturer Dell Dell Dell Dell Dell Dell Dell Dell Dell Dell Model Chassis Chassis Dummyl Dummmyl EqualLogic P EqualLogic P Forcel0 S4810 Forcel0 S4810 Forcel0 S4810 Forcel0 S4810 Type TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet GigabitEthernet GigabitEthernet 10GigabitEthernet 10GigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet mi Location TenGigab TenGigab ethl eth0 Eth1 EthO TenGigab TenGigab TenGigab TenGigab To Asset Tag Dell_Force10 1 Dell_Force10_2 FlexPod1 FlexPodl1 Dell_Force10_2 Dell_Force10 1 Dell_Storage Dell_Chassis Dell_Chassis Dell_Storage To Manufactur Dell Dell VMware VMware Dell Dell Dell Dell Dell Dell To Model Forcel0 S4810 Forcel0 S4810 Host Ho
568. ype is always session Status Active Canceled Completed or Failed Owner and Participants View all associated sessions for any specific resource instance To view this additional information double click within the row for the specific resource instance just before or just after the displayed session bar If the resource is shared the session presentation in the Resource Instance Calendar expands to show all sessions which include the resource View the reserved allocation a percentage for all resources The Resource Instances view displays a percentage at the end of the resource name that indicates the current utilization level of the resource in a session basis shared and on a port basis For example 22 means that 22 of its ports are taken at the present time and no percentage displayed means that the resource is fully available which means the resource is not a part of any session You can use this feature to discover which resources are available to check the availability of resources and schedule sessions accordingly and to analyze why a session fails when scheduled by looking at the status of the associated resources If you try to schedule a Template and are unable to do so you can analyze the information by performing the following steps l Using Inventory Look up the specific resources in that Template and check the status of those resources within the Resource Availability Calendar for
569. ys E Last 30 Days Match any of the above rules The Configure Filter screen facilitates the addition or deletion of new filters on the left of the screen It also facilitates setting up of filter rules by selecting properties from the drop down list selecting operators and entering filter values on the right of the screen Inventory Management 5 67 Managing Virtual Resources Configure Grouping The Configure Grouping feature allows you to group audit results based on various available properties On the top right of the Audit feature click icon to open the Configure Grouping screen see Figure 5 41 Figure 5 41 Configure Grouping Group By Avallable properties Selected properties Session Name Category Initiated By Result Session State Select and adjust properties from the Configure Grouping screen to display the audit results accordingly Expand All Click icon to expand all device related RA operations per device Collapse All Click icon to collapse all RA operations per device Purge Audit Data The purging feature allows you to purge the existing data on the basis of selected number of months e Note The Active System Manager purges all the audit data that is older than the selected number Nr of months To purge the audit data perform the following steps 1 Click Tools gt Settings on the Active System Manager menu bar The Active System Manager System Settings screen as displayed
570. ys the Active System Manager toolbar and 1ts icons see Table 1 9 for icon descriptions Figure 1 16 Active System Manager Toolbar Icons JE New Mm py a E ao Search gt LJ Instances A Types LJ Components Import Export Table 1 9 Active System Manager Toolbar Icons Icon Icon Name Description 9 New Defines the types of files available to choose from i e Resource type New e Resource instance e Other Save or Saves the application work in progress Save Alll E Search Allows you to search for the information about resource types resource instances AR templates links and configurations Active System Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Active System Manager User Interface Elements Active System Manager Toolbar Icons Table 1 9 Icon Icon Name Description y Import Allows you to import any Active System Manager source ES Import Export Allows you to export any Active System Manager source a ES Export 1 35 Active System Manager Overview Active System Manager User Interface Elements Table 1 10 displays the Active System Manager application icons found in views and editors This table organizes the icons by the default perspective they appear in and the window type where you can find the icon Table 1 10 Active System Manager Application Icons Icon Icon Name Access Calendar Close Configuring Parameter Configurations Connected Connection Console Disco
571. ystem Manager User Guide Release 7 1 Managing Repositories Editing Repository Elements To edit repository elements perform the following steps 1 Open a repository navigator view see Figure 9 7 for a repository element example Figure 9 7 Example of a Repository File Type Resource Adapters File Servers I Software Repositories 3 iS ngo No Filtering Name Path Repository Name Level Size gt 2 EqualLogic Storage Firmwares gt 2 EqualLogic Storage Resource Pools 4 150 Bootable Images 4 2 Image File Yay esxi5 1_dell ISOBOOT I 0 Bootable Images Base E esxi5 1_dell_ISOBoot 150 Bootable Images Base a gt 150 Repository a 2 Element 8 ubuntu 12 04 desktop i386 i50 ubuntu 12 04 desktop i3 ISO Repository Base gt 2 Image File gt gt 150 _REP gt PXE Bootable Images gt 2 TestVMRepo_192 gt 2 ToR Switch Configurations and Images gt 2 vCenter gt 2 VMware Baseline Images 2 Select one element right click and select Edit to display the property dialog box associated with element Figure 9 8 displays an example of a property for a specified element Repository Management 9 13 Managing Repositories 9 14 Figure 9 8 Element Properties for a Specified File Properties for ubuntu 12 04 desktop 1386 is0 p p lx Element Properties Element Properties Mame ubuntu 12 04 desktop 1386 150 Description Type Element Repository ISO Repository Path ubuntu 12 04 desktop 13
572. zed into a couple of categories Managed Resources Explicitly specified in Template designs scheduled by the users and set up and configured in live or active sessions Managed Resources may include switches routers servers and SAN equipment Examples of the types of control methods used for managed resources may include operations such as Acquire Control Discover Inventory Send Command Apply OS Image Load Configuration Save Configuration or Reboot Control Resources Form what may be considered the control and connection plane of the environment These resources help create or realize the Template designs that are authored by the users Rather than being explicitly specified in Template designs these resources work implicitly behind the scenes to connect and configure the Managed Resources and to perform various control actions Control Resources may include physical layer switches electrical or optical Layer 2 switches power controllers and terminal servers Examples of the types of methods used for control resources may include operations such as Acquire Control Make Link Break Link Configure VLAN Power On or Power Off The Resource Adapter Framework RAF supports a wide range of protocols and methods including Telnet SSH SNMP Sockets TL1 XML HTTPs SOAP WSDL CORBA and various TMF standards Once adapters are created using a Software Development Kit SDK they can simply be plugged in to the Active System Manag

Dell Active System Manager Version 7.1 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents